Me 2016 PDF

OUTCOME BASED CURRICULUM 2016
Program: Diploma in Mechanical

Engineering
by
Curriculum Development Cell,
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur

Document Written by
Dr. S.W. Rajurkar

and
Mr. G.V. Gotmare
Curriculum Development Cell
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur, India
Curriculum Developed by
Faculties and Experts (Mentioned in individual curriculum)
Approved by
Advisory Board (AB),
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS),
And
Board of Studies (BOS),
Accepted by
Governing Board (GB),
Published by
Dr. C. S. Thorat
Principal,
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur, India
ii
(An Autonomous Institute of Government of Maharashtra)
OUTCOME BASED CURRICULUM-2016

DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
The Program Structure and Curriculum Contents for Diploma in

Mechanical Engineering are approved in Advisory Board (AB),
Programwise Board of Studies (PBOS), Board of Studies (BOS),
And Governing Board (GB), Government Polytechnic, Nagpur.
(Mr. O.V.Sarode) (Dr. S.W.Rajurkar)

I/C. Head of Deptt. In-charge
Mechanical Engineering Curriculum Development Cell
and and
Chairman PBOS (ME) Member Secretary PBOS (ME)
(Dr. C.S.Thorat)
Principal
iii
Governing Board, Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
S.N. Name of Members Designation Organization

1 Shri. Gulabrao Thakare Chairman Jt. Director, Technical Education, R.O.
Nagpur
2 Dr. C. S. Thorat Member Principal, Government Polytechnic,
Secretary Nagpur
3 Dr. D.N.Shingade Member Principal, Government Polytechnic,
Amravati
4 Dr. L. M. Gupta Member Professor, Applied Mechanics; VNIT,
Nagpur-440010
5 Shri. Pratap Shinde Member Manager, Mahindra & Mahindra Ltd.,
Hingna MIDC, Nagpur.
6 Shri. Jayant Paranjpe Member MD, Rutam Technocrats, Nagpur.
7 Shri. Shashikant Choudhary Member M.D. India, Global Logic; Nagpur.

8 Shri. Manish Shukla Member Addl. G.M. & Principal, Regional
Telecom Training Centre (RTTC)
Nagpur-440006
9 Dr. S. T. Deshmukh Member Ex-Vice-Chancellor ,
SGB Amravati University
10 Shri. Hemant Ambaselkar Member Immediate Past President, Butibori
Manufacturers Association, Nagpur
11 Shri. Nitin Sudame Member Executive Director,
Space wood Furnishers Pvt. Nagpur
12 Dr. D. P. Mase Member Chairman Institution of Engineers (I),
Nagpur Local centre, Nagpur
13 Shri. Mukul Dixit Member President/ Head; Site, Indo Rama
Synthetics India, Butibori, Nagpur
14 Prof. D. S. Karaulia Member Director. NITTTR, Bhopal
15 Dr. U. Ramesh Member Director, AICTE-Western Regional

Office, Mumbai
16 Shri. Bharati Member General Manager, District Industries
Centre, nagpur
17 Dr. S. J. Patil Invitee Dy. Secretary, MSBTE,
Member Regional Office , Nagpur.
iv
Board of Studies, Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
S.N. Name of Members Designation Organization

1 Shri. V. R. Jamdar Chairman Director,
Heat Treat well, Nagpur &
Chairman G.B. VNIT, Nagpur
2. Dr. C. S. Thorat Member Invitee Principal,
3. Dr. S. J. Patil Member Deputy Secretary,
MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
4. Shri. B. B. Bhandarkar Member Rtd. Executive Engineer,
MSEB, Nagpur
5. Shri. R. M. Kawale Member Director,
M/S. Ram Kawale & Associates,
Nagpur
6. Shri. K. P. Dhawad Member Chief Executive,
Instruments & Systems, Nagpur
7. Shri. N. D. Zaware Member Joint Director,
Vocational Education & Training,
RO, Nagpur
8. Ms. Erika Kar Member Director,
PEGUSAS Academy, Nagpur
9. All HODs Member & HOD,
Chairman PBOS Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
10 Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Member Secretary I/C Curriculum Development Cell,
v
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Civil Engineering
Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization
No.
Dr. R. N. Giradkar Chairman Head, Civil Engineering,
1
Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur.
Dr. S. J. Patil Chairman Head, Civil Engineering,
(Upto 07/07/2016) Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur
Shri. M. R. Shelote Member (Industry) Consultant, Dattatray Nagar,
2
Near NIT Garden, Nagpur
Dr. Rajendra Khapare Member Professor, Civil Engg. RCE,
3
(Academic) Nagpur
Shri. Anant Fulzele Member (MSBTE Asst. Secretary (Tech.)
4
Nominee) MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
Shri. M. K. Panchawate Member (Institute) Lecturer in Civil Engg.
5
Shri. N. H. Telang Member (Institute) Lecturer in Civil Engg.
6
Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
7
Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Mechanical Engineering

No.
Dr. R. R. Choudhari Chairman Head, Mech. Engineering,
1
Shri. O. V. Sarode Chairman I/C Head, Mech. Engineering,
(up to 12/09/2016) Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur.
Shri.A. M. Onkar Member (Industry) CEO,
2
Onkar Furnitures, MIDC, Nagpur
Shri. G. F. Potbhare Member Principal,
3
(Academic) NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur
Shri. S. S. Baraskar Member (MSBTE Lecturer,
4
Nominee) Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi
Shri. O. V. Sarode Member (Institute) Lecturer in Mech. Engg.
5
Shri. G. H. Dahole Member (Institute) Lecturer in Mech. Engg.
6
7
vi
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Automobile Engineering

No.
Dr. K. S. Dixit Chairman I/C Head, Automobile Engg,
1
Shri. L. P. Kirpane Member (Industry) Mahindra Institute of learning
2
Excellance, Nagpur
Shri. P. N. Wadaskar Member Asst. Professor,
3
(Academic) Anjuman College of Engg. Nagpur
Shri. M.D. Jadhav Member (MSBTE HOD, Automobile Engg.
4
Nominee) G.H.Raisoni Polytechnic, Nagpur
Shri.S. A.Telang, Member (Institute) Lecturer in Auto. Engg.
5
Shri. R. B. Tirpude, Member (Institute) Lecturer in Auto. Engg.
6
7
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Packaging Technology

No.
Shri. R. S. Raool Chairman I/C HOD Packaging Technology,
1
Shri. Suresh Thakur Member (Industry) Manager,
2
Package Products, Nagpur
Shri. S. N. Madhugiri Member Ex-Principal,
3
(Academic) Dharampeth Polytechnic, Nagpur.
Shri. M. S. Deshpande Member (MSBTE Lecturer in Mechanical Engg.
4
Nominee) Govt. Polytechnic, Bramhapuri
Shri. A. S. Bhagat Member (Institute) Lecturer in Packaging Technology
5
Shri. Imran Syyad Member (Institute) Lecturer in Packaging Technology
6
7
vii
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Metallurgical Engineering

No.
1 Shri. K. L. Meshram Chairman, Head of Dept., Metallurgical Engg.
2 Shri. S. B. Varadpande, Member (Industry) Managing Director,
Orange City Alloys Pvt. Ltd.
Nagpur
3 Shri. Y. Y.Mahajan, Member Asst. Professor,
(Academic) Dept. of Metallurgy ,VNIT, Nagpur
4 Mr. Y. K. Gaiky Member (RBTE, Lecturer in Mechanical Engg.
Nominee) Govt. Polytechnic, Sakoli
5 Miss. V. C. Humney Member (Institute) Lecturer in Metallurgical Engg.
6 Shri S. M. Waikar Member (Institute) Lecturer in Metallurgical Engg.
7 Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Textile Manufacture

No.
Shri. D. S. Kulkarni Chairman Head, Textile Manufacture,
1
Shri. R. N.Yadav Member (Industry) President, RSR Mohata Spinning
2
and Waving Mills Ltd. Hinganghat
Dr. Ganesh Kakad Member (Academic) HOD Textile Engg.
3
JDIET, Yavatmal
Shri. S. G. Gaikwad Member (RBTE, Lecturer in Textile Manufacture,
4
Nominee) Govt. Polytechnic, Solapur
Dr. C. P. Kapse, Member (Institute) Lecturer in Textile Manufacture,
5
Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur
Dr.S.B.Muttagi Member (Institute) Lecturer in Textile Manufacture,
6
Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur
7
viii
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Electrical Engineering

No.
1 Dr. D.D. Lulekar Chairman Head of Deptt.,
Smt. K. M. Gaidhane Chairman I/C Head of Deptt.,
(up to 04/01 /2017) Govt. Polytechnic, Sadar, Nagpur.
2 Shri. Bhaskar Bale Member (Industry) Dy. Executive Engineer,
MSEDCL, Nagpur
3 Shri. R.Y. Ghormade Member (Academic) HOD Electrical,
Dharampeth Polytechnic, Nagpur
4 Dr. S. S. Bharatkar Member (MSBTE Lecturer in Electrical. Engg.
Nominee) Govt. Polytechnic, Amravati
5 Mrs. S. P.Thote Member (Institute) Lecturer in Electrical. Engg.
6 Shri. R. I. Kamble Member (Institute) Lecturer in Electrical. Engg.
7 Shri. G.V. Gotmare Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur.
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Electronics & Telecommunication

No.
Shri. S.S.Tadas Chairman HOD, Electronics & Telecomm.,
1
Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur.
Shri. Sandip V. Member (Industry) Director, Beta Computronics Pvt.
2
Darwhekar Ltd. Nagpur
Mrs. Gazala. Ali Member (Academic) HOD, Electronics,
3
Anjuman Polytechnic, Nagpur
Mr. S. M. Kale, Member (MSBTE Lecturer, ETX, Government
4
Nominee) Polytechnic, Gadchiroli
Shri. D. A. Member (Institute) Lecturer, ETX,
5 Brahmankar Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Mrs. U. M. Ramteke Member (Institute) Lecturer, ETX,

6
Shri. G.V. Gotmare Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
7
ix
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Computer Engineering

No.
1 Shri. S. P. Lambhade Chairman HOD, Computer Engg.
2 Shri. Atul Upadhay Member (Industry) COE,Vista Computers,
Ramnagar, Nagpur
3 Shri. N.V. Choudhari Member (Academic) Asst. Professor (CSE),
DBACOE, Wanadongari, Nagpur
4 Shri. Manoj Jethawa Member (MSBTE HOD Computer Science,
Nominee) Shri Datta Meghe Polytechnic,
Nagpur
5 Mrs.Vaishali Raje Member (Institute) Lecturer in Computer
6 Ms. D.M.Shirkey Member (Institute) Lecturer in Computer
7 Shri. G.V.Gotmare Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Information Technology

No.
1 Dr. A. R. Mahajan Chairman HOD, Information Technology
2 Shri. Atul Upadhay Member (Industry) COE,Vista Computers,
Ramnagar, Nagpur
3 Shri. N.V. Choudhari Member (Academic) Asst. Professor (CSE),
DBACOE, Wanadongari, Nagpur
4 Shri. Manoj Jethawa Member (MSBTE HOD Computer Science,
Nominee) Shri Datta Meghe Polytechnic,
Nagpur
5 Shri. R. L. Meshram Member (Institute) Lecturer in I.T.
6 Mrs. D. P. Member (Institute) Lecturer in I.T.
Chanmanwar Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
7 Shri. G. V. Gotmare Member Secretary Officer In-Charge CDC,
x
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Travel & Tourism

No.
Shri. Rajesh Pund Chairman I/C. HOD, Travel and Tourism,
1
Mrs.Pushpa Member Director,
2
Khubchandani (Industry) Uniglobe Travels, Nagpur
Ms. Erika Kar Member Director,
3
(Academic) PUGUSAS Acadamy, Sadar, Nagpur
Mrs. Amita Tandon Member (MSBTE Sr.Lecturer,
4 Nominee) Women's Tech. Education & Research
Institute, Nagpur
Mrs. L. Raman Member Ex. HOD, Travel and Tourism, Govt.
5
(Institute) Polytechnic, Nagpur
Ms. Shital Jagtap Member Lecturer, Travel and Tourism,
6
(Institute) Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
7
Advisory Board (AB) - English

No.
Shri S. M. Sayyed Chairman In-charge, English,
1
Dr.Nutan Chotai Member HOD,LAD College,Nagpur
2
(Academic)
Dr.Shilpa Sarode Member Asst.professor, LAD College,Nagpur
3
(Academic)
Mrs. K. N. Member (MSBTE HOD,SDMP,Nagpur
4
Deshmukh Nominee)
Mrs.Megha Machale Member Sr. Lecturer,
5
Mrs.Rupali Hirurkar Member Sr. Lecturer,
6
7
xi
Advisory Board (AB) - Mathematics

No.
Shri S. M. Sayyed Chairman In-charge, Mathematics,
1
Dr. K.C. Deshmukh Member Professor,RTM University,Nagpur
2
(Industry)
Dr. P. B. Bahatkar Member Professor,YCCE,Nagpur
3
(Academic)
Mr. Nasir Khan Member (MSBTE Lecturer,Anjuman
4
Nominee) Polytechnic,Nagpur.
Mr.P.T. Khobragade Member Sr. Lecturer,
5
Mr.G. R. Dewalkar Member Sr. Lecturer,
6
7
Advisory Board (AB) - Physics

No.
Shri M. K. Malke Chairman In-charge, Physics,
1
Dr.K. S. Moon Member HOD,M.P. Dev Sci. college,Nagpur.
2
(Academic)
Mrs. Ferheen Beig Member Professor, Anjuman College,Nagpur
3
(Academic)
Mrs. M. B. Mahaley Member (MSBTE HOD,SDMP,Nagpur
4
Nominee)
Dr. S. B. Raut Member Sr. Lecturer,
5
Mrs.S. B. Adulkar Member Sr. Lecturer,
6
7
xii
Advisory Board (AB) - Chemistry

No.
Shri S. R. Gaidhar Chairman In-charge, Chemistry,
1
2 Mr. M. B. Deshmukh Member (Industry) HOD, SDMP, Nagpur
Mr. S. Z. Jadhav Member Professor, Institute of Science,
3
(Academic) Nagpur.
Dr.K. A. Nandekar Member (MSBTE G.H. Raisoni Polytechnic, Nagpur
4
Nominee)
Dr. Mudrika Ahmed Member (Institute) Sr. Lecturer,
5
Dr. M. S. Rathod Member (Institute) Sr. Lecturer,
6
7
xiii
List of contributors for curriculum development
Sr. Name of Faculty Designation

No.
Mechanical Engineering
1 Dr.R.R.Chaudhari HOD, Mechanical Engineering
2 Mr. O. V. Sarode I/C H.O.D, Mechanical Engineering
3 Mr. G.H Dahole Curriculum Coordinator & Lecturer
4 Mr. M.G. Thote Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
5 Mr. A.R.Sheikh Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
6 Mr. M.S.Deshpande Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
7 Mr. M. M.Dangre Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
8 Dr. S.W.Rajurkar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
9 Mr. P. P. Patil Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
10 Mr. S. A. Dhankute Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
12 Mr. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
13 Mrs. R A Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
14 Mr. A. V. Abhyankar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
15 Mr. D. C. Satadeve Workshop Suprentendent
16 Mr. Mahesh Khanna Dy. Manager, Ashok Leyland,
Bhandara
17 Dr. V.M.Athawale Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
18 Mr. V.S Ikhar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
19 Mr.K.S.Thekedar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
20 Mrs.M.D.Kothekar Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering
Contributed by,
List of contributors for the curriculum is mentioned in individual curriculum.
@ 2017, Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
No part of this curriculum document is allowed to publish in any form before prior
permission of publisher.
xiv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES .......................................................................................................XX
LIST OF TABLES ....................................................................................................... XXI
CHAPTER 1 GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, NAGPUR AN INTRODUCTION
................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 History ....................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Autonomy .................................................................................................................. 1
1.3 Awards ...................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Geographical Location of Nagpur City ..................................................................... 2
1.5 Government Polytechnic, Nagpur Campus ............................................................... 3
CHAPTER 2 POLYTECHNIC EDUCATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5
2.1 Higher Education System in India ............................................................................ 5
2.1.1 Department of Higher Education, MHRD ...................................................... 7
2.1.2 All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) ...................................... 7
2.1.3 National Board of Accreditation (NBA) ......................................................... 7
2.1.4 Higher and Technical Education, Government of Maharashtra ...................... 8
2.1.5 Directorate of Technical Education (DTE), Government of Maharashtra ...... 8
2.1.6 Maharashtra State Board of Technical Education (MSBTE) .......................... 9
2.2 Polytechnic Education System .................................................................................. 9
CHAPTER 3 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM ..................................... 11
3.1 Organizational Structure of GPN ............................................................................ 11
3.2 Curriculum Development System ........................................................................... 12
xv
3.2.1 Governing Board (GB) .................................................................................. 13
3.2.2 Board of Studies (BOS)................................................................................. 14
3.2.3 Program Wise Board of Studies (PBOS) ...................................................... 15
3.2.4 Advisory Board (AB) .................................................................................... 15
CHAPTER 4 OUTCOME BASED EDUCATION PHILOSOPHY .......................... 16
4.1 Outcome Based Education ...................................................................................... 16
4.2 KEY constituents of OBE ....................................................................................... 17
4.2.1 Vision ............................................................................................................ 18
4.2.2 Mission .......................................................................................................... 18
4.2.3 Graduate Attributes (GA’s) ........................................................................... 18
4.2.4 Program Outcomes (PO’s) ............................................................................ 18
4.2.5 Program Educational Objectives (PEO’s) ..................................................... 19
4.2.6 Program Specific Outcomes (PSO’s) ............................................................ 19
4.2.7 Course Outcomes (CO’s) .............................................................................. 19
4.2.8 Specific Learning Outcomes (SLO’s) or Learning Outcomes (LO’s) .......... 20
CHAPTER 5 BLOOM’S TAXONOMY ....................................................................... 21
5.1 Introduction to Bloom’s Taxonomy ........................................................................ 21
5.2 Domains of Learning ............................................................................................... 22
5.2.1 Cognitive Domain ......................................................................................... 22
5.2.2 Psychomotor Domain .................................................................................... 24
5.2.3 Affective Domain .......................................................................................... 25
5.3 Program Outcomes and Domains of Learning ........................................................ 27
xvi
CHAPTER 6 CURRICULUM REVISION PROCESS............................................... 28
6.1 Change Management ............................................................................................... 28
6.1.1 ADKAR Model for Change Management .................................................... 29
6.1.2 Results of ADKAR Model ............................................................................ 30
6.2 Curriculum Revision Process .................................................................................. 30
6.2.1 Study of OBE Philosophy ............................................................................. 31
6.2.2 Analysis of OBE curricula ............................................................................ 31
6.2.3 Comparison with MSBTE Existing Curriculum ........................................... 33
6.2.4 Study of NBA/AICTE/MSBTE Guidelines .................................................. 35
6.2.5 Search Conference......................................................................................... 37
6.2.6 Curriculum mapping ..................................................................................... 37
6.2.7 Institute Level Policies .................................................................................. 38
6.2.8 Development of Curriculum Revision Model ............................................... 42
6.2.9 Preparation of Action Plan ............................................................................ 42
6.2.10 Analysis and Brain Storming at Program Level............................................ 45
6.2.11 Development of Vision, Mission and PEOs and Curriculum ....................... 45
6.2.12 Approval from AB, PBOS, BOS and GB ..................................................... 46
6.3 Curriculum Revision at a Glance ............................................................................ 46
CHAPTER 7 MODEL COURSE CURRICULUM ..................................................... 47
7.1 Basic Information .................................................................................................... 47
7.2 Rationale.................................................................................................................. 47
7.3 Course Outcomes (COs) .......................................................................................... 48
xvii
7.4 Course Details: Theory............................................................................................ 48
7.5 Course Details Practical .......................................................................................... 49
7.6 Specification Table .................................................................................................. 50
7.7 Question Paper Profile (QPP) ................................................................................. 50
7.8 Assessment and Evaluation Scheme ....................................................................... 51
7.9 Scheme of Practical Evaluation............................................................................... 53
7.10 Mapping of Course Outcomes with POs and PSOs ................................................ 53
7.11 Reference & Text Books ......................................................................................... 54
7.12 E-References ........................................................................................................... 54
7.13 List of Major Equipment’s/Instruments with Specification .................................... 55
7.14 List of Experts & Teachers who Contributed for Curriculum ................................ 55
CHAPTER 8 CURRICULUM DOCUMENT .............................................................. 56
8.1 Vision of Institute .................................................................................................... 56
8.2 Mission of Institute.................................................................................................. 56
8.3 Vision of Program ................................................................................................... 56
8.4 Mission of Program ................................................................................................. 56
8.5 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) ................................................................ 57
8.6 Program Outcomes (POs)........................................................................................ 57
8.7 Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs) ....................................................................... 58
8.8 Mapping of Vision, Mission, PEOs, POs, PSOs ..................................................... 58
8.8.1 Mapping of Vision and Mission .................................................................... 58
8.8.2 Mapping of Mission and PEOs ..................................................................... 59
xviii
8.8.3 Mapping of PEOs and POs- PSOs ................................................................ 59
8.9 Identified Skills in Search Conference .................................................................... 59
8.9.1 Technical skills for Mechanical Engineering Diploma Students .................. 59
8.9.2 Generic skills for Mechanical Engineering Diploma Holder ........................ 63
8.10 2011 Curriculum Mapping with Program Outcomes (POs) .................................... 63
8.10.1 Identified Gaps in 2011 Curriculum.............................................................. 66
8.11 Courses Identification ............................................................................................. 66
8.12 Program Structure ................................................................................................... 72
8.12.1 Program Structure Level I: General Studies ................................................. 73
8.12.2 Program Structure Level II: Basic Science Courses ..................................... 74
8.12.3 Program Structure Level III: Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts
Courses ...................................................................................................................... 75
8.12.4 Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses ...................................... 76
8.12.5 Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses (Project Courses) ......... 77
8.12.6 Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses .............................................. 78
8.12.7 Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses .............................................. 79
8.12.8 Program Structure Abstract ........................................................................... 80
8.13 Award of Class Courses .......................................................................................... 81
8.14 Curriculum at a Glance ........................................................................................... 82
8.15 Course Flow Diagram ............................................................................................. 83
APPENDIX A CURRICULUM ..................................................................................... 84
xix
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1. Location of Nagpur City.................................................................................. 3
Figure 1.2. Government Polytechnic, Nagpur Campus ..................................................... 4
Figure 2.1. Higher Education System in India ................................................................... 5
Figure 2.2. Classification of Higher Education System in India ....................................... 6
Figure 3.1. Organizational Structure of GPN .................................................................. 12
Figure 3.2. Curriculum Development System ................................................................. 12
Figure 4.1. Outcome Based Education Framework ......................................................... 17
Figure 4.2. Key Constituents of OBE .............................................................................. 17
Figure 5.1. Human Being and Domains of Learning ....................................................... 21
Figure 5.2. Revised cognitive hierarchy Levels............................................................... 23
Figure 5.3. Psychomotor hierarchy Levels ...................................................................... 24
Figure 5.4. Affective Domain hierarchy Levels .............................................................. 26
Figure 5.5. Program Outcomes and Domains of Learning .............................................. 27
Figure 6.1. Mapping of change management tools with ADKAR .................................. 29
Figure 6.2. GoPoNa Model .............................................................................................. 42
Figure 7.1. Course Code .................................................................................................. 47
Figure 8.1. Course Flow Diagram.................................................................................... 83
xx
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4.1. Difference between Course Outcomes and Course Objectives. ..................... 20
Table 5.1. Cognitive Domain Levels Action Verbs ......................................................... 23
Table 5.2. Psychomotor Domain Levels Action Verbs ................................................... 25
Table 5.3. Affective Domain Levels Action Verbs ......................................................... 26
Table 6.1. Credits Comparison ........................................................................................ 31
Table 6.2. Credit Ratio TH:PR Comparison .................................................................... 32
Table 6.3. Courses Comparison ....................................................................................... 32
Table 6.4. Examination Scheme Comparison .................................................................. 32
Table 6.5. Comparison of Autonomous Curricula ........................................................... 33
Table 6.6. Comparison of Existing Curriculum-2011 with MSBTE-2012 Curriculum .. 34
Table 6.7. List of Existing Courses for Revision/Deletion etc. ....................................... 34
Table 6.8. List of New Courses proposed ........................................................................ 34
Table 6.9. Comparison of Examination Scheme with MSBTE Curriculum.................... 34
Table 6.10. Abstract of Guidelines .................................................................................. 35
Table 6.11. Curriculum mapping (Sample) ..................................................................... 38
Table 6.12. Suggestive Curriculum at a Glance .............................................................. 41
Table 6.13. First Phase Action Plan ................................................................................. 43
Table 6.14. Second Phase Action Plan ............................................................................ 44
Table 6.15. Program Structure Level I (sample).............................................................. 45

Table 7.1. Course Details Theory (sample) ..................................................................... 49
Table 7.2. Course Details: Practical (sample) .................................................................. 49
Table 7.3. Specification Table (sample) .......................................................................... 50
Table 7.4. Question Paper Profile (sample) ..................................................................... 51
Table 7.5. Assessment and Evaluation Scheme (Sample) ............................................... 52
Table 7.6. Scheme of Practical Evaluation (Sample) ...................................................... 53
Table 7.7. Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs (Sample) ............................................. 53
Table 7.8. Reference & Text Books (Sample) ................................................................. 54
Table 8.1. Mapping of Vision-Mission ............................................................................ 58
Table 8.2. Mapping Mission-PEOs.................................................................................. 59
Table 8.3. Mapping PEOs-POs & PSOs .......................................................................... 59
Table 8.4. 2011 Curriculum Mapping with POs & PSOs ................................................ 64
Table 8.5. Courses Identification from Identified Skills.................................................. 67
Table 8.6. Program Structure Level I: General Studies ................................................... 73
Table 8.7. Program Structure Level II: Basic Science Courses ....................................... 74
Table 8.8. Program Structure Level III: Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts
Courses ...................................................................................................................... 75
Table 8.9. Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses ........................................ 76
Table 8.10. Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses (Project Courses) ......... 77
Table 8.11. Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses .............................................. 78
Table 8.12. Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses .............................................. 79
Table 8.13. Program Structure Abstract .......................................................................... 80
xxii
Table 8.14. Award of Class Courses ................................................................................ 81
Table 8.15. Curriculum at a Glance ................................................................................. 82
xxiii
CHAPTER 1
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur an Introduction
This chapter gives the history of Government Polytechnic, Nagpur.
1.1 History
The Government Polytechnic, Nagpur is an oldest technical institution in central India.

It was founded on 14th July 1914 as the Government Engineering School. At its
commencement the school had 16 students on roll and was located in the Victoria
Science College (now the Institute of Science) in Nagpur. During its first year the school
provided courses in Civil Engineering & Mechanical Engineering up to diploma standard.
Later in 1915 Automobile Engineering Course was also established which vias
subsequently converted into Post Diploma in Automobile Engineering. The institution
has given birth to Engineering College presently known as Visvesvaraya National
Institute of Technology, Nagpur (VNIT). The school was expanding rapidly & from 16
students enrolled in 1914 increased to nearly 2000 in current year and Govt. Engineering
School converted to Government Polytechnic, Nagpur.
1.2 Autonomy
The Institute has recently celebrated its Centenary year. Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
has history of 102 Glorious Years. The Government Polytechnic, Nagpur is committed to
contribute to through excellence in technical education, to serve as valuable resource for
industry and society. The institute is always upright in responding to educational needs of
its changing world’s scenario.
From academic session 1995 the institute was conferred with autonomous status by
Government of Maharashtra as per Government Resolution No. WBP-1093/(2640)
(69)VE-5 Dated- 31stMarch, 1994, in context of academic matter viz. identification of
1
2
need of new programs, requisite curriculum design, implementation of self-designed

curriculum, assessment, evaluation and certification of students.
1.3 Awards
Some of the prestigious awards received by Government Polytechnic, Nagpur are as

follows:
 State Award “Best Overall Performance 1996” (ISTE Narsee Monjee Award )
 State Award “Best Polytechnic, 1997” , (Govt. of Maharashtra)
 National Awards “Best Polytechnic, Student Chapter 2002”,(Institute of
Engineers (India))
 National Awards “Best Polytechnic, Student’s Project ,2002” (ISTE Narsee
Monjee )
 State Award “Best Overall Performance 2016” (ISTE Narsee Monjee Award )
 National Education Award for “Best Technical Educational Institute in
Maharashtra State-2016”
1.4 Geographical Location of Nagpur City

The latitude of Nagpur, India is 21.146633, and the longitude
is 79.088860. Nagpur, India is located at India country in the Cities place category with
the gps coordinates of 21° 8' 47.8788'' N and 79° 5' 19.8960'' E. Nagpur, India elevation
is 311 meters height. Nagpur is located at the exact centre of the Indian peninsula. Figure
1.1 shows the location. The city has the Zero Mile Stone locating the geographical centre
of India, which was used by the British to measure all distances within the Indian
subcontinent. [Wikipedia]. The city gets its name from the river Nag, which flows
through the city, originating at a small village called Lavha. It is famous for the Nagpur
orange and is known as the "Orange City" for being a major trade centre of oranges
cultivated in the region.
3
Figure 1.1. Location of Nagpur City
1.5 Government Polytechnic, Nagpur Campus
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur is situated in heart of the Nagpur City at
“Sadar” area, 2.1 km walking distance from zero mile stone as well as Nagpur railway
station. The campus map of GPN is shown in Fig. 1.2.

4
Figure 1.2. Government Polytechnic, Nagpur Campus

CHAPTER 2
Polytechnic Education System
This chapter describes the polytechnic education system in India. Various bodies
responsible for polytechnic education in India are also described below.
2.1 Higher Education System in India
The aim of any country’s higher education system is sustainable development and
achieving higher growth rates. It is enabled through creation, transmission and
dissemination of knowledge. To achieve this, India has setup a school education system
and higher education system. The higher education system is one of the strongest parts of
the Indian education system.
Figure 2.1. Higher Education System in India
Figure 2.1 shows the various bodies responsible for higher education in India, with their
roles; as follows:
1. Ministry of Human Resource Development (HRD)
5
6
 Regulating and coordination of education in India

 Coordination and cooperation between central government through central
advisory board of education (CABE) and direct interaction
2. University Grant Commission
 Coordination, determination and maintenance of standards in institutes of
higher education
 Release of grants
3. State Governments
 Funding Higher Education
 Determine administrative and operational matters
4. Statutory Professional Councils their roles and responsibilities.
 Recognition of Courses
 Promotion of Professional institutions
 Providing grants and awards
The higher education in India is categorised in to following three categories as shown in
fig 2.2:
1. General Education
2. Professional Education
3. Vocational Education
PES
Figure 2.2. Classification of Higher Education System in India
7
Polytechnic Education System (PES) in India is the undergraduate level category of

professional Education.
GPN is one of the autonomous polytechnic of PES in India. It is mandatory for GPN to
follow the guidelines framed by the various bodies responsible for technical education,
which are as follows:
2.1.1 Department of Higher Education, MHRD
The Department of Higher Education, MHRD, is responsible for the overall development
of the basic infrastructure of Higher Education sector, both in terms of policy and
planning in India. Under a planned development process, the Department looks after
expansion of access and qualitative improvement in the Higher Education, through world
class Universities, Colleges and other Institutions
2.1.2 All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE)
The All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) has been in existence since
November 1945 as a national level Apex Advisory Body. AICTE became a statutory
body through an act of Parliament 52, in 1987.
AICTE was established with a view to the proper planning and co-ordinated development
of the technical education system throughout the country, the promotion of qualitative
improvement of such education in relation to planned quantitative growth and the
regulation and proper maintenance of norms and standards in the technical education
system for matters connected therewith. One of the major functions of AICTE is to lay
down norms and standards for courses, curricula, physical and instructional facilities,
staff pattern, staff qualifications, quality instructions, assessment and examinations.
2.1.3 National Board of Accreditation (NBA)
The National Board of Accreditation (NBA), India was initially established by AICTE
(All India Council of Technical Education) under section 10(u) of AICTE act, in the year
1994, for periodic evaluations of technical institutions & programmes basis according to
specified norms and standards as recommended by AICTE council.
8
NBA in its present form came into existence as an autonomous body with effect from
7th January 2010, with the objective of Assurance of Quality and Relevance of
Education, especially of the programmes in professional and technical disciplines, i.e.,
Engineering and Technology, Management, Architecture, Pharmacy and Hospitality,
through the mechanism of accreditation of programs offered by technical institutions.
NBA has introduced a new process, parameters and criteria for accreditation. These
are in line with the best international practices and oriented to assess the outcomes of the
programme. NBA adopted Outcome Based Education (OBE) model for accreditation of
all engineering programs in India from 2013.
2.1.4 Higher and Technical Education, Government of Maharashtra
It is the apex authority responsible for steering and supporting the development and
growth of quality Higher and Technical Education that meets educational and social
objectives of the state. This department is highly committed towards inclusive education
and realizes the importance of quality of education and has undertaken numerous
initiatives for achieving highest quality standards in the field of education. Accreditation
and Re-accreditation of the Universities and Institutes of higher learning has been made
mandatory to ensure the quality of institutions.
2.1.5 Directorate of Technical Education (DTE), Government of Maharashtra
The role of the Directorate is to maintain, enhance the standard, quality of technical
education by laying the policies, establishing developing Govt. Institutions, guiding
supervising the aided, private institutions, interacting with industry and national level
institutions, co-ordinating with other departments of State Government, Government of
India Statutory Organisations and to contribute to the development of industry society at
large.
9
2.1.6 Maharashtra State Board of Technical Education (MSBTE)
Maharashtra State Board for Technical Education (MSBTE) was established with the
enactment of the Maharashtra State Board of Technical Education Act 1997 to regulate
the matters pertaining to diploma level technical education in the state of Maharashtra.
According to act section 34, the autonomous institutions shall be required to obtain
equivalence for their courses and programmes from the MSBTE. The MSBTE shall
monitor all academic and examination related activities of the Autonomous Institutions
such as curriculum, teaching examination scheme, teaching hours, academic schedule,
eligibility of candidate to appear for the examination, etc.
2.2 Polytechnic Education System
Polytechnic education in India constitutes an important segment of Technical Education

and contributes significantly to the economic development. Aimed at creating a vast
amount of technical manpower, the polytechnics have played a vital role in providing
skilled manpower at various levels for organized, unorganized and Service Sectors.
The aim of the polytechnic education is to create a pool of skill based manpower to
support shop floor and field operations as a middle level link between technicians and
engineers. The pass-outs of Diploma level Institutions in Engineering & Technology play
an important role in managing shop-floor operations. It is further an established fact that
small & medium Industry prefer to employ Diploma Holders because of their special
skills in interpreting engineering, drawings, estimating, costing, billing, supervision,
measurement, testing, repair & maintenance etc.
Curriculum is an educational programme designed, developed & implemented in formal
educational system to achieve pre-determined & pre-stated educational objectives. Every
individual social system comes in to existence as a result of need of its output emerged in
its environment. Educational objectives of PES can be stated as follows:-
a) To cater to specific manpower need in overall Technical Manpower Spectrum of
industry and society that lies between craftsman on one side and technocrat on
other.
10
b) To cater the man power need of primary, secondary and tertiary sector of
industry.
c) To cater to individual educational need for development of self, community and
society.
d) To cater to an individual need to update him in tune with advancement in
engineering and technology.
Educational objectives stated above talk about manpower with-certain task profile. To
develop such task profile in an individual, which consists in general of all duties and
associated tasks and sub tasks that an individual is supposed to perform, it is required to
organize various experiences in different setups viz. classrooms, laboratories, workshops
and fields, through out any educational programme. With such experiences it should be
ensured that students acquire requisite knowledge, skills, attitudes and abilities to
perform sub tasks and duties and finally job which he is likely to get after passing
programme.
Hence, it is essential to design education program taking in to account
predetermined objectives in the form of curriculum, then develop requisite resources viz.
physical like space, equipment, and furniture etc. human, information and implement it to
achieve the educational objectives.
CHAPTER 3
Curriculum Development System
This chapter describes the organization structure, curriculum development system

and the various bodies responsible for the development of curriculum of GPN.
3.1 Organizational Structure of GPN
GPN, being part of PES it has been catering needs of individual, community, society and
industry since last 102 years. Up to 1995 services being offered by GPN were under
different status viz. university, MP DTE and MSBTE.
In 1995 the institute was conferred with autonomous status by Government of
Maharashtra as per Government Resolution No. WBP-1093/(2640) (69)VE-5 Dated-
31stMarch, 1994, in context of academic matter viz. identification of need of new
programs, requisite curriculum design, implementation of self-designed curriculum,
assessment, evaluation and certification of students. In nutshell accountability regarding
academic matters referred above followed by placement of students in world of work is
trusted on the institute. Functional organization of students in world of work is entrusted
to the institute. Functional organization parallel to hierarchical organization of institute is
constituted for running institute under autonomous status effectively and efficiently. Fig.
3.1 shows the organizational structure of GPN.
11
12
Figure 3.1. Organizational Structure of GPN
3.2 Curriculum Development System
Since, 1995 the institute has been designing/revising and implementing curricula of 11
programmes. This is being done using Curriculum Development System shown in Figure
3.2.
Figure 3.2. Curriculum Development System

13
Curriculum Development System consists of Programs (Civil, Mechanical, and Electrical

etc.), Non Programme Department (Science, Maths, and Humanities), Institute Level
Committee (ILC), and Curriculum Developmental Cell (CDC) headed by Principal of the
Institute. Institute follows certain process in designing, revising, developing and
implementing curriculum and student assessment & evaluation for enhanced students’
learning. The constitutional bodies Governing Body (GB), Board of Studies (BOS) and
Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) for programs and non-constitutional body i.e.
Advisory Board (AB) for Non Programme Department are responsible for approval of
curriculum.
3.2.1 Governing Board (GB)
GB is an apex body. The committee members and roles and responsibilities of GB

of GPN are stated below:
 Committee Members:
1. Joint Director of Technical Education Maharashtra State, Bombay - Chairman
2. Nominee from Western Regional Committee Govt. of India - Member
3. Regional Officer, Human Resource Development or Co-ordinator, TTTI, Pune
- Member
4. Representative from the Local Centre the I.E.(India) - Member
5. Representative from the Engineering Association - Member
6. Representative from the District Industries - Member
7. Project Director, State Project Implementation Unit (World Bank) – Member
8. Principal of the Polytechnic – Member Secretary
 Functions and Responsibilities:
1. To decide the policy of the institute and decide guidelines of the function of
various committees.
2. To analyse all issues and provide policy directive for developing the scheme
and implementing it at the institute level.
3. To appoint the various committees of Governance for smooth functioning of
the Institute.
14
4. To institute scholarships fellowships studentships, Mudat prize and certificates

on the recommendation of Board of Studies.
5. Approve new programmes of studies leading to Diploma/Post-Diploma.
6. Approve modifications in present curriculum in order to meet the changed
demands of the industry society from time to time.
7. Approve Annual Reports of the Institute
8. Approve Continuing Education Programmes or similar Activities Beneficial to
the Students/Community Institute.
9. To approve the fees and other charges payable by the students of the
Polytechnics on the recommendation of Board of Studies.
3.2.2 Board of Studies (BOS)
BOS is an Institute level committee. The committee members and roles and
responsibilities of BOS of GPN are stated below:
1. Representative of the Industry - Chairman
2. Head of Department of 5 Programmes - Member
3. Local Experts of 5 Programmes- Member
4. Nominee of Board of Technical Examinations, M.S. Bombay- Member
5. In-charge of Curriculum Development Component– Member Secretary
1. To prepare Syllabi for various courses and develop curriculum keeping in view
the objectives of the Institute and the national requirement for consideration.
Syllabi shall be equivalent to Syllabi of Board of Technical Examinations.
2. To suggest methodologies for innovative teaching and evaluation techniques.
3. To Co-ordinate research teaching, extension and other academic activities in
the various departments/ institute.
4. To recommend books including test books for various courses of studies.
15
3.2.3 Program Wise Board of Studies (PBOS)
PBOS is a program level committee. GPN is having 11 PBOS committees. The

committee members and roles and responsibilities of PBOS of program of GPN are stated
below:
1. Head of the Department concerned- Chairman
2. Two Senior Lecturers- Member
3. One expert in the programme from the neighbouring institution - Member
4. Nominee from the Board of Technical Examinations Bombay - Member
5. One Expert from the local industry in each Programme – Member
6. In-charge of Curriculum Development component - Member-Secretary
1. To decide Philosophy of curriculum design course wise.
2. To analyse present needs and to identify desirable changes, additions, deletions
coursewise.
3. Analyse of personnel development.
4. Formation of Programme objectives.
5. Selection of contents.
6. Design of student’s evaluation.
7. To decide resources required and development thereof.
8. To decide strategy of implementation.
9. Recommend equivalence for granting exemptions.
3.2.4 Advisory Board (AB)
Non Program Department (Science, Maths, and Humanities) are not having PBOS
as per the Government Resolution. The AB is constituted in line with the PBOS for Non
Program Department. There are 4 AB each for Physics, Chemistry, Mathematics and
English Department.
CHAPTER 4
Outcome Based Education Philosophy
Government Polytechnic, Nagpur adopted the OBE approach for curriculum

design because, National Board of Accreditation (NBA) focusing on the adoption of
OBE approach for all engineering programmes in India from 2013 for accreditation.
Programmes to be accredited from 2013 will have to be based on OBE approach.
NBA adopted Outcome based Model because, OBE is “Learner Centric” rather than
“Teacher Centric”
4.1 Outcome Based Education
Outcome Based Education (OBE) is an education approach that focuses on the graduate
attributes or outcomes after completing an academic programme. Outcome based
approach means knowing what you want to achieve and then taking the steps to do so.
Some Benefits of OBE are-
1. More directed and coherent curriculum.
2. Graduates (students) will be more “relevant” to industry and other stakeholders.
The framework required for implementation of OBE consists of the following as shown
in Figure 4.1 and consists of:
 Outcome Based Curriculum (OBC): What students should able to do?
 Outcome Based Teaching learning (OBTL): Making the students to achieve the
outcomes
 Outcome Based Assessment (OBA): How to measure, what the students has
achieved?
16
17
Figure 4.1. Outcome Based Education Framework
4.2 KEY constituents of OBE
Figure 4.2 shows the key constituent of OBE.
Figure 4.2. Key Constituents of OBE

18
4.2.1 Vision
Vision is a picture of the future you seek to create, described in the present tense, as
if it were happening now. It shows where we want to go, and what we will be like
when we get there.
4.2.2 Mission
Mission statement defines what an institution is, why the institution exists, and its
reason for being. It defines what we are here to do together.
4.2.3 Graduate Attributes (GA’s)
Graduate attributes are the qualities, skills and understandings a university
community agrees its students should develop during their time with the institution.
These attributes include but go beyond the disciplinary expertise or
technical knowledge that has traditionally formed the core of most university
courses. WA (Washington Accord) defines 12 GA’s for Engineering Graduates.
4.2.4 Program Outcomes (PO’s)
Programme Outcomes (POs) describe what students should know and be able to do
at the end of the programme. They are to be in line with the graduate attributes
(GAs) of NBA. PO’s are to be specific, measurable and achievable. POs transform
the PEOs into specific student performance and behaviors that demonstrate student
learning and skill development.
Following are POs (Ten) for all diploma engineering programs as per NBA
guidelines-
1. Basic Knowledge: Ability to apply knowledge of basic Mathematics, Science and
Engineering to solve the engineering problems
2. Discipline Knowledge: Ability to discipline specific knowledge to solve core
and/or applied engineering problems
3. Experiments and Practice: Ability to plan and perform experiments and
practices and use the results to solve engineering problems
19
4. Engineering tools: Apply appropriate technologies and tools with an

understandings of limitations
5. The Engineer and Society: Demonstrate knowledge to assess the societal, health,
safety, legal and cultural issues, and the consequent responsibilities relevant to
engineering practice.
6. Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of engineering
solutions in societal and environmental context, and demonstrate knowledge and
need for sustainable development.
7. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of engineering practice.
8. Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a
member or leader in diverse/ multidisciplinary teams.
9. Communication: An ability to communicate effectively.
10. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have preparation and the ability
to engage in independent and life-long learning in context of technological
changes.
4.2.5 Program Educational Objectives (PEO’s)
The Program Educational Objectives (PEOs) are broad statements that describe the
career and professional accomplishments that the programme is preparing graduates
to accomplish. PEOs should be measurable, appropriate, realistic, time bound and
achievable.
4.2.6 Program Specific Outcomes (PSO’s)
No definition for PSO’s is found in literature. According to Dr. B.L. Gupta,
NITTTR, Bhopal, PSO’s are the broad statements of Program specific outcomes as
per the local needs.
4.2.7 Course Outcomes (CO’s)
Course Outcomes (COs) are clear statements of what a student should be able to
demonstrate upon completion of a course. They should be assessable and measurable
knowledge, skills, abilities or attitudes that students attain by the end of the course. It
20
is generally a good idea to identify between four and seven. All courses in a
particular programme would have their own course outcomes. These course
outcomes are designed based on the requirement of the programme outcomes (POs).
Each course outcomes are mapped to a relevant PO and they are mapped to the
programme educational objectives (PEO). The teaching learning process and
assessment methods are to be designed in such a way to achieve the COs. It is
important to ensure that the student is able to acquire the knowledge or skill required.
Table 4.1 clarifies the difference between Course Objectives Vs Course Outcomes
Table 4.1. Difference between Course Outcomes and Course Objectives.
Course Objectives Course Outcomes
Describe what a teacher needs to teach, and Describe what students should demonstrate
what needs to be planned to teach. upon the completion of a course.
Example- Example-
At the end of the course, students will- At the end of the course, students will be
Understand the types of wiring system. able to-
Choose a suitable wiring system for
particular installation.
4.2.8 Specific Learning Outcomes (SLO’s) or Learning Outcomes (LO’s)

Learning outcomes (LO’s) or Specific Learning Outcomes (SLO’s) are “statements
of what is expected that the student will be able to do as a result of learning the
activity”. (Jenkins and Unwin, 2001); i.e at the end of each unit or chapter. SLO’s
should also be assessable and measurable knowledge, skills, abilities or attitudes that
students attain by the end of the unit
21
CHAPTER 5
Bloom’s Taxonomy
Outcome-based education is an educational model in which curriculum and pedagogy

and assessment are all focused on student learning. Learning is a relatively permanent
change in behaviour potentiality that results from reinforced practice or experience. A
group of educational psychologists led by Benjamin Bloom develops a taxonomy, or
classification system, for learning. Some aspects of Bloom’s Taxonomy is described
below.
5.1 Introduction to Bloom’s Taxonomy
Benjamin Bloom (1948) developed classifications of intellectual behaviour and learning

in order to identify and measure progressively sophisticated learning. Bloom's taxonomy
is especially important in higher education where outcomes need to address the student
ability to use information, not just recall and regurgitate concepts. Lower levels of
learning are easier to assess but do not adequately display what the student can do with
the knowledge. However, learning is not a purely cognitive function; learning occurs
differently when it entails performing a skill or re-evaluating behavior. This approach is
based on biological structure of human being as shown in figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1. Human Being and Domains of Learning
Important elements of this approach which form basics of learning are explained below.
22
5.2 Domains of Learning
Learning is a process by which students develop relatively permanent change in mental

associations through experience. This is how learning is defined by cognitive
psychologists. Behavioral; psychologists define learning as a relatively permanent change
in behavior. However, learning is not a purely cognitive function; learning occurs
differently when it entails performing a skill or re-evaluating behavior.
There are following domains of learning:
A: Cognitive Domain relates to intellectual skills or abilities
B: Affective Domain relates to emotions, feelings, likes, dislikes etc.
C: Psychomotor Domain relates to manipulative skills of hands, legs. Eye-hand
coordination
In Engineering & Technology courses, endeavor is made to design curriculum with a
focus on development of cognitive skills through classroom teaching, whereas
manipulative (psychomotor) skills are developed in workshops, laboratories & seminars
where students work individually or in a group. Development of affective skills attitudes
and value is supposed to be acquired through projects and co-curricular activities. These
are also developed from the work culture or institutions.
How far a student has developed these abilities/skills especially from cognitive and
psychomotor domains is assessed on the basis of suitable examinations. When classroom
and laboratory teaching is viewed in this light, evaluation becomes an integral part of
teaching – learning process.
5.2.1 Cognitive Domain
Dr. Benjamin Bloom (1956) analysed questions asked in various examinations in
American situation and proposed a hierarchical arrangement of instructional objectives
(Intellectual abilities) tested by these questions.
The lowest level of cognitive learning achieved by a student is demonstrated by the recall
of information that the student retrieves from his long term memory. So, the storage and
retrieval of specific facts, concepts, principles, laws, definitions, properties, procedures
etc. directly from memory was classified as a knowledge level objective. Thus questions
23
testing memory of students were treated as at the lowest level of the hierarchy of
intellectual abilities. The other levels of hierarchy proposed by Dr. Bloom in 1956 relate
to the degree of information processing required in the brain needed to provide answer to
a question. The various levels in the cognitive hierarchy proposed by Dr. Bloom in 1956
and further revised in 2001 are shown in figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2. Revised cognitive hierarchy Levels
Table 5.1. Cognitive Domain Levels Action Verbs

Cognitive
Behavior descriptions Action Verbs
Domain Levels
Remember Recall or recognize information Define, Duplicate, List, Name,
Identify, Recall, Reproduce,
Recognize, Retrieve
Understand Understand meaning, re-state Calculate, Categorize, Clarify,
data in one's own words, Classify, Compare, Conclude,
interpret, extrapolate, translate Contrast, Describe, Exemplify,
Expand, Illustrate, Infer, Interpret,
Locate, Paraphrase, Predict, Report,
Restate, Summarize, Translate
Apply Use or apply knowledge, put Carry out, Classify, Demonstrate,
theory into practice, use Execute , Illustrate, Implement,
knowledge in response to real Practice, Solve, Use, Utilize
circumstances
24
Analyse Interpret elements, Appraise, Attribute, Compare,

organizational principles, Contrast, Deconstruct, Detect,
structure, construction, internal Differentiate, Discriminate,
relationships; quality, reliability Distinguish, Examine, Formulate,
of individual components Infer, Integrate, Organize, Parse,
Relate, Select, Sequence, Structure,
Test
Evaluate Assess effectiveness of whole Appraise, Check, Coordinate,
concepts, in relation to values, Critique, Defend, Detect, Dispute,
outputs, efficacy, viability; Judge, Monitor, Prioritize, Rate,
critical thinking, strategic Reconstruct, Select, Support,
comparison and review; Verify
judgment relating to external
criteria
Create Develop new unique structures, Change, Combine, Compile,
systems, models, approaches, Compose, Construct, Create,
ideas; creative thinking, Design, Formulate, Generate,
operations Hypothesize, Improve, Invent,
Plan, Predict, Produce
5.2.2 Psychomotor Domain
The Psychomotor Domain (RH Dave's version, 1970) was established to address skills
development relating to the physical dimensions of accomplishing a task. Because,
'motor' skills extend beyond the originally traditionally imagined manual and physical
skills, always consider using this domain, even if you think your environment is covered
adequately by the Cognitive and Affective Domains. Whatever the situation, it is likely
that the Psychomotor Domain is significant.
Figure 5.3. Psychomotor hierarchy Levels

25
Table 5.2. Psychomotor Domain Levels Action Verbs

Psychomotor
Domain Levels
Imitation/ Copy action of another; observe Copy, follow, replicate, repeat,
observation and replicate adhere, attempt, reproduce,
organize, sketch, duplicate
Manipulation Reproduce activity from Re-create, build, perform, execute,
instruction or memory implement, acquire, conduct,
operate
Precision/ Execute skill reliably, Demonstrate, complete, show,
competent independent of help, activity is perfect, calibrate, control, achieve,
quick, smooth, and accurate accomplish, master, refine
Articulation/ Adapt and integrate expertise to Solve, adapt, combine, coordinate,
consolidation satisfy a new context or task revise, integrate, adapt, develop,
formulate, modify, master
Naturalization Instinctive, effortless, Construct, compose, create,
& Mastery unconscious mastery of activity design, specify, manage, invent,
and related skills at strategic project-manage, originate
level
5.2.3 Affective Domain
Affective Domain, was detailed by Bloom, Krathwhol and Masia (1964, Taxonomy of
Educational Objectives: Vol. II, The Affective Domain.) Bloom's theory advocates this
structure and sequence for developing attitude - also now commonly expressed in the
modern field of personal development as 'beliefs'. As with the other domains, the
Affective Domain detail provides a framework for teaching, training, assessing and
evaluating the effectiveness of training and lesson design and delivery, and also the
retention by and affect upon the learner or trainee.
26
Figure 5.4. Affective Domain hierarchy Levels
Table 5.3. Affective Domain Levels Action Verbs

Affective Domain
Levels
Receiving Open to experience, Ask, listen, focus, attend, take part,
willing to hear acknowledge, hear, be open to, retain,
follow, concentrate, read, do, feel
Responding React and participate React, respond, interpret, clarify,
actively contribute, question, present, cite,
write, perform
Valuing Attach values and express Argue, challenge, debate, refute,
personal opinions confront, justify, persuade, criticize,
Organizing or Reconcile internal Build, develop, formulate, defend,
Conceptualizing conflicts; develop value modify, relate, prioritize, reconcile,
system contrast, arrange, compare
Internalizing Adopt belief system and Act, display, influence, solve, practice,
Values philosophy
27
5.3 Program Outcomes and Domains of Learning
Figure 5.5. Program Outcomes and Domains of Learning
Program Outcomes (POs) framed by NBA for diploma students are the specific
characteristics required by the stake holders in the students. There is definite relation
between these outcomes with the three different domain of learning, which are described
in figure 5.5. These classification plays major role while framing curriculum.
28
CHAPTER 6
Curriculum Revision Process
Since, autonomous status GPN revised curriculum after every 5 years. 2016
revision is the fifth revision. Concept of Bloom’s Taxonomy is included in GPN
curriculum since the beginning; however the complete model of OBE is adopted first
time in the curriculum revision process. The complete curriculum revision process is
described below.
6.1 Change Management
GPN is the diploma level educational institute is having total 12 diploma program, out of
which 11 programs are under autonomous status. Curriculum revision of such 11
programs in a short period with the new unknown model is a huge task before CDC. It is
natural reaction of human being even in the best circumstances for any change, is to
resist.
GPN used ADKAR model for change management. This diagnostic tool helps our
organization and our employees understand where they are in the change process. We use
this tool to identify gaps in your change management process and to provide effective
coaching for our faculties.
The ADKAR model is used to:
 manage faculties resistance
 help faculties transition through the change process
 create a successful action plan for curriculum development
 develop a strategy of curriculum development
29
6.1.1 ADKAR Model for Change Management

ADKAR has become very popular with managers and project teams because this
change management model is easily applied and simple to teach to others, including
executive sponsors of change. ADKAR stands for:
 Awareness : Awareness of the need for change
 Desire : Desire to participate and support the change
 Knowledge : Knowledge on how to change
 Ability : Ability to implement required skills and behaviors
 Reinforcement : Reinforcement to sustain the change
Following change management tools are used in curriculum revision process.
1. Communication
2. Motivation
3. Workshop
4. Resistance Management
5. Training
Figure 6.1 shows the mapping of these tools with ADKAR.
Figure 6.1. Mapping of change management tools with ADKAR

30
6.1.2 Results of ADKAR Model

As a result of using ADKAR model for change we got following results:
 Date of Starting curriculum Revision process : 23/01/2016
 Date of Completion of curriculum Revision process : 24/11/2016
 Time Period to complete curriculum Revision : 11 Months.
 No. of Programs for curriculum Revision : 11
 No. of Courses for curriculum Revision : 293
 Implementation of OBE curriculum from : July 2016
6.2 Curriculum Revision Process
Following Method is adopted for Development of Curriculum

 Study Outcome Base Education Philosophy
 Analyse OBE Curricula of Diploma in Engineering in India and Autonomous
Institute (MS) curricula
 Analyse Model Diploma in Engineering curriculum by AICTE
 Compare 2011 curriculum with MSBTE existing curriculum
 Study NBA/AICTE/MSBTE/NSQF guidelines
 Organize Search Conference for validation of skills
 Collect Feedback (Program-wise) on existing curriculum from stake holders
 Curriculum mapping with POs to identify curriculum gaps
 Decide Institute Level policies
 Develop Model
 Prepare Action Plan for development
 Analyse and Brain storming at program level
 Develop Vision, Mission and PEOs and curriculum at program Level (Framing,
Mapping, Editing, Revising)
 Approve from PBOS, BOS and GB.
31
6.2.1 Study of OBE Philosophy

CDC studies the OBE philosophy, which is described previously in this
document. The training of faculties are arrange for awareness of faculties.
6.2.2 Analysis of OBE curricula
Following Boards in India adopted Outcome based curriculum for Diploma in
Engineering:
 Gujarat Technological University-2014-15
 Board of Technical Examinations, Bengaluru, Karnataka- 2015-16
 State Board of Technical Education, Kerala state- 2015-16
 MSBTE is going for OBE from- 2017-18
The analysis of above OBE curriculum of each and every program is a huge task;
however CDC studied curriculum of Diploma in Electrical Engineering of above said
boards and analyze their curriculum based on the following points.
 Credits
 Credits Ratio TH:PR
 Total Courses
 Examination Scheme
 Comparison of Autonomous Curriculum in State
The results are shown in table 6.1 to 6.5
Table 6.1. Credits Comparison
Theory Practical
Boards Credits
Periods Periods
GTU, Ahmedabad (OBE) 95 87 182
108
BTE, Bengaluru (OBE) 88 142
(2Pr=1Cr)
47 per
SBTE, Kerala (OBE) NA (2Pr=1Cr)
Year
MSBTE, Mumbai (G scheme) 106 93 199
102
AICTE Model Curriculum 90 145
(2Pr=1Cr)
G. P. Nagpur (2011) 113 87 200
32
Table 6.2. Credit Ratio TH:PR Comparison
Boards TH:PR
GTU, Ahmedabad (OBE) 52:48
BTE, Bengaluru (OBE) 62:32
SBTE, Kerala (OBE) 70:30 (I yr)
MSBTE, Mumbai (G scheme) 53:47
AICTE Model Curriculum 64:36
G. P. Nagpur (2011) 57:43
Table 6.3. Courses Comparison

Theory Practical
Boards
Courses Courses
GTU, Ahmedabad (OBE) 28 06
BTE, Bengaluru (OBE) 22 18
SBTE, Kerala (OBE) NA NA
MSBTE, Mumbai (G scheme) 31 12
AICTE Model Curriculum 29 16
G. P. Nagpur (2011) 29 12
Table 6.4. Examination Scheme Comparison
Theory Practical
Boards
TEE CA TEE CA
GTU, Ahmadabad (OBE) 70 30 20/40 30/60
BTE, Bengaluru (OBE) 100 25 50 25
SBTE, Kerala (OBE) 100 50 50 50

33
MSBTE, Mumbai (G scheme) 100 25 50 25/50
AICTE Model Curriculum 70 20*+10** 50 25
G. P. Nagpur (2011) 80 20 25 25/50
*Progressive Test
** Assignments
Table 6.5. Comparison of Autonomous Curricula
Theory Total
Institute TH TU PR Total Practical
Papers Courses
G.P. Mumbai 96 12 68 176 25 13 38
VJTI, Mumbai 92 16 86 194 27 19 46
G.P. Aurangabad 103 00 81 184 26 13 39
G.P. Kolhapur 104 00 76 180 31 10 41
G.P. Nasik 111 03 82 196 29 11 40
G.P. Nagpur 113 05 82 200 29 12 41
6.2.3 Comparison with MSBTE Existing Curriculum
As mentioned 2.1.1, autonomous institutions shall be required to obtain

equivalence for their courses and programs from the MSBTE, it is essential to compare
GPN curriculum with existing curriculum for variation in content, Existing Courses for
Revision/Deletion, New Courses proposed, detailed Comparison of Examination Scheme.
This task is performed at program level. The analysis of this task is used to decide the
course outcomes, course contents as well as to finalize the program structure of revised
curriculum. The formats for the same are shown in table 6.6 to 6.9.
34
Table 6.6. Comparison of Existing Curriculum-2011 with MSBTE-2012 Curriculum

SN MSBTE Curriculum Equivalent course in Autonomous Content
Curriculum Variation
if any
with
MSBTE
Subject Name TH PR Course Name TH PR
Code of Periods Periods Code of Credits Credits
Subject course
Table 6.7. List of Existing Courses for Revision/Deletion etc.

Sr. Course Name of Course Write-R Reason for Name of New
No. Code (Revision) R/NR/D title if proposed
NR (No
Revision)
D (Deletion)
Table 6.8. List of New Courses proposed

Sr. Name of new courses proposed Reason for introduction of New
No. (if any) courses
Table 6.9. Comparison of Examination Scheme with MSBTE Curriculum

Sr. Points MSBTE Autonomous Remarks
No. Curriculum Curriculum if any
1 Theory Paper Maximum marks
2 Practical Maximum marks
3 Progressive Test Maximum marks
4 Term work Maximum marks
5 No. of subject/courses having internal

practical exam.
6 No. of subject/courses having
external practical exam
35
7 No. of subject/courses having internal

oral exam
8 No. of subject/courses having external
oral exam
9 No. of subject/courses having term work
10 No. of non-exam subject/courses
11 Industrial training included in

curriculum (Yes/No)
6.2.4 Study of NBA/AICTE/MSBTE Guidelines

The guidelines given in following documents are studied, and the final
conclusions are made to framed curriculum documents.
1. Orientation Workshop on Outcome Based Accreditation NBA training text
material- to frame Vision, Mission of the Institute, Vision, Mission, PEOs of
the program.
2. AICTE Guidelines- 21st Academic Council Meeting of AICTE on 3rd April,
2013 to decide percentage of various level courses. The abstract of the
guidelines is mentioned in the table 6.10.
Table 6.10. Abstract of Guidelines
S.
Levels Percentage Course Heads
N.
1 General 5 to 10% Language / Communication skills
Humanities and Social Science
Economics & Principle of management
NSS, NCC, NSO, Rural Development

2 Basic Science 15 to 25% Computer literacy with numerical analysis
Mathematics
Physics
Chemistry
36
3 Engineering 15 to 25% Engineering Graphics

Sciences and
Technical Arts Workshop Practice
Engineering Mechanics
Electrical Science I (Basic Electrical
Engineering)
Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer
Material Science and Engineering

Electrical Science II (Electronics and
Instrumentation)
4 Professional 55 to 65%
Subjects
i) Professional 22.5 to 27.5% Minimum number of Core courses
Core suggested by experts
ii) Professional 12.5 to 15% About 10% Electives should be made
Elective available to the students
iii) Free Elective 7.5 to 10% Open interdisciplinary electives allow a
student to diversify his/her spectrum of
knowledge
iv) Project 5 to 10%
v) Seminar & 2.5 to 5%

Industrial
Training
3. MSBTE Guidelines MSBTE/D-10/Director/2012/303 Dt.1st October, 2012-

The important guidelines given by MSBE are as follows:
 Credits should not be more than 160 and should be uniform across the
program
 Curriculum should be laboratory based and having more practical
weight age
 Curriculum should be restricted to five levels
 4th and 5th level courses are considered for award of diploma
 Practical Examination should be based on performance only.
37
 Implant training should be made compulsory any time in vacation after

first year and separate credits should be given.
 Online examination of courses should be start gradually. To begin with
one course per semester.
6.2.5 Search Conference

The search conference is organized at institute level on dated 12/02/2016. The
experts from the industries, academic institutions and alumni were present. The main
objectives of organization of search conference are as follows:
 Validate generic and technical skills identified by the program.
 Suggest new skills to be developed in a technician pertaining to specific work
area by industry/ field experts.
 Collect Feedback on existing curriculum and suggestions on previous received
feedback.
 Suggest new course content to be incorporated in curriculum.
 Obtain suggestions on various topics related to program structure.
 Analyze and prepare a final list of generic skills and technical skills and from
courses based on validated skills later on.
 Formation of Courses
6.2.6 Curriculum mapping
The 2011 curriculum is mapped to identify Program strengths (attributes that are
widely addressed) and Gaps (attributes that are addressed by only a few learning
experiences).
The simplest form of curriculum map is a matrix whose rows are the learning
experiences (curriculum courses) and columns are the Graduate attributes (or
Program Outcomes).
The curriculum courses include General Studies Courses, Basic Science Courses,
Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts Courses, Professional Courses (Core,
project, seminar etc.), Elective Courses.
38
To establish the curriculum map, each faculty member reviews his/her courses and
identifies the attributes that are addressed in the course based on its content and
materials.
A sample curriculum mapping sample is shown in Table 6.10. Program wise
curriculum mapping is given in subsequent chapter.
Table 6.11. Curriculum mapping (Sample)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2
Discipline Knowledge
Individual and Team
Life-Long Learning
Maintain Electrical
Maintain Electrical
The Engineer and
Engineering tools
Basic Knowledge
Environment and
Experiments and
Communication
Course
Power System
SN Course Name
Sustainability
Equipment’s
code
Practice
Society
Ethics
work
1 EV1101 Environmental
X - - - X X X X X X - -
science
2 EE1301 Basic
Electrical X X X X - - X X X X X X
Engineering
3 EE1401 Electrical
Circuit and X X X X - - - X - X X X
Network
4 EE1402 Electrical
- X X X X - X X - X X X
Measurement
6.2.7 Institute Level Policies

Institute level policy for curriculum development is decided by the CDC on the basis
of followings:
 OBE Model
 Analysis of various curriculum Autonomous Institute/ MSBTE curriculum/ OBE
curriculum
 NBA/AICTE/MSBTE Guidelines
 Feed Back from stake holders
 Search Conference Outcomes
 Curriculum Mapping of 2011 curriculum and
 GPN 2011 Curriculum
39
The following institute level suggestions are forwarded to the various programs for
framing program structure.
1. Levels of Courses V
 Level I- General studies courses- 5 (5 to 10%)
1. English
2. Communication Skill
3. Environmental science
4. Economics & Management
5. Rural development (Non Theory)
 Level II- Basic Science Courses- 6 (15 to 25%)
6. C programming (including introduction to office tools) (Non Theory) (Note:
Letter on this course is changed to Computer Applications as suggested in CM/IT
PBOS)
7. Physics
8. Chemistry
9. Mathematics-I
10. Mathematics-II
11. Mathematics- III
(Note: The program which does not require mathematics-III course, may opt for
more Computer literacy with numerical analysis courses. Letter on three
mathematics courses are converted into two mathematics courses, by increasing
the credits)
 Level III Engineering Sciences and Technical arts courses- 7 (15 to 25%)
(should be programme specific)
12. Engineering Graphics (Theory)
13. Workshop Practice (program specific) (Non Theory)
14. Electrical Science I (Basic Electrical Engineering)
15. Electrical Science II (Electronics and Instrumentation)
16. Material Science and Engineering (program specific)
40
17. Engineering Mechanics

18. Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer (or mechanical related e.g. Elements of
Mechanical Engineering for EE or program specific as per the experts
suggestions)
 Level IV- i) Professional Core Courses– 11- 22.5% to 27.5%
19. to 27- Theory cum Practical Courses
28 to 29 – Practical courses (Non-Theory)
(Note: Letter on number of core courses are increased to 14)
ii) Project Courses- 5 to 10%
30 to 31 – Practical Courses prerequisite for project (Non-Theory) Department
specific workshop + program related design laboratory
32. Industrial Project
iii) Seminar and Industrial Training Courses- - 2.5 to 5%
33. Seminar
34. Industrial Training/Practices
 Level V- Elective Courses– 11- 22.5% to 27.5%
i) Professional Elective Courses- 5/8 - 12.5 to 15%
35. to 42- Theory cum Practical Courses
(Note: Letter on number of professional electives are changed to 3/6)
ii) Free Elective- 7.5 to 10%
43. Finishing School (Common for all Brach)
44 to 53. Any one Elective Course each from 10 programs
(Note: Letter on number of electives courses are changed to 1/12)
2. Detailed Curriculum Response
CDC has suggested the various responses on various criteria based on the above
study and are given in table 6.12
41
Table 6.12. Suggestive Curriculum at a Glance

Suggestive
SN CRITERION
RESPONSE
1 Total No. of Courses in a Program 55*
2 Total courses required. 41
3 No. of courses having theory papers. 29
4 No. of courses having non Theory exam. 12
5 No. of General Studies courses 5
6 No. of Basic Science Courses 6
7 No. of Engineering Science courses 7
8 No. of Professional Core courses 11
9 No. of Professional Elective courses 5/8
10 No. of Professional Free Elective courses 2/10*
11 No. of Project courses 3
12 No. of Seminar courses 2/3

Total credits
13 150-155
(1 Th Hr = 1Credit & 2 Pr Hr = 1Credit)
4600
14 Total marks
(approx.)
50:50
15 Proportion of Hours (Periods), Th : Pr
(approx.)
65:35
16 Proportion of credits, Th : Pr
(approx.)
50:50
17 Proportion of marks; Th : Pr
(approx.)
18 Total courses for Award of Class 12
19 Total theory paper courses for Award of Class 10
20 Total marks for Award of Class 1600

42
6.2.8 Development of Curriculum Revision Model

Top to bottom design approach model of OBE described in Figure 4.2 is found in literature. No
other model is found in literature. OBE is not only top to bottom design approach; it is a 3600
approach model. Based on this 3600 CDC developed our own model based on the study
described above. Government Polytechnic, Nagpur model is named as GoPoNa Model.
The model is as shown in figure 6.2.
Figure 6.2. GoPoNa Model
GoPoNa Model is based on the OBE philosophy, various guidelines framed by the
AICTE/NBA/MSBTE, and Search conference outcomes (feedback from stake holders).
As OBE is 3600 approach various feedback loops are provided in the model for
continuous improvement. The model is self-explanatory.
6.2.9 Preparation of Action Plan
Due to time constraint it is decided that the curriculum development process should be
divided in to two phases. In first phase Curriculum of common courses i.e. Level I, II, III
43
are to be develop. And in second phase program specific courses of level IV and V are to
be developed. The action plan is prepared for the both phases and is shown in table 6.13
and table 6.14 respectively.
Table 6.13. First Phase Action Plan
Period/Date of
S.N. Activity
Completion, up to
 Formation of PBOS at departmental level
 Formation of institute level committee for deciding
1 common policies. 31/12/2015
 Formation of committee for deciding Basic Engg. ,
Science and CNE courses policies
Comparison of 2011 curriculum with MSBTE curriculum
2 02/01/2016
(Preliminary Task)
Meeting for deciding common policies of outcome based
3. 19/01/2016
curriculum at institute level.
Meeting for deciding policies of Basic Engg. , Science
4 19/01/2016
and CNE courses.
5 Workshop for outcome based design procedure 22/01/2016
Preparation of Vision, Mission statements, POs and COs
6 01/02/2016
at program level
Preparation of program structure based on outcome based
education (course titles, scheme etc) by all programs (first
7 10/02/2016
draft, based on the information/data received from
industries) & submission to I/C CDC.
Checking of first draft of program structure of all program
by curriculum revision committee (CDC) and return to
8 17/02/2016
respective program suggesting necessary corrections if
any.
Preparation of revised draft, if required, of program
9 24/02/2016
structure by the program and submission to CDC.
Search conference for Validation of skills, program
10 structure and course content detailing by all programs at 02/03/2016
department level.
Course Content detailing of I, II & III sem. courses strictly
as per Guideline of Curriculum Revision , information
11 11/03/2016
obtained from industries, content detailing format ,
feedback of MSBTE equiv. committee etc.
Revising program structure, course content based on the
12 19/03/2016
outcome of search conference(if required)
44
Arranging Program-wise Board of studies meeting

(PBOS) of all program for courses of all levels by
13 respective Program. 31/03/2016
Suggestions in PBOS if any to be incorporated for getting
approval from PBOS.
Submission of curriculum of I, II & III sem. courses (soft
14 copy) by program head/ “coordinator – curriculum” of 07/04/2016
program, to I/C CDC.
Finalizing/checking of curriculum of I, II & III sem.
15 courses of all program by Curriculum Revision 14/04/2016
Committee & submission to respective programs.
Presentation of curriculum structure and courses in BOS
16 20/04/2016
meetings.
Presentation of curriculum structure and courses in G.B.
17 27/04/2016
meetings
Table 6.14. Second Phase Action Plan

Period/Date of
S.N. Activity
Completion, upto
Course Content detailing of III (if any), IV & V Level.
06/06/2016
courses strictly as per Guideline of Curriculum Revision ,
1 to
information obtained from industries, content detailing
07/08/2016
format , feedback of MSBTE equiv. committee etc.
Revising program structure, course content based on the
2 14/08/2016
outcome of search conference(if required)
Arranging Program-wise Board of studies meeting
3 (PBOS) of all program for courses of all levels by
Up to
respective Program.
24/08/2016
Suggestions in PBOS if any to be incorporated for getting
4
approval from PBOS.
Submission of curriculum of IV & V level courses (soft
5 copy) by program head/ “coordinator – curriculum” of 31/08/2016
program, to I/C CDC.
Finalizing/checking of curriculum of IV & V level courses
6 of all program by Curriculum Revision Committee & 01/09/2016
submission to respective programs.
Presentation of curriculum structure and courses in BOS 07/09/2016
7
meetings. 08/09/2016
Presentation of curriculum structure and courses in G.B. Before Diwali
8
meetings Vacation
45
6.2.10 Analysis and Brain Storming at Program Level

As per the action plan, OBE philosophy, guidelines and outcomes of search conference
faculties in the program develops the program Structure (PS) and curriculum of courses
as a group task.
The draft program structure of Electrical Engineering (Described in chapter 7) and draft
curriculum of Basic Electrical Engineering is developed (shown in table 6.16) by CDC as
a model for development of various programs PS and curricula.
Table 6.15. Program Structure Level I (sample)
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
Level I: General Studies
DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Teaching
Scheme Examination Scheme
Sr. Course Prerequisite ( TH,TU,PR Total (Max. Marks)
Course Title
No Code courses/credits Hrs./Week)* Credits*
Theory Practical Total
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
1 EN101E English Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50@ 25 175
Communication
2 EN102E Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50@ 25 175
Skills
Industrial
3 MN101E Organization & Min.60 credits 04 00 00 04 70 30 Nil Nil 100
Management
Environmental
4 EV101E Nil 01 01 00 02 70** 30 Nil Nil 100
Science
Rural
5 RD101E Nil 00 00 02 01 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Development
Total 11 01 06 15 280 120 150 75 625
 Abbreviations:
TH – Theory ; PR- Practical; TU- Tutorial; TEE- Term End Examination; CA-
Continuous Assessment
 *Credit Formula: 1 TH Hr. = 1 Credit; 1 TU Hr. = 1 Credit; 2 PR Hrs. = 1 Credit
 Symbolic Representation
** Online Examination, @ Internal Practical Examination, # External Practical
Examination, $ Award of class course.
6.2.11 Development of Vision, Mission and PEOs and Curriculum

Vision and Mission of the Institute is revised by the CDC in consultation with all the
programs, industry experts, academic expert and alumni in search conference. Vision,
46
Mission, PSOs and PEOs of the programs are developed by program itself in consultation
with industry experts, academic expert and alumni in search conference. Vision and
Mission of the Institute is approved in BOS and GB and Vision, Mission, PSOs and
PEOs of the programs are approved in PBOS, BOS and GB.
6.2.12 Approval from AB, PBOS, BOS and GB
Program Structure, Curriculum of Science, Maths and Humanities departments are
approved in AB and program specific courses are approved in PBOS of individual
departments, Science, Maths and Humanities courses are also put before the PBOS of
each program for approval, the suggestions obtained in PBOS are carried out before put it
to BOS and all approved courses are put before BOS for approval. The approved
curricula are put before GB for final approval. Table shows the details of PBOS, BOS
and GB meetings.
6.3 Curriculum Revision at a Glance
 No. of Programs : 11
 No. of Courses : 291
 No. of GB Meetings : 2
 No. of BOS Meetings : 3
 No. of PBOS Meetings : 33
 No. of AB Meetings : 4
 No. of ILC Meetings : 5
 No. of SCC Meetings : 4
 No. of Coordinators Meetings : 5
 Trainings Workshops : 3
 Individual Department Trainings : 13
 Search Conference : 1
 No. of Faculties Involved : 108
 No. of outside Experts Involved : 46
 Days Spent for Curriculum Editing : 26
47
CHAPTER 7
Model Course Curriculum
Model Course Curriculum of Basic Electrical Engineering is framed by CDC of

GPN and circulates among the programs for development of various curricula. The
workshop is arranged to describe the contents in it. The details are described below.
7.1 Basic Information
Following introductory information related to course is given in each curriculum.

PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRICAL ENGG.
LEVEL NAME : ENGINEERING SCIENCES AND TECHNICAL ARTS COURSES
COURSE CODE : EE301E
The unique method is developed for assigning course code for the various courses, which
is described in Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1. Course Code
COURSE TITLE : BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 04; TU: 00; PR: 02(CLOCK HRs.)
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : 02 HRs (Internal)
PT. : 01 HR
7.2 Rationale
In rationale the importance of the course is described in brief.

48
7.3 Course Outcomes (COs)
COs are “Building Blocks” of OBE system. COs are measured at the end of the course.
They are aligned with one or more POs and are closely related to the assessments. COs
are measurable and assessable. Every course is having six COs.
Blooms taxonomy is important in higher education, where outcomes needs to be address
the student ability to use information, not just recall, therefore all course outcomes are
written in higher levels of learning. COs are based on all domains of learning to fulfill
maximum POs and start with the action verb. The example of CO is given below showing
domains of learning. CO1, CO2 and CO3 are in cognitive domain. CO4, CO5 and CO6
are in psychomotor domain. CO3 falls also under affective domain.
1. Apply electrical safety concept
2. Use principle and basic laws in electrical engineering for different applications
3. Solve simple electrical circuits.
4. Connect electrical measuring instruments in the circuit
5. Record the readings of various electrical meters.
6. Operate electrical equipment.
7.4 Course Details: Theory
Course content is limited to six units. Each unit is having topic and subtopic. Based on
the content Specific Learning Outcomes (SLOs) in cognitive Domain are mentioned.
Action verbs of Cognitive Domain in all levels of learning;
1. Knowledge,
2. Comprehension,
3. Application, Analysis, Synthesis, Evaluation.
These SLOs are in line levels of learning domains mentioned in specification table or
vice versa. Table 7.1 shows example.
49
Table 7.1. Course Details Theory (sample)
Units Specific Learning Topics and subtopics Hrs

Outcomes (Cognitive .
Domain)
1. Electrical 1. Apply electrical safety 1.1 Electrical Safety, Causes of accidents, 06
Safety rules while working General safety rules, Concept of
2. Remove the electrical shock, Effect of electric
electrocuted person shock, Method of removing
from live conductor electrocuted person, Safety signs and
3. Interpret electrical symbols.
safety signs and 1.2 Artificial respiration-schaefer’s
symbols method, silvester’s method, mouth to
4. Apply different mouth respiration.
methods of artificial 1.3 First Aid
respiration on 1.4 Fire, Causes of Fire, Basic ways of
electrocuted person extinguishing the fire Classification of
5. Select fire-fighting fire, Class A, B,C, D, Fire fighting
equipment on different equipments, fire extinguishers, and
types of fires. their types .
7.5 Course Details Practical
All Specific Learning Outcomes (SLOs) are in psychomotor domain to develop the
practical skills. Table 7.2 shows example.
Table 7.2. Course Details: Practical (sample)
Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Units Hrs.

als Domain)
1. Identify electrical measuring instruments, sources,
ICDP/ITDP, switches, loads, wires and execute 1. Electrical Safety 4
safety precautions in laboratory.
2 Connect voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter in
2
electrical circuit.
3 Measure the current, voltage and resistance with the 2. Fundamentals of
2
help of multi-meter or tong tester. electricity
4 Find unknown resistance using ohms law. 2
5 Find temperature coefficient of materials. 2
Skill test is mandatory to assess the skills acquire during the course work before term end
examination.
50
7.6 Specification Table
Specification table is a blue print for setting question paper. It is useful for designing a
valid question paper. In OBE 2016 curriculum; specification table is provided for
question paper setting (as well as for student); which shows the level wise cognitive
process dimensions. The sample Specification table is shown on table
Table 7.3. Specification Table (sample)
Unit Units Levels from Cognition Process Dimension Total Marks

No.
R U A
01 Electrical Safety 00(02) 04(00) 00(00) 04(02)

Fundamentals of
02 06(02) 08(08) 06(00) 20(10)
Electricity
03 DC Circuits 02(00) 04(00) 06(06) 12(06)
04 Electrostatics 02(00) 06(04) 00(00) 08(04)
Magnetism and
05 06(04) 04(08) 06(00) 16(12)
Electromagnetism
06 AC Fundamentals 02(00) 08(00) 00(06) 10(06)
Total 18(08) 34(20) 18 (12) 70 (40)
R – Remember U – Understand A – Analyze / Apply
It is suggested that for:
 Basic Courses: R=30%; U=50%; A=20%
 Higher Level Courses: R=20%; U=50%; A=30%
7.7 Question Paper Profile (QPP)
Question paper profile (QPP) is the steps to words the step of e-governance. We can
generate the question paper using computer program with the help of QPP and question
bank on each bit of QPP. QPP is also the ready reckoner to the setter for setting questions
on different levels of cognitive domain and topics. QPP reduces the process time of
printed Question Paper for Examination.
51
Table 7.4. Question Paper Profile (sample)
Q. Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6

option
No T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M
2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
2 R 2
02 2 R 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
03 5 R 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 5 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 5 U 4 5 R 4 3/5
05 4 U 6 2 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
06 3 A 6 5 A 6 6 A 6 2/3
2 Marks Bit- 5(2) = 7 Bits

T= Unit/Topic Number L= Level of Question M= Marks
R-Remember U-Understand A-Analyze/ Apply
7.8 Assessment and Evaluation Scheme
A detailed assessment and evaluation scheme is mentioned in curriculum in tabulated

form as mentioned in table 7.5, which is self-explanatory.
52
Table 7.5. Assessment and Evaluation Scheme (Sample)
To Max Min Evidence Course

What Frequency
Whom Marks Marks Collected Outcomes
Two PT
(Continuous Assessment)
(average of Test
PT two tests 20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Direct Assessment Theory
will be Scripts
Students
CA
computed)
Class Room Assignment

Assignments 10 -- 1, 2, 3
Assignments Book
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
End Exam Students 70 28 Answer 1, 2, 3
Course
Scripts
Total 100 40
One skill Practical

ST test at end of 20 -- Answer 4,5,6

term Scripts
Direct Assessment Practical
Students
CA
Journal
Assignments 05 -- Journal 4,5,6
Writing
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Practical
TEE
End Of the
End Exam Students 50 20 Answer 4,5,6
Course
Scripts
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on After First

Student Feedback Form
course PT
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
End Of Course Survey Questionnaires
Course
53
7.9 Scheme of Practical Evaluation
A detailed scheme of practical evaluation is mentioned in curriculum having practical

examination in tabulated form, which is a guideline for development of rubrics for
assessment purpose. A sample scheme of practical evaluation of EE301E is shown in
table 7.6.
Table 7.6. Scheme of Practical Evaluation (Sample)
S.N. Description Max. Marks
1 Drawing circuit diagram, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure
10
etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawing Graphs (if any) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50
7.10 Mapping of Course Outcomes with POs and PSOs
All developed curricula are mapped with POs and PSOs of the program. The POs and
PSOs which fulfilled by the curriculum content are identified first. Individual course
outcomes written previously are then mapped with the POs and PSOs. A sample mapping
of EE301E is shown in table 7.7.
Table 7.7. Mapping of COs with POs and PSOs (Sample)
Course Program Outcomes (POs) PSOs
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(COs)
CO1 3 3 - - - - 1 - - - 3 3
CO2 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 3
CO6 3 3 2 2 - - - 2 2 2 3 3
1: Slight (Low) 2: Moderate (Medium) 3: Substantial (High)

54
7.11 Reference & Text Books
A reference and text books required as per the content of curriculum are mentioned as a
reference for the student as well as faculties. Only standard books having ISBN numbers
are given priority in the document. A sample of EE301E is shown in table 7.8.
Table 7.8. Reference & Text Books (Sample)
Author, Publisher, Edition and
S.N. Title ISBN Number
Year Of publication
Principle of Electrical V.K. Mehta, S. Chand & 81-219-1053-6
1. Engineering and Company Ltd., Reprint, 1996
Electronics
A Text Book Of Electrical B.L.Theraja, A.K.Theraja, S. 81-219-2440-5
2.
Technology Vol-I Chand & Co Ltd., Reprint,2006
Basic Electrical V.N.Mittle, Arvind Mittal, The 13: 978-0-07-
3. Engineering McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 059357-2
Reprint, 2011
Experiments in Basic S.K.Bhattacharya and 978-81-224-
Electrical Engineering K.M.Rastogi., New Age 1042-6
4.
International Publisher, Reprint,
2009.
A Text Book on S. G. Tarnekar and P. K. 13: 978-
5. laboratory courses in Kharbanda, S. Chand& Company 8121901048
Electrical Engineering Ltd., Third, 1990
7.12 E-References
E-references as per the content of curriculum are mentioned as a reference for the student
as well as faculties. Standard e-references are given priority in the document. These
references are useful for students learning. A sample of EE301E is shown below.
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108108076/1 , assessed on 18th January 2016
 http://www.electrical4u.com , assessed on 18th January 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A9KSGAnjo2U, assessed on 18th January 2016

55
7.13 List of Major Equipment’s/Instruments with Specification
The list of major equipment’s/ instruments required for performing the practical to
developed psychomotor skills is mentioned in the document. A sample list of EE301E is
shown below.
1. Ammeter MI 0-5-10 A
2. Voltmeter MI 0-150-300 V
3. Wattmeter 0-3000 W
4. Digital Multi-meter
5. Rheostat assorted sizes
6. Variable Inductor
7.14 List of Experts & Teachers who Contributed for Curriculum
The list of experts & teachers who contributed for curriculum is mentioned in the
document followed by the signature of chairman PBOS and member secretary of PBOS
for the authenticity of the curriculum.
S.N. Name Designation Institute / Industry
1.
2.
_______Sign.________ _____Sign._____
(Member Secretary PBOS) (Chairman PBOS)
56
CHAPTER 8
Curriculum Document
Detailed curriculum document of Diploma in Mechanical Engineering is given

below.
8.1 Vision of Institute
To become a Center of Excellence, providing quality technical education and training
8.2 Mission of Institute
The mission of Government Polytechnic, Nagpur is-

1. To frame institutional policies for effective implementation of teaching learning
process
2. To inculcate values and ethics for life-long learning through curricular, co-
curricular and extra-curricular activities
3. To develop facilities and services for academic excellence
4. To enhance the skills of faculties and staff through industry institute
collaboration.
8.3 Vision of Program
Vision of the Mechanical Engineering Program:

Impart quality education to create world class Technical Professionals and Entreprenure
to meet the changing need of Industries and Society.
8.4 Mission of Program
Mission of the Mechanical Engineering Program:

M1: To develop and deliver quality academic programs in Emerging field of Mechanical
Engineering to empower the students to meet industrial needs with environmental
concern.
57
M2: To adopt the best Instructive methods to maximize knowledge transfer.

M3: To provide the best facility, infrastructure and environment to the students and
faculty members, creating an ambience conducive for excellence in Mechanical
Engineering education.
M4:To impart quality education to inculcate moral values, professional ethics and
Entrepreneurial qualities.
8.5 Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)
The Program Educational Objectives of (PEOs) Mechanical Engineering Program are:

PEO1: To provide a strong background of science and humanities in order to use these
tools in Mechanical Engineering.
PEO2: To develop the ability to demonstrate technical and administrative competence.
PEO3: To develop innovative ideas of recent technology for benefits of society with
environmental concern.
PEO4: To attain professional excellence through life-long learning and produce
supervisors who ensure ethical and moral behaviour.
PEO5: To develop the qualities of Entrepreneur and professional leader.
8.6 Program Outcomes (POs)
PO1: Basic Knowledge: Ability to apply knowledge of basic Mathematics, Science and
Engineering to solve the engineering problems
PO2: Discipline Knowledge: Ability to discipline specific knowledge to solve core
and/or applied engineering problems
PO3: Experiments and Practice: Ability to plan and perform experiments and
practices and use the results to solve engineering problems
PO4: Engineering tools: Apply appropriate technologies and tools with an
understandings of limitations
PO5: The Engineer and Society: Demonstrate knowledge to aassess the societal,
health, safety, legal and cultural issues, and the consequent responsibilities relevant
to engineering practice.
58
PO6: Environment and Sustainability: Understand the impact of engineering

solutions in societal and environmental context, and demonstrate knowledge and
need for sustainable development.
PO7: Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and
responsibilities and norms of engineering practice.
PO8: Individual and Team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a
member or leader in diverse/ multidisciplinary teams.
PO9: Communication: An ability to communicate effectively.
PO10: Life-long learning: Recognise the need for, and have preperation and the ability
to engage in independent and life-long learning in context of technological
changes.
8.7 Program Specific Outcomes (PSOs)
PSO1: Plan, Design, fabricate, test, operate mechanical systems and

processes
PSO2: Apply modern tools in manufacturing or processing quality products
8.8 Mapping of Vision, Mission, PEOs, POs, PSOs
8.8.1 Mapping of Vision and Mission

Table 8.1. Mapping of Vision-Mission
Mission Statements
M1 M2 M3 M4
Vision
   
Statement
59
8.8.2 Mapping of Mission and PEOs
Table 8.2. Mapping Mission-PEOs
Mission Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

Statements PEO1 PEO2 PEO3 PEO4 PEO5
    
M 1
  -- -- 
M 2
    
M 3
--    
M 4
8.8.3 Mapping of PEOs and POs- PSOs
Table 8.3. Mapping PEOs-POs & PSOs
PSOs
Program Outcomes (POs)
PEOs PSO1 PSO2
PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
10
PEO1  
PEO2     
PEO3      
PEO4    
PEO5   
8.9 Identified Skills in Search Conference
8.9.1 Technical skills for Mechanical Engineering Diploma Students

1. Prepare engineering drawings using codes, norms and standards manually as well
as through CAD software.
2. Visualize three dimensional objects and draw isometric projections
3. Apply knowledge of projections of points and solve the problems on projections
of straight lines
4. Sketch sectional and missing views
5. Draw projections of lines, planes, solids and section of solids.
60
6. Draw and interpret projection of auxiliary views and development of surfaces and
intersection of solid as per SP46
7. Draw the details and assembly of machine components
8. Create solid modeling
9. Modify and generate drawings and Print it
10. Prepare simple jobs correctly according to given specification using various tools,
measuring instruments and machines for different operations in fitting, smithy,
carpentry, pipefitting and metal joining shop.
11. Measure surface finish and dimensional parameter of component
12. Use destructive and nondestructive testing methods.
13. Compare various concepts of Statistical Quality Control
14. Measure different parameters of process and error estimation.
15. Use foundry materials and simple equipments to cast ferrous and non ferrous
materials using material technology and strength of material.
16. Use arc, gas and spot welding and cutting processes to prepare simple jobs.
17. Use TIG, MIG, SAW and other advance welding and cutting processes to prepare
simple jobs.
18. Use hot and cold working equipments for rolling and forging processes to produce
parts using material technology and strength of material.
19. Use conventional machine tools. (lathe, Milling, Shaper, Drilling, Slotting,
Planning, Capstans and Turrets, Automates, Grinding, Broaching, Jig boring,
Gear hobbing, Gear shaping, Special Purpose Machine tools,etc.)
20. Use presses and press tools.
21. Use Nonconventional machine tools.
22. Use heat treatment processes.
23. Use surface coating and protection methods.
24. Use software like AutoCAD, Pro/E etc to prepare and analyze solid models.
25. Apply concepts of Group Technology, Just in Time, Industrial Engineering
26. Apply concept of concurrent engineering to develop advance manufacturing
systems (Like Flexible manufacturing system, Computer Integrated
manufacturing, Robotics etc).
27. Use electrical and electronic elements/systems to actuate mechanical mechanism.
28. Apply concept of thermodynamics to boilers, steam turbines, air compressors
29. Apply concept of thermodynamics to IC engines, refrigeration
61
30. Use power plant equipments (high pressure boilers, Turbines-gas, steam, water,
etc) related systems and controls.
31. Use various instruments to measure heat/air related parameters.
32. Use energy conservation and Non conventional Energy System.
33. Apply principles of Fluid Machines and its recommendation for application
34. Use hydraulic equipments comprising of hydraulic elements (pumps, motors,
valves, cylinders etc).
35. Use pneumatic equipments comprising of pneumatic elements (Compressor,
motors, valves, cylinders, etc).
36. Select elements and construct simple hydraulic and pneumatic circuits.
37. Identify and locate the links in Mechanism.
38. Recognize various components of brakes , dynamometer and power transmission
devices.
39. Operate centrifugal governor, belt drives and mechanisms.
40. Observe and report writing of I.C. engine components through visit.
41. Design and modify simple machine elements like links/link mechanisms,
fasteners, knuckle joint, cotter joint, riveted joints, levers, etc.
42. Design and modify simple machine elements like shafts, springs, screw jack etc.
43. Use antifriction bearings.
44. Design and draw machine elements like gears, pulleys, clutches, bearings etc.
45. Use cutting tools for machines and machine tools.
46. Design and prepare jigs, fixtures, pattern, mould and press tools for production
purposes.
47. Interpret construction and working of steam generator/turbine.
48. Sketch proportional free hand sketches of machine components.
49. Construct cam profile and velocity acceleration diagram.
50. Use cost reduction techniques.
51. Calculate performance parameters in I.C. Engine / Air compressor.
52. Prepare process plan for given part.
53. Carry out work measurement and method study to improve productivity.
54. Select and use quality assurance (Quality control, SQC, Acceptance sampling,
TQM,TQC,ISO standards, etc) techniques.
55. Use industrial engineering concepts to improve productivity and quality.(JIT,
Reengineering, Value engineering etc)
62
56. Use entrepreneurship abilities to start any venture successfully.

57. Plan, use and control resources optimally and economically. (Man, Machine,
Material, Method, Money, Message-information)
58. Interpret factory acts and laws, relevant social laws.
59. Use innovative and creative approaches and skills for defining and
improving/solving industry/institute/ real life problems.
60. Develop ability to dismantle and assemble I.C. Engine
61. Measure the performance of hydraulic machines.
62. Select proper material handling system
63. Prepare maintenance schedule of material handling equipments
64. Appraise of modern trends in the field of refrigeration and air conditioning
65. Calculate COP of Refrigeration system
66. Find fault and select remedy in refrigeration system.
67. Interpret various components of CNC program
68. Develop and execute CNC program
69. Operate CNC Machines
70. Appraise Computer Aided Manufacturing
71. Select suitable energy sources
72. Diagnose the faults in automation
73. Identify various automated process, machines and equipments
74. Select suitable major control components for automation.
75. Illustrate different modes of heat transfer
76. Analyze the heat transfer rate
77. Use various heat exchangers in industrial/domestic application
78. Select proper engineering materials for specific application.
79. Choose different heat treatment processes.
80. Identify different microstructures of steel and cast iron
81. Prepare sample for microscopic examination.
82. Conduct different metallurgical tests on ferrous and non ferrous metals and alloys.
83. Develop method of commencement of project work
84. Use innovative, economic and technological viable solution to the world of work.
85. Use soft skills acquired by the student during their course of work.
86. Develop and present own technical knowledge, self- learning abilities, creativity,
and team working abilities.
63
87. Develop an understanding of the behaviour of material and components subjected

to various types of loading
88. Analyse and design engineering problems subjects to various forces.
89. Analyse behaviour of material till fracture and analyse its failure pattern
8.9.2 Generic skills for Mechanical Engineering Diploma Holder
1. Identify the problem and apply innovative, creative and logical approach for
problem solving.
2. Develop the lifelong learning attitude.
3. Use techniques to deal effectively with people in the direction of organizational
goals.
4. Maintain values, positive attitude and interpersonal relations.
5. Communicate effectively orally and in writing. Express views precisely,
effectively and positively.
6. Use soft skills acquired by the student during their course of work.
7. Manage time for a given work
8. Work under constraints
9. Develop conflict resolution skills.
10. Develop qualities of Emotional Intelligence.
11. Use the skills of giving and receiving Feedback for improving performance
12. Encourage the subordinates to ask the questions.
13. Develop and present own technical knowledge, self- learning abilities, creativity,
and team working abilities
8.10 2011 Curriculum Mapping with Program Outcomes (POs)
The 2011 curriculum is mapped to identify Program strengths (attributes that are widely
addressed) and Gaps (attributes that are addressed by only a few learning experiences).
The mapping table is shown below.
64
Table 8.4. 2011 Curriculum Mapping with POs & PSOs
Course PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PSO1 PSO2
Code
Communicatio
Individual and
Apply modern tools

in manufacturing or
Sustainability
The Engineer
operate mechanical
Environment
processing quality
Experiments
and Practice
Engineering
and Society
Knowledge
Knowledge
Team work
Life-Long
Discipline
fabricate, test,
Plan, Design,
Learning
systems and
processes
Ethics
products
Basic
tools
and
n
EN1101 X _ X _ _ _ _ X X X _ _
AM1301 X _ X X _ _ _ X _ X _ _
CH1201 X _ X _ _ _ _ X _ X _ _
MH1201 X _ X _ _ _ _ X _ X _ _
ME1301 X X X X _ _ X X X X X _
WS1301 X _ X X _ _ X X X X _ _
EV1101 X _ _ _ X X X X X X _ _
EN1102 X _ X _ _ _ _ X X X _ _
PH1201 X _ X X _ _ _ X _ X _ _
MH1202 X _ X _ _ _ _ X _ X _ _
ME1302 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X X
IT1101 X _ X X _ _ _ X X X _ _
EE1303 X _ X X _ _ X X _ X _ _
EC1313 X X X X _ X _ X _ X X X
MH1203 X _ X _ _ _ _ X _ X _ _
ME1401 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X _
65
AM1307 X _ X X _ _ _ X _ X _ _
ME1402 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X X
ME1413 _ X X -- _ _ _ X _ X X X
ME1102 X _ X X _ _ X X X X X _
ME1403 _ X X X _ _ _ X _ X X _
ME1412 _ X X X _ X _ X X X X _
ME1405 _ X X X _ X X X X X X _
ME1404 _ X X X X X X _ X X X X
WS1401 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X X
CM1308 X _ X X _ _ _ X _ X _ _
ME1101 X _ _ _ X X X _ _ X _ X
WS1402 _ X X X _ _ _ X X X X X
ME1410 _ X X X _ _ _ X X X X _
ME1416 _ X X X X _ _ X X X X _
ME1504 _ X X _ _ X _ X _ X X _
ME1406 _ X X X _ _ X X _ X X _
ME1407 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X _
ME1418 _ X X X X X X X X X X X
ME1411 _ X X X _ _ X X X X X X
ME1501 _ X X _ X X _ _ X X _ _
66
ME1503 _ X X X _ _ _ X X X X X
ME1508 _ X X X X _ _ X X X X X
ME1509 _ X X X _ _ _ X X X X _
8.10.1 Identified Gaps in 2011 Curriculum

2011 curriculum mapping with Program Outcomes (POs) and Program Specific
Outcomes (PSOs) are carried out. It is found that, the content in 2011 curriculum related
to following POs are less related to other POs.
1. PO4: Engineering Tools
2. PO5: The Engineer and Society
3. PO6: Environment & Sustainability

4. PO7: Ethics
5. PO9: Communication
Therefore, to fulfill these gaps some common courses and program specific courses are
suggested in curriculum
Common Courses:
1. Rural Development
2. Finishing school
3. Industrial Training / Industrial practices
4. Free Electives (Total twelve courses)
Program related courses:
1. Computer Aided Drafting.
2. CNC Machines.
8.11 Courses Identification
Courses are formed based on identified skills in search conference, identified gaps
in 2011 curriculum, AICTE guidelines and institute policy framed by ILC. The following
table shows the identified skills and courses formed based on it.
67
Table 8.5. Courses Identification from Identified Skills
T1, T2,T3….. etc indicates Technical skill with serial number mentioned earlier
G1,GT2,G3….. etc indicates Generic skill with serial number mentioned earlier
Identified Skills Courses

G5- Communicate effectively orally and in writing. Express 1. English
views precisely, effectively and positively.
G4- Maintain values, positive attitude and interpersonal 2.Communication skills
relations.
G5- Communicate effectively orally and in writing. Express
views precisely, effectively and positively.
G6- Use soft skills acquired by the student during their course
of work.
T25- Apply concepts of Group Technology, Just in Time, 3.Industrial
Industrial Engineering Management
T55- Use industrial engineering concepts to improve
productivity and quality.(JIT, Reengineering, Value
engineering etc)
T56- Use entrepreneurship abilities to start any venture
successfully.
T58- Interpret factory acts and laws, relevant social laws.
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 4.Environmental
Science
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 5. Rural Development
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 3.Computer
Applications
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 7. Engineering Physics
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 8. Applied Chemistry
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 9. Engg. Mathematics
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 10Applied Mathematics
T1- Prepare engineering drawings using codes, norms and 11. Engg. Graphics
standards manually as well as through CAD software.
T2- Visualize three dimensional objects and draw isometric
projections
T3- Apply knowledge of projections of points and solve the
problems on projections of straight lines
T4- Sketch sectional and missing views
T48-Sketch proportional free hand sketches of machine
components.
68
T10- Prepare simple jobs correctly according to given 12. Workshop Practice
specification using various tools, measuring instruments
and machines for different operations in fitting, smithy,
carpentry, pipefitting and metal joining shop.
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 13. Engg. Mechanics
T27 - Use electrical and electronic elements/systems to actuate 14. Elements of El.
mechanical mechanism. Tech.
T27 - Use electrical and electronic elements/systems to actuate 15. Electronics &
mechanical mechanism Mechatronics
T78- Select proper engineering materials for specific 16.Mech.Engineering
application. Materials
T79- Choose different heat treatment processes.
T80 Identify different microstructures of steel and cast iron
T81- Prepare sample for microscopic examination.
T82- Conduct different metallurgical tests on ferrous and non
ferrous metals and alloys.
T28- Apply concept of thermodynamics to boilers, steam 17. Thermal Engg.
turbines, air compressors.
T30- Use power plant equipments (high pressure boilers,
Turbines-gas, steam, water, etc) related systems and
controls.
T47- Interpret construction and working of steam
generator/turbine.
T75- Illustrate different modes of heat transfer
T1- Prepare engineering drawings using codes, norms and 18. Engg. Drawing
T4- Sketch sectional and missing views
T5- Draw projections of lines, planes, solids and section of
solids.
T48-Sketch proportional free hand sketches of machine
components.
T87- Develop an understanding of the behaviour of material 19. Strength of
and components subjected to various types of loading Materials
T88- Analyse and design engineering problems subjects to
various forces.
T89 Analyse behaviour of material till fracture and analyse its
failure pattern
T1- Prepare engineering drawings using codes, norms and 20. Machine Drawing
T6- Draw and interpret projection of auxiliary views and
development of surfaces and intersection of solid as per
SP46
T7- Draw the details and assembly of machine components
69
T37- Identify and locate the links in Mechanism. 21. Theory of Machines
T38- Recognize various components of brakes , dynamometer
and power transmission devices.
T39- Operate centrifugal governor, belt drives and
mechanisms.
T43- Use antifriction bearings.
T49- Construct cam profile and velocity acceleration diagram.
T15- Use foundry materials and simple equipments to cast 22. Manufacturing
ferrous and non ferrous materials using material Processes
technology and strength of material.
T16- Use arc, gas and spot welding and cutting processes to
prepare simple jobs.
T17- Use TIG, MIG, SAW and other advance welding and
cutting processes to prepare simple jobs.
T18- Use hot and cold working equipments for rolling and
forging processes to produce parts using material
technology and strength of material.
T21- Use Nonconventional machine tools.
T22- Use heat treatment processes.
T23- Use surface coating and protection methods.
T45- Use cutting tools for machines and machine tools.
T25- Apply concepts of Group Technology, Just in Time, 23. Production
Industrial Engineering Technology
T46- Design and prepare jigs, fixtures, pattern, mould and
press tools for production purposes.
T50- Use cost reduction techniques.
T52- Prepare process plan for given part.
T53- Carry out work measurement and method study to
improve productivity.
T57- Plan, use and control resources optimally and
economically. (Man, Machine, Material, Method, Money,
Message-information)
T29- Apply concept of thermodynamics to IC engines, 24. I.C. Engine
refrigeration
T40- Observe and report writing of I.C. components through
visit.
T51- Calculate performance parameters in I.C. Engine / Air
compressor.
T60- Develop ability to dismantle and assemble I.C. Engine
T33- Apply principles of Fluid Machines and its 25. Fluid Power
recommendation for application
T34- Use hydraulic equipments comprising of hydraulic
elements (pumps, motors, valves, cylinders etc).
T61- Measure the performance of hydraulic machines.
70
T19- Use conventional machine tools. (lathe, Milling, Shaper, 26.Advance Mfg.
Drilling, Slotting, Planning, Capstans and Turrets, Processes
Automates, Grinding, Broaching, Jig boring, Gear
hobbing, Gear shaping, Special Purpose Machine
tools,etc.)
T20- Use presses and press tools.
T21- Use Nonconventional machine tools.
T45- Use cutting tools for machines and machine tools.
T41- Design and modify simple machine elements like 27. Machine Design
links/link mechanisms, fasteners, knuckle joint, cotter
joint, riveted joints, levers, etc.
T42- Design and modify simple machine elements like shafts,
springs, screw jack etc.
T44- Design and draw machine elements like gears, pulleys,
clutches, bearings etc.
T29- Apply concept of thermodynamics to IC engines, 28. Refrigeration &
refrigeration Airconditioning
T64- Appraise of modern trends in the field of refrigeration
and air conditioning
T65- Calculate COP of Refrigeration system
T66- Find fault and select remedy in refrigeration system.
T67- Interpret various components of CNC program 29. CNC Machines
T68- Develop and execute CNC program
T69- Operate CNC Machines
T1- Prepare engineering drawings using codes, norms and 30. Computer Aided
standards manually as well as through CAD software. Drafting
T5- Draw projections of lines, planes, solids and section of
solids.
T9- Modify and generate drawings and Print it
T24- Use software like AutoCAD, Pro/E etc to prepare and
analyze solid models.
T7- Draw the details and assembly of machine components 31. CAD/CAM
T8- Create solid modeling
T9- Modify and generate drawings and Print it
T24- Use software like AutoCAD, Pro/E etc to prepare and
analyze solid models.
T70- Appraise Computer Aided Manufacturing
T11- Measure surface finish and dimensional parameter of 32. Metrology &
component Quality Control
T12- Use destructive and nondestructive testing methods.
T13- Compare various concepts of Statistical Quality Control
T54-Select and use quality assurance (Quality control, SQC,
Acceptance sampling, TQM,TQC,ISO standards, etc)
techniques.
71
T11- Measure surface finish and dimensional parameter of 33. Mech. Measurement
component
T13- Compare various concepts of Statistical Quality Control
T14- Measure different parameters of process and error
estimation.
T59- Use innovative and creative approaches and skills for 34. Industrial Project
defining and improving/solving industry/institute/ real
life problems.
T83- Develop method of commencement of project work
T84- Use innovative, economic and technological viable
solution to the world of work.
G1- Identify the problem and apply innovative, creative and
logical approach for problem solving.
G2 Develop the lifelong learning attitude.
of work.
G7- Use soft skills acquired by the student during their
course of work.
G8- Work under constraints
G13-Develop and present own technical knowledge, self-
learning abilities, creativity, and team working abilities
G2 Develop the lifelong learning attitude. 35. Seminar
of work.
G7- Manage time for a given work
G11- Use the skills of giving and receiving Feedback for
improving performance
G13-Develop and present own technical knowledge, self-
learning abilities, creativity, and team working abilities
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 36. Industrial Practices/
Industrial Training
T32- Use energy conservation and Non conventional Energy 37. Elective1/1:
System. Renewable energy
T71- Select suitable energy sources sources
T72- Diagnose the faults in automation 38. Elective ½:
T73- Identify various automated process, machines and Industrial Automation
equipments
T74- Select suitable major control components for automation.
T31- Use various instruments to measure heat/air related 39. Elective2/1: Heat
parameters. Transfer
T75- Illustrate different modes of heat transfer
T76- Analyze the heat transfer rate
T77- Use various heat exchangers in industrial/domestic
72
application
T25- Apply concepts of Group Technology, Just in Time, 40. Elective2/2: CIM
Industrial Engineering
T26- Apply concept of concurrent engineering to develop
advance manufacturing systems (Like Flexible
manufacturing system, Computer Integrated
manufacturing, Robotics etc).
T34- Use hydraulic equipments comprising of hydraulic 41. Elective3/1:
elements (pumps, motors, valves, cylinders etc). Industrial Fluid Power
T35- Use pneumatic equipments comprising of pneumatic
elements (Compressor, motors, valves, cylinders, etc).
T36- Select elements and construct simple hydraulic and
pneumatic circuits.
T62- Select proper material handling system 42. Elective 3/2:
T63- Prepare maintenance schedule of material handling Material Handling
equipments
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 43. Finishing School
Common Course to fulfil Program Outcomes 44. Free Electives
8.12 Program Structure
The program structure of the Mechanical Engineering program is developed as

described in chapter 6 previously and is given below.
8.12.1 Program Structure Level I: General Studies
Table 8.6. Program Structure Level I: General Studies

Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
Sr. Course Prerequisite Total (Max. Marks)
Course Title Hrs./Week)*
No Code courses/credits Credits*
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
1 EN101E English Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50@ 25 175
2 EN102E Communication Skills Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50@ 25 175
Industrial
3 MN101E Min.50 credits 04 00 00 04 70 30 Nil Nil 100
Management
Environmental
4 EV101E Nil 01 01 00 02 70** 30 Nil Nil 100
Science
5 RD101E Rural Development Nil 00 00 02 01 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Total 11 01 06 15 280 120 150 75 625
Abbreviations:
TH – Theory ; PR- Practical; TU- Tutorial; TEE- Term End Examination; CA- Continuous Assessment
Credit Formula: 1 TH Hr. = 1 Credit; 1 TU Hr. = 1 Credit; 2 PR Hrs. = 1 Credit
Symbolic Representations:
** Online Examination,
@ Internal Practical Examination,
# External Practical Examination,
$ Award of class course,
73
74
8.12.2 Program Structure Level II: Basic Science Courses
Table 8.7. Program Structure Level II: Basic Science Courses
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
Course
( TH,TU,PR
Sr. Prerequisite Total (Max. Marks)
Code
No courses/credits Credits*
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
CA201E Computer Applications Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 075

1
PH201E Engineering Physics Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
2
CH201E Applied Chemistry Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
3
MH201E Engineering Mathematics Nil 04 01 00 05 70 30 Nil Nil 100
4
MH202E Applied Mathematics MH201E 04 01 00 05 70 30 Nil Nil 100
5
Total 16 02 08 22 280 120 150 75 625
75
8.12.3 Program Structure Level III: Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts Courses
Table 8.8. Program Structure Level III: Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts Courses
Level III: Engineering Sciences and Technical Arts Courses

Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
1 ME301E Engineering Graphics Nil 02 00 04 04 70 30 Nil 25 125
2 WS301E Workshop Practice Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil Nil 50 050
3 AM301E Engineering Mechanics Nil 03 01 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
Elements of Electrical
4 EE304E Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
Technology
5 EC303E Electronics & Mechatronics Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
Mechanical Engineering
6 MT303E Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
Materials
7 ME303E Thermal Engineering. Nil 04 00 00 04 70 30 Nil Nil 100
Total 21 01 16 30 420 180 200 175 975
76
8.12.4 Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses

Table 8.9. Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
a) Core Courses
1 ME401E Engineering Drawing ME301E 02 00 04 04 70 30 Nil 25 125
2 AM407E Strength of Material AM301E 03 01 02 05 70 30 50@ 25 175
3 ME402E Machine Drawing ME401E 03 00 04 05 70 30 Nil 25 125
$
4 ME403E Theory of Machines Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
$
5 WS401E Manufacturing Processes Nil 03 00 04 05 70 30 50# 25 175
6 ME404E Production Technology Nil 03 00 00 03 70** 30 Nil Nil 100
7 ME405E Internal Combustion Engine $ Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
8 ME406E Fluid Power $ Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
Advance Manufacturing
9 WS402E Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50@ 25 175
Processes
Machine Design $ AM407E &
10 ME407E 03 00 04 05 70 30 50# 25 175
ME402E
Refrigeration And
11 ME408E Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
Airconditioning $
12 ME409E CNC Machines $ WS401E 02 00 02 03 70 30 50# 25 175
13 ME410E Computer Aided Drafting ME301E 01 00 04 03 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
14 ME411E CAD/CAM Nil 02 00 04 04 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Sub Total (a) 37 01 38 57 840 360 550 325 2075
77
8.12.5 Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses (Project Courses)
Table 8.10. Program Structure Level IV: Professional Courses (Project Courses)

Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
b) Project Courses
$
15 ME412E Metrology and Quality Control Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50# 50 100
16 ME413E Mechanical Measurement NIL 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50# 50 100
$ #
17 ME414E Industrial Project 100 credits 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 100 50 150
Sub Total (b) 00 00 12 06 Nil Nil 200 150 350
c) Industrial Interaction courses
18 SE401E Seminar 60 credits 00 00 02 01 Nil Nil 50@ 50 100
Any one from following
ID401E Industrial Training 00 00 02 01 Nil Nil 50@ 50 100
19 70 credits @
ID402E Industrial Practices 00 00 02 01 Nil Nil 50 50 100
Sub Total (c) 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 100 100 200
Total (a) + (b) + (c) 37 01 54 65 840 360 850 575 2625
78
8.12.6 Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses
Table 8.11. Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses

Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
a) Professional Electives (one from each group)
Group 1
$
1 ME501E Renewable Energy Sources Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
$
1 ME502E Industrial Automation Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
Group 2
2 ME503E Heat Transfer $ Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
Computer Integrated
2 ME504E Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
Manufacturing $
Group 3
3 ME505E Industrial Fluid Power $ Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
$
3 ME506E Material Handling Nil 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
Sub Total (a) 12 00 06 15 210 90 150 75 525
b) Free Elective – Non-Technical
1 FS501E Finishing School Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
79
8.12.7 Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses
Table 8.12. Program Structure Level V: Elective Courses

Teaching Scheme Examination Scheme
Sr. Course Prerequisite ( TH,TU,PR Hrs./Week)* Total (Max. Marks)
Course Title
No Code courses/credits Credits* Theory Practical Total
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
c) Free Electives Technical (Any one) % Not offered for Program ME
1 FE501E Basic Building Drawings Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
@
FE502E RAC Maintenance % Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
@
2 FE503E Electrical Maintenance Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
@
3 FE504E Hobby Electronics Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
4 FE505E Basic Packaging Technology Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Industrial Metallurgical
5 FE506E Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Practices
6 FE507E Computer Network Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
@
7 FE508E PC Architecture & Maintenance Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
@
8 FE509E Fabric Selection and Care Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
Two and Four Wheeler
9 FE510E Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Technology
Energy Conservation and 75
10 FE511E Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25
Management
11 FE512E Learning Ability Development Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50@ 25 75
Sub Total 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 25 75
Total (a) + (b) + (c) 12 00 14 19 210 90 250 125 675
80
8.12.8 Program Structure Abstract
Table 8.13. Program Structure Abstract
Abstract
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
( TH,TU,PR
Sr. Course Title No of Total (Max. Marks)
Level Hrs./Week)*
No Prerequisite courses/credits Courses Credits*
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
1 I General Studies 5 11 01 06 15 280 120 150 75 625
2 II Basic Science Courses 5 16 02 08 22 280 120 150 75 625
Engineering Sciences and
3 III 7 21 01 16 30 420 180 200 175 975
Technical Arts Courses
4 IV Professional Courses 19 37 01 54 65 840 360 850 575 2625
5 V Elective Courses 5 12 00 14 19 210 090 250 125 675
Total 41 97 05 98 151 2030 870 1600 1025 5525
Above program structure approved in PBOS meeting held on 30th march, 2016 for implementation from Academic session
2016-17.
81
8.13 Award of Class Courses
Table 8.14. Award of Class Courses

Teaching
Scheme Examination Scheme
Sr. Course Prerequisite ( TH,TU,PR Total (Max. Marks)
Course Title
No Code courses/credits Hrs./Week)* Credits*
TH TU PR
TEE CA TEE CA Marks
1 ME403E Theory of Machines $ Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
$
2 WS401E Manufacturing Processes Nil 03 00 04 05 70 30 50# 25 175
$
3 ME405E Internal Combustion Engine Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
$
4 ME406E Fluid Power Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
$
Machine Design AM407E,
5 ME407E 03 00 04 05 70 30 50# 25 175
ME402E
$
6 ME408E Refrigeration And Airconditioning Nil 03 00 02 04 70 30 50# 25 175
$
7 ME409E CNC Machines WS401E 02 00 02 03 70 30 50# 25 175
8 ME412E Metrology and Quality Control $ Nil 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 50 #
50 100
$
ME501E Renewable Energy Sources Nil
9 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
ME502E Industrial Automation $ Nil
ME503E Heat Transfer $ Nil
10 Computer Integrated 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
ME504E Nil
Manufacturing $
ME505E Industrial Fluid Power $ Nil
11 04 00 02 05 70 30 50# 25 175
ME506E Material Handling $ Nil
12 ME414E Industrial Project $ 100 credits 00 00 04 02 Nil Nil 100# 50 150
Total 32 00 32 48 700 300 650 350 2000
8.14 Curriculum at a Glance
Table 8.15. Curriculum at a Glance
SN CRITERION RESPONSE
1 Total No. of Courses in a Program 55
2 Total courses required 41
3 No. of courses having Theory papers 29
4 No. of courses having non Theory exam. 12
5 No. of General Studies Courses 5
6 No. of Basic Science Courses 5
7 No. of Engineering Science Courses 7
8 No. of Professional Core Courses 14
9 No. of Professional Elective Courses 3/6
10 No. of Professional Free Elective Courses 2/12
11 No. of Project Courses 3
12 No. of Seminar Courses 2/3

Total Credits
13 151
(1 Th Hr = 1Credit & 2 Pr Hr = 1Credit)
14 Total Marks 5525
51:49
15 Proportion of Hours (Periods), Th : Pr
(approx.)
67:33
16 Proportion of Credits, Th : Pr
(approx.)
52:48
17 Proportion of Marks; Th : Pr
(approx.)
18 Total courses for Award of Class 12
19 Total theory paper courses for Award of Class 10
20 Total marks for Award of Class 2000
82
8.15 Course Flow Diagram
Figure 8.1. Course Flow Diagram
83
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, NAGPUR.
(An Autonomous Institute of Govt. of Maharashtra)
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE,ME,EE,EC,PK,MT,IT,AE,CM,TX,TR

LEVEL NAME : GENERAL STUDIES
COURSE CODE : EN101E
COURSE TITLE : ENGLISH
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 03TU: 00; PR: 02(CLOCK HRs.)
TOTAL CREDITS : 04(1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
The basic structure of English through Grammar enhances Holistic development as an individual
as well as their role in the world. While teaching this course, complete emphasis will be laid on
enhancing expression of ideas in English by the students. Excellence in this language enables a
technician to develop his professional career as well as a strong standing in society.
 COURSE OUTCOMES:
After completing this course students will be able to–
1. Construct grammatically correct sentences.
2. Express ideas effectively in oral and written form.
3. Enhance comprehending abilities.
4. Develop interest in and appreciate literature.
5. Use social skills and be conversant.
6. Speak sentences with correct intonations.
1
EN101E English 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Domain)
1. 1. Identify grammatical 1.1 Articles :Appropriate use of definite
12
Application of rules to form correct and indefinite articles
Grammar sentences. 1.2 Prepositions: To use correct
2. Use correct sentence prepositions as per context.
pattern in writing and 1.3 Phrases: Combining words to form
speaking. various phrases.
3. Enrich vocabulary. 1.4 Tenses: Appropriate uses of tenses in
4. State and identify given situations.
various tenses to be 1.5 Voice: use of active and passive
used in a situation. voice.
1.6 Narration: Conversion of direct and
indirect speech.
1. Present oral summary 2.1 Text:
2.Text 16
of topics read or heard. Learning to read fluently and to develop
. 2. Adjust speed of insight through prose and poetry.
reading. Selected prose and poetry prescribed
3. Follow oral in the text.
instructions and 2.2 Prose:
interpret them to 1. Positive Thinking- By Stephen
others 2. Vision 2020- Dr. A.P.J. Abdul
4. Present summary of Kalam.
topics read and heard. 3.What India Wants:
A.Our muddled Generation-
DineshKumar.
B. Employers want Employees not
Exam results –Manish Sabharwal.
4. The Last Cab Ride- Kent Newburn
2.3 Poem:
1.Kalahandi-Jaganath Prasad Das
2.Money Madness-D.H. Lawrence
3. Where the mind is without fear-
Rabindranath Tagore.
4. Voice of the unwanted Girl-Sujata
Bhatt.
1. Take down lecture 3.1 Success stories:(selected Two success
3. 06
notes while listening. stories from text)
Success 2. Write single or 1.”It happed in India” Kishor Biyani
stories multiple sentences. 2. Aditya Kumar Birla.
3. Comprehend main 3.2 Comprehension: (Selected two
And Seen
ideas and reproduce passages from the text)
passages for
Comprehensio them.
n. 4. 4. Ask pertinent
question as well as to
answer them.
2
EN101E English 2016
1. Use word formation 4.1 Synonyms and Antonyms

4.
devices. 4.2 One word substitution.
Vocabulary 2. Use new words in 4.3 Using words and expressions
Building sentences. appropriate to audience.(peers,
3. Read/write new words superiors, subordinates and others) 04
from various media.
4. Enrich vocabulary
through reading.
1. Use correct Sample situations for conversational
5. 04
pronunciations practice.
Conversationa 2. Pronounce the words 5.1 Introducing yourself and others.
l Practice. correctly. 5.2 Meeting and parting.
3. Speak sentences with 5.3 Requests
correct intentions. 5.4 Inquiries and information.
4. Use correct 5.5 Asking, Giving and Refusing
accent/stress for the Permission.
words. 5.6 Apologizing.
1. Expand ideas into
6 Writing 6.1 Paragraph writing: Elaborate and 06
Technique paragraphs
expand ideas.
2. Prepare speeches as
s. 6.2 Speech writing: Welcome speech,
per situations Farewell speech, Introducing the
3. Connect multiple guests and vote of thanks.
sentences.
Total Hrs. 48
B. LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ASSIGNMENTS:

al’s Domain)
1. Tense Busters -All levels(To be performed in Application of 04
language lab) Grammar)
2. Reading and making notes Prose 02
3. Summarizing poems Poetry 02
4. Reading and making notes Short stories 02
5 Reading and making notes Prose 02
6 Comprehending passage Comprehension 02
passage
7 Issues in English(to be performed in language lab) Vocabulary 06
building
8 Formal conversations-Telephonic ,Video Conversation 02
conferencing practice
9 Introducing –self and others Conversation 02
practice
10 Observation of oratory speeches of renowned Conversation 02
speakers practice
11 Preparing speech and presenting Writing techniques 02
12 Writing a paragraph on given topic Writing techniques 02
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs. 32
3
EN101E English 2016
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER:

No.
R U A
Application of
01 06(04) 06(04) 00(00) 16(12)
Grammar
02 Text 04(04) 16(04) 06(00) 26(08)
03 Short stories 04(04) 08(04) 00(00) 08(04)
04 Vocabulary Building 04(00) 04(04) 00(00) 08(04)
Conversational
05 00(00) 00(00) 06(06) 06(06)
Practice
06 Writing Techniques 00(00) 00(00) 06(06) 06(06)
Total 18(12) 34(16) 18 (12) 70 (40)
R – Remember U – Understand A – Analyze / Application
 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER:

option
1 U 2 1 U 2 1 U 2 1 U 2 1 U 2 1 U 2 5/7
01
1 R 2
02 2 U 4 2 R 4 2 R 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 3 U 4 2 R 4 2 R 4 3 U 4 3/5
04 4 R 4 4 A 4 1 R 4 1 R 4 1 U 4 3/5
05 5 A 6 5 A 6 5 U 6 2/3
06 6 A 6 6 A 6 6 U 6 2/3
4
EN101E English 2016
 ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION SCHEME:

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
Progressive (average of
Assessment) 20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
(Continuous
Test (PT) two tests will
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Assignments Continuous 10 -- Book / 1, 2, 3
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &

Assessment Continuous 20 -- Assessment 4,5,6

Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Writing Continuous 05 -- Journal 4,5,6
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE
End Exam End Of the Practical

Students 50 20 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
Progressive Student Feedback Form
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
End Of Course Questionnaires
Course
5
EN101E English 2016
 SCHEME OF PRACTICAL EVALUATION:
1 Performance 05
2 Overall presentation of given assignment 05
3 Viva voce 10
4 Activity 05
TOTAL 25
 MAPPING COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAM OUTCOMES:

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
3 - 3 - - - - - 3 3 - -
1
3 - 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
2
- - 3 - - - - - 3 3 - -
3
- - 3 - - - - - - - - -
4
- - 3 - - - 1 1 3 3 - -
5
3 - 3 - - - - 1 3 3 - -
6
 REFERENCE & TEXT BOOKS:

Year Of publication
Positive Thinking Stephen, Inspirational Stories ,June -
1
2011
Vision 2020 Dr.A.P.J. Abdul Kalamm ‘Prism’, 1403928282
2
Macmillan Publication.
What India Inc- Dinesh Kumar, Manish Sabharwal, 9788125059523
3
Golden Harvest,
The Last Cab Ride ‘Life’,by Stephen -
4
Kalahandi Jaganath Prasad Das, Reflection on 9788125041764
5
vital issues’, by P.J.George
Money Madness D.H.Lawrence by P.J.George 9788125041764
6
Orient Blackswan 2010
Where the mind is without Rabindranath Tagore Prism, Macmillan 1403928282
7
fear Publication
6
EN101E English 2016
Voice of the unwanted girl Sujata Bhatt 1403928282

8
Prism, Macmillan Publication
High School English Wren and Martin Revised by 81-219-0009-3
9 Grammar and Composition Dr.N.D.V. Prasada Rao,
S.Chand Publication.
Business communication Urmila Rao 81-8318-438-3
10
Himalaya Publication, 2011
Contemporary English David Green 033392183-6
11 Grammar-structure and Revised Edition,2004
composition Himalaya Publication
Interactive English S.K.Gangal, Revised Edition 1997 81-7023-678-9
12
Allied Publishers
Applied English Grammar and Dr. P.C. Das, 2013, New Central Book 978-81-7381-542-
13
composition. Agency. 3
English for Practical Purposes Z. N. Patil, B.S. Valke 033935098
14
 E-REFERENCES:
www.talkenglish.com-grammar , assessed on 12th March, 2016
www.edufind.com-englishgrammar ,assessed on 12 th March, 2016
www.perfect-english-grammar.com, assessed on 12 th March, 2016
www.yosuccess.com, assessed on 13th March, 2016
 LIST OF EXPERTS & TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS

CURRICULUM:

Dr. Sadiya Raza Lecturer in English & Government Polytechnic,
1.
Coordinator Nagpur.
2. Dr. Nutan Chotai Expert, Head of Dept. LAD College, Nagpur.
3. Mrs. K.N. Deshmukh Expert, Head of Humanities SDMP, Nagpur.
4. Dr. Shilpa Sarode Expert, Asst. Professor LAD, Nagpur
Mrs. M.M. Machale Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
5.
Nagpur.
Ms. Humeera Quraishi Visiting Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
6
Nagpur.
Ms. Marlyn Fernandes Visiting Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
7.
Nagpur.
Ms. Nazish Ahmed Visiting Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
8.
Nagpur.
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA INCE,ME,EE,EC,PK,MT,IT,AE,CM,TX,TR

COURSE CODE : EN102E
COURSE TITLE : COMMUNICATION SKILLS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 03 TU: 00; PR: 02(CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE EXAM. : 03 HRs
PR. TEE EXAM : 02 HRs (Internal)
PT. EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
In this present competitive scenario, proficiency in communication skills is one of the basic
needs of technical students. A diploma holder is therefore expected to meet the challenges of
communicating with his peers, superiors, subordinates and clients. Communication skills will
help him towards achievement of perfection.
1. Apply concepts of communication in the given situation.
2. Modify language skills.
3. Execute requisite qualities as per industry requirements.
4. Compose official documentation.
5. Participate in and conduct group discussions and meetings effectively
6. Use correct pronunciations and intonations.
1
EN102E Communication Skills 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Domain)
1. 1. Identify modern 1.1 Definition, Process, Types: Verbal- 14
Communication concept of Non Verbal, Formal-Informal,
communication. Upward-Downward, Horizontal.
2. Breaks down 1.2 Barriers of communication: Physical,
barriers to Mechanical, Psychological,
communicate Language, Status .Ways to overcome
effectively. barriers.
3. Modify appropriate 1.3 Selection of proper channels of
body language. communication.
4. Derive confidence 1.4 Non-verbal communication in detail:
while conversing. Body language, Eye contact, Dress
and appearance, color, sound,
Gestures, Postures, Pictorial
representations.(Maps, Charts
,Graphs)
1. Identify their 2.1 Listening and reading skills-
2. 08
receptive skills to Importance of listening skills, levels
Inculcation of strengthen their of listening, Types of reading,
various generic productive skills. Phonetics, IPA
skills. 2. Derive listening 2.2Speaking and writing – Importance of
abilities. Pronunciation, Importance of
3. Use detailed write- Debate.
ups
4. Participate in
conversations.
1. Identify strengths 3.1 Aims of self-development, self-
3. 10
and weakness. awareness with respect to strength
Areas of self- 2. Classify different and weakness, How to overcome
Development. types of motivation weakness for acquiring self-
in one’s life. confidence.
3. Plan presentations 3.2 Motivation –Introduction, Definition,
properly. Types with example.
4. Modify leadership 3.3 Presentation skills – Parameters,
qualities. Appearance, use of body language,
Eye contact, content preparation,
Depiction of interest of audience.
3.4 Time management- Importance,
Process of time planning.
3.5 Team Building and Leadership
qualities.
1. Plan group 4.1 Interview Techniques: Preparation,
4. 06
discussion. Behavior during interview, post
Development of 2. Relate behavior interview.
during and post 4.2 Group discussion: Being the first
2
soft skills. interview. member, how to make a general

3. State and justify discussion, to give a concrete shape to
one’s abilities. discussion, purpose.
5. 1. Identify various 10
types of letters. 5.1Letters: Job application and Resume
Business 2. List down one’s writing Leave letter, Sales letter,
correspondence Enquiry letter, order letter, complaint
qualities by writing
letter.
resume.
5.2 Report writing: Progress, Accident,
3. Use various reports Trouble, Feasibility.
to express ideas 5.3 Notices, circular, Memorandum-mail
effectively in messages.
English
Total Hrs. 48

al’s Domain)
1. Master the skill of face -to -face communication 02
2. Sharpen one’s body language while communicating
02
with the help of Extempore/Impromptu. Communication
3. Demonstrate through role-play skills of a good
04
communicator like RJ, News reader, commentator.
4. Master the art of reading, writing, listening skill(to
06
be performed in Language lab using software) Inculcation of
5 Execute the art of Debate various Generic 02
6 Transcribe the given words phonetically skills
02
7 Master the skill of oral presentation by presenting a
Areas of self- 02
topic through PowerPoint presentation.
development.
8 Demonstrate leadership qualities 02
9 Manipulate Group Discussion by active
Development of 02
participation
soft skills
10 Build interview techniques through Mock Interview 02
11 Implement the art of writing E-mails and reports
02
Business
12. Implement the art of writing Formal drafting’s by correspondence
02
preparing resume, letters.
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs. 32
3

No.
R U A
01 Communication 06(06) 04(04) 06(04) 16(14)

Inculcation of various
02 Generic skills among 02(00) 08(10) 00(06) 10(16)
future engineers
Areas of self
03 06(00) 06(06) 06(00) 18(06)
Development
Development of soft
04 02(04) 08(00) 00(00) 10(04)
skills
Business
05 00(00) 08(04) 08(00) 16(00)
Correspondence
Total 20(08) 30(20) 20 (12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 A 2 3 U 2
01 5/7
1 R 2
02 1 R 4 1 R 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
03 3 R 4 4 R 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 1 U 4 5 U 4 4 U 4 1 A 4 4 U 4 3/5
05 2 A 6 3 A 6 3 U 6 2/3
06 1 A 6 5 A 6 2 U 6 2/3
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

1 Performance 05
2 Overall presentation of given assignment 05

3 Viva voce 10
4 Activity 05
TOTAL 25

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
2 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
1
- - 3 - - - - - 3 - - -
2
- - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
3
2 - 3 - - - - 3 3 - -
4
- - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
5
- - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
6

Year Of publication
Professional Communication S.R.Pravin, S.Chand Publications 81-219-2092-02
1.
skills
Developing Communication Macmillan Publications,Revised 0333929195
2.
skills Edition,2011
Business communication and G.S.R.K , Himalaya Publication, First 978-81-8488-596-
3.
Soft skills. Edition, 2009 5
Secret of face to face Peter Urs, Bendar, Macmillan 0333937139
4.
communication. Publication
Technical communication Meenakshi Raman, Prakash Singh, 0-19-567695-5
5.
principles and practices Oxford University Press,
Effective English Krishna Mohan, Raman Tata McGraw 13978-0-19-
6
Communication Hills, 566804-9
Modern Commercial R.S.Pillai, Bhagwati, S.Chand& Co. 812190519-2
7
Correspondence
6
 E-REFERENCES:
www.mindtools.com.au, assessed on 12th March, 2016
www.interviewbest.com, assessed on 12th March, 2016
www.skillsyouneed.com-presentationskills, assessed on 12th March, 2016

CURRICULUM:
Dr. Sadiya Raza Lecturer in Government Polytechnic,
1.
English&Coordinator Nagpur.
2. Dr. Nutan Chotai Expert, Head of Dept. LAD College, Nagpur.
3. Mrs. K.N. Deshmukh Expert, Head of Humanities SDMP, Nagpur.
4. Dr. Shilpa Sarode Expert, Asst.Professor LAD, Nagpur
Mrs. M.M. Machale Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
5.
Nagpur.
Ms. Humeera Quraishi Visiting Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
6
Nagpur.
Ms. Marlyn Fernandes Visiting Lecturer in English . Government Polytechnic,
7.
Nagpur.
Ms. Nazish Ahmed Visiting Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
8.
Nagpur.
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/MT/PK/TX
COURSE CODE : MN101E
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
PREREQUISITE : 50 Credits
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 04; TU: 00; PR: 00
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Managing personnel and scarce resources in any organization is one of the primary &
most challenging functions in industries. Scientific Management studies have evolved
techniques for the same. The success of an enterprise depends upon how effectively the
manpower is organized to work. The students of engineering who will be joining as
technicians in the industrial organization are expected to have preliminary information about
these said procedures
1. Illustrate various forms of organization and its necessity and different aspects of
entrepreneurship.
2. Analyze different sources of finance for industry to fulfill capital needs.
3. Interpret principles of human resource management, safety engineering and
supervisory management along with various industrial acts
4. Illustrate various functions of marketing management and inventory control.
5. Calculate various cost of production, selling price of a product and its depreciation.
6. Analyze concept of TQM and modern techniques of quality control.
1
MN101E Industrial Management 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs.

(Cognitive Domain)
1.Introduction 1. Define Management, 1.1 Definitions: Management,
12
to Organization, Organization, Administration and
Management Administration and Entrepreneurship. Forms of ownership:
& Entrepreneurship. Proprietorship, Partnership, Joint stock
Entrepreneurs 2. Compare Management, co.
hip Organization, 1.2 Co-operative sector, Public sector,
Administration. Government Undertaking, Advantages,
3. Interpret appropriate type of limitations& Application of each type,
ownership. comparison between different forms
4. Carry out different methods 1.3 Types of Organization: Line,
of selection of organization. Functional, line & staff organization,
5. Define Function of Advantages, limitations &Applications
Management. of each type, comparison between
6. Describe Entrepreneurial different types.
qualities/traits. 1.4 Functions of Management: -
7. Acquire industrial work Forecasting, Planning, Organizing
culture Directing, Motivating, Controlling,
8. Describe successful Coordinating, Decision-making,
entrepreneurs 1.5 Principles of management, Levels of
9. Select Government management - Function of each level.
subsidies 1.6 Entrepreneurship: Concept, Types of
Entrepreneur, Characteristics of
Entrepreneur, Women
entrepreneurship, problem faced by
women entrepreneur.
1.7 Case studies on successful
entrepreneurs
1.8 Government subsidies for entrepreneur:
Expert lecture on it.
( No questions should be asked on the
subtopic 1.7 & 1.8)
2.Financial 1. State the need and 2.1 Need of Finance and Sources of 10
Management sources of finance. finance for enterprises -Short term,
2. Define and differentiate Medium term and long term
Shares and debentures. sources.
3. Construct Break Even 2.2 Shares, debentures, types of shares
point in an Industry. and Comparison between shares &
4. Analyse Break even point debentures
5. Calculate E.O.Q. 2.3 Break Even Analysis- Importance of
6. Compare types of capital. Breakeven point, E.O.Q.
(numerical on EOQ)
7. Acquire basics &
2.4 Types of capital: fixed and working
financial Management
capital
techniques.
2
Units Specific Learning Topics and subtopics Hrs.

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
3. Human 3.1 Concept, aim , & objectives of 10
1. State Concept, aim,&
Resource HRM.
Management objectives of HRM.
3.2 Functions of HRM: planning,
Describe Functions of organizing, staffing, recruitment,
HRM. education & training- need, methods
2. Interpret the need of of training, , Motivation, controlling,
welfare & safety, compensation, integration and
Industrial Hygiene. maintenance. Labour welfare ,
Industrial relations
3. Define functions of 3.3 Safety engineering: need,
Supervisors. organization, committee, programme,
4. Identify&/choose instructions & training. Accidents:
proper style of causes & prevention.
supervision. 3.4 Characteristics of supervisors,
functions of supervisors and styles of
5. Describe industrial act supervision& its advantages and
limitations.
3.5 Industrial act: Need, Factory act
1948, ESI act, Workmen
compensation act only
4. Marketing 1. Describe the activities 4.1 Definition of Market, Functions of 12
and of Marketing Marketing Department
inventory Management. 4.2 Marketing strategies, Marketing
management 2. State inventory environment, Consumer behavior,
management technique. Market research, Market survey,
3. Use marketing marketing mix.
strategies. 4.3 Sales forecasting, Sales promotion,
4. Select sales promotion advertising, media selection.
and media 4.4 Definition of inventory &inventory
control.
4.5 Types of inventory items in
industries, ABC and VED analysis
only
1. Define & calculate 5.1 Product cost determination, Direct 10
5. Estimation
various cost and Cost and Indirect Cost, Material
and Costing Cost And Labour Cost, Expenses-
expenses involving in
Product manufacturing. Factory and Overheads.
2. Calculate the selling 5.2 Determination of Selling Price of
price of product. product- Profit and Loss Statement,
3. Describe balance sheet. Balance sheet description.
4. Define& compare 5.3 Depreciation &, Obsolescence-
depreciation and Concept and Comparison.
5.4 Methods of Calculating depreciation-
obsolescence.
straight line, reducing balance,
5. Describe& Calculating
annuity, sinking fund & sum of the
depreciation. digit methods. ( Simple Numericals
on subtopic 5.1, 5.2 & 5.4 )
3

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. Define terms related to 6.1 Concept and definition of Quality,
6. Total 10
TQM Quality Control, Quality
Quality 2. Describe various quality Conformance and Quality Assurance.
Management control techniques. 6.2 TQM- Concept and Objectives,
3. Interpret importance of Process
quality circle and ISO 6.3 Quality control techniques: Lean
9000 Manufacturing -JIT,5”S”, Six sigma,
4. Compare ISO9000 and Kaizen, BPR
TQM 6.4 Quality Circle and ISO 9000, ISO
14000, ISO 9001: 2015, ISO 14001:
2015, Difference between ISO9000
and TQM,
Total Hrs. 64

Practicals Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Units Hrs.
Domain)
Nil
4

No.
R U A
01. Management 04(04) 10(04) 00(00) 14(08)

02. Financial Management 04(00) 04(06) 04(00) 12(06)
Human Resource 02(00) 04(06) 06(00)
03. 12(06)
Management
Marketing And
04. Inventory 04(04) 06(00) 00(04) 10(08)
Management
Estimation And
05. 06(04) 04(02) 02(00) 12(06)
Costing
Total Quality
06. 04(04) 06(00) 00(02) 10(06)
Management
Total 24(16) 34(18) 12 (06) 70(40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 1 A 2
01 5/7
1 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 A 4 2 U 4 1 A 4 4 A 4 3/5
03 4 R 4 3 U 4 5 R 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 5 A 4 5 U 4 6 R 4 6 U 4 6 A 4 3/5
05 3 A 6 4 U 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 1 U 6 6 U 6 3 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
Assessment) 20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Assignments Continuous 10 -- Book / 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
End Exam Students 70 28 Answer 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill
Assessment Continuous -- -- -- --
Students
CA
Journal
Writing Continuous -- -- -- --
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Students -- -- -- --
Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

Nil

For Mechanical Engineering Program:
Outcomes (Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
2 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 3 _ _ _ 3 2 3 _ _ 3 3 _
4 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 _
5 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 2
6 3 _ _ _ 3 2 3 _ _ 3 3 2
For Other than Mechanical Engineering Program:

Outcomes (Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
2 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
3 3 _ _ _ 3 2 3 _ _ 3 _ _
4 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _ 3 _ _
5 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _ 3 _ _
6 3 _ _ _ 3 2 3 _ _ 3 _ _
7
 REFERENCE & TEXT BOO1KS:

Year Of publication
1. Industrial Engineering & T.R.Banga & S.C.Sharma, 10: 81-7409-078-9
Management Khanna Publishers, Edition-25, 13:978-81-7409-078-9
20142
2. Industrial Engineering O.P. Khanna, Dhanpat Rai, New 81-885-9777-5
And Management Delhi, 1980
3. Industrial organization Lawrence L Bethel & James L 09-322-3849-1
and management Riggs, New York, McGraw-Hill
[1971], 6th , 1979
4. Industrial Management I.K.Chopde & A.M.Sheikh, 81-219-1480-9
S.Chand & Co. Ltd, Delhi, 2 nd,
1999
5. Industrial engineering: Tara Chand, Publisher: Nem B0007BSSB0
Organization and Chand, 5th, 1982
management
6. Engineering Economics Tara Chand, Publisher: Nem 81-85240-82-5
Chand, 14th, 2014
7. Entrepreneurial S.S.Khanka, S.Chand & Co. Ltd, 81-219-1801-4
Development Delhi, 1 st , 1999, reprint 2006
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://www.free-management-ebooks.com/index.htm , assessed on 22th March 2016 .
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oQ1OTaJ9Sfc&list=PLB628C837430CB736&in
dex=3 assessed on 23th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2PkrT1ko3Yk&list=PLB628C837430CB736&in
dex=10 assessed on 24th March 2016
 http://www.slideworld.com/pptslides.aspx/industrial-management assessed on 24th
March 2016
 http://www.powershow.com/view/e4cd2mMwY/Industrial_Organization_I_powerpoi
nt_ppt_presentation assessed on 25th March 2016
 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS/INSTRUMENTS WITH SPECIFICATION
Nil
8

CURRICULUM:
1. Mr. V.S Ikhar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mrs. R A Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Mr. G. H. Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
4. Er. A.M.Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur
5. Shri. G.F.Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur
6. Dr.S.S.Baraskar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/PK/MT/TX/TR

COURSE CODE : EV101E
COURSE TITLE : ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 01; TU: 01; PR: 00 (CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE : 01 Hr. (Objective Type Online Examination)
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. : 15 MINUTES (Objective Type offline Examination)
 RATIONALE:
The world today is facing the biggest challenge of survival. Degradation of ecosystem,
depletion of natural resources, increasing levels of pollution, poses major threat to the
survival of mankind. The need of the hour, therefore, is to concentrate on the area of
environmental science, which shall provide an insight into various environment related
issues.
Environmental science is an interdisciplinary academic field that integrates physical and
biological sciences, with the study of the environment. It provides an integrated, quantitative,
and interdisciplinary approach to the study of environmental systems & gives an insight into
solutions of Environmental problems
1. Define the terms related to Environmental Studies.
2. Identify natural resources and resolve problems associated with them.
3. Identify alternate energy resources and use them efficiently during their engineering
practices.
4. Develop habits which will cause less harm to environment
5. Analyze key issues about environment and create public awareness about those
environmental issues.
6. Follow environmental ethics as lifelong learning.
1
EV101E Environmental Science 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs

(Cognitive Domain) .
1. Earth 1. Name the historical events 1.1 Earth Science: Concepts of
02
Systems and of earthquakes, volcanoes, Geologic time scale;
Resources Tsunami, cyclone & earthquakes, volcanoes ,
landslides in the world. Tsunami , cyclone & landslides
2. Identify problems 1.2 The Atmosphere: Weather and
associated with soil, water climate; the Coriolis Effect
3. Define weather and climate. 1.3 Global Water Resources and
4. Analyze the global water Use: Present scenario, surface
problems. and groundwater issues; global
problems; and its conservation.
1.4 Soil : soil erosion and other
soil problems; methods of soil
conservation
1. Define Biodiversity 2.1 Definition of Biodiversity
2.Concept of 02
Biodiversity 2. List Levels of biodiversity 2.2 Levels of biodiversity
3. Define and list the 2.3 Value of biodiversity
biodiversity hotspots 2.4 Threats to biodiversity, loss of
4. List the endangered species biodiversity (biodiversity
5. Prepare a report on value hotspots)
of Biodiversity 2.5 Conservation of biodiversity
6. Suggest methods /steps for (modern methods of
Biodiversity conservation biodiversity conservation)
1. Match the energy forms 3.1 Energy Consumption history
3. Energy 03
Resources and projects 3.2 Present global energy use,
2. List various forms of Future energy needs
Consumption
energy 3.3 Energy forms:( conventional
3. State advantages and and non conventional )
disadvantages of forms of 3.4 Energy Conservation
energy 3.5 Renewable Energy: Solar
4. Select appropriate solutions energy; solar electricity;
of Efficient Use energy biomass; wind energy; ocean
5. Utilize techniques for waves and tidal energy;
energy consumption to geothermal
reduce impact on
environment.
1. Define pollution and 4.1 Definition of pollution.
4. Pollution 04
pollutants 4.2 Air pollution: Definition,
2. List the types of pollutants. Classification, sources, effects,
3. Identify the Pollutants and Prevention and ambient air
their sources quality standards.
4. Develop habits to reduce 4.3 Water Pollution: Definition,
pollution Classification, sources effects,
5. State the standard / Prevention And WHO and
limiting/ controlling values BIS water quality standards.
2
of various types of 4.4 Soil Pollution/land pollution:

pollution. Definition, sources, effects,
prevention
4.5 Noise Pollution: Definition,
sources, effects, prevention.
4.6 Biomedical Waste and E-Waste
-- Origin, Effects and control
Measures.
4.7 CPCB and MPCB norms and
roles and responsibilities.
5 Social Issues 1. Define sustainable 5.1 Concept of development,
03
development sustainable development
and
Environment 2. Evaluate sources of Green 5.2 Watershed management , rain
house effect, acid rains, water harvesting
Global warming 5.3 Global Warming, greenhouse
3. List the incidences of effect; ozone depletion,
Nuclear Accidents, relevant laws and treaties
5.4 Nuclear Accidents and
Holocaust: Basic concepts and
their effect on climate, ,
relevant laws and treaties
1. Differentiate between 6.1 Formal and non-formal
6. 03
formal and non formal education
Environmental
Education education 6.2 Role of Govt. and Non-Govt.
2. List the various acts and Organization
their provisions 6.3 Indian constitutional provisions
3. Develop awareness about regarding the environment.
environment. Brief description of the
following acts and their
provisions: Environmental
Protection Act and Prevention
of Water, air and noise
Pollution Act.
6.4.Concept EIA and
environmental Ethics
Total Hrs. 16

Practicals Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
1 Prepare report on Loss of biodiversity, its conservation and Concept Of 4
also describe biodiversity hotspots. Biodiversity
2 Prepare report on use of various renewable energy Energy Resources 4
sources. And
Consumption
3 Group discussion and Assignment on article collection Pollution 4
from news papers, magazines and internet on local
environmental pollution.
4 Prepare report on case study of Industrial/Nuclear/any Social Issues And 4
other Disaster in India. Environment
3

No.
R U A
Earth Systems And

01 02(00) 04(00) 02(00) 08(00)
Resources
Concept Of
02 04(00) 08(00) 02(00) 14(00)
Biodiversity
Energy Resources And
03 04(00) 08(00) 04(06) 16(00)
Consumption
04 Pollution 04(00) 10(04) 06(00) 20(04)
Social Issues And
05 02(00) 04(00) 00(00) 16(12)
Environment
Environmental
06 02(00) 02(00) 02(00) 06(00)
Education
Total 18(00) 36(00) 16 (00) 70 (00)
Q. Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

No T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 1 U 2 2 R 2 1 U 2
3 U 2 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 U 2 3 R 2 4 U 2 2 U 2
01
To 4 A 2 4 U 2 4 U 2 5 R 2 2 U 2 3 U 2 4 R 2
35
2 U 2 3 U 2 5 R 2 4 U 2 3 U 2 5 U 2 3 A 2
4 U 2 3 A 2 4 A 2 6 R 2 6 U 2 6 U 2 4 A 2
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Progressive (average of Test Answer
Assessment) 20 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
(Continuous
Test (PT) two tests will Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Online
TEE
End Of the
End Exam Students 70 28 Examination 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course
Report
Total 100 40
Skill
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course

Nil
5

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(COs)
1 3 -- -- -- 3 3 3 3 -- 3 - -
2 3 -- -- -- -- 3 -- -- -- 3 - -
3 3 -- -- -- 3 3 -- -- -- 3 - -
4 3 -- -- -- 3 3 3 3 -- 3 - -
5 -- -- -- -- 3 3 3 3 2 3 - -
6 -- -- -- -- 3 -- 3 3 2 3 - -

Year Of publication
Oxford University Press, New 0-19-807228-2
1. Environmental studies
Delhi. 2011
Y.K. Singh, New Age 8122418481,
2. Environmental Science 9788122418484
International, New Delhi
A Text Book Of Arvind Kumar, APH Publishing, 817648590X,
3. 9788176485906
Environmental Science New Delhi
A Kamla & D.L.Kanth Rao, Tata
4. Environmental Engg 0-07-451708-2
Mc Graw-Hill,New Delhi
A Textbook of Shashi Chawla, Tata Mc Graw-
5. 9781259006388
Environmental Studies Hill,New Delhi
 E-REFERENCES:
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lists_of_nuclear_disasters_and_radioactive_incident
s, accessed on 20Janaury 2016
2. ww.legalserviceindia.com/articles/noip.htm accessed on 18 March 2016
3. https://prezi.com/8mnz--ldkybc/apes-unit-1-earth-systems-resources/ accessed on
23March 2016
4. http://www.conserve-energy-future.com/AlternativeEnergySources.php, 18
March 2016
Nil
6

CURRICULUM:
Dr. S J Patil Head of Civil Engineering, Government Polytechnic,
1
(I Shift) Nagpur.
R N Giradkar Head of Civil Engineering, Government Polytechnic,
2
(II Shift) Nagpur.
N. U Sulbhewar Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
3
Nagpur.
B. R. Ambade Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
4
Nagpur.
D. A. Khandare Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
5
Nagpur.
6 Mr. M. R. Shelote Consultant Engineer M R Associates, Nagpur
Ramdeobaba College of
7 Dr. R. N. Khapre Associate Professor Engineering and
Management, Nagpur
8 Mr. A. J. Fulzele Assistant Secretary (Tech.) MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/PK/MT/TX/TR
COURSE CODE : RD101E
COURSE TITLE : RURAL DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 01(1TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
India is a rural developing country. About 70 percent of the total inhabitants are living in rural
area. The development of India as a whole cannot be possible without development of the rural
areas. The Central and state Governments tried to develop rural area through various welfare,
health, economic, and social schemes. But it is the moral duty of each urban person to think
about the development of rural area.
Young students are said to be new Nation. Therefore, this subject has been introduced so that
the students should aware about the rural scenario in India. They should think and work for the
overall rural development as per the development indicators prescribed at International level.
They should write, and work for the Rural – Urban Linkage to upgrade the rural level.
1. Interpret Indian development indicators with International level.

2. Use and record questionnaire for rural survey.
3. Apply engineering knowledge for rural economy.
4. Suggest suitable scheme for rural development.
5. Prepare sustainable development plan for rural development.
6. Create suitable environment in rural area for development of every individual.
1
RD101E Rural Development 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
Practical Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
s
1 Write report of Development, Indicators of development, Rank Overview of 04
of India in various development indexes (Individual task).
Rural
Report includes:
 Development, Modern Concepts, Indicators of Development
development,
 Importance, Scope and Objectives of RD.
 Agriculture development, Agricultural allied development,
Social and Human Development.
 Rank of India in Human development index, Water and
Sanitation Index, Shelter index, Education to all indexes,
Health and wellness index.
2 Write report related to particular village (Group of 10 Issues of Rural 06
students). Survey, observe and evaluate Educational issues,
Development
Occupational issues, Agricultural issues, irrigation issues,
migration issues, landless issues, Water supply and sanitation
issues, Health issues, Poverty issues, Nutrition issues,
Unemployment issues, Economy issues, Market for agriculture
products issues, in Rural Development.
Report includes:
 Social structure of Rural India, Educational issues,
Occupational issues, Agricultural issues, irrigation issues,
migration issues, landless issues, Water supply and sanitation
issues, Health issues, Poverty issues, Nutrition issues,
Unemployment issues, Economy issues, Market for
agriculture products issues, etc
3 Write report related to particular village (Group of 10 Constitutional 06
students). Survey, observe, evaluate and propagate Rural
Provisions and
Development programes (Sarva Shiksha Mission, Jal
Swarajya Scheme, Water shed Management, Gobar Gas Programs for
Scheme, Water Harvesting, MNREGA etc.) Run by Central
Rural
and State Govt, according to directive principles in Indian
Constitution. Development
Report includes:
 Constitutional provisions for Rural Development,
Directive Principles.
 Schemes of Central and State Govt. for Rural
Development.
 Role of GOs and NGOs.
 Empowerment –Social, Educational, Economic, Women
and Human.
 Private Public Partnership (PPP), its advantages and
disadvantages.
2
Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.

als
4 Write report related to particular village (Group of 10 Technology 06
students). Survey, observe and propagate Modern Technology
for Rural
(Rural Housing, Non Conventional Energy, Rural Water
Supply and Sanitation, Agricultural allied industries etc.) in Development
Rural Development.
Report includes:
 Low cast housing.
 Rural water supply and sanitation,
 Water conservation and Water shed management,
 Non-conventional energy.
 Computer application and Management Information
system, Info – literacy, Global village
 Solid waste management.
5 Write report related to particular village (Group of 10 Economical 06
students). Survey issues and challenges in Rural Development
Developments
programs and suggest Rural – Urban link for social change in
rural development and Nation Building.
Report includes:
 Basic micro-economic theories and concepts, Growth,
Income, Employment, Finance.
 Rural resources – Land, Forest, Water, Human, Capital
and Market.
 Rural Economy - Agriculture Reforms, Rural Finance,
Rural Urban linkage.
 Understanding BUDGET of Central and State Govt.
 Corporate Social Responsibilities.
 SEZ, Advantages and disadvantages on rural
development.
6 Present a report on Rural Development experiences of the Rural 04
same village, challenges, opportunities, suggestions.
Development
Presentation includes:
 Success stories of rural development in India, Asia and Success
other countries.
Stories
Total 32
Note – The students shall select any one village and perform all practical based on
experiences in that village.
3

What Frequency
Two PT
Progressive (average of -- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
-- -- -- --
Assignments Continuous
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the -- -- -- --
End Exam Students
Course
-- -- -- --
Total
Skill
-- -- -- --
Assessment Continuous
Students
CA
Journal
Writing Continuous 25 10 Journal 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Writing skills, Data collection from internet, Writing references, etc. 05
2 Survey skills, Preparation of questionnaire, Gathering information through 10

interviews, etc.
3 Knowledge of rural development schemes, its salient features, its role in 10
rural development, etc.
4 Knowledge of modern technology, Tech terms, its need in rural area, rural 10
development through technology, etc.
5 Rural urban linkage, sustainable human development, global village, etc. 05
6 Presentation and viva-voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(COs) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
- -
1 3 3 - - - - - 1 - 3
2 3 3 - 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
- -
3 3 3 - 3 - - 2 3 3 3
- -
4 3 3 2 3 3 - 3 3 3 3
3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 - -
5
- -
6 3 3 2 3 1 - 1 - 3 3

Year Of publication
Micro Enterprise & Rural Subrata Kumar Ray, Neha 9788183875752
1.
Development In India, Publishers & Distributors.
Rural Development Indian Expert Panel Of GPH, Publisher: 9789382688976
2.
Context, GPH.
Rural Development Expert Panel Of GPH, Publisher: 9789382688990
3. Planning And Management, GPH
,
RURAL DEVELOPMENT, A. Thomas William and A.J. 9788131602652,
4. Concept and Recent Christopher, Edition – 2011.
Approaches, ,
Rural Development & Dr. B.D. Sharma, 9789381385418
5.
Policies
5
Empowering Rural Dr. H.K. Lal, Publisher: Neha 9788174456250

6 Development Through Publishers & Distributors
Panchayats.
 E-REFERENCES:
 www.un.org/esa/agenda21/natlinfo/countr/israel/ruraldevelopment.pdf , assessed on 5th March
2016
 rural.nic.in/sites/downloads/NewReleases/Greening_RD_Report.pdf , assessed on 5th March
2016
 planningcommission.nic.in/plans/stateplan/sdr_punjab/sdrpun_ch5.pdf, assessed on 5th March
2016
 jica-ri.jica.go.jp/IFIC_and_JBICI-Studies/english/.../pdf/chapter4.pdf. assessed on 5th March
2016
 www.fao.org/3/a-ah885e.pdf, assessed on 5th March 2016
 yojana.gov.in/CMS/(S(y4dqrc55g1m1qhnd4soqih45))/pdf/.../January.pdf, assessed on 5th
March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LXgyAfnBgWo, assessed on 5th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jCpEh78M4xE assessed on 5th March 2016
Not Applicable

CURRICULUM:
Dr. S.J. Patil Head of Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
1.
Nagpur.
Mr. B. R. Ambade Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
2.
Nagpur.
Mr. T. K. Rangari Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
3.
Nagpur.
Ms. D. A. Khandare Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
4.
Nagpur.
5. M. R. Shelote Consultant M.R. Associates, Nagpur
6. Dr. R. N. Khapre Associate Professor RCOEN, Nagpur
7. A. J. Fulzele Assistant Secretary (Tech) MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/AE/MT/PK/TX

LEVEL NAME : BASIC SCIENCE COURSES
COURSE CODE : CA201E
COURSE TITLE : COMPUTER APPLICATIONS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Engineering students should know the basics of handling the computers. This course describes the
basics of word processing, table handling, and power point presentations for the understanding of
elementary knowledge related to IT applications. It also describes basics of problem solving using
C language, for the understanding of elementary knowledge related to logic development. It is
very useful course for understanding the higher level knowledge in the field of IT applications and
software engineering.
1. Use various formatting tools available in word processor.
2. Handle spread sheets.
3. Prepare presentation.
4. Draw block diagrams, figures.
5. Use LATEX for writing project report
6. Create static website using HTML
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
1
CA201E Computer Applications 2016

Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor
Practicals Units Hrs.
Domain)
 Create new document , open existing document and
1. perform various operations on text like Font setting
2
, delete, select, insert, copy- paste, cut- paste, find
and replace.
 Perform various page setup operations like
2 paragraph setting, page margin, size, orientation, WORD 2
watermark, page borders. PROCESSING
 Insert and remove Picture/ Image, Tables,
3 Hyperlink, page break, Headers-Footers, bulleted 2
lists in document.
4  Perform Mail merge operation. 2
 Open blank /existing worksheet and perform
operations like select, delete, insert, copy- paste,
cut- paste, find &replace text / data in cell and range
of cells.
5 2
 Perform various formatting operations like, Data
Alignment, Wrap text, merge / unmerge cells,
change column width, row height, setting page
margin, size, orientation, print area.
 Insert and remove Picture/ Image, Hyperlink, page
break, Headers-Footers, in worksheet. Insert and
6 SPREADSHEET 2
remove cells, rows, columns. Draw various types of
graphs / charts.
 Perform various Functions like sum, average,
count, countif, countblank, min, max, upper, lower,
len, trim, left, right, mid, date, day, today, month,
7 4
year, abs, int, exp, floor, sign, sum, sumif, sqrt and
formulae like calculating simple interest,
compound interest etc. on data in a worksheet.
 Sort data in ascending and descending order, on one
8 and more than one field. 2
 Apply Filter and obtain desired information.
 Create new presentation, add /delete slides, insert /
9 delete tables, word Art, header/footer ,slide number, 2
cliparts, images in slide, hyperlink. PRESENTATION
 Apply various slide transition methods; apply
10 animation effect, setup slide show, for selected 2
slides.
 Draw diagrams in a slide, using various available
11 PRESENTATION 2
shapes, insert / modify/ delete charts in slide.
 Draw block diagrams, circuit diagrams etc.
DRAWING
12  Save diagrams in jpg/ TIFF formats 4
TOOL
 Insert saved diagrams in documents
2
 Open LATEX document

 Write simple mathematical equations in LATEX
13 document LATEX 4
 Insert figures and tables in in LATEX document
 Generate the reports using templates
 Create HTML document by using different tags,
elements and attributes (any four)
 Create HTML document by using various
4
14 formatting tags (text level and paragraph level).
(any four)
 Design webpage using nesting list. (using OL, UL
and DL)
 Add images, tables and text linksin created
document.
15 4
 Insert multimedia in webpage using various
techniques
 Set various attributes of tables.
HTML
 Set various attributes of images.
16 4
 Create hyperlink to text, image, table content and
email.
 Create HTML document by using frame and
17 2
frameset tags (any two)
 Create HTML document by using frame and
18 2
frameset tags along with various attributes.
 Create HTML document by using form and its
19 2
elements (any two)
20  Create login form and set password. 2
 Create static website using all above HTML
21 8
facilities. (MINI PROJECT)
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs 64

Nil
Nil
3

What Frequency
Two PT
Assessment) -- -- -- --
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignments Continuous -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
End Exam Students -- -- -- --
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &

Assessment Continuous 20 -- Assessment 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6

Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Writing Continuous 05 -- Journal 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the Rubrics &

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Activities 20
2 Performance 20
3 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
1. World wide web designing C. Xavir 13: 9780074639719
with HTML
2. HTML5 for Publishers Sanders Kleinfeld 10/ASIN:
B005ISQ7JM
3. HTML5 for Web Designers Jeremy Keith 10/ASIN:
0984442502
 E-REFERENCES:
http://www.w3schools.org.in, accessed on 11th April, 2016

30/03/2016https://www.tug.org/twg/mactex/tutorials/ltxprimer-1.0.pdf accessed on 11th April, 2016
https://www.latex-tutorial.com/tutorials/ accessed on 11th April, 2016
http://www1.maths.leeds.ac.uk/LaTeX/TableHelp1.pdf accessed on 11th April, 2016
http://www.tutorialspoint.com/html/html_frames.htm accessed on 21st April, 2016
showmedo.com/videotutorials/openofficeaccessed on 29th April, 2016
www.tutorialsforopenoffice.orgaccessed on 29th April,2016
5

1. Computer (Dual CORE and above)
2. Network printer.
3. Office Suite.
4. LATEX.

CURRICULUM:
Mr. S.P. Lambhade Head of Computer Government Polytechnic,
1.
Engineering Nagpur.
Dr. Mrs. A.R. Mahajan Head of Information Government Polytechnic,
2.
Technology Nagpur.
V.A. Raje Lecturer in Computer Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Dr. A.R. Mahajan Head of Information Government Polytechnic,
4.
Technology Nagpur.
L.D. Vilhekar Lecturer in Information Government Polytechnic,
5.
Technology Nagpur.
Shri. Atul Upadhyay CEO Vista Computers , Ram Nagar,
6
Nagpur
Shri. N. V. Chaudhari Asst. Professor (CSE) DBACEO, Wanadongri,
7
Nagpur
Shri. Manoj Jethawa HOD Computer Science Shri Datta Meghe
6
Polytechnic, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/IT/CM /MT/PK/AE/TX

COURSE CODE : PH201E
COURSE TITLE : ENGINEERING PHYSICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Engineering physics is an essential part of the educational system and of an advanced society,
therefore this course essentially required for engineering courses. The different streams of physics
provides fundamental facts, principals and laws are very helpful in having better understanding of
the other technology courses which contributes to the technological infrastructure and provides
trained personnel needed to take advantage of scientific advances and discoveries. Physics is an
exciting intellectual adventure that inspires young people and expands the frontiers of our
knowledge about Nature.
1. Apply the principal and laws of Physics on physically observable things to their respective
disciplines.
2. Illustrate broad ideas about different physical phenomena.
3. Apply fundamental physics in various Engineering fields.
4. Select proper measuring instruments on the basis of range and least count to measure the
physical quantities.
5. Calibrate different measuring instruments.
6. Handle instruments carefully to avoid any type of devastation.
1
PH201E Engineering Physics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. General 1. Relate Deformation in bodies 1.1 Elasticity, Plasticity, Rigidity.
06
Properties of by the action of external Deformation in bodies by the action
solids forces. of external forces, Stress and Strain
2. Identify least count and with their types, Elastic Limit,
range of instruments. Hook's Law, yield point, factor of
3. State hook’s law of elasticity. safety, breaking stress, ultimate
4. Define different terms related stress. Applications of elasticity.
to elasticity. Types of modulus of Elasticity with
5. Differentiate accuracy and relation between them.
precision. 1.2 Searle's method to find out Young's
6. Describe the types of modulus of elasticity. Least count
modules of elasticity. and range of instruments: Vernier
7. Illustrate the Searle's caliper, outside micrometer screw
apparatus. gauge, Travelling microscope.
8. Solve the numerical based on (Numerical based on above)
Elasticity.
2. General 1. Define the terms related with 2.1Surface Tension, Factors affecting
08
Properties of general properties of liquid. surface tension, Molecular force,
liquids 2. State the factors affecting cohesive and adhesive force, Angle
surface tension and viscosity. of contact with its significance and
3. Select the laws of viscosity capillary action (no derivation),
to find the coefficient of Effect of impurity and temperature
viscosity of freely falling on surface tension. Application.(
body. Numerical based on above)
4. Classify the types of flow of 2.2 Viscous force, Definition of
liquid with significance of viscosity, Newton’s law of
Reynold’s number. viscosity, Reynolds’s number and
5. Illustrate the phenomenon of its significance, critical velocity,
Capillarity and angle of streamline flow, turbulent flow,
contact of liquid and glass. Stoke's law, statement and formula
6. Solve the numerical based on (no derivation), Coefficient of
general properties of matter. viscosity and S.I. unit.
Application.(Numerical based on
above)
1. List the modes of 3.1Heat: Three modes of transmission
3. Transmission 10
transmission of heat. of heat- conduction, convention,
of heat and Gas
2. Define the terms related to radiation. Good and bad conductor
laws
expansion of solid due to of heat with examples, Law of
heat. thermal conductivity and S.I. units,
3. State the laws related to gas Coefficient of linear, aerial and
and specific heat. cubical expansion, relation between
4. Describe Mayor's relation. them (no derivation).( Numerical
5. Apply the adiabatic and based on above)
isothermal expansion for 3.2 Boyles law, Charle’s law, Gay
bulk modulus of elasticity. Lussac’s law, absolute zero
6. Solve the numerical related temperature, Kelvin scale of
to gas laws and heat. temperature, General gas equation
(statement only), two specific heats
2
of gases, relation between them,

Mayer's relation. . Isothermal
process and adiabatic
process(Numerical based on above)
1. Define different terms related 4.1 Definition of wave motion,
4. Wave motion 14
to Acoustics. amplitude, period, frequency &
and Acoustics
2. Reproduce the formula for wavelength, relation between
velocity of sound with end velocity, frequency & wavelength.
correction. Progressive wave, Stationary
3. Classify the different types waves, longitudinal and transverse
of wave by their wave. Node, Antinode. forced and
characteristics. free vibration, definition of
4. Recognize sound absorbing resonance with example, procedure
textile material. to find resonance with the help of
5. Describe the phenomenon of tunning fork. Formula for velocity
resonance with examples. of sound with end correction,
6. Describe the Doppler effect various factors which depends on
and Sabine’s formula. it.( Numerical based on above)
7. Implement the conditions for 4.2Introduction to Doppler Effect and
good acoustics in auditorium. its applications. Echo,
8. Solve the numerical related Reverberation, Reverberation Time.
to wave motion and Absorption coefficient of material,
acoustics. Sabine's formula for reverberation
time, Factors affecting the
Reverberation of time and acoustics
of building. Sound absorbing
materials. (Numerical based on
above)
1. Define the terms related to 5.1 Photon, properties of photons,
5. Modern 18
topics in modern physics. Planck’s hypothesis, Threshold
Physics
2. List the properties frequency, threshold wavelength
applications of LASER. and work function, Photoelectric
3. State the characteristics of effect with characteristics
photo electric effect. properties. Principle, Construction
4. State the applications related and working of Photoelectric cell
to X-ray, LASER, and photo with applications. Einstein’s
cell. photoelectric equation. (Numerical
5. Implement the photoelectric based on above)
effect to develop photocell. 5.2 Properties of laser, Types of laser,
6. Illustrate the construction absorption, spontaneous and
and working of Ruby stimulated emission. Definition of
LASER Pumping and its type, Population
7. Describe the production of inversion, Metastable state. Ruby
X-rays. laser: Principle, construction and
8. Solve the numerical base on working. Applications of LASER in
Photo-electricity and X-rays. Engineering and biomedical
Engineering.
5.3Introduction to X-rays, Properties of
X-rays, production of X-ray using
Coolidge tube. Formula for
Minimum wavelength of X-rays,
Applications of X-rays in
Engineering, medical and scientific
field.( Numerical based on above)
3
1. Define the terms related to 6.1 Optical fiber, Material of Optical

6. Optical Fiber 08
Optical fiber and fiber. Structure of optical fiber and
and
nanotechnology. its types. Principle of Optical fiber-
Nanotechnology
2. Draw the diagram for inner total internal reflection. Acceptance
structure of optical fiber. angle, Numerical aperture.
3. State the applications of Applications of Optical
Optical fiber and Fiber.(Numerical problems)
nanotechnology. 6.2 Definition of nanoscale, nanometer,
4. Clarify the properties of nanoparticle, nanostructured
nanoparticles are different materials with examples,
than other particles. Application of nanotechnology in
5. Describe the principle of Engineering and Technology,
optical fiber. medical, cosmetics, environmental,
6. Solve the numerical based on space and defense.
optical fiber.
Total Hrs. 64
4

Pract- Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
icals
1 Identify the various instruments used in Physics laboratory
and follow precautionary measures. 2
2 Determine least count and range of Vernier Caliper, Outside

micrometer screw gauge and calculate its zero error. 2
3 Calculate the diameter of a small spherical body by Outside General Properties 2

micrometer screw gauge. of solids
4 Measure the outer diameter of a cylindrical body by Vernier
Caliper. 2
5 Calculate the value of Young's modulus of elasticity of

given wire and identify the type of material from standard 2
value.
6 Find rise of liquid in capillary tube and compute surface
tension of liquid. 2
7 Compose the relation between terminal velocity and radius

of spherical body with different materials passing through General Properties 2
the liquid. of liquids
8 Find the most viscous fluid from given fluids by calculating
coefficient of viscosity. 2
9 Analyze the effect of volume on pressure at constant

2
temperature. Transmission of
10 Calculate mechanical equivalent of heat, J by electrical heat and gas laws
2
method.
11 Determine inner diameter of resonance tube using Vernier
2
Caliper.
12 Find the velocity of sound with the help of resonance tube. Wave Motion and
OR Acoustics
2
Determine the unknown frequency of tuning fork by
sonometer.
13 Measure the angle of divergence of Laser. Modern Physics 2
14 Find total internal reflection of light by pin method.
OR Optical Fiber and
2
Calculate the surface area (SA), volume (V) and SA/V of an Nanotechnology
object and measure dimensions required for it.
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 32
5

No.
R U A
General Properties of
01 06(00) 00(04) 00(00) 06(04)
solids
General Properties of
02 02(00) 08(06) 00(00) 10(06)
liquids
Transmission of heat
03 02(00) 04(04) 06(04) 12(08)
and gas laws
Wave Motion and
04 04(04) 04(02) 06(00) 14(06)
Acoustics
05 Modern Physics 02(04) 10(04) 06(00) 18(08)
Optical fiber and
06 02(02) 08(00) 00(06) 10(08)
Nanotechnology
Total 18(10) 34(20) 18(10) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 6 R 2
01 5/7
4 U 2
02 1 R 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 4 R 4 4 U 4 4 R 4 3 A 4 3/5
04 6 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 5 R 4 5 U 4 3/5
05 5 A 6 4 A 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 5 U 6 3 A 6 6 A 6 2/3
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Drawing circuit diagram/figure, selection of equipment’s. 10
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
- -
1 3 - - - - - - - - 2
- -
2 3 - - - - - - - - 2
- -
3 3 - - - - - - - - 2
- -
4 3 - 2 2 - - - 2 - 2
- -
5 3 - 2 2 - - - 2 - 2
- -
6 3 - 2 2 - - - 2 - 2

Year Of publication
1. Modern Physics B.L.Thereja, S.Chand & Company Ltd 13:978-8-12-
5th Edition, 2014 190163-5
2. Engineering Physics V.Rajendran, The McGraw Hill 13: 978-0-07-
Education Pvt. Ltd,1st Edition, 2010 107014-0
3. Conceptual Physics P.G.Hewitt, San Francisco Addison 13:
Wesley- 10th Edition, 2006 9780321909107
4. Engineering Physics R.K.Gaur And S.L.Gupta, Dhanpatrai 97-8-18-992822-3
Publication New Delhi,1987
 E-REFERENCES:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7vT-988yH3M , assessed on 5th march 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XMWcQ4Fn_3I , assessed on 4th march 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6L3Y6UnWe6M , assessed of 5th march 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KjUlKF6_4LI , assessed on 2 nd march 2016
8

1. Vernier Caliper (Least count= 0.01 cm and range= 0 to 12 cm)
2. Screw gauge (Least count= 0.001 cm and range= 0 to 2.5 cm)
3. Young’ Modulus- Searle’s pattern with micrometer reading 0.001 cm.
4. Travelling microscope vertical and horizontal scales with range 0- 15 cm with least
count 0.001 cm
5. resonance apparatus with glass tube and metal reservoir (L= 0- 100 cm)
6. sonometer teak wood with length 1m.
7. Tunning fork -256, 320, 384, 428, 480, 512 Hz.
8. Boyle’s apparatus iron base double steel rod, 25 ml fitted with leveling screw on
base
9. Stoke’s apparatus with glass tube 50 cm.
10. Stop watch GEM 1/10 sec.
11. Ammeter (DC, 0-5 Amp)
12. Millimeter (DC, 0-1 Amp. G.E. type D 50)
13. Voltmeter (DC, 0-3V )
14. Rheostat single tube of 6.5 cm dia., 30 cm length, 5 Amp, 18 ohm, provided with
Bakelite solider with phosphor, bronze contacts.
15. Joule’s calorimeter with mass 198 cal/gms.
16. Laser

CURRICULUM:
1. M. K. Malke I/C Physics Department Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur.
2. Dr. K. S. Moon Associate Professor Dharampeth M P Deo
Memorial Science College,
Nagpur
3. Mrs. Farheen Baig Assistant Professor Priyadarshini College of
Engineering, Nagpur
4. Mrs. M.B. Mahaley HOD, Physics Department SDMP, Nagpur
5. Dr. S. B. Raut Lecturer Government Polytechnic,

Nagpur.
6 Mrs. S.B. Adulkar Lecturer Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur.
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/AE/MT/PK

COURSE CODE : CH 201E
COURSE TITLE : APPLIED CHEMISTRY
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Chemistry is the basic science which is essential to all engineering courses. For an engineer, the
usage of equipments and instruments would require knowledge of chemical substances, their
composition and properties. Chemistry subject knowledge also aims to bridge the theoretical concepts
and their practical engineering applications, thus highlighting the role of chemistry in the field of
engineering.
Study of Applied chemistry is essential to mechanical engineering course group. It provides

knowledge about the appropriate use of engineering materials, their protection, study of extraction of
iron, study of different fuels and their usage and lubrication process in different working conditions of
machines. This will be gateway for development of reasoning capacity of students and understanding
new technology as well.
1. Use principles and basic laws of chemistry in engineering field.
2. Select and apply knowledge of metal and nonmetallic materials in field of engineering
and Technology.
3. Select proper fuel and lubricants on the basis of properties and application.
4. Record readings of experiments.
5. Conclude result of practical on the basis of ultimate stakeholders or society.
6. Safely handle chemicals and equipments which are correlate with safety of others and
environmental protection
1
CH201E Applied Chemistry 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Define terms related to Atomic Structure:
1 Chemical Atomic structure. 1.1 Definition of Atom, Fundamental Particles 10
Bonding 2. State postulates of Bohr’s of Atom – their Mass, Charge, Location.
Theory. 1.2 Postulates of Bohr’s Theory
3. Draw schematic diagram 1.3. Definition, Shape of the orbitals &
of atom. distinction between Orbits & Orbitals.
4. State all steps of 1.4 Hund’s Rule, Filling Up of the Orbitals by
formation of molecules. Aufbau’s Principle (till Atomic no. 30).
5. Review the filling up Valence:
orbital by Aufbau 1.5 Definition& types of valence
principle and Hunds rule. (Electrovalence & Covalence).
1.6 Octet Rule, Duplet Rule.
1.7 Formation of Electrovalent e.g. NaCl,
CaCl2, MgO, AlCl3.
1.8 Formation of Covalent Compounds CO2,
H2O, NH3, C2H2.
1.9 Distinction between electrovalent &
covalent compounds.
2. 1. Describe the process of Metallurgy
Metallurgy extraction of iron from its 2.1Definitions of metallurgy, ores of iron. 12
and Alloys ore. 2.2Extraction of pig iron by smelting in Blast
2. State different processes of furnace with chemical reactions in
Heat treatment. different zones. Product of Blast furnace
3. Select effects of alloying 2.3Composition, properties and applications
elements on properties of of pig iron, slag and flue gases.
steels. 2.4Properties and applications of commercial
4. State importance and forms of iron-pig iron, cast iron, wrought
purposes of heat treatment iron
of steel. Steels
2.5Definition of steel. Classification of plain
carbon-low carbon, medium carbon, high
carbon steel with their properties and
application.
Alloy steel
2.6 Effect of alloying element C, Ni, CO, V,
Mo, W, Cr on properties of steel,
2.7Composition, properties and application of
heat resisting steel, Nicrome, magnetic
steel (alnico), 18-8stainless steel, 18-4-1
high speed steel.
Heat treatment of Steels
2.8 Definition and purposes of –Hardening,
Tempering, annealing, and Normalizing.
3. Non- 1. Distinguish between Polymers (Plastics, Rubber)
Metallic thermo softening and 3.1 Definition and types of Plastic, thermo 08
Engineering thermosetting plastics. softening and thermosetting plastics.
Materials 2. List the properties of Properties, properties and uses of plastic.
Rubber. 3.2 Formation of Plastic by Addition &
2
3. State the applications of Condensation process (by giving e.g. of

thermal insulators, Polyethylene & Bakelite plastic
Thermocole and Glass Respectively )
wool. 3.3Rubbber: Types of Rubber.
4. Describe applications of 3.4Natural Rubber: Its Processing,
Polyethylene & Bakelite Drawbacks of Natural Rubber,
plastic Vulcanization of Rubber with Chemical
Reaction.
3.5 Synthetic Rubber: Definition, difference
between natural and synthetic rubber,
3.6 Properties of synthetic rubber such as
elasticity, tack, abrasion resistant, their
definition and related applications.
3.7 Insulating material
Definition & Characteristics of Thermal
insulators. Preparation, Properties &
Applications of Thermocole & glass wool.
4. Energy 1. State characteristics of a Energy
good fuel. 4.1 Definitions of a fuel, calorific value and 16
2. State significance of ignition temperature,
proximate analysis of a 4.2 Characteristics of a good fuel,
fuel. Classification of fuels with suitable
3. Describe the process examples, advantages and disadvantages
fraction distillation of of solid fuels, liquids fuels and gaseous
crude petroleum. fuels.
4. State significance of Classifications of fuel :
Biogas, LPG and CNG. 4.3 Solid fuels: analysis of solid fuels-
5. Compare different types of Proximate analysis for determination of
fuel- solid, liquid and moisture, volatile matter, ash and fixed
gaseous. carbon, significance of Proximate
analysis,
4.4 determination of gross calorific value by
using Bomb calorimeter.
4.5 Liquid fuels—Origin, fractional
distillation of crude petroleum, boiling
range, composition and applications of
petroleum fractions obtained.
4.6 Composition, properties applications of-
Biodiesel.
Gaseous fuels
4.7Composition,properties,applications of
Biogas, LPG, CNG
5. Lubricants 1. State functions of 5.1 Definition, Types of Lubricants, Functions
lubricants of Lubricants. 10
2. Describe the mechanism of 5.2 Types of lubrication. Fluid film
lubrication. lubrication, Boundary lubrication and
3. State characteristics of Extreme pressure lubrication.
Lubricants. 5.3 Characteristics of Lubricants- Viscosity,
4. Select proper lubricant on oiliness ,viscosity Index, oiliness ,
the basis of different types Volatility, cloud and pour point, Flash and
of machines. fire point, Neutralization number,
emulsification.
5.4 Selection of Lubricant for various types of
machines such as I.C engine, steam engine
3
cylinder Gear system, cutting tools

delicate and simple machines, tractors and
rollers.
6.Corrosion 1. State mechanism of 6.1 Definition of corrosion, Types of
atmospheric corrosion and corrosion, mechanism of Atmospheric or 08
immersed corrosion. chemical corrosion .Effect of oxide film
2. Describe different methods on atmospheric corrosion. Factor effecting
of protection of metal from atmospheric corrosion.
corrosion. 6.2 Immersed Corrosion or Electrochemical
3. Select proper protection Corrosion, definition, types and
method for different types mechanism(Hydrogen evolution and
of material from corrosion. oxygen absorption)
6.3 Factors Affecting Electrochemical
Corrosion
6.4 Protection of Metals by Purification of
Metals, Alloy Formation, Cathode
Protection,
6.5 Controlling the External Conditions
6.6Application of Protective Coatings like
metal coating by -
Galvanizing, Tinning, Sherardizing
Metal Spraying, Metal Cladding,
Cementation or Diffusion Method.
6.7Application of non metallic coatings: paint-
definition, characteristics, constituents of
paint and their functions.
Total Hrs. 64
4

Pract- Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain)
Units Hrs.
icals
1 Explore the chemistry laboratory. Chemical
02
Bonding
2 Determine the percentage of Iron in given steel sample
by redox titration.
Metallurgy and
OR 02
Alloys
Determine the percentage of copper in given alloy
sample.
3 Find the relation between loss in weight of aluminium
02
strip in acidic and alkaline medium and rate of corrosion.
4 Determine the strength of given hydrochloric acid Corrosion
solution by titrating it against sodium hydroxide solution. 02
5 Determine thinner content in oil paint. 02
6 Determine the percentage of moisture content in the
given coal sample. 02
Energy
7 Determine the percentage of ash content in the given coal
sample by proximate analysis. 02
8 Determine coefficient of viscosity using Ostwald’s
02
Viscometer
9 Determine acid value of lubricant by KOH
Lubricants
OR
02
Determine flash point of lubricant by use of flash point
apparatus.
10 Prepare Phenol formaldehyde resin used in Non-Metallic
manufacturing of Bakelite Plastic. Engineering 02
Materials
11 Analyse basic and Acidic Radicals of known salt solution-1
02
(Confirmatory Test) using qualitative analysis method.
02
Chemical Bonding
02
02
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 32
5

No.
R U A
1 Chemical Bonding 06(04) 04(04) 00(00) 10(08)
2 Metallurgy and Alloy 02(00) 04(06) 06(00) 12(06)
Non-Metallic 10(04)
3 06(00) 04(04) 00(00)
Engineering Material
4 Energy 02(04) 10(02) 06(04) 18(10)
5 Lubricant 02(00) 08(00) 00(00) 10(06)
6 Corrosion 04(04) 06(00) 10(06)

00(02)
Total 18(10) 34(20) 18(10) 70(40)


option
01 1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 4 U 2 5/7
6 R 2
02
1 R 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 1 R 4 1 U 4
3/5
03
3 R 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 3 U 4 4 R 4
3/5
04 3/5
5 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 4 A 4 6 U 4
05 2/3
2 A 6 4 A 6 2 U 6
06 2/3
4 U 6 6 A 6 5 A 6
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Writing chemical reactions, handling the equipment, writing 10
procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, result, drawing graphs(if any) 10
4 Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
2
3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - -
3 - 3 - - - - 3 - 3 - -
4
3 - 2 - - - - 2 - 2 - -
5
3 - 1 - - 2 - 1 - 1 - -
6

Year Of publication
1 Engineering Chemistry Jain and Jain , Dhanpat Rai 978-93-437-07-
publishing company(P) ltd.16th 3
Edition reprint 2015
2 A Text book of Engineering S. S. Dara ,S. Chand Publication,15th 9788121903592
Chemistry Edition
3 Engineering Chemistry R. Sivakumar , N. Sivakumar and 9780745-
Tata McGraw-Hill, 10th Edition 328896
4 Polytechnic Chemistry Vedprakash Mehta ,Jain brothers, 6th 13-
Edition 9788183600134
5 Industrial Chemistry B.K.Sharma, Goel Publication, 8th 8187224002,
Edition 9788187224006
8
 E-REFERENCES:
http://www.substech.com/dokuwiki/doku.php?id=full_index_of_articles_on_fluids-,
assessed on 2 Feb. 2016
http://www.ausetute.com.au/corrosion.html, assessed on 4 Feb. 2016
http://www.sherardizing.com/resources/files/9_Sherardizing_Corrosion.pdf , assessed on
4 Feb. 2016
http://www.galvanizeit.org/aga/animation, assessed on 6 Feb. 2016
http://www.ehow.com/list_6725219_different-types-metal-cladding.html, assessed on 8
Feb 2016
1. Electronic balance (measure up to 0.001 mg)

2. Battery 12 volt
3. Digital multi-meter
5. Voltmeter mi 0-150-300 V
7. Electrolytic cell set up
8. Muffle furnace( temp. measure up to 15000 c)
9. Oven ( temp measure up to 500 0c)
 LIST OF EXPERS & TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS

CURRICULUM:
Sr. Name Designation Institute/Industry

No
1. Dr. P.J. Sondawale I/C chemistry Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
Department
2. Dr. Mudrika I. Lecturer in chemistry Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
Ahmed
3. Dr. M. S. Rathod Lecturer in chemistry Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
4. Dr. S. A. Petkar Lecturer in chemistry Government Polytechnic, Nagpur
5. Mr. S.R. Gaidhar Lecturer in chemistry Government Polytechnic,

Gadchiroli
6. Dr. S. Z. Jadhav Professor in Institute of Science, Nagpur
chemistry
7. Dr. K. A. Nandekar Lecturer in chemistry G.H.Raisoni Polytechnic,
Nagpur
_______________________ ________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/AU/PK/MT/EE/EC/IT/CM/TX

COURSE CODE : MH201E
COURSE TITLE : ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:04; TU: 01; PR:00 (CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
The subject is classified under basic sciences and intends to teach students basic facts,
concepts and principles of Mathematics as a tool to analyze Engineering problems.
Mathematics lay- down the foundation for understanding core Technology subjects.
1. Develop logical thinking which is useful in comprehending the principles of all other
subjects.
2. Use concept of allied angle, compound angle, multiple, and sub multiple angle to
solve engineering problems.
3. Use measures of central tendency and measures of dispersion in decision making.
4. Apply matrix method to solve simultaneous equations in two and threevariables.
5. Develop intellectual skill by using mathematical concept.
6. Apply laws of logarithm to solve engineering problems.
1
MH201E Engineering Mathematics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs
(Cognitive Domain) .
1. 1. Identify natural and 1.1 Definition of logarithm 04
Logarithm common logarithm 1.2 Definition of natural & common
2. Apply laws of logarithm in logarithm
solving examples 1.3 Laws of logarithm & change of
base formula
2. Partial 1. Define rational function, 2.1 Definition of rational function , 06
fractions proper and improper proper ,improper fraction and
fraction. partial fraction
2. Factorize quadratic and 2.2 Resolving proper fraction into
cubic polynomial partial fraction.
3. Resolve proper and 2.2.1 Denominator containing non
improper fraction into repeated linear factors
partial fraction. 2.2.2 Denominator containing repeated
linear factors
2.2.3 Denominator containing
irreducible non repeated
quadratic factors
2.3 Resolving improper fraction into
partial fraction.
3. 1. Memorize 14
Determinant expansionformula of 3.1 Definition of determinant , order
and Matrix determinantof order 2 and of determinant
3. 3.1.1 Expansion of determinant of
2. Find the value order 2 and 3
ofdeterminant of order 2 3.2 Definition of matrix
and3. 3.2.1 Types of matrices
3. Define various typesof 3.2.2 Algebra of matrices
matrices. 3.2.3 Transpose of matrix , ad-joint of
4. Perform all matrix and inverse of matrix
algebraicoperations on 3.2.4 Solution of system of linear
matrices. equations two and three
5. Solve variables by inverse matrix
simultaneousequations in method
two andthree variables
4. 1. Define allied angle and 4.1 Trigonometric ratios of any angle 22
Trigonometr compound angle. 4.2 Fundamental identities
y 2. State the formula of 4.3Trigonometric ratios of allied
multiple angle (2 and 3 angles
4.4 Trigonometric ratios of compound
sub-multiple angle ( ).
angles
3. Verify 4.5 Trigonometric ratios of multiple
trigonometricidentities. and sub-multiple angles
4. Solve examples 4.6 Factorization and de-factorization
usingallied angle, formulae
compound angle, multiple
2
and sub-multiple angle

formula.
5. Solve examples using
factorization and de-
factorization formula.
5. Inverse 1. Define inverse 5.1 Definition of inverse trigonometric 06
trigonometri trigonometric functions. functions
c functions 2. Find principle values of 5.2 Principle values of inverse
inverse trigonometric trigonometric functions
functions 5.3 Relation between inverse
3. Solve examples ofinverse trigonometric functions
trigonometric functions.
6. Statistics 1. Define mean of data. 6.1 Measures of central tendency ( 12
2. Memorize formula ofmean, mean only )
combined mean,mean 6.2 Combined mean
deviation andstandard 6.3 Measures of dispersion
deviation. 6.4 Range , mean deviation , standard
3. Find mean and combined deviation
mean. 6.5 Variance and coefficient of
4. Find the range, mean variation
deviation, standard 6.6 Comparison of two sets of
deviation and variance. observations
5. Find coefficient of
variation and compare the
consistence
Total Hrs. 64
al
1 Solve examples using laws of logarithm Logarithm 01
2 Find partial fraction of proper fraction. 01
Partial fraction
3 Find partial fraction of improper fraction. 01
4 Expand determinant of order 2 and 3. 01
5 Perform all algebraic operations on matrices Determinant and 01
6 Find transpose , ad-joint and inverse of matrix Matrix 01
7 Solve simultaneous equations in two and three variables 01
8 Verify trigonometric identities. 01
9 Use allied angle and compound formulae 01
10 Use multiple and sub-multiple angle formulae Trigonometry 01
11 Apply factorization formula to solve examples. 01
12 Apply de-factorization formula to solve examples. 01
13 Find principle values of inverse trigonometric functions Inverse trigonometric 01
and verify formulae functions
14 Find mean of any data and combined mean oftwo sets 01
ofdata.
15 Find the range, mean deviation, standard deviation and 01
Statistics
variance.
16 Find coefficient of variation and compare the 01
consistency
Total Hrs. 16
3

No.
R U A
01 Logarithm 00(02) 04(00) 00(00) 04(02)

02 Partial fraction 00(00) 08(06) 00(00) 08(06)
03 Determinant and Matrix 02(00) 08(04) 06(04) 16(08)
04 Trigonometry 06(00) 14(08) 04(04) 24(12)
Inverse trigonometric
05 02(00) 04(04) 00(00) 06(04)
functions
06 Statistics 00(02) 12(00) 00(06) 12(08)
Total 10(04) 50(22) 10(14) 70 (40)

option
3 R 2 4 R 2 4 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 3 A 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 4 U 4 4 A 4 3/5
04 4 U 4 5 U 4 4 A 4 5 U 4 4 U 4 3/5
05 6 U 6 4 U 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 6 U 6 3 A 6 6 A 6 2/3
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

NIL

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
3 3 3 - -
1 2 - - - 2 3 -
3 3 3 - -
2 2 3 - - 2 3 -
3 3 3 - -
3 2 3 - - 2 3 -
3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - -
4 - -
3 3 2 - 2 3 - 3 - -
5 - -
3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - -
6 - -

Year Of publication
Higher Algebra Hall & Knight, Publisher: Arihant, 9352030605
1.
5th Edition 2015
Plane Trigonometry S L Loney, Publisher: Arihant, 9352030540
2
5th Edition 2015
Basic Statistics B L Agarwal, Publisher: Anshan 1848290675
3.
Engineering Mathematics S.S .Shastry,Prentice Hall Of India, 978-81-203-
4.
4th Edition 2008 3616-2
Fundamental of Statistics S C Gupta, Himalaya Publishing 9789350517697
5.
House, 7thEdition 2015
 E-REFERENCES:
https://www.khanacademy.org/math/algebra, assessed on March 3, 2016
https://www.khanacademy.org/math/trigonometry, assessed on March 3, 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BiLIcCtXmm0, assessed on March 3, 2016
6

CURRICULUM:
1. Mr. S.M. Sayyed I/C Mathematics Dept. Govt. Polytechnic Nagpur
2. Mr. P.T. Khobragade Lecturer Govt. Polytechnic Nagpur
3. Mr. G.R. Dewalkar Lecturer Govt. Polytechnic Nagpur
4. Dr. K. C. Deshmukh Professor R. T. M. Nagpur University
Dr. P. B. Bahatkar Professor Y. C. C. E. Nagpur
5.
6 Mr. Nasir Khan Lecturer Anjuman Polytechnic Nagpur
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/AU/PK/MT

COURSE CODE : MH202E
COURSE TITLE : APPLIED MATHEMATICS
PREREQUISITE : MH201E
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 04 ; TU:01; PR:00 (CLOCK HRs.)
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE EXAM. : 03 HRs
PR. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Mathematics is the backbone of Technical courses, Understanding of engineering concepts
require logical approach and thinking. The course is extension of Engineering Mathematics
of first semester and stepping into the prerequisites to learn Calculus and Numerical method.
Applied Mathematics lay down the foundation to understand and express principles and laws
involved in other Technological subjects.
1. Apply mathematical term, concept, principles and different methods for studying engineering
subjects.
2. Apply mathematical methods to solve technical problems.
3. Execute management plans with precision.
4. Use mathematical techniques necessary for daily practical problems.
5. Apply concept of extrema in finding maximum profit of production and minimum cost or material
needed for production of an article.
6. Apply various numerical method to solve algebraic and simultaneous equations.
1
MH202E Applied Mathematics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY:

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. Functions 1. Identify various types 1.1 Definition of function, value of a function.
10
and Limits of functions. 1.2 Types of functions.
2. Define odd and even 1.3 Concept of limit.
function. 1.4 Algebra of limits.
3. Find value of any 1.5 Limits of algebraic functions.
given function. 1.6 Limits of trigonometric functions.
4. Find limits for all 1.7 Limits of exponential & logarithmic
different functions. functions.
2.1 Definition of derivative, Notations.

2. Derivatives 1. State limit definition of 16
2.2 Derivative of standard functions.
and derivative.
Applications of 2.3 Rules for differentiation (without proof )
2. Perform all algebraic 2.4 Derivative of composite functions.
derivative
operations on derivatives. 2.5 Derivative of inverse trigonometric
3. Find slope, Equation of functions.
tangent and normal line 2.6 Derivative of implicit functions.
of the given curve. 2.7 Logarithmic differentiation.
4. Solve examples of 2.8 Derivative of parametric functions.
maxima and minima. 2.9 Second order differentiation.
2.10 Applications: Equation of tangent and
normal; Maxima and minima.
1. State Integration by 3.1 Definition of integration as anti-derivative.
3. Integration, 16
parts theorem. 3.2 Integration of standard functions.
Definite
2. Integrate function 3.3 Rules for integration.
integration and
using different method. 3.4 Integration by substitution.
Applications
3. Solve examples of 3.5 Integration of rational functions.
definite integral 3.6 Integration by trigonometric transformation.
using properties. 3.7 Integration by parts.
4. Find area using 3.8 Integration by partial fraction.
integration method. 3.9 Definition of definite integral.
3.10 Properties of definite integral.
3.11 Applications: Area under the curve, Area
bounded by two curves.
1. State order and degree 4.1 Definition of differential equation.
4. Differential 08
of D.E. 4.2 Order and degree of differential equation.
equations
2. Solve differential 4.3 Methods of solving differential equations of
equations of first order first order and first degree.
and first degree. 4.4 Variable separable method, reducible to
3. Solve different variable separable.
engineering problems 4.5 Homogenous differential equation,
using differential exact differential equation.
equations. 4.6 Linear and Bernoulli equations.
2
5. Numerical 1. Identify the interval of 5.1 Solution of algebraic equation.

14
methods root of algebraic 5.1.1 Bisection method.
equation. 5.1.2 Regula-Falsi method.
2. Find the approximate 5.1.3 Newton-Raphson method.
root of algebraic 5.2 Solution of Simultaneous
equation. equations containing 3 unknowns.
3. Solve the system of 5.2.1 Gauss elimination method.
simultaneous 5.2.2 Iterative methods: Gauss-Seidal &
equations containing 3 Jacobi’s method.
unknowns
Total Hrs. 64
B LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ASSIGNMENTS:

al
1 Find value of any given function. 1. Functions and 01
2 Find limits algebraic functions. Limits 01
3 Find limits trigonometric, exponential functions. 01
4 Solve examples on derivative using algebraic operations. 2. Derivatives and 01
5 To find dy/dx of implicit functions. Applications of 01
6 To find dy/dx of parametric functions and inverse derivative 01
inverse trigonometric functions.
7 Find equation of tangent and normal and solve maxima 01
and minima problems.
8 Solve examples using rules of integration and 01
3. Integration,
substitution method
Definite integration
9 Solve examples using integration by parts and 01
and Applications
partial method
10 Solve examples using integration by parts and 01
partial fraction method.
11 Evaluate definite integral using properties. 01
12 Find area using integration
13 Solve D.E. using variable separable method and 4. Differential 01
reducible to variable separable. equations
14 Solve homogenous, linear and Bernoulli D.E. 01
15 Find the approximate root of algebraic equation. 5. Numerical 01
16 Solve the system of simultaneous equations methods 01
Total Hrs. 16
3

No.
R U A
Functions and
01 04(00) 08(08) 00(00) 12(08)
Limits
Derivatives and
02 Applications of 04(00) 08(04) 06(06) 18(10)
derivative
Integration, Definite
03 integration and 02(00) 08(08) 06(00) 16(08)
Applications
04 Differential equations 00(04) 08(00) 00(00) 08(04)
05 Numerical methods 04(00) 12(04) 00(06) 16(10)
Total 14(04) 44(24) 12 (12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2
01 5/7
4 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 3 U 4 3 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
04 4 U 4 4 U 4 5 R 4 3 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
05 2 A 6 3 A 6 2 A 6 2/3
06 5 U 6 5 U 6 5 A 6 2/3
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

NIL

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
3 3 3 - -
1 2 - - - 2 3 -
3 3 3 - -
2 2 3 - - 2 3 -
3 3 3 - -
3 2 3 - - 2 3 -
3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - -
4 - -
3 3 2 - 2 3 - 3 - -
5 - -
3 3 2 3 2 3 - 3 - -
6 - -

Year Of publication
Engineering Mathematics- P N Wartikar, Pune Vidyarthi 4567155742
1.
1 Griha Prakashan
Calculus of one variable IA Maron, Publisher: Arihant, 5 th 9352030559
2.
edition 2015
Engineering Mathematics S.S .Shastry, Prentice Hall Of 9788120336162
3.
India, 4th edition 2008
Engineering Mathematics D.T.Gaikawad, S Chand 8121933560
4.
Publication, 1 st edition 2010
Higher Engineering B S Grewal, Publisher: S Chand, 43rd 9788174091955
5. edition 2014
Mathematics
 E-REFERENCES:
http://www-math.mit.edu/~djk/calculus_beginners/, assessed on March 3, 2016
https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Calculus, assessed on March 3, 2016
6

CURRICULUM:
Mr. M. SAYYED I/C HOD, MATHS DEPTT. GOVT. POLYTECHNIC
1.
NAGPUR
Mr. T. KHOBRAGADE LECTURER GOVT. POLYTECHNIC
2.
NAGPUR
Mr. R. DEWALKAR LECTURER GOVT. POLYTECHNIC
3.
NAGPUR
Dr. K. C. DESHMUKH PROFESSOR R. T. M. NAGPUR
4.
UNIVERSITY
Dr. P. B. BAHATKAR PROFESSOR Y. C. C. E. NAGPUR
5.
Mr. NASIR KHAN LECTURER ANJUMAN POLYTECHNIC
6
NAGPUR
_______________________ ________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/CE/PK

COURSE CODE : ME301E
COURSE TITLE : ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 04 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. EXAM : 02 HRs
 RATIONALE:
Engineering graphics is the language of engineers. It describes the fundamentals, facts,
concepts, principles and techniques of Engineering Graphics. The course illustrates
techniques of drawing in an engineering field. The concepts of graphical language are
used in expressing the ideas, conveying the instructions, which are used in carrying out
the jobs on the sites, shop floor etc. It helps to develop the idea of visualizing the actual
object or part on the basis of drawings and blue prints. This course is useful in
developing drafting and sketching skills of the student. This preliminary course aims at
building a foundation for the further course in drawing and other allied courses.
1. Apply various drawing codes, conventions and symbols as per IS SP-46 in
engineering drawing.
2. Apply the technique of geometrical figure. scale, loci of points for further
drawing.
3. Relate the views of an object for drawing orthographic and isometric projections.
4. Visualize three dimensional objects and draw isometric projections.
5. Draw orthographic views , isometric views and freehand sketches
6. Apply knowledge of projections of points and solve the problems on projection of
straight lines
1
ME301E Engineering Graphics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1.Principles 1. Use drawing 1.1 Use of different drawing instruments 05
of drawing instruments. and equipment
2. Use IS SP-46 1.2 Types of letters and numbers (single
3. Loci of points from stroke vertical and inclined letters
given data. and numbers only
4. Redraw the given 1.3 Conventions of lines, Dimensioning
drawing. technique as per IS SP -46
1.4Scales (reduced, enlarged and full
size)- Plain scale, diagonal scale,
1.5 Redrawing
1.6 Loci of points
2. 2.1 To draw an ellipse by: i) Directrix - 08
1. Draw conic sections.
Engineering focus method ii)Arcs of circles
curves. 2. Draw involute, cycloid method iii) Rectangle method
and know their iv)Concentric circles method
applications. 2.2 To draw parabola by i) Directrix -
focus method ii) Rectangle method
3. Draw helix , spiral 2.3 To draw hyperbola by i) Directrix –
from given data. focus method ii) Passing through a
given point with reference to given
asymptotes iii) Transverse axis focus
method
2.4 To draw involute of circle and
polygon of maximum six sides
2.5 To draw cycloid, epi-cycloid and
hypo-cycloid
2.6 To draw Archimedean spiral &
Helix
3.1 Introduction to orthographic 06
3. 1. Visualize, interpret and
projections
Orthographic draw orthographic
3.2 First angle and Third angle method of
projections. views from given projections
pictorial views. 3.3 Conversion of simple pictorial views
2. Use of IS SP-46.for into orthographic views and
dimensioning dimensioning techniques as per IS
technique. SP-46
1. Visualize, interpret and 4.1 Isometric scales
4. Isometric
draw Isometric 4.2 Isometric views/projections of
projections
views/projections from simple & cylindrical object (plane
given orthographic surfaces, slanting surfaces, and 06
views Rectangular, V, Trapezoidal slots)
1.Locate the projection of 5.1 Projections of straight lines inclined
5. Projection
points to one reference plane and parallel to
of straight 03
2. Draw projection of the other – limited to both ends in first
lines quadrant.
lines.
2

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. Sketch proportionate 6.1 Types of threads – Vee and square 04
6. Free hand
freehand sketches of threads, left hand and right hand
sketches threads
given machine
elements 6.2 Bolts – square and hexagonal bolts,
2. Select proper fasteners eye bolt
and foundation bolts 6.3 Types of nuts – square, hexagonal,
wing, capstan, cap, flanged, ring and
dome nut
6.4 Locking arrangement – lock or check
nut, split pin, slotted nut, castle nut,
swan nut and grooved nut
6.5 Foundation bolts- Eye foundation
bolt, Rag foundation bolt and Lewis
foundation bolt
6.6 Riveted joints – Types of rivets,
Single/double riveted Lap and Butt
joints
Total Hrs. 32

als
1. Draw types of lines, lettering, numbers on sketch 1.Principles of 08
book and one problem each of scales, loci of points drawing
& two problems of redraw.(01 Sheet)
2 Draw four Engineering Curves, one from topic 2.1, 12
2.Engineering
one from topic 2.2, 2.3, one from topic 2.4, 2.5 & Curves
one from topic 2.6 of chapter 2 (01 Sheet)
3 Draw one problem using first angle method of 3 Orthographic 12
projection and another using third angle method of Projections
projection (01 Sheet)
4 Draw one problem with plane surfaces & other with 12
4. Isometric
cylindrical, slot, slanting surfaces (using natural
Projections
scale and isometric scale) (01 Sheet)
5 08
Draw four problems by using first angle method of 5. Projections of
projection (01 Sheet) Straight Lines
6 Draw Free Hand Sketches – any ten sketches 12
6. Free Hand
covering all the topics under chapter 6 (01 Sheet) Sketches
Total Hrs. 64
3
Unit Units Levels from Cognition Process Dimension Total

No. Marks
R U A
01 Principles of drawing 10(05) 00(00) 00(00) 10(05)
02 Engineering Curves 00(00) 12(06) 00(00) 12(06)
Orthographic
03 00(00) 12(00) 00(12) 12(12)
Projections
04 Isometric Projections 00(00) 00(12) 12(00) 12(12)
Projections of Straight
05 00(00) 12(06) 00(00) 12(06)
Lines
06 Free Hand Sketches 00(00) 12(08) 00(00) 12(08)
Total 10(05) 48(32) 12(12) 70 (49)

option
01 1 R 5 1 R 5 1 R 5 - - - - - - - - - 2/3
02 2 U 6 2 U 6 2 U 6 - - - - - - - - - 2/3
03 3 U 12 3 A 12 - - - - - - - - - - - - 1/2
04 4 A 12 4 U 12 - - - - - - - - - - - 1/2
05 5 U 6 5 U 6 5 U 6 - - - - - - - - - 2/3
06 6 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 - - - 3/5
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Progressive (average of Drawing
Assessment) 20 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Sketch
Assignments Continuous 10 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Book
Examination)
(Term End
Drawing
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Drawing
Skill sheet,
Assessment Continuous 20 -- Rubrics & 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6

Assessment
Sheets
Students
CA
Drawing
Drawing
portfolio Continuous 05 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
portfolio
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

Nil

For Mechanical Engineering:
Course Program Outcomes (POs) PSO PSO
Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 3 _ _ _ _ 3 3 _ 3 _ _
2 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
3 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
4 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
5 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
6 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
For Other Programs:

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 3 _ _ _ _ 3 3 _ 3 _ _
2 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
3 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
4 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _
5 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
6 3 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
6

Year Of publication
Engineering Drawing 81-7061-091-2
1. Bureau of Indian Standards, Third
Practice for Schools
Reprint, October 1998
and Colleges IS: SP-46
2. Engineering Drawing N.D.Bhatt, Charotar Publishing house 978-93-80358-
2010 17-8
3. Machine Drawing N.D.Bhatt & V. M Panchal, Charotar 978-93-80358-
Publishing house2010 11-6
4 D.A.Jolhe, Tata McGrawHill 978-0-07-
Engineering Drawing
Edu.2010 064837-1
5. Engineering Drawing R. K. Dhawan , S. Chand&co. 81-219-1431-0
6 P. J Shaha, S.Chand&co.2008 81-219-2964-4

Engineering Drawing
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TJ4jGyD-WCw, assessed on 25th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dmt6_n7Sgcg, assessed on 25th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_MQScnLXL0M, assessed on 26th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3WXPanCq9LI, assessed on 26th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fvjk7PlxAuo, assessed on 27th March 2016
 http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me2011/handouts/engg%20graphics.pdf , assessed on 27th
March 2016

1) Drawing Board with drawing instruments
2) Minidrafter

CURRICULUM:
O. V. Sarode I/C, Head of Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
1.
Engineering Nagpur.
M.G. Thote Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
G.H Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Er. A.M.Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
4.
Nagpur
Shri. G.F.Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur
5.
Dr.S.S.Baraskar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi
6.
Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/AE/PK/MT/TX

COURSE CODE : WS301E
COURSE TITLE : WORKSHOP PRACTICE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : Nil
PR. TEE EXAM : Nil
PT. EXAM : Nil
 RATIONALE:
Workshop Practice is an engineering science course. The knowledge of this course is essential
for technician industry to perform his/her duties. Working in workshop develops the attitude of
groups working and safety awareness. This course provides industrial environment in the
educational institute.
1. Adapt safety precautions in workshop
2. Read and interpret job drawing
3. Use hand tools for various operations
4. Apply basic techniques in manufacturing processes
5. Operate different equipments/machineries used in basic shops
6. Perform jobs according to drawing
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
1
WS301E Workshop Practice 2016

Practi Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain)
cals
Units Hrs.
1. Observe the demonstration of hand tools, machine Tools and
equipments used in Carpentry Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
specifications, details, applications and safety rules of above tools.
Carpentry
2. Prepare utility job involving related carpentry operations. (Job to
be prepared by group of 2 to 4 students depending on volume of 8
work)
equipments used in Welding Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
Welding
4. Prepare utility job involving related Welding operations. (Job to
be prepared by group of 2 to 4 students depending on volume of 8
work)
equipments used in Fitting Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
specifications, details, applications and safety rules of above tools. Fitting
6. Prepare One individual job involving related Fitting operations. 8
equipments used in Smithy Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
Smithy
8. Prepare One individual job involving related Smithy operations. 8
equipments used in Plumbing Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
specifications, details, applications and safety rules of above tools. Plumbing
10. Prepare One individual job involving related Plumbing operations.
8
equipments used in Sheet Metal Shop. Draw the sketches; write 2
specifications, details, applications and safety rules of above tools. Sheet
12. Prepare utility job involving related Sheet Metal Shop operations. Metal
(Job to be prepared by group of 2 to 4 students depending on 8
volume of work)
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 64
Note: Jobs should be Programme specific.

Nil
Nil
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Jobs,
Rubrics &
Assessment Continuous 40 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Assessment
Sheets
Students
CA
Record
Continuous 10 -- Journals 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3
 SCHEME OF JOB EVALUATION:

1 Job Drawing 5
2 Handling Tools, machineries and its operations 10
3 Dimension Accuracy 20
4 Overall finishing of Job 5
Total 40

Outcomes 1 2
(COs) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
_
1 3 - 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 3
_
2 3 - 3 3 - - _ 3 3 3 3
_
3 3
- 3 3
- - _ 3 3 3 3
_
4 3
- 3 3
- - _ 3
- 3 3
_
5 3
- 3 3
- - 3 3
- 3 3
_
6 3
- 3 3
- - 3 3 3 3 3
For Other Programs:

Outcomes 1 2
(COs) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
_ _
1 3
- 3 3
- - 3 3
- 3
_ _
2 3
- 3 3
- - _ 3 3 3
_ _
3 3 - 3 3 - - _ 3 3 3
_ _
4 3
- 3 3
- - _ 3
- 3
_ _
5 3
- 3 3
- - 3 3
- 3
_ _
6 3
- 3 3
- - 3 3 3 3
4

Year Of publication
A Course in Workshop B.S. Raghuwanshi; Dhanpat Rai 10-0000017108
1.
Technology sons, New Delhi ; 2006, 2011
Elements of Workshop Hajra; Choudhary; Media Promoters 10-8185099146
2.
Technology & Publishers Mumbai, 2009
A Textbook of Manufacturing Gupta J.K., R.S. Khurmi 81-219-3092-8
3.
Process (Workshop Tech.) S.Chand & Co. New Delhi
Workshop Practice Manual R K Hegde, Sapna Book House, 2012 13:
4. For Engineering Diploma & 9798128005830
ITI Students
 E-REFERENCES:
http://books.google.co.oin/books/isbn=9380026757 , assessed on 17th March 2016
http://www.asnu.com.au/profile./our-process-aspx , assessed on 17th March 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=swnEQ17cQW, assessed on 17th March 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=c-FN4M77qyA, assessed on 17th March 2016

1. Welding Transformer (Air Cooled) Single Phase
2. Welding Transformer (Oil Cooled) Three Phase
3. Gas Welding Set
4. Bench Drilling Machine
5. Hydraulic Power Saw Machine
6. Bench Grinder
7. Bench Vise
8. Wood Turning Lathe Machine
9. Circular Saw Machine
10. Portable Wood Cutting Machine
11. Portable Drilling Machine
12. Carpentry Vice
13. Pipe Bending Machine
14. Pipe Vice
15. Pipe Cutter
16. Black smith Hearth
17. Anvil
18. Swage Block
19. Sheet Bending Machine
20. Sheet Cutting Machine
21. Brazing Equipment
22. All Hand Tools and Measuring Tools use in Carpentry Shop, Fitting Shop,
Welding Shop, Plumbing Shop, Smithy Shop and Sheet Metal Shop,
5

CURRICULUM:
D. C. Satadeve Workshop Superintendant Government Polytechnic,
1.
Nagpur.
Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
3.
Nagpur
4.
5.
Engineering
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/PK/MT

COURSE CODE : AM301E
COURSE TITLE : ENGINEERING MECHANICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
RATIONALE:
Study of this course develops understanding of effect of force on a body. It helps in
analytical and graphical solutions to problem related to forces acting on body. It also helps in
understanding concept and application of Equilibrium, friction, centroid and center of gravity
Study of simple machines gives idea about input, output, efficiency and friction of machine.
Study of this course is very useful at higher level like strength of materials, Mechanics of
structure etc. It helps in forming base for understanding all the courses, which are related to
engineering mechanics.
1. Apply concept of engineering mechanics in engineering field.
2. Analyze effect of force, friction, centroid and centre of gravity.
3. Solve problems related to force, equilibrium of forces, friction, centre of gravity and
simple lifting machines.
4. Prove simple laws of equilibrium of forces.
5. Compute efficiency of different machines.
6. Draw the graphs between load and efforts, load and efficiency.
1
AM301E Engineering Mechanics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1.Introduction of 1.Define terms related to 1.1Definition of engineering mechanics,
02
Engineering Engineering Mechanics necessity and Classification of
Mechanics 2. State the units of different engineering mechanics.
scalar and vector quantity. 1.2 Definitions: Space, time, particle, body,
rigid body, mass, weight, scalar and
vector quantity.
1.3Units of measurement (SI units):
Fundamental units and derived units.
2.Simple lifting 1. Define terms related to 2.1Concept of simple lifting machine,
08
Machine simple lifting Machine uses of machine, definition of load,
2.Describe different types of effort, mechanical advantage, velocity
simple lifting machine ratio, efficiency of Machines,
3.State velocity ratio of
reversible and non-reversible
machines
4. Solve problem related to
machines..
simple lifting machine 2.2Ideal machine, friction in machine,
law of machine, maximum
Mechanical advantage and efficiency.
2.3Velocity ratios of simple axle and
wheel, differential axle wheel, Single
purchase & double purchase crab
winch, Simple screw jack, Weston’s
differential pulley block, geared
pulley block, two sheaves and three
sheaves pulley block, worm and worm
wheel
3.Forces 1.Define Terms Related to 3.1 Concept of force, definition of force, unit
12
Force of force, effects of force, Characteristics
2. Define terms related to of force.
moments 3.2System of forces. Principle of
transmissibility of force.
3. Define terms related to
3.3 Composition of forces & Resolution of
graphic statics forces (Two dimensional), Orthogonal
4. State Principal of and Non Orthogonal components of a
Transmissibility of Force force. Resultant force. Resultant of
5. State Law of concurrent, non- concurrent and parallel
parallelogram of forces forces, Law of parallelogram of forces:
6. Describe Resolution & limitations and its applications
Composition of forces 3.4 Definition of moment, sign convention of
7. Solve problems on moments, types of moments. Law of
forces. moment, definition of couple, types of
couple, properties of couple, Varignon’s
theorem of moments and its applications
3.5 Introduction to graphic statics, graphical
representation of force, Bow’s notation,
Space diagram, force diagram, polar
diagram & funicular polygon.
2
4. Equillibrium 1.Define terms related to 4.1Definition of equilibrium, analytical 10

Equillibrium conditions of equilibrium, free body
2. State analytical diagram
conditions of 4.2 Lami’s Theorem: limitations and its
equilibrium. applications. (Simple problems, no
2.State Lamis theorem problems on spheres put in container).
3. Define terms related to 4.3Equilibrium of concurrent, non-
Beam concurrent and parallel forces.
4. Solve Problems related Definition of Beam, span, types of
to Lamis theorem and beams, types of supports, types of
beam reaction. loading: point load and UDL.
Analytical method to calculate
reactions at support for point load and
UDL on simply supported and
overhanging beams
5. Centroid & 1.Define centroid and center 5.1Definition of centroid and centre of
08
Centre of of gravity gravity, difference between centroid
gravity 2.State centroids of plain and centre of gravity. Locating
regular figures. centroids of regular figures such as
3.Locate centroid of two
triangle, rectangle, circle, semi circle,
different geometric areas
4.Solve problems related to
quarter circle. (No Derivations).
compound figures. 5.2Locating centroid of compound
5.State the centre of gravity figures, having combination of two
solid bodies different geometric areas only.
6..Locate c.g of two different 5.3Centre of gravity of solid bodies like
solid bodies cylinder, cone, sphere and
7.Solve problems related to hemisphere.
compound figures 5.4Locating centre of gravity of
compound bodies having combination
of only two different geometric shapes
6.Friction 1. Define terms related to 6.1Concept of friction and its importance 08
friction in engineering, types of friction, laws
2. State laws of friction of friction, limiting equilibrium,
3. Apply concept of limiting friction, co-efficient of
friction friction, angle of friction, angle of
4. Solve problems related repose, relation between co-efficient
to friction of friction and angle of friction.
6.2 Equilibrium of bodies on level surface
subjected to force parallel and
inclined to plane & inclined plane
subjected to force parallel to the
plane. (No ladder friction).
Total Hrs. 48
3

als
1. Find the M.A., V.R., Efficiency of and law of 2
machine for simple /Differential Axle and Wheel
2 Find the M.A., V.R., Efficiency and law of machine 2
for Simple Screw Jack
3 Find the M.A., V.R., Efficiency and law of machine Simple lifting 2
for Two Sheave Or three sheave Pulley Block Machine
for Single purchase Crab Or Double purchase Crab
for Worm and Worm Wheel
6 Find unknown force using law of polygon of forces. 2
7 Find forces in the members of jib crane by using 2
triangle law of forces.
8 Determine resultant of co-planer concurrent forces Forces 4
by graphical method. (Any two problems)
9 Determine resultant of co-planer non Concurrent 4
Forces by graphical method. (Any two problems)
10 Find angle between three concurrent forces using 2
Lami’s Theorem.
11 Find equilibrium of parallel forces using beam 2
Equillibrium
reaction apparatus.
12 Determine beam reaction for Vertical Point Load 2
and UDL. (Any two problems)
13 Compare co-efficient of Friction between different Friction 2
surfaces such as Wood and wood, Wood and glass,
Wood and metal.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs. 32
Tutorials
1 Forces, Equilibrium, simple lifting machine 08
2 Friction , Centroid and centre of gravity 08
Total Hrs. 16
4

No.
R U A
01 Introduction 04(02) 00(00) 00(00) 04(02)

Simple Lifting
02 02(00) 08(04) 00(04) 10(08)
Machine
03 Forces 02(00) 12(04) 06(06) 18(10)
04 Equilibrium 02(00) 08(00) 00(06) 10(06)
Centroid And Centre
05 00(00) 04(04) 06(00) 10(06)
Of Gravity
06 Friction 00(02) 04(08) 12(00) 16(06)
Total 10(04) 36(20) 24 (16) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 2 U 4 2 U 4 4 U 4 2 U 4 2 A 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 3 U 4 3 U 4 3 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 4 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 3 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
06 6 A 6 6 A 6 4 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing figure of simple lifting machine and force diagram, selection of 10
equipment’s. writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawing Graphs(if any ) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Program Outcomes (POs)
Course
Outcomes PSO PSO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2
1 - -
3 - - - - - - - - -
2 - -
3 - - - - - - - - -
3 - -
3 - - - - - - - - -
4 - -
3 - 3 3 - - 3 3 - -
5 - -
3 - 3 3 - - 3 3 - -
6 - -
3 - 3 3 - - 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
1. Applied Mechanics R.S. Khurmi,S.Chand&Co.New 10:8121916437
Delhi, 2014 13:9788121916431
2. Engineering Mechanics Sunil Deo, Label Book Publishers 10:9381595550
New Delhi, 2014 13:978-938159558
3. Engineering Mechanics Basu, Tata Mcgraw Hills, 2013 10:125906266X
13:978-1259062667
4. Engineering Mechanics S Ramamrutham, S Chand & Co. 8187433515
New Delhi, 2008 9788187433514
5. Static and Straight of U.C. Zindal Asian Book Pvt. Ltd 10:8184120737
Materials New Delhi, 2008 13:9788184120730
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-JG9IEqRzQ4, assessed on 28thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4VIhh6sGkrI, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EcPGKLUE04I, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ndT35aqDfAQ, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=W9UDs-kSR0g, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kuAfu0fZOLw, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PO5EL9TB-v4, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Bx-mMA6k8u4, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9XtGJXVnQxk, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=k37FJHbSQA8, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6_D6jjQcAFU, assessed on 30thMarch 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AOkeQMMsSrc, assessed on 30thMarch 2016

1. simple /Differential Axle and Wheel 01
2. Simple Screw Jack 01
3. Two Sheave Or three sheave Pulley Block 01
4. Single purchase Crab Or Double purchase Crab 01
5. Worm and Worm Wheel 01
6. Force table apparatus for law of polygon of forces. 01
7. Jib crane by using triangle law of forces. 01
8. Lami’s Theorem. Force table apparatus 01
9. Co-efficient of Friction between different surfaces ,
such as Wood and wood, Wood and glass,
Wood and metal. 01

CURRICULUM:
1. Y. K. Chandarana HOD, Applied Mechanics Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
2. H. S. Chepey HOD, Civil Engineering A.S. T. S., Wardha
Lecturer in Applied Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
3. A. P. Waghmare
Mechanics
Lecturer in Applied Govt. Polytechnic,
4. R. D. Mendhe
Mechanics Amravati
Lecturer in Applied Govt. Polytechnic, Gondia
5. R. N. Nibudey
Mechanics
6. M. R. Shelote Consultant M.R. Associates, Nagpur
7. Dr. R. N. Khapre Associate Professor RCOEN, Nagpur
8. A. J. Fulzele Assistant Secretary (Tech) MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME, PK
COURSE CODE : EE304E
COURSE TITLE : ELEMENTS OF ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Mechanical engineering students should know the facts, concepts,
principles and procedures in electrical engineering. This course describes the basic facts,
concepts & principles for understanding the basic elementary knowledge related to
electrical area. It is very useful course for understanding the basic knowledge of
electrical engineering.
1. Interpret electrical circuit diagram & wiring layout diagrams.
2. Use principles and basic laws in electrical engineering.
3. Identify different parts of various machines.
4. Connect electrical measuring instruments in circuit.
5. Record the readings of various electrical meters.
6. Use different machines for different applications.
1
EE304E Elements of Electrical Technology 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Electrical 1. Recall electrical safety 1.1 Electrical Safety, Causes of accidents,
06
Safety rules. General safety rules, Concept of
2. Remove the electrocuted electrical shock, Effect of electric
person from live conductor shock, Method of removing
3. Interpret electrical safety electrocuted person, Safety signs and
signs and symbols symbols.
4. Carry out different 1.2 Artificial respiration-Schaefer’s
methods of artificial method, Silvestre’s method, mouth to
respiration on electrocuted mouth respiration.
person 1.3 First Aid
5. Use fire-fighting 1.4Fire, Causes of Fire, Basic ways of
equipment on different extinguishing the fire Classification of
types of fires. fire, Class A, B,C, D, Fire fighting
6. Classify various types of equipments, fire extinguishers, and
earthing. their types .
7. State the need of earthing. 1.5Earthing-Nessesity of earthing,
methods of reducing earth resistance.
2. 1. Define the various 2.1 Concept of electric charge, current,
12
Fundamentals electrical voltage drop, EMF, potential
of Electricity parameters difference, Direction of current and
2. Select the different types their SI units.
of materials for particular 2.2Resistance, unit of resistance, Law of
applications. resistance (Factors affecting
3. State various laws and its resistance), Effect of temperature on
applications. resistance, temperature coefficient of
4. Calculate the temperature resistance, Ohms law ,Resistance in
series, properties of series circuit,
coefficient of resistance
voltage distribution in series circuit,
5. Draw line diagram of
equivalent resistance of series circuit,
power system Applications of series circuits,
6. Describe concept of DC Resistance in parallel, properties of
voltage & current. parallel circuit, current distribution in
7. Connect number of parallel circuit, equivalent resistance of
resistances in series & parallel circuit, Applications of parallel
parallel. circuits, Series-parallel combination,
Equivalent resistance of series-parallel
combination (Numerical problems
based on 2.2)
2.3 Kirchhoff’s current and voltage law(no
numericals)
2.4 Work, power, energy and their SI units,
Joule’s law, Relation between H.P and
watts, Kwh and Kcal, cost of electrical
energy. (Numerical problems based on
2.4)
2.5Concept of generation, transmission and
distribution of electrical power, line
diagram of AC power flow in supply
systems, voltage levels at various
stages in power system.
2
2.6Concept of DC voltage & current.

2.7 Types of loads. Standard single phase
and three-phase distribution supply
system.
3.Electromagn 1. State Faradays law of 3.1Electromagnetism-Introduction, Terms 08
etism electromagnetism. related to Electromagnetism. Faradays
2. Apply faradays law of law of electromagnetic induction.
electromagnetic induction. 3.2 Direction of induced emf and current.
3. Describe the nature of Fleming right hand rule, Fleming left
induced emf. hand rule and Lenz law.
4. Define terms related to 3.3 Nature of induced emf-
AC fundamentals I. Dynamically induced emf.
5. Compare terms time II. Statically induced emf-its
period and frequency, classification-
i. Self induced emf
angular velocity and
ii. Mutual induced emf
frequency, frequency and
3.4 AC Fundamentals-Generation of
speed.
alternating voltage- single phase and
three-phase.
3.5Equation of sinusoidal alternating
voltage and current, important
terminology such as- waveform,
instantaneous value, cycle, time period,
frequency, amplitude, Relation
between time period and frequency,
angular velocity and frequency,
frequency and speed.
3.6 Maximum, average and R.M.S. value
of sinusoidal waveform, form factor
and peak factor.(No derivation)
1. Define transformer. 4.1 Single phase Transformer –
4. 12
2. Solve problems related to Principle of operation, working of
Transformer transformer. transformer, types of transformer-
3. Describe the concept of shell type and core type, their
transformation ratio, construction, comparison, and
KVA rating of applications
transformer, voltage 4.2 EMF equation (No derivation),
regulation and transformation ratio, KVA rating of
efficiency transformer, voltage regulation and
4. Classify the different efficiency (Simple Numerical
types of transformer. problem based on emf equation &
5. Use auto-transformer, CT transformation ratio).
and PT for various 4.3 Auto-transformer –Special features,
applications. Schematic diagram and its
applications.
4.4 Welding-transformer – Special
features, Schematic diagram and its
applications..
4.5 Current Transformer and Potential
Transformer- Special features,
connection diagram and its
applications.
1. Classify different types of 5.1DC Drives- General working
5 Drives 14
AC & DC motors. principle, types, application and
2. Select the particular motor selection for different applications
3
for particular application. ,need of starter, 3 point starters,

3. Describe construction and reversal of rotation, speed control
working of DC machines methods(only DC shunt motor)-
and AC machines. 1.armature control method,2.Flux
4. State the need of starter. control method. Concept of
5. Control the speed of brushless DC motor.
motor. 5.2 AC Drives-Three phase induction
6. Predict the fault in motor. motors - General working principle
&their types, salient features,
application and selection for
different applications, need of
starter, types of starter (only
names), and reversal direction of
rotation.
5.3Singlephase Induction motors-
General working principle &their
types (only names), application and
selection for different applications,
reversal of rotation.
5.4 Stepper motor-Introduction,
principle, construction, working,
and application of stepper motor.
1. Use different types of 6.1 Wiring accessories- test lamp,
6. Wiring 12
wiring accessories as per switches, Fuses, ICDP, ICDB,
application.. ICTP, MCB, ELCB, their selection,
2. Select different accessories rating and application.
for particular type of 6.2 Wires –Introduction, Types,
installation. Specification and selection for
3. Classify different types of particular use.
wires. 6.3 Cables- Introduction, Name of
4. Select suitable wire for the cables. 6.4 Wiring connections of
installation. lamp, fan, and fluorescent tube light
6. Choose cable for particular
etc, Different faults in electrical
application. wiring circuit.
7. Prepare the circuit of
6.5 Wiring connections of three phase
wiring.
induction motors with starters and
8. Predict the faults in
installation.
main switch.
6.6 Use of megger as insulation
9. Use starter of three phase
resistance tester.
induction motors.
10. Use of Megger for
measurement of insulation
resistance of electrical
installation.
Total Hrs. 64
4

Practical’s Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Units Hrs.
Domain)
1 Use firefighting equipment on fire and execute Electrical safety 2
safety precautions in laboratory.
2 Connect voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter in
electrical circuit for measurement of electrical 2
quantity.
3 Find unknown resistance using ohms law and
observe the effect f temperature on resistance of 2
Fundamentals of
conductor.
4 Measure the total resistance of series circuit& Electricity
2
parallel circuit
5 Find the branch current and mesh voltage using
2
Kirchhoff’s laws. (KCL & KVL)
6 Measure different parameters by using tong
2
tester and multimeter
7 Identify LV & HV winding of single phase
2
transformer and test its polarity. Transformer
8 Determine the voltage and current ratio of single
2
phase transformer
9 Identify different parts of transformer. 2
10 Identify different parts of stepper motor. 2
11 Start D. C. Shunt motor by using 3 point starter
2
and reverse the direction of rotation
12 Start Three phase Induction motor and reverse Drives 2
the direction of rotation.
13 Control the speed of D.C. shunt motor by using
field control method and armature voltage 2
control method.
14 Identify different electrical accessories &
Use test lamps for testing single-phase and three
2
–phase supply. Use of tester. Wiring
15 Perform different test on electric motor such as
continuity test, earth fault test, insulation 2
resistance test by using Megger.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 32
5

No. Marks
R U A
01 Electrical Safety 02(00) 08(00) 00(06) 10(06)

Fundamentals of
02 02(02) 08(00) 06(06) 16(08)
electricity
03 Electromagnetism 02(00) 04(04) 00(00) 06(04)
04 Transformer 02(04) 04(04) 06(00) 12(08)
05 Drives 02(00) 04(08) 06(00) 12(08)
06 Wiring 04(02) 04(04) 06(00) 14(06)
Total 14(08) 32(20) 24(12) 70(40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 2 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 4 R 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 6 R 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 2 A 6 4 A 6 1 A 6 2/3
06 5 A 6 6 A 6 2 A 6 2/3
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Drawing circuit diagram/ selection of equipment’s/ writing procedure 10
etc.
2 Performance/skill 20
3 Calculation/Result/ Drawing Graphs(if any) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(COs)
1 3 - - - - - 1 - - - - -
2 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
3 3 - - - - - - - - - - -
4 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 - 3 - -
5 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 - 3 - -
6 3 - 3 3 - - - 3 - 3 - -

Year Of publication
1. Principle of Electrical V. K. Mehta, S Chand & Company 81-219-1053-6
Engineering and Electronics Ltd., Reprint, 1996
2. A Text Book Of Electrical B. L. Theraja, A. K.Theraja, S. Chand 81-219-2440-5
Technology Vol-I & Co Ltd., Reprint,2006
3. Basic Electrical Engineering V. N. Mittle, Arvind Mittal, The 13: 978-0-07-
McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, 059357-2
Reprint, 2011
4. Experiments in Basic S. K. Bhattacharya and K. M. 978-81-224-1042-6
Electrical Engineering Rastogi., New Age International
Publisher, Reprint, 2009.
5. A Text Book on laboratory S. G. Tarrekar and P. K. Kharbanda, 13: 978-8121901048
courses in Electrical S. Chand& Company Ltd., Third,
Engineering 1990
8
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.scribd.com/.../Lecture-Notes-Basic-Electrical-and-Electronic assessed on 28th
Feb 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LAtPHANEfQo 31 mar 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vh_aCAHThTQ assessed on 31 mar 2016
 www.studyyaar.com/index.../11-basic-electrical-a-electronics-engineerinassessed on 28th Feb
2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SpqwAasxY7Uassessed on 31 mar 2016.
 www.faadooengineers.com/.../448-BASIC-ELECTRICAL-ENGINEERIN assessed on 28th Feb
2016.
 www.learnerstv.com/Free-engineering-Video-lectures-ltv059-Page1.htmassessed on 28th Feb
2016

6. Variable Inductor
7. Megger 500V/1000V Hand driven.
8. Tong tester.

CURRICULUM:
Dr. C.S.Thorat Principal Government Polytechnic,
1.
Nagpur.
Mrs. K. M. Gaidhane I/C, Head of Electrical Government Polytechnic,
1.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. R. I. Kamble Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. S. P. Thote Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Dr. R. S. Surjuse Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
4.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. G. V. Gotmare Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
5.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. H, N. Kharkar Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
6
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. N. H. Adkine Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
7
Engineering Nagpur.
Mrs. A. P. Gandhi Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
8
Engineering Nagpur.
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGG

LEVEL NAME : ENGINEERING SCIENCE AND TECHNICAL ART COURSES
COURSE CODE : EC303E
COURSE TITLE : ELECTRONICS AND MECHATRONICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 04; TU: 00; PR: 02(CLOCK Hrs.)
TH. TEE EXAM : 03 HRS
PR. TEE EXAM : 02 HRS (Internal)
PT EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Modern equipments have electronic devices. Understanding the principles of electronic
devices is therefore essential for diploma technicians. This course contemplates
identification and testing of components, their principles of working of various
electronic devices and signal conditioning. This subject also introduces the concepts of
mechatronics and PLC.
1. Apply working principles of different electronic devices for system design.
2. Design a mechatronics system by integrating electronic, mechanical and control
system components.
3. Design a system for measurement of a particular physical quantity using different
sensors and transducers.
4. Operate various electronic test and measurement instruments and equipments.
5. Assemble different electronic circuits to obtain desired output.
6. Develop and execute different ladder programs on PLC.
1
EC303E Electronics & Mechatronics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1 1. Draw symbols of various 1.1 Solid State Devices:
06
Solid State components.  Schematic symbols,
Devices and 2. Describe the working applications and specifications
Diode Circuits principle of electronic of Resistors, Inductors,
components. Capacitors
3. Enlist the applications of  Schematic symbols, Working
electronic devices. Principle, applications and V-I
4. Sketch the circuit diagram characteristics of – PN junction
with relevant waveforms diode, Zener Diode, FET, UJT,
for rectifiers and filters. SCR.BJT (only types)
5. Identify specific electronic  Photo-devices –Schematic
component in a circuit. symbols, Working Principle,
6. Compare different applications of LED Displays –
rectifiers. 7-segment Display, LCD,
7. Compare different filters. Optocouplers(No
Constructional details)
1.2 Diode Circuits:
 Circuit Diagram, Working
Principle, Waveforms and
comparison of – Half wave
Rectifier, Full wave Rectifier,
Centre tap and Bridge
Rectifier.
1.3 Filter Circuits:
 Circuit Diagram, Working
Principle, Waveforms and
comparison of– C, LC, CLC
2 1. Draw the symbol for 2.1 Number Systems:
08
Basics of various logic gates.  Decimal Number System,
Digital 2. Convert numbers in Binary Number System,
Circuits different number systems. Conversion of Decimal to
3. Write the truth table for Binary and vice versa
various logic gates. 2.2 Logic Gates:
4. Compare microprocessor  Basic Gates: Symbols and truth
and microcontroller. tables of AND, OR, NOT.
5. Define various terms  Universal Gates: Symbols and
related to microprocessors. truth tables NAND, NOR,
6. Enlist the features of Exclusive Gates: XOR, XNOR
microprocessors. 2.3Microprocessors
7. Enlist the features of  Terminology of
microcontrollers. microprocessors: Bit, Byte,
8. Justify why NAND &NOR Word, Nibble, Bus, Register,
gates are called as ALU, Program, Assembly
Universal gates. Language, Compiler,
2
9. Realize a given Boolean Assembler, Flowchart.

expression using logic 2.4 Microcontrollers
gates.  Basics of microcontroller-
Busses and registers.
2.5 Features of 8085 and 8051
2.6 Comparison of microprocessor
and microcontroller.
2.7 Applications of microprocessor
and microcontroller
3 1. Define transducers. 3.1Sensors
12
2. Classify different types of  Definition of sensor
Sensors & transducers.  Types of sensors,
Transducers 3. Select a particular Principle of working and
transducer depending on applications of –
the need of situation. i. Pressure Sensors - Bourdon
4. Design a system to measure Tube
a particular physical ii. Temperature Sensors -
quantity by specific RTD, Thermistors.
transducers. iii. iii. Photo sensors –
5. Identify the type of sensor Photodiode, LDR, LED
or transducer in a system iv. iv. Proximity Sensors –
used to measure a physical Capacitive, Inductive
quantity. 3.2 Transducers
6. State the principle of  Definition of transducer
operation of different  Classification – Active/Passive,
transducers. Primary/Secondary, Electrical,
Mechanical, Optical and their
examples
 Selection Criteria for
transducers
 Principle of working and
application of-
i. Displacement
transducers - LVDT,
RVDT
ii. Strain Gauge, Load cell,
Cantilever arm
3.3 Switches
 Types and application of-SPST,
SPDT, DPST, DPDT, Toggle
switch, Push button switch
3.4 Relays
applications of –
Electromagnetic, Dry reed
relay
3.5 Encoders
applications of Rotary Encoder
3
4 1. State the need of signal 4.1 Necessity of signal

10
conditioning. conditioning
Signal 2. Describe the use of op-amp 4.2 Block diagram of AC and DC
Conditioning in signal conditioning signal conditioning
process. 4.3 Block diagram, Working and
3. Select a particular op-amp applications of Operational
based circuit depending on amplifier IC741
application.  Virtual ground concept,
4. Illustrate the process of  Inverting, Non inverting
analogue to digital signal amplifier,
conversion and vice-versa.  Integrator,Differentiator,
5. Describe the process of 4.4 Wheatstone bridge its working
square wave generation. principle and application.
6. Select a particular timer as 4.5 Data Converters: Block
per the requirement. diagram and working of
successive approximation
ADC, R-2R DAC
4.6 Timers: Block Diagram of
IC555, Applications of timer as
Astable Multivibrator(AMV),
Monostable
Multivibrator(MMV),Bistable
Multivibrator(BMV),
Comparison of AMV, MMV,
BMV
1. Describe the basic control 5.1 Control system
5 15
system.  Definition of Control System
Control 2. Differentiate between  Classification of control system
Systems & different control systems.  Block diagram of control
Fundamentals 3. Select a particular control system
of system as per the need.  Operating Principle of open
Mechatronics 4. Describe the function of a loop & closed loop control
servomotor. systems
5. Describe the function of a  Advantages, disadvantages of
position control systems. open loop and closed loop
6. State the need of control systems
mechatronics.  Transfer function of open loop
7. Define sequential and closed loop control system
integration mechatronic  Principle of Servomechanisms,
system. Transfer function of AC and
8. Define concurrent DC servomotor
integration mechatronic  Armature controlled and field
system. controlled synchros, Synchros
error detector with waveforms
9. Enlist the objectives of
5.2 Mechatronics
mechatronics.
 Origin and Evolution of
10. State the advantages,
mechatronics
disadvantages of
 Definition of Mechatronics-
mechatronics.
Sequential Integration,
11. Identify the various basic Concurrent Integration
elements of mechatronics.
4
12. Describe the function of  Need for mechatronics in

each module in industry
mechatronics.  Objectives of mechatronics
13. Derive the transfer function  Modules in mechatronic
of a closed loop control systems
sytem.  Examples of Mechatronics
14. Derive the system for Systems – Automatic Camera,
operating synchros as an Automatic Washing Machine
error detector. (Any One)
 Advantages, disadvantages of
mechatronics
1. Describe the basic PLC 6.1 Introduction to PLC
6 13
architecture. 6.2 General block diagram of
Programmable 2. Describe the working of hardware of PLC & Internal
Logic PLC. architecture of PLC
Controller 3. Identify various 6.3 Development of ladder logic
(PLC) components of a PLC. diagram –
4. Write simple ladder  Input & Output Instructions
programs.  Scan time, rungs, branching of
5. Develop a program to rung,
perform a given task using  Relays NO/NC contacts
different instructions in  Sourcing & sinking
PLC. 6.4Develop a program using
6. Develop the ladder logic following PLC Instructions –
for different instructions of  Logical – AND, OR, NOT,
PLC. NAND, NOR, XOR
 Latching – latch, unlatch,
binary Input/ output bit
 Timers – TON, TOF, RTO,
RES
 Counter – CTU, CTD, RES
 Comparators – LIM, EQU,
NEQ, LES, LEQ, GRT, GEQ
 Compute – ADD, SUB, MUL,
DIV, SQRT,
Total Hrs. 64

Domain)
Operate a regulated power supply to set a constant
voltage and current.
1 2
 Use coarse and fine control knobs for precise
voltage adjustment.
Operate a function generatorto generate different types
of waveforms over a wide range of frequencies.
General
 Use the function select knob to generate a
2 Electronic 2
particular waveform.
Measurement
 Use the DC offset knob to adjust the DC shift techniques
in a signal.
5
 Use the amplitude variable knob to adjust the

amplitude of signal generated.
Operate a Cathode Ray Oscilloscope to observe the
output of a circuit.
 Use Volt/div and time/div knobs for amplitude
3 and frequency measurement 2
 Use a particular channel in a dual trace
oscilloscope.
 Use Intensity and Focus front panel controls
Operate a digital multimeter to measure AC and DC
voltage, AC and DC current, and resistance.
4 2
 Test resistors, diodes and transistors.
 Test continuity in a circuit
Identify different passive electroniccomponents and
solid state devices.
3  Draw the symbols for above devices 2
Solid State
 Identify their terminals and packages
devices and
 Test above devices diode circuits
Assemble the circuit for half wave, full wave and
4 bridge rectifiers (any one) and draw the waveforms at 2
different points in the circuit.
Verify the truth table for various logic gates. Basics of
5 Digital 2
Circuits
6 Measure linear displacement using LVDT. 2
Sensors &
Measure temperature using thermistor and
7 Transducers 2
thermocouple.
Assemble AMV using IC555 and draw the nature of
8 2
output waveform generated. Signal
Assemble inverting and non-inverting amplifier using Conditioning
9 2
op-amp IC741.
Prepare a report on technical and commercial
10 specifications of different modules of PLC available in 2
Programmable
market.
Logic
11 Develop and execute simple ladder programs for PLC. 4
Controller
Develop and test the ladder logic for TON, TOF and
12 2
RES instructions of PLC.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 32
6

No.
R U A
Solid State Devices and

01 02 (00) 08 (08) 00 (00) 10 (08)
Diode Circuits
Basics of Digital
02 02 (04) 04 (04) 06 (00) 12 (08)
Circuits
03 Sensors & Transducers 04 (02) 08 (04) 00 (00) 12 (06)
04 Signal Conditioning 02 (00) 08 (00) 00 (06) 10 (06)
Control Systems &
05 Fundamentals of 00 (02) 06 (04) 06 (00) 12 (06)
Mechatronics
Programmable Logic
06 04 (00) 04 (00) 06 (06) 14 (06)
Controller
TOTAL 14 (08) 38 (20) 18 (12) 70 (40)
Q. Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Option

No
T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 3 R 2 5/7
01
5 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
3/5
03 3 U 4 4 U 4 4 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4
3/5
04 3 U 4 6 U 4 6 R 4 2 R 4 5 U 4
05 5 U 6 5 A 6 4 A 6 2/3
06 2 A 6 6 A 6 6 A 6 2/3
T = Unit/ Topic Number L = Level of Question M= Marks

R – Remember U – Understand A- Analyse/ Apply
7

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics
TEE
End Exam End Of the &Practical

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
8

1 Drawing circuit diagram, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure etc. 10
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawing Graphs(if any) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Program Outcomes (POs) PSOs
Course
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
3 - - - - - - - - 3
1 - -
3 - - - - - - - - 3
2 - -
3 - - - - - - - - 3
3 - -
- - 2 2 - - - 2 - 3
4 - -
- - 2 2 - - - 2 - 3
5 - -
- - 2 2 - - - 2 - 3
6 - -
1 – Slight (Low) 2 – Moderate (Medium) 3 – Substantial (High)

Year Of publication
Textbook of Applied R. S. Sedha, Revised Edition, S. 8121927838,
1.
Electronics Chand Limited, 2008 9788121927833
Modern Digital Electronics R. P. Jain, Tata McGraw-Hill 0070669112,
2.
Education, 2010, Fourth Edition. 9780070669116
Microprocessor Ramesh S. Gaonkar, 3rd Edition, 0131988557,
Architecture, Programming, Prentice Hall, 1996 9780131988552
3.
and Applications with the
8085
A Course in Electrical and A.K. Sawhney, DhanpatRai
4. Electronics Measurement Publication, 10th Edition, 1994
and Instrumentation
Control SystemEngineering U.A. Bakshi, V. U. Bakshi, 8184314639,
5.
Technical Publications, 2008 9788184314632
6 Mechatronics W. Bolton, Pearson Education India 8131762572,
9788131762578
9
Mechatronics Ganesh S. Hegde, Illustrated 1934015296,

7 Edition, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 9781934015292
2010
Introduction to Gary Dunning, Rockwell lab 1401884261
programmable Logic Manual for Dunning’s Intro to
8
Controllers Programmable logic Controllers,
2005
Programmable logic Bolton, 2006 0750681128
9
Controllers

CURRICULUM:
Shri S. S. Tadas HOD, Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
1.
Nagpur
Mrs. M. N. Bawane Lecturer in Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
2
Nagpur
Mrs. H. R. Bhusari Lecturer in Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
3
Nagpur
Mr. D. A. Brahmankar Lecturer in Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
4
Nagpur
Ms. Giri K. G. Lecturer in Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
5
Nagpur
Mr. SandeepDarwhekar Director Beta Computronics Pvt.
6
Ltd., Nagpur
Mrs. Gazala Ali HOD, Electronics Anjuman Polytechnic,
7
Nagpur
Mr. S. M. Kale Lecturer in Electronics Government Polytechnic.,
8
Gadchiroli
______________________ ______________________
10
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
LEVEL NAME : ENGINEERING SCIENCE AND TECHNICAL ART COURSES
COURSE CODE : MT303E
COURSE TITLE : MECHANICAL ENGINEERING MATERIALS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR.,1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Mechanical engineering students should have a good knowledge of composition,
properties, and applications of engineering materials used in various field. In order to inculcate
the same, this course is designed. Ferrous & Non ferrous metals and alloys find major
applications. Amongst these, steels and cast iron are the main alloys with major applications in
engineering practices. He should be able to identify steels and cast irons by their specifications
and be able to select them for proper applications.. Powder metallurgy process also finds
applications in manufacturing of special parts with typical properties. This course describes the
composition, properties and applications of materials which is very useful for identifying and
selecting the proper material in the field of mechanical engineering.
1. Identify different engineering materials.
2. Select proper engineering materials for specific application.
3. Choose different heat treatment processes.
4. Identify different microstructures of steel and cast iron
6. Conduct different metallurgical tests on ferrous and non ferrous metals and alloys.
1
MT303E Mechanical Engineering Materials 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1.Engineering 1. State the types of 1.1 Introduction, Classification of 06
Materials - engineering materials engineering materials with examples
Structure and 2. Differentiate 1.2 Introduction to composite and foam-
Properties amorphous and characteristics and applications
crystalline solid 1.3 Amorphous solid and crystalline solid
3. State properties of & its difference
material for engineering 1.4 Introduction to Ferrous metals, their
use Characteristics & applications.
4. State the example of 1.5 Introduction to Non-Ferrous metals,
crystal structure. their Characteristics & applications.
5. Calculate atomic 1.6 Crystal structure ( BCC, FCC & HCP
packing efficiency of only), Unit cell and space lattice,
different crystal concept of atomic packing efficiency
structures. 1.7 Properties of metals, Physical
Properties & Mechanical Properties
2.Equilibrium 1. Define the phase 2.1 Definitions of phase or equilibrium or 10
diagrams diagram constitution diagram, pure metal,
2. Compare different solid alloy and solid solutions.
solutions. 2.2 Types of solid solutions –
3. Draw and interpret substitutional and interstitial
Iron-Carbon diagram 2.3 Solidification of pure metal and alloy
4. State phases and with Cooling curves.
composition of steels. 2.4 Iron - Carbon Equilibrium diagram,
5. State critical Microstructures of carbon steel and
temperature of steel cast iron, Critical temperatures & its
6. Identify the micro significance.
structure of cast iron
and steel.
3.Ferrous 1. Classify cast iron. 3.1 Cast Iron: Classification, 16
metals and 2. Identify Cast Iron from composition, characteristics and uses
alloys: I.S. designation of different types of Cast Iron and
3. Draw flow diagram of alloy cast iron. I.S. Specifications of
production of cast iron Cast Iron
and steel. 3.2 Flow diagram for production of
4. State the effect of different types Cast Iron.
alloying element on 3.3 Steel: Definition & Properties,
alloy. classification of steels on various
5. Define steel basis as low , medium, high carbon
6. Compare cast iron with steels, Hypo, Hyper eutectoid steels
steel 3.4 Chemical composition, properties and
7. Classify steel. applications of Low Carbon Steel,
8. Identify Cast Iron and Medium carbon steel, High Carbon
Steel for proper Steel.
application 3.5 Flow diagram for production of steel.
2
9. State effect of alloying 3.6 Alloy Steels: Definition &

element on properties Classification of alloy steel.
of steel 3.7 Effects of alloying elements on
10. Select appropriate mechanical properties of steels such
steels and cast irons for as Cr, Ni, Mo, W and V
engineering 3.8 Composition and application of:-
applications i)Tool steels: High speed
steels(HSS), HCHC; ii) OHNS iii)
Stainless Steels.
3.9 I.S. specifications of steels.
3.10 Selection of appropriate steels and
cast irons for engineering applications
4. Heat 1. Locate phases on TTT 4.1 Time Temperature Transformation 16

Treatment Of diagram diagram for eutectoid steel only
Steels 2. Describe different 4.2 Heat Treatment Processes:
types of heat treatment Purposes, temperature ranges, types
processes and applications of:
3. Select temperature a. Annealing
range for suitable heat b. Normalizing
treatment process c. Hardening
4. State the purpose of d. Tempering
heat treatment 4.3 Surface Heat Treatment processes:
5. Identify proper heat Need of Surface heat treatment,
treatment process Types of Surface hardening methods
6. State the effect of like Flame Hardening, Induction
cooling rate on Hardening, Carburizing, and
properties Nitriding.
7. Recommend proper
heat treatment process.
5. Non ferrous 1. Compare brass with 5.1 Chemical compositions, properties 08
Alloys bronze and applications of :
2. State applications of a. Copper alloy: brasses and bronzes.
non ferrous alloys. b. Aluminium alloys :Y-alloy,
3. Select proper non Hindalium, duralium, Magnelium.
ferrous alloys for given c. Bearing materials::Lead based and
applications. Tin based.
6. Powder 1. Define terms related to 6.1 Advantages, limitations and 08
Metallurgy powder metallurgy. applications of Powder Metallurgy
2. State different powder for Engineering products.
manufacturing 6.2 Brief Description of Powder product
processes. manufacturing. e.g. powder making,
3. Describe process flow blending, compacting, sintering,
sheet for manufacturing infiltration & impregnation.
powder metallurgy
product.
Total Hrs. 64
3

Domain)
1. Draw crystal structure of different engineering Engineering 4
materials. Materials - Structure
and Properties
2 Draw, locate and interpret various phases from Iron- Equilibrium diagram 6
Carbon equilibrium diagram.
3 Prepare Sample for microscopic examination of Cast 6
Iron/ steel
4 Carry out any one process of heat treatment on plain Heat Treatment Of 6
carbon steel. Steels
5 Prepare powder metallurgical component (any one) Powder Metallurgy 4
6 Perform test such as tensile test, hardness, impact 4

Engineering
test, spark test.(any one) and Predict mechanical
behavior of materials. Materials - Structure
and Properties
02
Skill Assessment
Total: 32
4

No.
R U A
.Engineering Materials
01 - Structure and 02(00) 04(04) 00(00) 06(04)
Properties
02 Equilibrium diagram 04(02) 06(04) 00(00) 10(06)
Ferrous metals and
03 alloys 02(02) 08(08) 06(00) 16(10)
Heat Treatment Of
04 02(00) 08(04) 06(06) 16(10)
Steels
05 Non ferrous Alloys 02(00) 04(04) 06(00) 12(04)
06 Powder Metallurgy 02(00) 08(00) 00(06) 10(06)
Total 14(04) 38(24) 18 (12) 70 (40)

option
2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
3 R 2
02 2 R 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
03 5 R 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 5 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 5 U 4 5 R 4 3/5
05 2 U 6 3 A 6 4 A 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 5 A 6 6 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing phase diagram, selection of material. writing procedure etc. 10
2 Performance 10
4 Viva voce 20
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(COs)
1 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
2 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
3 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
4 3 _ 2 2 _ _ _ 3 2 3 3 _
5 3 _ 2 2 _ _ _ 3 2 3 3 _
6 3 _ 2 2 _ _ _ 3 2 3 3 _

Year Of publication
1. Material science & V. D. Kodgire, S. V. Kodgire, Everest 10:8186314008
Metallurgy for engineers Publishing House, first edition, 2011 13:9788186314005
2. Engineering Materials & R. Srinivasan, Tata McGraw Hill 13- 978-0-07-067281-
Metallurgy Education Pvt. Ltd, first edition 1994 9
3. Heat Treatment: Principles T. V. Rajan, C. P. Sharma, Ashok 978-81-203-4095-4
and Techniques Kumar Sharma, Prentice Hall Of India.
2nd edition, 1994
4. Powder Metallurgy Anil Kumar Sinha, Dhanpat Rai 4567144058
Publications , 1st Edition ,1981
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=98lh5Q0M0cg, assessed on 16th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3_BH6HqpPtk, assessed on 16th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eHFI-xuZIiQ, assessed 16th March 2016
 http://www.engmatl.com/index.php?start=6, assessed on 16th March 2016
 http://downloadingisnotsin.net/material-science-and-metallurgy-by-kodgire-pdf-free-
download/, assessed on 22nd March 2016
 http://scitech.quickfound.net/, assessed on 27th April 2016

1. Models of crystal structure-(FCC,BCC,HCP)
2. Standard Fe-Fe3C equilibrium diagram
3. Microscope- magnification 100X
4. Grinder- Double ended
5. Polishing machine- cloth polished, rotating disc type
6. Muffle furnace- max temperature 10000c
7. Hardness tester- Rockwell c scale
8. Different Metallurgical products

CURRICULUM:

1. Mr. K. L. Meshram HOD, Metallurgical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. D. K. Mukharjee Retired Senior Metallurgist Ordnance Factory, Ambazari,
Nagpur
Engineering Nagpur.
4. Mr. Y.Y. Mahajan Assist. Professor , VNIT Nagpur
Metallurgy & Material
Science
5. Mr. S. B. Varadpande Managing director Orange city alloys Pvt. Ltd
Nagpur
6. Mr. Y. K. Gaiky Lecturer Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Sakoli
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/AE
COURSE TITLE : THERMAL ENGINEERING
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:04; TU:00;PR:00 (CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Thermal Engineering is a core subject in mechanical engineering. This course
includes the study of basic laws & concept of thermodynamics, gas laws, properties of
steam and steam generation. Mechanical engineer should understand working and
application of various processes of thermal power plants.
1. Apply fundamental concepts and laws of thermodynamics to thermodynamic
systems.
2. Illustrate the concept of steam generation, steam properties and vapour processes.
3. Analyze the construction and working of boiler and its mountings.
4. Interpret the construction and working of condenser and cooling towers.
5. Interpret the construction and working of steam turbine and Nozzle
6. Illustrate the different modes of heat transfer.
1
ME303E Thermal Engineering 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. Basic 1. Define fundamental 1.1Thermodynamic system, boundary,
18
Concepts concept of surrounding,
thermodynamics. Thermodynamic properties, state, process,
2. Apply first law of path of the system, Reversible and
thermodynamics to irreversible processes, Energy, Work and
various thermodynamic heat. Reversible work. Zeroth Law of
devices. Thermodynamic. (Simple Numerical).
3. Apply second law of 1.2 First Law of Thermodynamic Concept of
thermodynamics. perpetual Motion machine 1, Application
4. State ideal gas laws. of first law of Thermodynamic to Non
5. Represent various ideal flow or closed system. And steady flow
gas processes on P-V and process, Enthalpy, Ideal gas laws, gas
T-S diagram. equation. Characteristic & universal gas
constants, representation of various gas
processes on P-V and T-S diagram.
Specific heat at constant pressure &
constant volume, ratio of specific heats.
(Simple Numerical).
1.3 Limitation of first law of
thermodynamics, Second Law Of
Thermodynamics, Kelvin Plank &
Clausius statement, clausius Inequality,
Application of Second law to Heat
Engine, Heat Pump and refrigerator,
COP of Refrigerator, PMM-II, and
Entropy, Entropy change in reversible
and irreversible processes. (Simple
Numerical)
2.Steam 1. State the concept of 2.1Generation of steam at constant pressure
Generator 14
steam generation. with representation on various charts such
2. Calculate the properties as T-S,H-S. Properties of steam and use
of steam of steam table, Mollier chart, (Numerical
3. Use of steam tables and based on properties)
mollier chart. 2.2 Principles of steam generation in high
4. Describe construction pressure boiler, classification of boilers,
and working of different Water tube boiler and fire tube boiler,
types of boilers and Introduction of high pressure boiler
functions of boiler Lamont, Benson, Loffler, Velox boilers
mountings and 2.3 Boiler draught- natural & artificial,
accessories relative merits & demerits, list of boiler
5. Describe boiler draught mountings and Accessories & its function
2
3. Vapour 1. Represent various vapour 3.1 Vapour processes:-Constant pressure, 04

Cycle processes on P-V and T-S Constant temperature, constant
diagram. volume, constant enthalpy, constant
2. Describe various vapour entropy process
cycles. 3.2 Concept of Carnot cycle, Rankine
3. Draw various cycles on P- cycle, P-V and T-S diagram of
V and T-S diagram. Carnot cycle and Rankin cycle.
4. 1. Apply Dalton’s law to 4.1Dalton Law of partial pressure 10
Condensers condenser. Functions of condensers,
& Cooling 2. Describe construction and classification of condensers,
Towers working of condensers Construction and working of jet and
and cooling tower.
surface condensers,
3. Calculate condenser
4.2 Sources of air leakage and its effect,
efficiency, vacuum concept of condenser efficiency,
efficiency vacuum efficiency(numerical based
4. State the effect of air
leakage in condenser.
on efficiency)
4.3 Cooling Tower-Construction and
working of forced, natural and
induced draught cooling tower.
1. Define Mach number and 5.1 Steam nozzle: - Concept of M ach
5. Steam 14
critical pressure. number and critical pressure,
Nozzle & 2. State the application of Continuity equation, types of
Turbine steam nozzles. nozzles, equation for exit velocity,
3. Describe the principle of Application of steam nozzles.
working of steam turbine. Efficiency of nozzles.(no numerical)
4. Compare Impulse and 5.2 Steam turbine: - Classification of
reaction Turbine turbines, Principle of operation,
5. Describe the Methods working of Impulse and Reaction
to improve efficiency turbine. Basic difference between
of turbine, Impulse and reaction Turbine,
6. Describe necessity of Methods to improve efficiency of
Compounding of turbine, Compounding of turbines.
turbines (No numerical)
1. Describe various modes 6.1 Modes of heat transfer:-Conduction, 04
6. Heat of heat transfer. Convection and radiation, Fourier`s
Transfer 2. Define various law.
terminology used in 6.2 Radiation;-Thermal
radiation radiation,Absorptivity,Transmissivity,
Reflectivity,Emissivity,Black and
Gray body
Total Hrs. 64
 LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ASSIGNMENTS:
Assignment Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.

Nil
3

No.
R U A
01 Basic Concept 02(00) 08(04) 06(06) 16(10)
02 Steam Generator 06(00) 04(06) 04(00) 14(06)
03 Vapour Cycle 00(04) 08(00) 00(00) 08(04)
Condensers and Cooling
04 04(02) 10(00) 00(06) 14(08)
Towers
Steam Nozzles and
05 04(02) 04(04) 06(00) 14(06)
Turbines
06 Heat Transfer 04(02) 00(04) 00(00) 04(06)
Total 20(10) 34(18) 16(12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 U 2 1 U 2 6 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2
01 5/7
5 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 U 4 3 R 4 4 R 4 5 R 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 6 R 4 1 U 4 3/5
04 2 A 4 2 R 4 5 U 4 3 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 1 A 6 4 A 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 4 U 6 5 A 6 1 A 6 2/3
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

NIL

Course
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
2 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 1 3 3 _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
5 _ 3 _ _ _ _ 2 3 _ 3 3 _
6 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 1 3 3 _
For Automobile Engineering:

Course
Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _
2 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 1 3 _ _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 _ _
5 _ 3 _ _ _ _ 2 3 _ 3 _ _
6 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 1 3 _ _

Author, Publisher, Edition
and Year Of publication
Thermal Engineering: P.L. Ballaney, Khanna 10: 8174090312
Engineering Publishers, 24 th Edition,
1
Thermodynamics and Energy Reprint 2011
Conversion Techniques
6
Thermal Engineering D. K. Chavan & G.K.Pathak, 978-81-89401-20-7

2 Standard Publishing House, 2nd
Edition, 2013
Thermal Engineering R.K.Rajput, Laxmi 9788131808047
3 Publications (P) Ltd. 9th
Edition, 2015
Thermal Engineering S.L. Somasundaram, New Age 10: 8122409792
4
International Publisher, 1996 13: 978-8122409796
Thermal Engineering Vol. I Dr. S.S. Khandare, Charotar 9788185594682
5 (Thermodynamics And Heat Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,
Engines) 2008
Thermal Science and Dr. M.L.Mathur& Prof. F.S. 9788183600835
6 Engineering Mehta, Jain Book Depot
(JBD), 3rd Reprint, 2013
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aC7c1NgA-7M, assessed on 23 rd March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=is5wdVgPOkI, assessed on 23rd March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Wz62eqg0kqs, assessed on 28th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UW7Pm3kXJT8 ,assessed on 28th March 2016

CURRICULUM:
1. Mr.O.V.Sarode I/C HOD, Mechanical Government Polytechnic Nagpur
Engineering
2. Mr.S.W.Rajurkar Lecturer , Mechanical Government Polytechnic Nagpur
Engineering
3. Mrs.M.D.Kothekar Lecturer , Mechanical Government Polytechnic Nagpur
Engineering
4. Mr.K.S.Thekedar Lecturer , Mechanical Government Polytechnic Nagpur
Engineering
5. Mr. Mahesh Khanna Deputy Manager Ashok Leyland Ltd. Bhandara
6 Er. A.M.Onkar Chief Executive Onkar Furnitures, MIDC, Nagpur
Officer

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/PK
LEVEL NAME : PROFESSIONAL COURSES
COURSE TITLE : ENGINEERING DRAWING
PREREQUISITE : ME301E
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:02; TU:00;PR:04 (CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE : 04 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. EXAM : 02 HRs
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified as professional course. It describes the fundamentals,
facts, concepts, principles and techniques of Engineering drawing. The course illustrates
techniques of drawing in an engineering field. The concepts of drawing language are
used in expressing the ideas, conveying the instructions, which are used in carrying out
the jobs on the sites, shop floor etc. It helps to develop the idea of visualizing the actual
object or part on the basis of drawings and blue prints. This course is useful in
developing drafting and sketching skills of the student. This preliminary course aims at
building a foundation for the further course in machine drawing and other allied courses.
1. Relate the views of an object for drawing sectional views and missing views.
2. Interpret the technique of projection of lines , planes ,projection of solids and projection of
section of solids
3. Apply the technique of freehand sketches and welded joints.
4. Sketch sectional views and missing views.
5. Draw projection of lines, planes, projection of solids and section of solids.
6. Sketch appropriate freehand sketches of machine component and welded joints.
1
ME401E Engineering Drawing 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1. Sectional 1. Visualize given pictorial 1.1Types of sections and conversions of 05
Orthograp view. pictorial views into sectional
hic views 2. Draw sectional views. orthographic views.(compete objects
involving Slots, ribs etc)
2. Missing 3. Visualize given views. 2.1 Draw missing view from the given 05
views 4. Draw missing views orthographic views.
3. Projection 1. Draw projections of lines 3.1 lines inclined to both the reference 08
of lines and locate its traces. planes .Locate H.T., V. T.(limited to
and planes 2. Draw projections of planes. both ends in first quadrant)
3.2 Projection of simple planes.eg. circular,
square, rectangular ,rhombus,
pentagonal and hexagonal. inclined
to one reference plane and perpendicular
to other ( first angle method of
projection only)
4 Projection 1. Visualize different types of 4.1 Projections of prisms, pyramid, cone,
of solids regular solids. cylinder, tetrahedron and cube, with 05
2. Draw the projections of their axes inclined to one reference
regular solids. plane and parallel to other.
5. Section of 1. Visualize cut models of 5.1 Prism and cylinder-Axis inclined to one 05
solids different types of regular reference plane and parallel to other,
solids. Axis parallel to both the reference plane.
2. Draw the projections of Whereas section plane is inclined to one
different cut models of reference plane and perpendicular to
regular solids. other.
5.2 Cone , Pyramid, Cube Tetrahedron , -
Axis inclined to one reference plane and
parallel to other ,where as section plane
is inclined to one reference plane and
perpendicular to other .
6. Free hand 1. Draw proportionate 6.1 keys:- sunk, saddle, tapper, woodruff, 04
sketches freehand sketches of given and cone .
machine elements 6.2 Couplings:- Muff, flange, Oldham ,
2. Select proper fasteners and 6.3 Pulleys:- Flat belt, V-belt, fast and loose
foundation bolts pulleys.
6.4 Welding symbols and welded joints.
6.5 Pipe joints and fitting.- Flanged joint,
socket and spigot joint , union joint
.Nipple, coupler, Reducing socket, tee,
cross, plug, elbow and bend .
Total Hrs. 32
2
B. LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES:

als Domain)
1. Draw two problem on sectional orthographic views. 1.Sectional 10
(01 Sheet) Orthographic views
2 Draw two problem on Missing views. 2.Missing views 08

(01 Sheet)
3 Draw two problems on projection of lines and 3.Projection of 12
planes each . lines and planes
(01 Sheet)
4 Draw two problems on projection of solids. 4 Projection of 12
(01 Sheet) solids
5 Draw two problems on section of solids. 5. Section of solids 12
(01 Sheet)
6 Draw Free Hand Sketches of the following- Any 6. Free hand 10
two keys , any one pulley, any one coupling, any sketches
one welded joint, any one pipe joint. (01 Sheet)
( All welding symbols and all pipe fittings are to be
drawn in the practical sketch book)
Total Hrs. 64
Note:-Use A2 Size of drawing sheets.
C. LIST OF ASSIGNMENTS:
Practical’ Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Units Hrs.

s Domain)
1. Draw five problems on sectional orthographic 1.Sectional ---
views.(On Practical sketch book) Orthographic views
2. Draw five problems on Missing views. (On 2.Missing views ---

Practical sketch book)
3. Draw five problems on projection of lines and 3.Projection of ---
planes each .(On Practical sketch book) lines and planes
4. Draw five problems on projection of solids. (On 4 Projection of ---
Practical sketch book) solids
5. Draw five problems on section of solids.(On 5. Section of solids ---
Practical sketch book)
6. Draw Free Hand Sketches of the following- keys 6. Free hand ---
, pulleys, couplings, welded joints, pipe joints & sketches
fittings. (On Practical sketch book)
3

No.
R U A
l Marks
01 Sectional 00(00) 12(00) 00(00) 12(00)
Orthographic views
02 Missing views 00(00) 00(00) 12(00) 12(00)
03 Projection of lines and 00(00) 14(08) 00(00) 14(08)
planes
04 Projection of solids 00(00) 10(10) 00(00) 10(10)
05 Section of solids 00(00) 00(00) 10(10) 10(10)
06 Free hand sketches 12(08) 00(00) 00(00) 12(08)
Total 12(08) 36(18) 22(10) 70 (36)

option
01 1 U 12 1/1
02 2 A 12 1/1
03 3 U 6 3 U 8 3 U 8 2/3
04 4 U 10 4 U 10 1/2
05 5 A 10 5 A 10 1/2
06 6 R 4 6 R 4 6 R 4 6 R 4 6 R 4 3/5
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Drawing
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Practical
Assignments Continuous 10 -- Sketch 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Book
Examination)
(Term End
Drawing
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Drawing
Drawing
Portfolio Continuous 05 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Portfolio
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

Nil

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
2 _ 3 _ __ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
3 _ 3 _ _ __ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 1 3 3 3 3 _
S.N. Title Author, Publisher, Edition ISBN Number

1. Engineering Drawing Practice Bureau of Indian Standards, 81-7061-091-2
for Schools and Colleges IS: Third Reprint, October 1998
SP-46
2. Engineering Drawing N. D. Bhatt, Charotar 978-93-80358-17-8
Publishing house 2010
3. Machine Drawing N. D. Bhatt & V. M Panchal, 978-93-80358-11-6
Charotar Publishing
house2010
4 Engineering Drawing D. A. Jolhe, Tata McGraw- 978-0-07-064837-1
Hill Edu.2010
5. Engineering Drawing R. K. Dhawan , S. Chand & 81-219-1431-0
co.
6 Engineering Drawing P. J Shaha, S. Chand & co. 81-219-2964-4
2008
6
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TJ4jGyD-WCw, assessed on 25th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dmt6_n7Sgcg, assessed on 25th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_MQScnLXL0M, assessed on 26th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3WXPanCq9LI, assessed on 26th March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fvjk7PlxAuo, assessed on 27th March 2016
 http://www.me.umn.edu/courses/me2011/handouts/engg%20graphics.pdf , assessed on 27th
March 2016

2) Minidrafter

CURRICULUM:

1. Mr. O. V. Sarode I/C HOD, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. M.G. Thote Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Mr. G.H Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
4. Mr. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur
5. Shri. G. F. Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur
6. Dr. S. S. Baraskar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/AE/PK

COURSE CODE : AM407E
COURSE TITLE : STRENGTH OF MATERIAL
PREREQUISITE : AM301E
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:03; TU:01;PR:02(CLOCK HRs.)
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT : : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Concepts and principles involved in the analysis and design of various machines and
machine components along with mechanical properties of engineering materials in
Mechanical Engineering, Automobile engineering and Packaging technology are covered
in this course. Design and analysis of machines and it’s components needs the basic
understanding of mechanical properties of material and their behavior under stress. The
approach of teaching should develop critical thinking in the students. In laboratory the
experiments integrate the knowledge and desired skill in students.
1. Develop an understanding of the behaviour of material and components subjected to
various types of loading
2. Analyse and design engineering problems subjects to various forces.
3. Select appropriate materials considering engineering properties, economy, safety and
sustainability.
4. Draw shear force diagram, bending moment diagram, bending stress and shear stress
diagrams.
5. Prepare the specimen as per Indian standard (IS) specifications, fix it and operate the
machine to carry out the test.
6. Record the readings and the behaviour of material till fracture and analyse its failure
pattern
1
AM407E Strength of Material 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1 Define various terms and 1.1 Definition of stress, strain, elasticity. 08
1.Simple
compute their values Definition of rigid, elastic and
Stress And
2.Calculate Material plastic bodies. Deformation of
Strain elastic body under various forces.
Properties Under
Longitudinal & Lateral 1.2 Type of stresses-normal and
Loads tangential, normal tensile and
3 Analyse Composite & compressive stresses, standard
Compound stress systems stress strain curve for mild steel bar
4 Calculate design constants under tension test, Hook’s law,
elastic limit, modulus of elasticity,
for various conditions.
factor of safety, yieldand working
5 Calculate the change in stresses.
dimensions and volume of 1.3 Stress and strain in composite
the body subjected to section under axial loading.
uniaxial, biaxial and triaxial 1.4 Stress and strain due to temperature
loads/stresses. variation developed in
6 Calculate the stress, strain homogeneous and composite bars.
due to temperature variation 1.5 Longitudinal and Lateral strain,
in homogeneous and Poisson’s ratio, biaxial and triaxial
compound bars. stresses, volumetric strain, change
7 Compute Strain Energy in volume, Bulk modulus.
under Different Types of 1.6 Shear stress and strain, modulus of
Loading rigidity, complementary shear
stress and induced tension and
compression due to it.
1.7 Relation between modulus of
elasticity, modulus of rigidity and
bulk modulus.
1.8 Differentiate between Sudden ,
Gradual & Impact Loads
1.9 Define Strain Energy , Proof
Resilience modulus of resilience.
1.10 Strain energy stored in a body
when subjected to gradual, Sudden
and impact load
1 Define various terms and 2.1 Type of beams, supports and loads. 08
2. Shear
compute their values 2.2 Concept and definition of shear
Force &
2. Draw Shear Force & force and bending moment.
Bending
Bending Moment Diagram 2.3 Shear force and bending moment
Moment
for Statically Determinate diagram for simply supported,
Beams. cantilever and over hanging beams
3 Calculate the shear force subjected to point loads and
and bending moment for uniformly distributed loads only.
determinate beams with 2.4 Point of maximum sagging and
load combinations of point hogging bending moment, point of
2
load and uniformly contra-flexure, Relation between load,

distributed load. shear force and bending moment.
4 Differentiate shape of shear
force diagram and bending
moment diagram for point
load and uniformly
distributed load.
1 Define various terms and 3.1 Definition, M.I. of plane lamina, 08
3. Moment
compute their values radius of gyration, parallel and
of Inertia perpendicular axes theorems, M.I. of
2. Compute Moment of rectangular, circular semicircular and
Inertia of Symmetric & triangular section
asymmetric structural 3.2M.I. of symmetrical and
sectionsusing parallel and Unsymmetrical I-section, channel
perpendicular axes section, T-section, angle section, &
theorems. Hollow sections and built up section
about centroidal axes
3.3 Polar Moment of Inertia of circular
sections.
4. Principal 1. Define terms related to 4.1 Definition of principal plane, 06

principal planes and oblique plane.
Planes and
Stresses principal stresses 4.2 State of stress at a point in two
2. Calculate Principal Stresses dimensional stress system, different
& Principal Plane on a states of stresses.
plane in a Strained 4.3 Mohr’s circle, application of Mohr’s
structural Material circle.
3. Calculate Principal stresses 4.4 Resultant stress, principal stresses –
graphically by Mohr’s major and minor, position of principal
Circle planes
1.Define terms related with 5.1 Definition, short column, long 08
5Columns,
Columns column, type of end conditions for
Direct and 2.State end conditions of columns, Buckling of axially loaded
,Bending column columns..
Stresses 3 Define Effective length, 5.2Effective length, radius of gyration,
radius of gyration, slenderness ratio, Assumptions made
slenderness ratio Euler’s in Euler’s theory, Euler’s buckling
buckling load load
4,State Assumptions made in 5.3Rankine’s formula used for
Euler’s theory, Euler’s calculated crippling loads.
buckling load 5.4Concept of bending stresses,
5 Calculated Crippling load Equation of bending.
by Eulers and Rankines 5.5Concept of direct and eccentric loads
Formula Short compression member
6. Stresses of various (Rectangular, square, circular
structural components sections) subjected to eccentric loads
7.Calculate direct and about any one or both the centroidal
bending Stresses of a axis.
rectangular ,square and
circular column
3
6.Thick and 1. State torsional equation and 7.1 Theory of torsion, Torsional 04
Thin moment of resistance for equation, Moment of resistance,
circular shaft Assumption made in theory of pure
Cylindrical
Shell 2. State assumption made in torsion.
theory of pure torsion 7.2Shear stress distribution across the
3 Calculate shear strength , section of circular shaft, strength of
torsional rigidity and polar circular shaft, polar modulus
modulus of circular and .7.3Stresses in walls of thin cylindrical
hallow shaft shells due to internal pressure,
4.Define thin, thick circumferential and longitudinal
cylindrical shell, stresses
Circumferential and 7.4Change in dimensions and volume
longitudinal stresses.. of cylindrical shell due to internal
5.Calculate Circumferential pressure.
and longitudinal strain and 7.5Thin spherical shells, change in
stresses and volume due to diameter and volume due to internal
internal pressure of pressure (No derivation).
cylindrical shell
7.Torsion 1. State torsional equation and 7.1 Theory of torsion, Torsional 06
moment of resistance for equation, Moment of resistance,
circular shaft Assumption made in theory of pure
2. State assumption made in torsion.
theory of pure torsion 7.2Shear stress distribution across the
3 Calculate shear strength , section of circular shaft, strength of
torsional rigidity and polar circular shaft, polar modulus
modulus of circular and
hallow shaft
Total Hrs. 48
4

Practica Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
ls
GROUP A (ATLEAST 2)
1 Operate Universal testing machine for different 1. Simple Stress 02
types of test. And Strain
2 Measure the elongation of steel by using 1. Simple Stress 02
Extensometer. And Strain
3 Operate Compression testing machine for 1. Simple Stress 02
compression test. And Strain
GROUP B (ATLEAST 6)
4 1.Simple stress and 02
Perform Tension test on mild steel plane bar.
strain
Perform Tension test on HYSD steel.
strain
Perform Shear test on different metals.
strain
7 Perform Izod impact test. 1Strain Energy 02
Perform Brinell’s hardness test. strain

Perform Compression test on metals.
strain
10 5.Direct and 02
Perform Flexure test on wooden and steel beam.
bending stresses
11 Perform Torsion In Circular Shaft 6.Torsion 02
GROUP C: LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS
12 Draw shears force and bending moment diagrams 2 Shear force & 08
of different types of beams and loadings. (Four bending moment
problems on – Two A2 sizesheets.)
13 Draw Mohar’s circle for Principal planes and 6.Principal stresses 06
stresses(Four problems on –Two A2 size sheet) and planes
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs 32
C. LIST OF TUTORIALS:
Tutorials
Numericals based on- Simple stress strain, Shear force and bending moment, 08
Moment of Inertia
Numericals based on -Principal planes, Direct and bending, Thin cylinders, Torsion 08
Total Hrs. 16
5

No.
R U A
Simple stress and
01 04(02) 04(06) 08(00) 16(08)
strain
Shear force &bending
02 02(02) 06(06) 04(00) 12(08)
moment
03 Moment of inertia 02(00) 04(00) 00(04) 06(04)
Principal plane and
04 02(00) 06(04) 00(00) 08(04)
stresses
Columns, direct and
05 00(00) 06(04) 08(04) 14(08)
bending stresses
Thin and thick
06 00(00) 08(00) 00(04) 08(04)
cylindrical shell
07 Torsion 00(00) 00(00) 06(04) 06(04)
Total 10(04) 34(20) 26 (16) 70(40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
2 R 2
02 1 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
03 1 A 4 2 A 4 3 A 4 5 A 4 6 A 4 3/5
04 1 A 4 4 A 6 5 A 4 6 A 4 7 A 4 3/5
05 1 A 6 2 U 6 4 A 6 2/3
06 2 U 6 5 U 6 7 U 6 2/3
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Drawing free body diagram, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure 20
etc.
2 Calculation, Result, Drawing Graphs(if any 10
3 Viva voce 20
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - -
2 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - -
3 3 - - - - - - - - 3 - -
4 3 - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 3 - -
5 3 - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 3 - -
6 3 - 2 2 - - 2 2 - 3 - -

S.N. Title Author, Publisher, Edition and ISBN Number
Year Of publication
1 Strength of Materials, Vol. I: S. Timoshenko, CBS; 3rd 978-8123910307
Elementary Theory and edition , 2004
Problems
2 Mechanics of Materials Timoshenko Gere, CBS; 2nd 978-8123908946
edition, 2006
3 Mechanics of Materials R.C. Hibbeler , Pearson 978-9332518605
Education; 9th edition , 2013
4 A Textbook of Strength of Dr. R.K. Bansal , Laxmi; 978-8131808146
Materials Publications(P) Ltd. 5th edition,
2012
5 Strength of Material R. S. Khurmi., S. Chand & Co. 978-8121928229
Ltd.
6 Strength of Material S. Ramamurtham, Dhanpat Rai 818743354X,
Publishing Co. 9788187433545
7 Mechanics of Structure Vol 1 S. B. Junnarkar and H. J. Shah, 978-9380358659
Charotar Publishing House Pvt.
Ltd., 2012
8 Strength of Material Sunil S. Deo, Nirali Prakashan , 978-9383073283
2013
8
 E-REFERECNES:
 https://www.youtube.com/feature=player_detailpage, assessed on 28 th Sep.2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=InEpKlYBkvk&feature=player_detailpage
assessed on 28 th Sep.2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l20kF6fhScA&feature=player_detailpage
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RJXJpeH78iU&feature=player_detailpage

 Universal Testing machine of capacity 400kN,600 kN/1000kN, analog type/digital
type with all attachments and accessories.
 Extensometer with least count 0.01mm, maximum extension 25 mm with single dial
gauge/ digital display suitable for various gauge length
 Compression testing machine of capacity 2000KN, analog /digital type having facility
to measure deformation with all attachments and accessories.
 Izod/Charpy impact testing machine confirming to IS:1757.
 Tile flexural testing machine confirming to IS:654,capacity 200Kg with uniform
loading rate of 45 to 55 Kg/minute provided with lead shots
 Hot Air Oven with thermostatic control having temp. range 100 to 105o C
 Accessories: venire caliper, meter scale, weighing balance, weights, punch, file,
hammer, screw driver, pliers ,etc.
 WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS CURRICULUM:

Y.K. Chandarana Head of Applied Government Polytechnic,
1.
Mechanics Dept. Nagpur.
Prof. A.P.Waghmare Lecturer in Applied Government Polytechnic,
2.
Mechanics Nagpur.
Prof A.G.Bhaiswar Lecturer in Applied Government Polytechnic,
3.
Mechanics Nagpur.
4. M. R. Shelote Consultant M. R. Associates, Nagpur
5. Dr. R. N. Khapre Associate Professor RCOE, Nagpur
6. A. J. Fulzele Assistant Secretary (Tech.) MSBTE, RO, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM

LEVEL NAME : PROFESSIONAL COURSES.
COURSE TITLE : MACHINE DRAWING
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 04 HRs
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. : 02 HR
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified as professional course. It describes the
fundamentals, facts, concepts, principles and techniques of Machine drawing. The course
illustrates techniques of drawing in an engineering field. A Mechanical Engineer,
irrespective of their field of operation in an industry, is expected to possess a thorough
understanding of drawing, which includes clear visualization of objects and the proficiency
in reading and interpreting a wide variety of production drawings. Besides, they are also
expected to possess certain degree of drafting skills depending upon job function, to perform
day to day activity i.e. communicating and discussing ideas with supervisors and passing on
instructions to subordinates. This course envisages reinforcing and enhancing the knowledge
and skill acquired in the earlier two courses viz. Engineering Graphics & Engineering
Drawing.
1. Interpret the projection of auxiliary views and development of surfaces of solids.
2. Interpret intersection of solids and technique of conventional representation as per
SP46.
3. Interpret the technique of drawing details and assembly of machine components
4. Draw the projection of auxiliary views and development of surfaces of solids
5. Draw the projections of intersection of solids and conventional representation as
per SP46.
6. Draw the details and assembly of machine components
1
ME402E Machine Drawing 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1. Development 1. Develop the lateral 1.1 Develop the lateral surfaces of 08
of surfaces of surfaces of various solids regular solids viz. Prism, cylinder,
solid. with its engineering Pyramid, Cone.
applications. 1.2 Development of surfaces of solids in
section and solids with holes and
slots.
1.3 Applications such as Tray ,Funnel,
Chimney, pipe bends etc.
2. Auxiliary 1. Draw the projection of 2.1 Auxiliary planes, Projection of 08

views objects on Auxiliary object on auxiliary planes
plane 2.2 Complete regular views with the help
2. Draw complete auxiliary of given auxiliary views.
view.
3. Intersection of 1. Visualize & draw curves Curves of intersection of the surfaces 08
solids of intersection of surfaces of the solids in following cases
of solids 3.1 Prism with prism, cylinder with
cylinder, prism with cylinder when i)
axes are at 900 & intersect ii) The
axes are at 900 & offset
3.2 Cylinder with cone when the axes of
the cylinder is parallel to both the
reference planes & cone resting on
base on H.P. & with axis intersecting
and offset from axis of cylinder.
4 Conventional 1. Draw the conventional Standard convention using
representation representation. SP- 46 (1988) 06
4.1 Materials – C.I., M.S., Brass, Bronze,
Aluminum, Wood, Glass, Concrete
& Rubber
4.2 Long & Short break in pipe, rod &
shaft
4.3 Ball & roller bearing, pipe joints,
cocks, valves, internal / external
threads
4.4 Various sections – half, removed,
revolved, offset, partial & aligned
section
4.5 Knurling, secreted shafts, splined
shafts
4.6 Springs with square & flat ends,
gears, sprocket wheels & chain
wheels
4.7 Countersunk & counter bore, tapers
5. Assembly to 1. Visualize assembly 5.1 Introduction – basic principles of 09

details drawing dismantling process
2. Draw details from 5.2 Preparation of detailed working
assembly drawing drawing of the following: i)
Universal & Oldham’s Coupling ii)
Footstep & pedestal bearing iii)
Lathe tool post, pipe vice iv) Screw
jack v) Cross head vi) Gland &
stuffing box vii) Steam stop valve &
non return valve ( Max. 8 parts )
6. Details to 1. Visualize details of 6.1 Introduction – basic principles of 09
assembly component. process of assembly
2. Draw assembly drawing 6.2 Preparation of assembly drawing
from given details. from the given details of components
i) Universal & Oldham’s Coupling
ii) Footstep & pedestal bearing iii)
Lathe tool post, pipe vice iv) Screw
jack v) Cross head vi) Gland &
stuffing box vii) Steam stop valve &
non return valve ( Max. 8 parts )
Total Hrs. 48
B. LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES:
Practical’s Specific Learning Outcomes Units Hrs.
(Psychomotor Domain)
1. Draw two problems.(o1 sheet) 1. Development of surfaces of solid. 10
2. Draw two problems.(o1 sheet) 2.Auxiliary views 12
3. Draw two problems.(o1 sheet) 3.Intersection of solids 12
4. Draw conventional representation of any 4 Conventional representation 06
ten machine elements.(01 sheet)
5. Draw details of the component from 5. Assembly to details 12
given assembly (01 sheet)
6. Draw assembly drawing from the given 6.Details to assembly 12
component in two views (01 sheet)
Total Hrs. 64
Note ;- Use A2 size of drawing sheets.
C. LIST OF ASSIGNMENTS:
Practical Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Hrs.
Units
’s Domain)
1. Draw four problems for home assignment in practical 1. Development of -
sketch book. surfaces of solid.
2. Draw four problems for home assignment in practical 2.Auxiliary views -
sketch book.
3. Draw four problems for home assignment in practical 3.Intersection of solids -
sketch book.
4. Draw conventional representation of machine 4 Conventional --
elements. representation
5. Draw two problems for home assignment in practical 5. Assembly to details --
sketch book.
6 Draw two problems for home assignment in practical 6.Details to assembly --
sketch book.
Unit Unit Levels from Cognition Process Dimension Total

No. Marks
R U A
Development of
01 00(00) 10(00) 00(10) 10(10)
surfaces of solid.
02 Auxiliary views 00(00) 10(10) 00(00) 10(10)
03 Intersection of solids 00(00) 00(10) 10(00) 10(10)
Conventional
04 12(06) 00(00) 00(00) 12(06)
Representation
05 Assembly to details 00(00) 00(00) 14(00) 14(00)
06 Details to assembly 00(00) 00(00) 14(00) 14(00)
12(06) 20(20) 38(10) 70 (36)


option
01 1 U 10 1 A 10 1/2
02 2 U 10 2 U 10 1/2
03 3 A 10 3 U 10 1/2
04 4 R 3 4 R 3 4 R 3 4 R 3 4 R 3 4 R 3 4/6
05 5 A 14 1/1
06 6 A 14 1/1


What Frequency
Two PT
Drawing
(Continuous
Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Practical
Assignments Continuous 10 -- Sketch 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Book
Examination)
(Term End
Drawing
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Drawing
Drawing
Portfolio Continuous 05 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Portfolio
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course

Nil

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
2 _ 3 _ __ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _

Year Of publication
1. Engineering Drawing Bureau of Indian Standards, Third 81-7061-091-2
Practice for Schools and Reprint, October 1998
Colleges IS: SP-46
2. Engineering Drawing N. D. Bhatt, Charotar Publishing 978-93-80358-17-8
house, 2010
3. Machine Drawing N. D. Bhatt & V. M Panchal, 978-93-80358-11-6
Charotar Publishing house, 2010
4 Mechanical Engineering N. S. Salunke, Tech-Max 978-93-5077-209-6
Drawing Publication,
5. Machine Drawing R. K. Dhawan , S. Chand &co. 81-219-0824-8
6. Machine Drawing Sidheshwar, Tata Mc Grew Hill 9780074603376

Publication
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://blogpuneet.wordpress.com/2013/11/19/wall-bracket-3d/, assessed on 24th

August 2016
 http://www.slideshare.net/shameem.mist/engineering drawing, assessed on 24th
August 2016
 https://india.oup.com/orcs/9780198070771/, assessed on 24th August 2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jAqTQdE-mpE,
2) Minidrafter
 LIST OF EXPERTS & TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS CURRICULUM:

1. Mr. O. V. Sarode I/C HOD, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. M. G. Thote Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE CODE : ME403E$
COURSE TITLE : THEORY OF MACHINES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE. : 03 Hrs.
PR. TEE. : 02 Hrs. (External)
PT : 01 Hrs.
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified under professional courses. Mechanical engineering
technicians primarily work as production, maintenance and design supervisors. In order
to perform such jobs they should have ability to analyze, identify and interpret various
mechanisms and the machines. Operation and maintenance of machines need detail
information of relative motions and the functional aspect of mechanism used in the
machinery and the forces and couples on the members of the machine due to external
forces. The course imparts the facts, concepts, principles, procedure, kinematics analysis
of mechanisms, cams, power transmission device, flywheel and governor, brake and
dynamometer, bearing, clutches, etc. Detail knowledge of above mentioned aspects with
deep insight to the practical applications develop a professional confidence in them to
become successful engineers.
1. Apply suitable mechanisms, velocity and acceleration in mechanism and drives for
particular application.
2. Analyze cams and follower, flywheel and governor and graphically and analytically
counterbalance mass.
3. Recognize various components of brakes and dynamometer, power transmission
devices, clutches and bearings
4. Construct cam profile, displacement, velocity and acceleration diagram.
5. Calculate various terms related to open belt drive and adapt Grashof’s law for four bar
mechanism.
6. Operate centrifugal governor, belt drives and different mechanisms, determine
graphically and analytically counterbalance mass.
1
ME403E Theory of Machines 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. 1. Define various definitions 1.1 Kinematics of Machines: Definitions
08
Introduction related to kinematics and of Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics,
to Kinematics mechanisms. Kinetics, Kinematic link, Kinematic
and 2. List types of terms related to pairs with it’s types, Constrained
Mechanisms. kinematics and mechanisms. motion and it’s type, Kinematic
3. State types of inversions of chain with classification,
mechanisms. Mechanism, Gruebler’s criterion,
4. Draw the sketches of Inversion, Machine and structure.
mechanisms and inversions.
1.2 Inversions of Kinematic Chain:
5. Describe different
Inversion of four bar chain:
mechanisms and inversions.
Coupled wheels of Locomotive
6. State uses of different
and Pantograph.
mechanisms.
Inversion of Single Slider
Crank chain: Rotary I.C. Engines
mechanism, Whitworth quick
return mechanism and Crank and
slotted lever quick return
mechanism.
Inversion of Double Slider
Crank Chain: Scotch Yoke
Mechanism and Oldham’s
Coupling.
1.3 Common mechanisms:
a) Ackerman’s steering
mechanism
b) Differential gear mechanism.
2. 1. Define terms related to 2.1 Definition of Linear displacement,

Angular displacement. 08
Velocity and velocity and acceleration.
Acceleration 2. State the concept of relative 2.2 Concept of relative velocity and
in velocity and acceleration. relative acceleration of a point on
Mechanisms. 3. Calculate velocity and link, Angular velocity and angular
acceleration for given acceleration, Inter relation between
mechanism. linear and angular velocity and
4. Draw velocity and acceleration.
acceleration diagram for 2.3 Drawing of velocity and acceleration
given mechanism. diagrams of given configuration.
Numericals on determination of
velocity and acceleration of a point
on link by relative velocity method
(excluding Coriollis component of
acceleration).
2.4 Determine velocity and acceleration
of different links in reciprocating
engine mechanism by Analytical
method (No derivation) and Klein’s
construction.
2
3. 1. Define terms related to 3.1 Definition of Cams and followers

08
Cams and cam. with their detailed classification and
Follower 2. Classify cams and follower. applications, Cam terminology.
3. Construct displacement 3.2 Displacement diagram when the
diagram and cam profiles follower moves with
for the given type of (i) Uniform Velocity (ii) S.H.M.
follower motion with and (iii) Uniform acceleration and
without offset. retardation.
Simple numerical on construction of
Radial cam profiles with Knife-edge
and Roller followers with and
without offset.
4. 1. Define Flywheel and 4.1 Flywheel: Definition, Function
06
Flywheel and governor. and Applications of flywheel,
Governors 2. Compare flywheel and Turning moment diagram for
governor. four stroke single cylinder I. C.
3. State terms related to the Engine. (No numericals), Define
governor. Coefficient of fluctuation of
4. Describe with neat sketch energy, Coefficient of fluctuation
types of governors. of speed and its significance.(No
5. Select type of governor for numericals).
particular application. 4.2 Governors: Definition, Function
and applications, its comparison
with flywheel.
Types of governor:
a) Inertia governors.
b) Centrifugal governors.
i) Porter governor
ii) Proell governor
iii) Hartnell governor
iv) Hartung governor
v) Wilson-Hartnell governor.
Governor terminology .
(No numericals ).
5. 1. Classify power 5.1 Power transmission:
08
Power transmission drives. Types of Drives – Belt, Chain,
Transmission , 2. Select suitable power Rope, Gear drives and their
Balancing and transmission drive for comparison.
Vibration particular applications. Belt Drives:
3. Compare different types of i) Flat belt, V– belt and their
power transmission drives. applications, material for Flat
4. Calculate various and V-belt.
parameters in belt drive. ii) Terms used for belt drive :
5. State concept of balancing. Angle of lap, Belt length, Slip
6. Find balancing mass and and creep, velocity ratio, ratio of
position of plane. tight side and slack side tension,
centrifugal tension and initial
tension, condition for maximum
power transmission (No
derivation, Simple numericals).
Chain Drives : Advantages and
disadvantages, classification of
chain.
Gear Drive:
Gear terminology,
3
types of gears and gear trains, and

their selection for different
applications. Train value for
simple, compound and epicyclic
gear train. (No numericals.)
Rope Drives: Types, applications,
advantages and limitations of rope
drives.
5.2 Balancing: Concept of balancing,
Balancing of single rotating
mass, Balancing of several masses
rotating in the same plane,
Analytical and graphical
Methods.(Simple numerical.)
5.3 Vibration: Concept, terminology,
causes.
1. Define clutches, bearing, 6.1 Clutches: Definition, classification
10
6. brakes and dynamometers. and applications of clutch, Power
Clutches, 2. Describe construction and transmission through friction by
Bearigs,Brakes working of various types of uniform pressure and uniform wear
And clutches, bearing, brakes theories, Construction and working
Dynamometer. and dynamometers. of Single plate, Multiplate,
3. Select clutches, bearing, Centrifugal and Cone clutch (No
brakes and dynamometers derivation, simple numericals on
for particular applications. Single and Multiplate clutches.)
4. Calculate torque required to 6.2 Bearings : Definition, Details of
overcome friction and Simple pivot , Collar and Conical
power lost in friction in pivot bearing. (No derivation).
clutches and bearings. Calculation of torque and power
5. Compare between brakes lost in friction.
and dynamometers 6.3 Brakes: Definition, Classification of
6. Calculate terms related to Brakes, Introduction to Disc brake,
brake. Construction and working of Block
brake, Band brake , Combined
band and block brake, Internal
expanding shoe brake
(No derivation,) Find braking
force , braking torque and power.
6.4 Dynamometer: Definition ,
Construction and working of :
(i) Prony brake dynamometer.
(ii) Rope brake dynamometer.
(iii) Hydraulic dynamometer.
(iv) Eddy current Dynamometer
(No numericals).
Total Hrs. 48
4

Practical’s Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
1 Identify links, types of links, kinematic chain, in Introduction To 04
following mechanisms. Kinematics and
1) Ackerman’s steering mechanism Mechanism
2) Coupling rod of locomotive.
3) Oldham’s coupling.
4) Elliptical Trammel.
5) Geneva mechanism
6) Water hand pumps mechanism.
Prepare proportionate sketches of above
mechanisms.
2 Use Grashof’s law for identifying four bar Introduction To 02
mechanism. Kinematics and
Mechanism
3 Determine velocity and acceleration of various links Velocity and 04
of the given two mechanisms, by relative velocity Acceleration In
method for analysis of motion of links. (Two Mechanisms
Problems on A2 size sheet).
4 Determine velocity and acceleration in an I.C. Velocity and 04
engine’s slider crank mechanism by Klein’s Acceleration In
construction.( One Problem with varying crank Mechanisms
angle on A2 size sheet).
5 Construct Displacement diagram Cam profile of a Cams and 04
radial cam for the given follower type and given Follower
motion of follower with offset and without offset.
(Four Problems on A2 size sheet).
6 Identify and locate various components of Flywheel and 04
Centrifugal Governor. Governors
7 Calculate slip, length of belt, angle of contact in an 04
Power
open belt drive .
Transmission
and
Balancing
8 Determine graphically and analytically 04
Power
counterbalance mass and its direction for complete
Transmission
balancing of a system of several masses rotating in and
a single plane.(Two problems on A2 size sheet).
Balancing
02
Skill Assessment
Total Hrs. 32
5
Unit Units Levels from Cognition Process Total

No. Dimension Marks
R U A
1 Introduction To
Kinematics and 04(00) 06(00) 00(06) 10(06)
Mechanism
2 Velocity and Acceleration
02(00) 04(04) 06(04) 12(08)
In Mechanisms
3 Cams and Follower 02(00) 04(00) 06(06) 12(06)
4 Flywheel and Governors 00(02) 06(04) 04(00) 10(06)
5 Power Transmission and
00(00) 06(06) 06(00) 12(06)
Balancing
6 Clutches, Bearings,
Brakes and 02(04) 08(04) 04(00) 14(08)
Dynamometers.
Total 10(06) 34(18) 26(16) 70(40)


option
1 U 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 U 2 6 R 2 5 U 2
01 5/7
4 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 R 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 6 R 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 4 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
04 4 A 4 6 U 4 6 A 4 2 A 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 3 A 6 5 U 6 1 A 6 2/3
06 2 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Drawing diagrams of mechanisms, governors ,cam profile , selection of 10
equipment’s. writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawings (if any ) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _
2 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _
3 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _
4 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 _ 2 3 _
5 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 _ 2 3 _
6 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 _ 2 3 _
 REFERENCE and TEXT BOOKS:

Year Of publication
1. Theory of Machines Shigley, Joseph E., Uicker, John 13: 9780070569300
and Mechanism. Joseph, McGraw-Hill
Companies, 2nd Edition 1994
2. Theory of Machines. R.S. Khurmi and J.K. Gupta, S
Chand and company ltd.14th 10:812192524X
Edition, 2005
3. Theory of Machines. S.S. Ratan , Tata McGraw-Hill 13: 9780070144774
Education Pvt. Ltd. 3rd Edition,
2009
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mechanism_(engineering) , assessed on 29th July, 2016
 http://royalmechanicalbuzz.blogspot.in/2015/04/theory-of-machines-by-rs-khurmi-
ebook-pdf.html assessed on 29th July, 2016
 http://nptel.ac.in/video.php?subjectId=112104121 assessed on 3rd October, 2016
8

 Model of
i) Ackerman’s steering mechanism
ii) Coupling rod of locomotive.
iii) Oldham’s coupling.
iv) Elliptical Trammel.
v) Geneva mechanism
vi) Water hand pumps mechanism.
vii) Scotch Yoke Mechanism
 Models of Different types cam and Followers- eccentric cams, tangent cams, roller
and knife age followers.
 Models of Mechanically operated two braking mechanism for wheelers.
i) Shoe brake
ii) Band Brake
iii) Internal expanding shoe brake
iv) Disc Brake
 Balancing of several masses rotating in a single plane Test rig.
 LIST OF EXPERTS and TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS

CURRICULUM:
1. Mrs. R A Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
2. Mr. G. H. Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
2. Mr. D J Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
3. Dr. V M Athawale Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN MECHANICAL ENGG.
COURSE CODE : WS401E$
COURSE TITLE : MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : 02 Hrs. (External)
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Diploma technician often comes across various types of basic manufacturing
processes. He /she is required to select, operate and control the appropriate processes
with respect to machines, specific cutting tools, cutting fluids for specific applications
in order to convert raw material into finished products as per the requirement of
drawings. He /she is also required to know about latest improvements in manufacturing
processes. With sound knowledge of this subject, the diploma technician will be able to
handle and control practical situations more effectively and confidently.
1. Adopt safety practices while working on various machines.
2. Select proper heat treatment, metal joining and casting process.
3. Select cutting tools, cutting fluids and manufacturing processes for the desired output.
4. Use proper tools, equipments and machineries for specific applications.
5. Manufacture the job by selecting proper process as per given drawing.
6. Inspect the job.
1
WS401E Manufacturing Processes 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. Mechanics 1. State basic elements of 1.1 Basic elements of machining
04
of Metal machining. 1.2 Principles of metal cutting & forces
Cuttings 2. Define terms related to involved in metal cutting, Oblique &
cutting tools. orthogonal cutting
3. Draw cutting tool 1.3 Chip formation, Types of chips.
diagram showing its 1.4 Cutting tool nomenclature & tool
various nomenclature signature,
4. Describe metal cutting 1.5 Cutting parameters.
principles.
2. Cutting 1. Define various terms 2.1 Cutting Fluid: Introduction,
06
Fluid & Tool relate to cutting fluid. classification of cutting fluid, solid
Materials 2. Classify cutting fluids. & liquid cutting fluid, chemical
3. Select cutting fluids for coolants, Selection of cutting fluids
various machining and its application during machining
operations operation.
4. State characteristics of 2.2 Tool Material : Introduction,
various tool materials. characteristics of tool material, types
5. State factors affecting of tool material such as plain carbon
machinability steel, high carbon steel, high speed
6. Describe the procedure steels, carbide tools, ceramics,
of tool resharpening. diamond tools, cemented oxides,
abrasives & CBN etc
2.3 Tool life & tool wear, types of tool
failure. Resharpening of cutting
tools.
2.4 Machinability, factors affecting
machinability
3. Metal 1. Define various terms 3.1 Fusion process, Processes of joining,
10
Joining related to metal 3.2 Welding processes –Types, working
processes jointing. principle & applications: Gas
2. Classify metal jointing welding, carbon arc welding,
process. shielded metal arc welding, TIG
3. Describe various welding, MIG welding, plasma arc
welding processes. welding,
4. State various welding 3.3 welding defects.
defects and its causes. 3.4 Tools & equipment used in gas
5. Describe the tools and welding.
equipments used in gas 3.5 Introduction to soldering and brazing
welding. – Process, fillers, heating methods &
6. Compare soldering and applications.
brazing. 3.6 Safety precautions taken while
7. Select heating methods. performing joining operations
2
4. Machining 1. Define various terms 4.1 Lathe Machines: Introduction,

12
Operations related to machining classification, centre lathe and its
operations. details, Different lathe operations
2. Classify lathe like facing, plain turning, taper
machines. turning, thread cutting, chamfering,
3. Describe construction grooving, knurling. Lathe accessories
and operation of centre and its attachments.
lathe. 4.2 Drilling Machine: Introduction. ,
4. Define various terms twist drill nomenclature,
relate to drill. Classification, working principle &
5. Select proper drill for applications of drilling machine, like
particular application. portable, sensitive, upright, radial,
6. Classify drilling gang, multiple spindle.etc, Automatic
machines. drillers & turret drilling machine,
7. Describe the Cutting speed and feed different
construction and operations performed on drilling
operation of various machines like drilling, reaming,
drilling machines. boring, counter sinking, counter
8. Describe various boring, spot facing.
drilling operations.
9. Describe shaping, 4.3 Shaping, Slotting & Planning
slotting and planning Machine: Introduction, Elements of
machines. shaping, slotting & planning
10. Compare shaping, machine, Working principles,
slotting and planning classification of shaping, slotting &
machines. planning machine ,Stroke length and
its adjustment. Comparison between
them.
4.4 Safety precautions adopted while
working on machines
5.Heat 1. Define various heat 5.1 Necessity of heat treatment, common
06
Treatment Of treatment terms. heat treatment processes, annealing,
Metals 2. State necessity of heat normalizing, hardening, tempering &
treatment their selection for different metals
3. Describe various heat used for industrial applications
treatment methods. 5.2 Surface hardening methods-
4. Select proper heat carburizing, induction, flame
treatment method for hardening & their application
particular application. 5.3 Safety precautions taken while
performing heat treatment.
6. Casting 1. Define various terms 6.1 Pattern making: Basic steps in

10
relate to pattern, mould making casting, Pattern : types,
process
and casting. materials and allowances, tools, color
2. Describe the basic steps coding of patterns.
in making casting, 6.2 Moulding: Types of moulding sands,
3. State the properties of properties of sand, moulding
moulding sand. methods, cores and core prints,
4. Describe various elements of gating system, bench
moulding methods. moulding, floor moulding, pit
3
5. Classify furnaces. moulding, machine moulding.

6. Describe the 6.3 Casting: Furnaces: Construction and
construction of cupola working of cupola furnace, electric
and electric arc arc furnace. - Methods &
furnace. applications of - Centrifugal casting,
7. State various casting shell moulding, investment casting,
defects their causes and Casting defects - Causes & remedies.
remedies. 6.4 Hot chamber and cold chamber die
8. Describe various die casting, Die casting defects - Causes
casting methods. & remedies.
9. Justify the causes of 6.5 Safety precautions taken while
casting defects. performing casting operation.
Total Hrs. 48

Assign Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
ment
1 Perform one simple job on TIG / MIG welding setup or Metal Joining 06
prepare report on visit to TIG / MIG welding shop. Process
2 Perform one turning job on lathe containing the Machining 22
operations like plain turning, step turning, taper turning, process
grooving, knurling and chamfering.(minimum 5
operations)
 Read and interpret job drawing
 Raw material size – Bar dia. 40 to 50 mm, length
80 to 100 mm.
 Set the tool and select the cutting parameters for
machining operations
 Inspect various dimensions of jobs by using
measuring instruments.
3 Perform one composite job containing the operations on Shaper machine 12
shaper and drill machine.
4 Prepare report on visit to heat treatment plant with respect Heat Treatment 06
to processes & its methodology.
5 Prepare one pattern as per given drawing. Casting (Pattern 12
making)
6 Prepare mould for any one given pattern Casting 06
(Moulding)
Total 64
4

No.
R U A
01 Mechanics of Metal
02(00) 04(04) 00(00) 06(04)
Cuttings
02 Cutting Fluid & Tool
06(00) 04(00) 00(06) 10(06)
Materials
03 Metal Joining
02(02) 04(04) 06(00) 12(06)
processes
04 Machining Operations 02(00) 12(04) 06(06) 20(10)
05 Heat Treatment Of
04(02) 06(04) 00(00) 10(06)
Metals
06
Casting process 02(04) 04(04) 06(00) 12(08)
Total 18(08) 34(20) 18(12) 70 (40)


option
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 6 R 2 3 R 2
01 5/7
5 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
03 4 U 4 4 U 4 4 U 4 4 U 4 6 R 4 3/5
04 2 R 4 5 R 4 6 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 3 A 6 4 A 6 4 A 6 2/3
06 6 A 6 5 U 6 2 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics,
Assessment
Assessment Continuous 20 -- 4,5,6
Sheets &
Job
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Course Job
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Job drawing, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure, precautions etc. 10
2 Performance 20
3. Skill 10
4. Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 3
2 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
3 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
4 - 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3
5 - 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3
6 - 3 3 3 - - 1 3 3 3 3 3

1. Workshop Technology (Vol. – B. S. Raghuwanshi. Tata 81 -212-0269-8
II) McGraw-Hill
2. Workshop Technology (Vol. - Hazara & Chaudhary. Media 0-210-98173-3
II) Promoters & Publishers.
3. Production Technology R.K. Jain & S.C. Gupta. 978-0534934293
Khanna Publishers.
4. Manufacturing Science and Suresh Dalela. Umesh 81-7611-179-1
Technology (Vol.-I,II & III) Publication
5. Manufacturing Processes Begeman, Myron L. 0471062405
Amstead, B.H. John Wiley
& Sons Inc.
6. Fundamental of metal B. L. Juneja, G.S.Sekhon, 10: 8122414672
cutting and machine tools Nitin New Age International 13: 978-
Pvt Ltd Publishers, 2008 8122414677
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aC7c1NgA-7M, assessed on 23rd March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=is5wdVgPOkI, assessed on 23 rd March 2016

1. Lathe Machine with all accessories
2. Drilling Machine pillar type with all accessories
3. Arc welding Machine with all accessories
4. TIG welding Machine with all accessories
5. Shaping Machines with all accessories
6. Fitting, welding, moulding tools and equipments as per requirement.

CURRICULUM:
1 Dr. R. R. Chaudhari Head of Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Lecturer , Mechanical Government Polytechnic
Engineering Nagpur
3. Mr. D. C. Satdeve Workshop Super indent, Government Polytechnic

Nagpur

Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, NAGPUR
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGY
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 01 HRs. (Objective Type Online Examination)
PR. TEE : NIL
PT. : 30 MINUTES (Objective Type offline Examination)
 RATIONALE:
Modern manufacturing industries have complex production processes. A
technician entering into such field comes across various problems involving production
processes, methods, planning, scheduling etc. One has to effectively use the industrial
engineering techniques for increasing productivity of men, machines, equipments and
materials. Therefore, knowledge of work study, plant layout - material handling,
advancements in manufacturing processes to increase the output, maintenance of
equipments is very essential. This course helps to impart the knowledge of techniques for
increasing productivity and better Quality control.
1. Recognize the various techniques of product design and process planning and control.
2. Interpret the suitability and application of plant layout.
3. Select suitable jig, fixture and locator for improving productivity.
4. Interpret the various elements of Method study.
5. Interpret the various elements of Work measurement.
6. Identify the new concepts in production technology and TQM techniques.
1
ME404E Production Technology 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Production 1. Define Productivity and its types. 1.1 Introduction to production system
05
System and 2. State the requirement of proper 1.2 Types of production system and
Product Design production system. applications.
3. Describe techniques of improving 1.3 Requirements and Factors of
productivity. good production system.
4. Describe approach and concept of 1.4 Product development approaches,
product development. Product development process and
Related Concepts-Simplification,
Standardization, Specialization
1.5 Definition of productivity, types,
techniques of improvement of
productivity.
2. Plant Location 1. State importance of Site selection. 2.1 Importance of site selection and
05
and Layout. 2. Identify factors affecting site governing factors.
selection. 2.2 Govt. policies, Relaxation for
3. Identify Govt. policies/relaxation backward areas
related to plant location in backward 2.3 Definition, objectives and types
area. . of plant layout.
4. Define plant layout and its types. 2.4 Characteristics of good plant
5. Compare different type of plant layout
layout. 2.5 Symptoms of bad plant layout.
6. State objectives of good plant layout. 2.5 Design principle of plant layout.
7. Enlist characteristics of good plant
layout.
8. State symptoms of bad plant layout.
9. Describe design principle of plant
layout.
3. Process planning, 1. Define process planning. 3.1 Process planning from raw
jigs and fixtures. 2. Enlist steps involved in process material to finish product. 08
planning. 3.2 Factors affecting the process
3. State factors affecting process planning.
planning. 3.3 Sequence of operations, operation
4. Select sequence of operations for a sheet, and combined operation.
process. 3.4 Determination of stages of
5. Describe need of operation sheet. inspection.
6. Define standard time, setup time and 3.5 Introduction of jigs and fixture,
operation time for a job. difference between jigs and
7. Prepare operation sheet for a fixture.
component. 3.6 Types of jigs and fixture.
8. State the objective of confining the 3.7 Types of locators, 3,2,1 principle
operations. of location.
9. Describe need of inspection during 3.8 General principles of jigs and
production. fixture design.
10. Describe factors for selection of
stage for inspection.
11. Define jigs and fixture.
12. Differentiate jigs and fixture.
13. State application of locator.
14. Describe general principle of design
of jigs and fixture.
4. Production 1. Define Production planning and 4.1 Introduction to Production
Planning and 14
control. Planning and Control (PPC).
Control. 2. State importance of Production 4.2 Function of production planning
Planning and Control in and control.
2
manufacturing unit. 4.3 Routing, definition, concept and

3. State Six principle objectives of route sheet.
production planning and control. 4.4 Sequencing N jobs on 2
4. Define Routing in manufacturing machines.
unit. 4.5 Scheduling devices.
5. Express the decisions that are to be 4.6 Factors affecting scheduling
taken in routing. devices.
6. State advantages of routing. 4.7 Definition of Dispatching.
7. Define the term sequencing of 4.8 Types and common forms used in
operations. Dispatching.
8. Define scheduling of activities for 4.9 Definition of Production Control
production. and the “Expediting”.
9. State advantages of scheduling. 4.10 Definition of progressive control
10. Differentiate Scheduling and of production and its steps.
Routing. 4.11 Concept of line balancing.
11. Define Dispatching. 4.12 Gantt chart, as control tool and
12. Enlist forms used in Dispatching. method of construction.
13. Describe types dispatching. 4.13 Advantages of Gantt chart.
14. Construct a Gantt chart for a given
Sample data.
15. State advantages of Gantt chart.
16. Define line balancing.
17. Describe need of line balancing.
5. Industrial 1. Define Method study and work 5.1 Method study : – Terminology
Engineering. 08
measurement. used, aims and objectives, steps
2. State objectives of Method study and in method study and method
work measurement. improvement, various recording
3. State steps in Method study and work techniques.
measurement. 5.2 Outline process, flow process
4. Describe different recording charts, multiple activity chart,
techniques used in method study. two handed process chart and
5. Describe principles of motion string diagram
economy. 5.3 Principles of motion economy
5.4 Work Measurement: - Definition,
aims, objectives, Time study
equipment,
5.5 Scientific methods of work
measurement, advanced methods
in work measurement,
5.6 Normal time, standard time,
allowances, Merit rating.
(Numerical to find out standard time)
6. New Concepts In 1. Describe CAPP 6.1 Computer Aided Process Planning
Production (CAPP) 08
2. Describe Single minute exchange of
Technology dies. 6.2 Single minute exchange of dies
3. Describe Lean Production or lean 6.3 Lean Production or lean
manufacturing manufacturing- Objective,
4. State elements of lean production elements of lean production.
5. Describe concept of kaizen, kanban, 6.4 Concept of kaizen, kanban, 5S,
5S, 3M 3M Benefits of Lean Production,
6. Compare traditional and Lean Comparison between traditional
and Lean Production on the basis
Production on the basis of
of production, layout, batch size,
production, layout, batch size, process, quality
process, quality 6.5 Selective Laser Melting (SLM)
7. State Benefits of Lean Production production system
8. Describe ISO9000 6.6 ISO 9000, Quality circle, Total
9. Describe Quality circle Quality Management (TQM),
10 Describe TQM Business Process Re-engineering
11. Describe BPR (BPR).
Total Hrs. 48
3

Practical’s Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
Nil
Unit Units Levels from Cognition Process Total

No. Dimension Marks
R U A
Production System and
01 02(00) 04(00) 02(00) 08(00)
Product Design.
Plant Location and
02 04(00) 08(00) 02(00) 14(00)
Layout.
Process planning, jigs
03 04(00) 08(00) 04(06) 16(00)
and fixtures.
Production Planning and
04 02(00) 04(00) 00(00) 16(12)
Control.
05 Industrial Engineering. 04(00) 10(04) 06(00) 20(04)
New Concepts In
06 02(00) 02(00) 02(00) 06(00)
Production Technology
Total 18(00) 36(00) 16 (00) 70 (00)
 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER
Q. Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

No T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M T L M
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 1 U 2 2 R 2 1 U 2
3 U 2 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 U 2 3 R 2 4 U 2 2 U 2
01
To 4 A 2 4 U 2 4 U 2 5 R 2 2 U 2 3 U 2 4 R 2
35
2 U 2 3 U 2 5 R 2 4 U 2 3 U 2 5 U 2 3 A 2
4 U 2 3 A 2 4 A 2 6 R 2 6 U 2 6 U 2 4 A 2
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the Online

End Exam Students 70 28 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Exam.
Total 100 40
Skill
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL -- -- -- --
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Course
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students
End Of The
Course
5

Nil

Outcomes (Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
2 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 3 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ 2 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
 REFERENCE and TEXT BOO1KS:

Year Of publication
1. A Text Book of P. C. Sharma, S. Chandand Co. 81-2191-114-1
Production Technology Ltd, Delhi, 1st Edition, 2009
2. Production Technology R. K. Jain, Khanna Publisher, 17th 81-740-9099-1

Edition, 2001
3. Production Technology K. L. Narayana, Swarna Venkate 978-93-80578-52-1
Ramana, I.K. International
Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2nd
Edition,2000
4. Production Technology Pakirappa, Durga Publishing 13-120-5002-9

House, 4th Edition, 2005
5. Industrial Engineering T. R. Bangaand S. C. Sharma, 978-81-7409-078-9
and Management Khanna Publishers, 25th Edition,
2014
6
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://link.springer.com/book/10.1007%2F978-3-319-12304-2 , assessed on 10th September,

2016
 http://svmcollege.in/14403/rk-jain-production-technology-free-download-site/., assessed on
10th September, 2016
 https://docs.google.com/document/d/1Raos2OWuTZypsp8XE1dUi6FCcHOfI08PE5ojXMdF
p2U/edit , assessed on 10th September, 2016
 http://ebookinga.com/pdf/a-textbook-of-production-engineering-by-pc-sharma-pdf-free-
download , assessed on 10th September, 2016
 http://pec.ac.in/~pecac/new/wp-content/uploads/2015/01/Production-Industrial-ngineering.pdf
assessed on 10th September, 2016
 http://joteringstu.esy.es/advances-in-production-technology-lecture-notes-in-
production-engineering.pdf. , assessed on 10th September, 2016
Nil
 LIST OF EXPERTS and TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS CURRICULUM:

Mr. A. R. Sheikh Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
1.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. M. M. Dangre Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Gadchiroli.
Mr. G. H. Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mrs. R. A. Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
4.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
5.
Nagpur
Shri. G. F. Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur
6.
Dr. S. S. Baraskar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi
7.
Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, NAGPUR
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs.
PR. TEE : 02 HRs. (External)
PT. : 1 HR.
 RATIONALE:
I.C. Engines & air compressor finds applications in almost all sectors of
industry due to automation and in automobile fields due to increase in transportation of
goods & people day by day. Also I.C. engines are one of the major contributors of air
pollution Hence it is necessary to understand constructional, working & thermodynamic
features of I.C. engine as Diploma technicians deal with working, testing and
maintenance of it. Therefore, Internal Combustion Engines course has been considered
highly relevant for mechanical technician.
1. Analyze working of IC Engine, Gas Turbine and Air compressor.
2. Interpret different system in IC Engine, Gas Turbine and Air compressor
3. Calculate the performance parameter of I C Engine and Air compressor and its effect on
environment
4. Develop ability to dismantle and assemble I C Engine
5. Observe and report writing of different components of I C Engine through visit
6. Operate IC Engine and Air compressor to measure different parameters and identify faults
and remedies through test and visit
1
ME405E Internal Combustion Engine 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1 Introduction 1. List and Identify parts of 1.1 Classification of I.C. engines, 04
to I. C. engine. 1.2 Applications of I. C. engine
Engine 2. State different application 1.3 Different parts of I.C. engine and
of I.C. engine their functions
3.Define different term 1.4 Basic engine terminology
related to I.C. engine Bore, stroke, TDC, BDC, Clearance
4. Classify IC engine on volume, Swept volume,
various basis. Compression ratio, cut off ratio
5. Describe the functions of
various parts of IC engines.
6. Calculate Swept volume,
Compression ratio, cut off
ratio
2. 1.Discribe working principal 2.1 Working principle of two and four 12
Spark of S.I. engine stroke S.I engine .Otto cycle, air
ignition 2.Interpret indicator and standard efficiency, mean effective
engines valve timing diagram pressure, effect of compression
3.Calulate air standard ratio on efficiency, valve timing
efficiency and MEP diagram for four stroke engines.
4.List and Identify parts of Numerical to calculate air standard
fuel supply system efficiency, Mean Effective pressure
5. Illustrate air fuel (MEP).
requirement in S.I. engine 2.2 Carburetion: fuel supply system,
6. Describe electronic petrol Function of carburetor, air fuel
injection and electronic mixture and fuel requirements of
ignition system with S. I. engines., simple carburetor
sketch. and its drawback, petrol injection
7. Describe detonation and system, port and throttle MPFI
pre-ignition system, Electronic fuel injection -
8 .State concept of DTSI D-MPFI system , L-MPFI system
Engine. 2.3. Ignition: Requirements for ignition,
9. Compare battery and battery and magneto ignition
magneto ignition system system and comparison, concept of
on various basis electronic ignition systems,
transistorized assisted contact
ignition system(TACIS),
2.4 Concept of digital twin spark
ignition Engine. (DTSI Engine)
2.5 Concepts of pre-ignition and
detonation.
2
3 1. Describe working principal 3.1 Working principle of Two and four 10

Compression of C.I. engine stroke C.I. engine .Diesel cycle, air
Ignition 2.Draw P-V and T-S diagram standard efficiency, valve timing
Engine of diesel cycle diagram for four stroke engines.
3. Interpret valve timing Numerical to calculate air standard
diagram with working of efficiency, No derivation)
diesel engine 3.2 Fuel injection: function of fuel
4. Calculate air standard injection system, types of fuel
efficiency of diesel cycle. injection systems, working of fuel
5. State function of fuel injector, fuel pump -bosh type only,
injection system and CRDI concept, need of electronic
working of fuel pump and injection system
injector 3.3 Concept, advantages and
6. Describe concept of CRDI applications of supercharging and
system and electronic turbo-charging
ignition system 3.4 Comparison between S.I. and C.I.
7. Justify the use of engine
supercharging and turbo 3.5 Comparison between two stroke
charging in I.C. engine and four stroke engine.
8. Compare S.I. and C.I.
engine on various basis
4 1. State types of cooling 4.1 Cooling: -Need of cooling of an I. C. 06
Cooling method and its application engine, Types of cooling system,
and 2. State types of lubricating Air cooling, its applications and
lubrication methods and its advantages. Water /liquid cooling(
application natural and forced circulation of
3. Compare different cooling water),application, advantages and
system comparison With air cooling.
4. State lubricant additives Different types of coolants.
and its function 4.2 Need of lubrication in an I.C.
5. Describe lubrication engine. Functions of lubrication
system with sketch system. Types of lubrication system
6. Describe cooling system and its application, splash, pressure
with sketch and charge lubrication system
4.3 Lubricant additives and their
function
5 1.Define I.C. engine testing 5.1 Need of testing of an I.C. engine. 08

I.C. engine terminology Engine power, I.P, B.P compression
testing and 2. Calculate power and ratio. Mechanical efficiency. heat
pollution efficiency. balance sheet ,Morse test,
3Draw heat balance sheet Numerical to calculate I.P. ,B. P.,
4.State pollutants in exhaust Mechanical efficiency and heat
gases of I.C. engine and its balance sheet.
effect on environment 5.2 Pollutants in exhaust gases of petrol
5. State the norms of and diesel engines, their effects on
pollution environment, Catalytic Converter,
6. Describe catalytic Bharat stage III, IV norms.
converter
3
6 1. Describe the working of 6.1Introduction to gas turbines 08

Introduction to gas turbine Classification and applications of
gas turbine 2. Compare close cycle and gas turbine, working of Constant
and air open cycle gas turbine pressure Closed cycle and open
compressor 3. State uses of compressed cycle gas turbines and their
air comparison.
4. Define air compressor 6.2 Introduction to air compressor Uses
terminology of compressed air, classification.
5. Calculate power required Definition of Pressure ratio,
and efficiencies of capacity, F.A.D Swept volume
compressor 6.3 Reciprocating air compressor
6. Interpret multistage of Construction and working of single
compressor and concept and two stage compressors.
of Inter cooling and after Volumetric, Isothermal and
cooling Mechanical efficiency. Advantages
7. Analyze P-V diagram of multi-staging, concept of Inter
with inter cooling. cooling and after cooling.
Numerical to calculate mechanical
and isothermal efficiency, power
required. (No derivation)
Total Hrs 48

Domain)
1 Locate and identify various I.C. engine parts and Introduction to I.C. 2
draw its neat sketches engine
2 Dismantle& assemble S.I. & C. I. engine 4
(a) Simple carburetor
(b) Fuel injection pump (bosch type)
3 Dismantle & assemble four stroke CI engine and C.I. engine 4
identify the various components
4 Locate and identify components of cooling & Cooling & lubrication 2
lubrication system and draw its neat sketches of I. C. engine
5 Conduct test on I.C. engine to prepare heat balance I.C. engine testing and 4
sheet pollution
6 Conduct Morse Test on multi cylinder petrol engine I.C. engine testing and 4
to determine its indicated power and mechanical pollution
efficiency.
7 Conduct test on two-stage reciprocating air Introduction to air 4
compressor to determine its volumetric efficiency compressor & gas
turbine
8 Prepare a report on visit to engine maintenance All Units 6
workshop.
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
Introduction to I. C.
01 02(04) 04(00) 00(00) 06(04)
Engine
Spark Ignition
02 04(00) 08(06) 06(00) 18(06)
engines
Compression
03 02(00) 04(04) 06(04) 12(08)
Ignition engine
Cooling &
04 02(02) 08(04) 00(00) 10(06)
lubrication
I.C. engine testing
05 02(00) 04(06) 06(04) 12(10)
&pollution
Introduction to gas
06 turbine &air 02(02) 04(04) 06(00) 12(06)
compressor
Total 14(08) 32 (24) 24 (08) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 4 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 5 A 4 3/5
03 2 R 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 3 A 4 3/5
04 2 U 4 4 U 4 6 U 4 1 R 4 3 U 4 3/5
05 2 A 6 5 A 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 3 A 6 6 A 6 5 U 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

S. N. Description Max. Marks
1 Drawing diagrams of various parts of IC engines, selection of 10
equipment’s. & tools, writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _
2 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _ _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ 1 _ 3 _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 _ 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 2 3 _ 3 3 _
 REFERENCE AND TEXT BOOKS:

Year Of publication
1. Internal Combustion R. P. Sharma, Dhanpat Rai 9788189928469
Engine Publication , 2010
2. A Course in Internal V.M. Domkundwar, Dhanpat Rai 978-81-7700-116-7
Combustion Engine ( SI & Co. Ltd. Publication, Fourth
Units) edition,2014
3 Internal Combustion V. Ganeshan, Mcgraw Hill 13-9781259006197

th
Engine Education, 4 Edition, 2012 10-1259006190
4 Internal Combustion H. B. Keswani, Standard Book , 4th 81900893511
Engine Edition 2003
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pqa4zCo4erY , assessed on 23rd August, 2016

 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s2WGFELXPNg assessed on 23rd August, 2016
 automobiletechinfo.blogspot.com/.../dtsi-digital-twin-spark-ignition-system.html
assessed on 23rd August, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=H2J0lSTYVhQ assessed on 23rd August, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=H2J0lSTYVhQ assessed on 23rd August, 2016
 www.cpcb.nic.in/Vehicular_Exhaust.php assessed on 23rd August, 2016

 Test rig of four stroke diesel engine
 Test Rig of Two stage reciprocating compressor
 Working .Model of fuel pump ,injector & carburetor
 Working model of C.I. engine
 Demonstration Model & chart of cooling , lubrication & fuel supply system of I. C.
engine.

1. Mr. O. V. Sarode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. S. A. Dhankute Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Mr. A. R. Sheikh Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
4 Mr. M. M. Dangare Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : FLUID POWER
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PR. TEE : 02 HRs (External)
PT. : 01HR
 RATIONALE:
Fluid Power is a classical subject. This course introduce Fluid Mechanics and establish
its relevance in Mechanical Engineering .It deals with fundamental concepts and principles in
hydraulics, hydro kinematics and hydrodynamics and their application in solving fluid flow
problems.
In India about 22% (42, 783.43 MW; 30 June, 2016) Electric Energy is generated by
Hydroelectric Power plant. Hydraulic Turbine plays a vital role in this area. Hydraulic
pumps have important role in water supply, irrigation etc. This course describes Hydraulic
machines and evaluates its power and efficiency.
1. Apply fundamental concepts and Bernoulli’s Equation for various applications on fluid
flow.
2. Apply principles of Fluid Machine’s and recommend it for particular application.
3. Analyze the input energy Kinetic and total energy on fluid blades to obtain its power and
efficiency.
4. Measure characteristics like pressure, velocity, flow rate , etc by using flow and pressure
measuring device
5. Operate various hydraulic machines and interpret its result.
6. Perform various operations on Centrifugal and Reciprocating pump.
1
ME406E Fluid Power 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1. 1. Define various terms 1.1 Mass Density, Specific Weight,
07
Fundamental related to properties of Specific volume, Specific gravity,
s of Fluid fluid. Dynamic viscosity, Kinematic
and Fluid 2. Define terms related to viscosity. Newtonian and non-
Static pressure Newtonian Fluid. Units and
3. Describe the process of dimensions of all properties.
using different (Numerical Problem based on it.)
Manometers and pressure 1.2 Compressibility, Surface tension,
Gauge to measure Capillarity, Vapour Pressure and
pressure of liquid in pipes. Cavitations.
4. Calculate pressure in 1.3 Fluid pressure at a point, Pascal’s
manometers. Law, Pressure head, Pressure
5. Differentiate various intensity.
manometers. 1.4 Concept of absolute vacuum,
6. Describe Bourdon Tube gauge pressure, atmospheric
Pressure Gauge. pressure, absolute pressure.
7. Calculate total pressure 1.5Manometer. Simple Manometer-
and centre of pressure on Piezometer and U-tube
plane surface submerged Manometer, Differential
in liquid. Manometer- U-tube, Differential
Manometer and Inverted
Differential Manometer, Bourdon
Tube Pressure Gauge. (Numerical
based on it.)
1.6Total Pressure and Centre of
Pressure
1.7 Total Pressure and Centre of
pressure on Horizontal, Vertical
and Inclined Plane surface.
Calculate pressure of liquid on
submerged body. (Numerical
based on it.)
No derivation on Inclined plane
surface, only formula.
2 1. Define types of fluid 2.1 Kinematics: - Types of fluid
07
Fundamental flow. flows- steady, unsteady, uniform,
s of Fluid 2. Identify laminar and non uniform, rotational,
Flow turbulent flow of flowing irrotational, Laminar, turbulent,
fluid Compressible and Incompressible
3. Correlate various energies flow.
in flowing fluid. 2.2 Description of Flow Pattern –
4. Apply continuity equation Streamline and Stream tube,
to calculate velocity and Continuity equation, Rate of flow
discharge of liquid or discharge.
2
5. State restrictions of 2.3 Dynamics:- Energy possessed by

Bernoulli’s theorem. flowing fluid- Kinetic energy,
6. Apply Bernoulli’s Potential Energy and Pressure
theorem on Venturimeter, Energy. Bernoulli’s theorem- Its
Orifice plate, Pitot tube. application on Venturi meter,
7. Calculate discharge of orifice meter and Pitot tube.
liquid. (Numerical based on it.)
8. Calculate discharge and 2.4 Orifice- Classification, Flow
Hydraulic Coefficient. through orifice and Experimental
9. Determine hydraulic determination of Hydraulic
coefficients. Coefficient .Calculate discharge
and Hydraulic Coefficient.
3. Flow 1. State laws of friction for 3.1 Laws of fluid friction - Laminar
06
Through laminar and turbulent and turbulent.
Pipes flow. 3.2 Darcy’s- Weibach equation and
2. Calculate Major and Chezy’s equation for frictional
minor losses in pipes. losses in pipes. No Derivation.
3. Describe total gradient Calculate major loss in pipe.
and hydraulic gradient 3.3 Minor losses in fittings and
discharging freely in valves. Calculate minor loss
atmosphere. (Numerical based on it.)
4. Determine Maximum 3.4 Hydraulic gradient line and total
power transmission energy line
through a pipe. 3.5 Flow through pipe in series or
5. Describe water hammer Compound pipes.
in pipes. 3.6 Hydraulic power transmission
through pipe
3.7 Water Hammer in Pipes.
4. Impact of 1. Define impact of jet. 4.1 Impact of free jet, Impulse
04
Jets 2. Determine impact of jet momentum equation, Impact of
on Stationary and moving jet on Stationary and Moving
plates and curved vanes. Vertical, Inclined Flat Plate.
3. Draw velocity triangle 4.2 Impact of jet on Stationary and
diagram at inlet and outlet Moving Curved plate at the
on plates and curved centre. Calculate force
vanes. 4.3 Impact of jet on Stationary and
4. Calculate work done and Moving symmetrical and
efficiency. unsymmetrical curved one end
tangentially when the plate is
symmetrical and unsymmetrical.
(Numerical based on it.)
(No Derivation. Only Formulae
related to Work done, efficiency
and Velocity triangle at inlet and
outlet Diagram.)
5 Hydraulic 1. Draw general layout of 5.1 Layout and features of
12
Turbines hydroelectric power plant. hydroelectric power plant, surge
2. Identify Hydraulics tanks and its need.
turbine according to its 5.2 Head and efficiency’s hydraulic
classifications. turbines
3
3. Describe various 5.2 Classification of hydraulic

Component and working turbines and their applications.
of hydraulic turbines. 5.3 Component, Construction and
4. Select of hydraulic Working principle of Pelton
turbines according to wheel, Francis, Propeller and
available head. Kaplan turbine. Governing of
5. Compare hydraulic turbine.
turbines on the basis of 5.4 Draft tubes – types, construction
various parameters. and function.
6. List function of draft tube 5.5 Calculation of Work done Power,
in hydraulic turbines. and efficiency of turbine.
7. Calculate work done and (Numerical based on it.)
efficiency. 5.6 Concept of Cavitation in turbines,
5.7 Selection of Hydraulic Turbine.
5.8 Specific speed of turbine
6. Pumps 1. Describe working of 6.1 Centrifugal Pump: -Classification,
12
Centrifugal pump, Construction, principle of
multistage pumps and working, priming methods.
reciprocating pumps 6.2 Types of casings and impellers.
2. Compute Manometric 6.3Manometric head, Work done,
head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, Overall
Manometric efficiency, efficiency, Net Positive Suction
and Overall efficiency of Head (NPSH), Priming of a
centrifugal pump. centrifugal pump.
3. Describe Submersible 6.4Operating Characteristics of
pumps and jet pump. Centrifugal pumps.
4. Analyze importance of air 6.5 Pumps in series and parallel.
vessels in reciprocating 6.7 Submersible pumps and jet pump.
pumps. Find various heads, Efficiencies,
5. Draw indicator diagram Diameters of impellor, Various
of reciprocating pump. velocities, Inlet and outlet Vane
6. Find various heads, angle. θ, φ, α and β as indicated
Efficiencies, Diameters of in velocity triangle, Discharge of
impellor, various pump and Work done by
velocities, Inlet and outlet impellor.
Vane angle. θ, φ, α and β 6.8Reciprocating Pump: -
as indicated in velocity Construction, working principle
triangle, Discharge of and applications of single and
pump and Work done by double acting reciprocating
impellor. pumps.
6.9 Slip, Cavitation and separation.
6.10 Use of Air Vessels.
6.11 Indicator diagram with effect of
acceleration head and frictional
head.
(Numerical based on Centrifugal
pump & Reciprocating Pump)
Total Hrs. 48
4

Domain)
1 Determine the sum of pressure energy, kinetic
energy and potential energy at each section of
2
conduit is constant and prove Bernoulli’s
Theorem.
2 Determine coefficient of discharge for
Fundamentals of 4
Venturimeter
Fluid Flow
3 Determine coefficient of discharge for Orifice
2
Meter.
4 Determine Coefficient of Discharge, Coefficient
of Contraction and Coefficient of Velocity of 2
Sharp edged circular orifice
5 Determine Dracy’s friction factor in pipes of
2
three different materials. Flow Through
6 Determine minor friction loss for flow in pipes ( Pipes
4
bends, fittings, etc)
7 Determine overall efficiency of Pelton Turbine. 4
Hydraulic
8 Determine overall efficiency of Francis Turbine Turbines 4
9 Determine overall efficiency of Centrifugal
Pumps 4
Pump.
10 Determine overall efficiency of Reciprocating
2
Pump.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 32
5

No.
R U A
Fundamentals of Fluid
01 02(02) 08(04) 00(00) 10(06)
and Fluid Static
Fundamentals of Fluid
02 06(02) 04(00) 00(04) 10(06)
Flow
03 Flow Through Pipes 04(00) 04(00) 00(04) 08(04)
04 Impact of Jets 02(00) 04(04) 00(00) 06(04)
05 Hydraulic Turbines 02(00) 04(06) 12(04) 18(10)
06 Pumps 02(04) 10(06) 06(00) 18(10)
Total 18(08) 34(20) 18 (12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
2 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 U 4 2 R 4 1 U 4 2 A 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 3 R 4 3 U 4 3 A 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 4 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 5 A 4 6 R 4 3/5
05 5 A 6 5 A 6 5 U 6 2/3
06 6 A 6 6 U 6 6 U 6 2/3
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Selection of equipment’s, Drawing sketch of Apparatus, Writing 10
procedure, Observation Tables.etc.
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(COs) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 - - - - - - 3 3 3 -
2 - 3 - - - - - - 3 3 3 -
3 - 3 - - - - - - 3 3 3 -
4 - 3 2 2 - - - 2 3 3 3 -
5 - 3 2 2 - - - 2 3 3 3 -
6 - 3 2 2 - - - 2 3 3 3 -

Year Of publication
1. Introduction to Fluid S. K. Som, G. Biswas, S. 13: 978-0-
Mechanics and Fluid Chakraborty, Tata Mc- Graw Hill 071329194
Machines Education Private Limited, Third 10: 07-132919-6
Edition,2016
2. A Text Book of Fluid R. K. Bansal, Laxmi Publication (P) 13: 9788170083115
Mechanics and ltd, Ninth Edition, 2013.
Hydraulic Machines
3. Hydraulics and Fluid P. N. Modiand S. M. Seth, Standard 81-900893-7-4
Mechanics including Book house, Twentieth 078-81-898401-26-
Hydraulic Machines Edition,2015, 9
4. Hydraulic Machines Dr. Jagdish Lal, Metropolitan Book 978-81-224-1042-6
Co.Pvt Ltd., 1994
5. Fluid Mechanics F. M White, McGraw-Hill College; 10: 0072938447
Sixth Edition, October, 2006. 13: 978-
0072938449
8
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105171/1 , assessed on 05 th September, 2016
 http://msubbu.in/ln/fm/ , assessed on 05th September, 2016
 http://www.engineeringtoolbox.com/fluid-mechanics-t_21.html , assessed on 05th
September, 2016
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-contents/IIT-
KANPUR/machine/ui/Course_home-lec28.htm , assessed on 05th September, 2016

1. Piezometer, Differential U-tube Manometer, Bourdon Pressure Gauge, Measuring
tank and stop watch
2. Hydraulic Bench containing Piezometer, scale, measuring cylinder, stop watch etc.
3. Test Rig of flow through pipes, and various bends, pipe fitting etc.
4. Pelton Wheel Test Rig.
5. Francis Turbine Test Rig with Dynamometer.
6. Centrifugal pump Test Rig.
7. Reciprocating Pumps Test Rig.
 LIST OF EXPERTS AND TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS

CURRICULUM:
1. Mr. P. P. Patil Lecturer , Department of Government Polytechnic,
Mechanical Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. A. R. Sheikh. Lecturer , Department of
Government Polytechnic,
3. Mr. S. A. Dhankute. Lecturer , Department of
4. Er. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer OnkarFurnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE CODE : WS402E
COURSE TITLE : ADVANCE MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
This is a advanced technology subject which is to be taught, after getting
conversant with the basic manufacturing processes. It is necessary for a diploma
engineer to know about the advancements in the area of manufacturing processes. This
subject will impart knowledge & skills necessary for working in modern manufacturing
environment. This subject will help the student to get familiarize with working
principles and operations performed on non conventional machines, advanced welding
techniques, milling machines, grinding machines, surface finishing machines and
maintenance of machine tools.
1. Adopt safety practices while working on various machines.
2. Apply fundamental concepts of different Non-traditional machining processes for
given situation.
3. Apply modern trends in manufacturing and automation.
4. Perform jobs as per drawing by selecting appropriate machining process.
5. Prepare report by visiting various manufacturing shops/industries.
6. Prepare maintenance schedule for various manufacturing machines..
1
WS402E Advance Manufacturing processes 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Traditional 1. Define various terms related 1.1 Broaching machines:- Introduction,
08
Machining to traditional machining classification of Broaching
Methods processes. machines, basic parts of
2. Classify Broaching horizontal broaching machine &
machines. their functions, applications,
3. Describe construction, advantages and limitations of
operation & application of Broaching machine.
horizontal broaching 1.2 Capstan, turret lathe & automats,
machine. Planer and plan miller function of
4. Describe Capstain, Turret parts & operations.
lathe, automats. 1.3 Boring Machines – types, tools and
5. Describe construction, operations.
operation & application of
Plano miller
6. Classify Boring machines.
7. Describe boring tools &
operations.
8. Select proper machining
process for performing
operations.
2. Non- 1. State necessity of non- 2.1 Need, mechanisms & process
10
traditional traditional material removal parameter in Material removal
Material processes. process (MRP),Classification of
removal 2. Classify non-traditional MRP
processes material removal processes. 2.2 Abrasive jet machining (AJM),
3. Describe various non- Water jet machining (WJM),
traditional material removal Electric discharge machining
processes. (EDM), wire cut Electric discharge
4. State the advantages, machining (WEDM), Laser beam
disadvantages and machining (LBM),Electro chemical
applications of various non- machining (ECM),Ultrasonic
traditional material removal machining (USM) - setup, working
processes. principle, process parameters,
5. Select proper machining advantages, disadvantages and
process for performing applications of all above processes.
operations.
3. Milling & 1. Define various terms related 3.1 Milling: Introduction, classification
08
Gear Cutting to milling operations ,basic parts of column & knee type
operation 2. Classify Milling machines milling machine & their functions,
3. State basic parts of Milling milling cutters, different milling
machines. operations, like plain milling, side
4. Describe milling cutters. milling, straddle milling, gang
5. Describe milling operations. milling, face milling - slot milling,
6. Describe cutting parameters slitting. Up milling & down milling,
of milling machines. cutting parameters of milling
7. Classify gear manufacturing operations.
methods 3.2 Gear Cutting: Introduction, gear
8. Describe various gear manufacturing methods, universal
2
manufacturing processes. dividing head & indexing methods,

9. State advantages, gear shaping & gear hobbing - setup,
disadvantages & applications working, advantages, disadvantages,
of gear manufacturing applications, gear finishing methods-
processes grinding, shaving, burnishing.
10. Describe universal
dividing head & indexing
methods.
11. Describe various gear
finishing methods.
12. Select proper machining
process for performing
operations on milling
machines.
4. Surface 1. Classify grinding machines. 4.1Grinding Machines: Classification
08
Finishing 2. State designation and and working of grinding machine -
processes specifications of grinding surface, cylindrical, centreless,
wheels grinding wheel specifications,
3. Describe working of grinding wheel dressing & truing.
grinding machines Selection criteria for grinding wheel.
4. Select proper grinding wheel Balancing of grinding wheels, safety
for particular applications precautions.
5. Describe wheel dressing, 4.2 Super Finishing: Methods of surface
truing & balancing processes. finishing like honing, lapping,
6. Describe super finishing burnishing, polishing and buffing -
processes like honing, setup, working, advantages,
lapping, burnishing, limitations and applications
polishing & buffing.
7. State advantages,
disadvantages of super
finishing processes
8. Select proper super finishing
processes for particular
applications
5 Advanced 1. Describe submerged arc 5.1 Introduction, Submerged arc
welding process, resistance welding 10
welding & welding process
other 2. Describe resistance arc process, Solid state welding
Processes welding process process, Laser beam welding
3. Describe solid state welding process- basic principle,
process advantages, disadvantages &
4. Describe laser beam welding applications of each process.
process 5.2 Hybrid Manufacturing processes,
5. State advantages, Rapid prototyping technology-
Introduction, working principle &
disadvantages of advanced
application.
welding processes
9. Select proper welding
processes for particular
applications
6. Describe hybrid
manufacturing processes.
7. State application of hybrid
manufacturing process
8. Describe rapid prototyping
technology and state its
3
application
6. 1. State the need of 6.1 Need and importance of
06
Maintenance maintenance activity. maintenance activity, Types of
of Machine 2. Classify maintenance maintenance, Basic maintenance
Tools: practices practices for simple machine
3. Describe maintenance elements, viz Bearing, Coupling,
practices of various machine Shaft and pulley, gears, chains,
tools. machine belts.
4. Describe maintenance cycle 6.2 Repair cycle analysis, Repair
and repair complexity complexity, Maintenance manual,
5. Describe the details of Maintenance records.
maintenance manual
6. State the importance of
maintenance records.
Total Hrs.
48
Assign Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.

ment
1 Prepare report on visit to fabrication shop regarding actual Traditional 04
working of Broaching machine, Boring machine, Planer Machining
machine and their applications. Methods
2 Prepare report on Industrial visit to nontraditional machining Non- traditional 06
process with respect to its working principle & parameters. Material removal
processes
3 Perform gear cutting (spur gear /helical gear) operation by Milling & Gear 08
using simple indexing method (max. four students per job). Cutting operation
4 Perform surface grinding / cylindrical grinding operation on Surface Finishing 04
job for given diagram. (max. four students per job). processes
5 Prepare power point presentation on Non-traditional Advanced 06
manufacturing process/advanced welding techniques (2 welding & other
students/ group) & present in practical batch. Processes
6 Prepare Maintenance report for any two machines/machine Maintenance of 04
elements with reference to type of faults, causes & remedies. Machine Tools
(In a group of 4-5 students)
Note: - Workshop diary should be maintained by each student duly signed by respective shop
instructors.
Total Hrs. 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
01 Traditional Machining
02 (04) 04 (04) 06 (00) 12 (08)
Methods
02 Non- traditional
Material removal 00 (02) 08 (08) 06 (00) 14 (10)
processes
03 Milling & Gear
04 (00) 08 (00) 00 (06) 12 (06)
Cutting operation
04 Surface Finishing
06 (02) 06 (00) 00 (04) 12 (06)
processes
05 Advanced welding &
02 (00) 04 (06) 06 (00) 12 (06)
other Processes
06 Maintenance of
Machine Tools 04 (00) 04 (04) 00 (00) 08 (04)
Total 18 (08) 34 (00) 18 (10) 70(40)


option
1 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 6 R 2 2 R 2
01 5/7
4 R 2
02 3 R 4 4 R 4 1 U 4 1 R 4 1 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
04 3 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 6 U 4 4 A 4 3/5
05 1 A 6 2 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
06 4 U 6 5 A 6 5 U 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &

Assessment
Assessment Continuous 20 -- 4,5,6
Sheets &
Job
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Course Job
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Job drawing, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure, precautions etc. 10
2 Performance 20
3. Skill 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Course Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 - - 1 - - - - 3 3 3
2 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
3 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3
4 - 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3
5 - 3 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 3 3
6 - 3 3 3 - - 1 3 3 3 3 3

1. Workshop Technology B. S. Raghuwanshi. Tata 81 -212-0269-8
(Vol. – II) McGraw-Hill
2. Workshop Technology Hazara & Chaudhary. Media 0-210-98173-3
(Vol. - II) Promoters & Publishers.
3. Production Technology O. P. Khanna & Lal 456714404X
Volume- II Dhanpat Rai Publications. 13:1234567144042
4. Nonconventional Machining P.K.Mishra, Narosa Publishing 10: 8173191387
House, 1997 13: 978-8173191381
5. Industrial Maintenance H.P.Garg, S.Chand (G/L) & 10: 8121901685

Company Ltd; 3rd Revised 13: 978-8121901680
edition, 1987
6. Maintenance Engg. L.R.Higgins, McGraw-Hill 10: 0071826610
Handbook Education; 8TH edition, 2014) 13: 978-0071826617
7. Technology of Machine S.F.Krar, McGraw-Hill 10: 0073510831
Tools Education; 7TH Edition , 2010 13: 978-0073510835
8. Production Technology HMT, McGraw-Hill Education; 9780070964433
7
9. Advanced Machining Hassan Abdel-Gawad El-Hofy, 10: 0071453342

Processes: Nontraditional McGraw-Hill Education, 2005 13: 978-0071453349
and Hybrid Machining
Processes
10. Rapid Prototyping: Laser- Patri K. Venuvinod, Weiyin 10: 1402075774
based and Other Ma, Springer; 2004 13: 978-1402075773
Technologies
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aC7c1NgA-7M, assessed on 23rd March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=is5wdVgPOkI, assessed on 23rd March 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UW7Pm3kXJT8 ,assessed on 28th March 2016

1. Lathe Machine with all accessories
2. Cylindrical grinding machine with all accessories
3. Milling Machine with all accessories
4. Fitting, welding, tools and equipments as per requirement.

1. Dr. R. R. Chaudhari HOD, Mechanical Government Polytechnic
Engineering Nagpur
2. Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Lecturer , Mechanical Government Polytechnic

Engineering Nagpur
3. Mr. D. C. Satdeve. Workshop Superintendent Government Polytechnic
Nagpur
4. Er. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer OnkarFurnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur
6 Dr. S. S. Baraskar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Arvi
Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : MACHINE DESIGN
PREREQUISITE : AM407E, ME402E
TH. TEE : 04 HRs
PT. : 02 HRs
 RATIONALE:
Machine design is a professional course for mechanical engineer requiring prior
knowledge of Strength of materials, Theory of machine, Engineering materials,
Manufacturing processes, Mechanical engineering drawing. This course aims to provide
fundamental knowledge for material selection, analysis of different types of machine
elements subjected to various types of stresses, design of simple machine elements like
shaft, keys, coupling, spring, levers, screw, joints and ergonomic concepts.
1. Apply philosophy, considerations and procedure of design of machine element and
ergonomic.
2. Interpret the design procedure for machine parts shaft, key, coupling and fasteners.
3. Apply the design procedure for power screws and springs
4. Design machine element shaft, key and coupling.
5. Design fasteners and power screws.
6. Design various springs.
1
ME407E Machine Design 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1 1. List steps in design 1.1 Machine Design philosophy and 08
Introduction to procedure. Procedures
Design 2. List general considerations 1.2 General Considerations in Machine
in designing machine Design
element. 1.3 Fundamentals - Principal Stresses,
3. State causes and remedies Creep and Creep Curve, Fatigue, S-
of stress concentration N curve, Endurance limit, Factor of
4. Describe suitable theory of Safety and its selection, Stress
failure for given Concentration - Causes &
applications. Remedies, Engineering materials:
5. Illustrate ergonomic Properties and designation of
consideration to suit materials, Use of design data book,
specific equipment Use of standards in design
1.4 Theories of Elastic Failures
1.5 Ergonomic consideration in design,
Man machine relationship, Design
of equipment for display and
control, Aesthetic considerations
regarding shape, size, color &
surface finish
1. State applications of various 2.1 Design of Cotter Joint, Knuckle 08

2. Design of
joints. Joint and Turnbuckle
Simple
2. State application of various 2.2 Design of Levers-Hand/Foot Lever
Machine
levers. & Bell Crank Lever,
Elements
3. Select proper formulae 2.3 Design of C-Clamp, , Overhang
4. Apply various stress Crank, Arm of Pulley
considerations
4. Identify possible failures.
5. Calculate various
parameters as per
requirement.
3. Shaft, 1.Classify each mechanical 3.1 Shafts : Types, materials, standard 10
Key, elements sizes, Design of Shafts (Hollow
Coupling, 2. Select mechanical elements and Solid) using strength and
and for specific condition rigidity equation, Design of line
Antifriction 3. Apply various stress shafts supported between bearings
Bearings considerations. with one or two pulleys in between
4. Calculate various or one overhung pulley
parameters as per 3.2 Key: Classification, Design of sunk
requirement. keys, Effect of keyways on strength
of shaft
3.3 Coupling: Classification, Design of
muff coupling, flange coupling,
bush-pin type flexible coupling
3.4 Classification of Bearings – Sliding
contact & rolling contact
3.5 Terminology of Ball bearings – life
2
load relationship, basic static load

rating and basic dynamic load
rating. Selection of ball bearing
using manufacturer’s catalogue
4. Design of 1. Identify stresses in bolted 4.1 Stresses in Screwed fasteners, Bolts 08
Fasteners joints. of Uniform Strength
2. Apply various stress 4.2 Design of Bolted Joints subjected to
considerations. eccentric loading
3. Calculate various 4.3 Design of parallel and transverse
parameters in bolted joints fillet welds, axially loaded
as per requirement. symmetrical
4.Classify welded joints.
5.Calculate fillet welding
parameters under different
orientation
5 Power Screw 1. Illustrate various thread 5.1 Thread Profiles used for power 08
profile for power screw. Screws, relative merits and demerits
2. Describe self-locking and of each.
overhauling concept. 5.2 Torque required to overcome thread
3. Calculate efficiency of friction, Self-locking and
power screw, overhauling property,
4. Apply various stress 5.3 Efficiency of power screws & Types
consideration. of stresses induced,
5. Identify various possible 5.4 Design of Screw Jack, Toggle Jack
failures in Jacks.
6. Calculate various
parameters of Jack.
6.Desgn of 1.Classify springs. 6.1 Classification and Application of 06
Spring. 2.Define spring terminology Springs.
and applications of springs. 6.2 Spring – terminology, materials and
3.Select various formulae. specifications
4.Apply stress considerations 6.3 Stresses in springs, Wahl’s
for springs under various correction factor, Deflection and
application. Energy stored in springs
5.Calculate parameters of 6.4 Design of Helical tension and
spring. compression springs subjected to
uniform applied loads like I.C.
engine valves, Weighing balance,
Railway buffers and Governor
springs
Total Hrs.
48
3

Domain)
1 Design Cotter joint, Knuckle joint or Turn buckle (Any
two)
1. Apply various stress considerations.
2. Formulate various resisting areas. 8
3. Select appropriate formulae
4. Calculate various parameters
5. Draw assembly and detail drawings as per Design of simple
calculated dimensions. machine elements
2 Design of Lever and Bell crank lever ( Any One )
2. Formulate various resisting areas.
3. Use appropriate formulae 8
5. Draw assembly and detail drawings as per
calculated dimensions.
3 Design of shaft –
(i) Line shaft supported in bearings
with one or two pulleys & a gear
(ii) Propeller shaft
1. Calculate torque and max. Bending moment. 8

2. Select appropriate failure theories
Compensating factors to suit conditions.
3. Select appropriate formulae.
5. Draw the concept drawing depicting
Shaft, Key,
conditions.
Coupling and
4 Design of coupling – (Any One)
antifriction
(i) Rigid flange coupling
Bearings
(ii) Flexible coupling.
 Use Design data Book. ,
 List the assumptions made
1. Calculate torque. 8
2. Select empirical relations from design data
book.
3. Calculate various parameters.
4. Verify these dimensions under possible
failures using formulated resisting areas.
5 Design of bolted joint(eccentric loading)
1. Confirm appropriate loading condition.
Design of 8
2. Calculate load per bolts.
fasteners
4. Calculate bolt parameters.
4
6 Design of Screw jack or Power Screw

2. Formulate various resisting areas.
3. Select appropriate formulae
4. Calculate various parameters. Power Screw 8
5. Verify these dimensions under possible
failures using formulated resisting areas.
7 Design of Helical spring
 Use Design data Book.
 List the assumptions made
1. Calculate torque. Design of springs
2. Select appropriate formulae. 6
3. Calculate wire diameter.
4. Select standard wire diameter.
6. .Draw the concept drawing
8 Prepare two assembly drawings on auto-cad from
drawings covered above practical. 8
All Topics
1. Select appropriate CAD commands.
2. Draw the assembly drawing.
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs 64
5

No. Marks
R U A
01 Introduction to design 00(02) 12(04) 00(00) 12(06)
02 04(00) 00(00) 08(06) 12(06)
Design of simple
machine elements
03 02(00) 00(06) 12(00) 14(06)
Shaft, Key, Coupling,
and antifriction Bearings
04 02(00) 06(00) 04(08) 12(08)
Design of fasteners
05 Power Screws 00(02) 04(00) 08(04) 12(06)
06 Design of springs 02(00) 00(04) 06(00) 08(04)
Total 10 (04 ) 22(14) 38 (18) 70 (36)

option
1 R 2 2 R 3 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 1 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
03 2 A 6 2 A 6 3 U 6 2/3
04 3 A 6 4 U 6 6 U 6 2/3
05 4 A 4 5 U 4 5 A 4 2/3
2/3
06 2 A 8 4 A 8 5 A 8
6

What Frequency
Two PT
Progressive (average of Test Answer
20 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
7

1 Data representation ( Given / Standard ),Assumptions (If any) 10
2 Calculation and results 20
3 Drawing / Sketching 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
_ 3 _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
2 3 3 3 3 3
_ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
3
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
4
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
5
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
6

1. Introduction to Machine Design V. B. Bhandari, Tata Mc- 0070434492
Graw Hill 2001
2. Machine Design R. K. Jain, Khanna Publication 8174090991
3. Machine Design Pandya & Shah, Dhanpat Rai 81-74009-205-6

& Son Third Edition
4 Mechanical Engineering Design Joseph Edward Shigley, Mc- 0072520361
Graw Hill 2004
5 Design Data Book PSG Coimbatore. 1-55798-273-2
6 Hand Book of Properties of Abdulla Shariff, Dhanpat Rai 9780210223680

Engineering Materials & Design & Sons.2001
Data for Machine Elements
Theory and Problems of Machine Hall, Holowenko, Laughlin, 007084352X
7
Design Mc- Graw Hill.1980
8
 E-REFERENCES:
 www.youtube.com/watch2v?=CLeLFUvvO2g , assessed on 7th September, 2016
 http://www.uni.edu/~rao/Md-17%20Shaft%20Design.pdf , assessed on 7 th September,
2016
 www.youtube.com/watch2v?=Wyv7_WFaSzc, assessed on 7th September, 2016
 www.youtube.com/watch2v?=CLeLFUvvO2g, assessed on 7th September, 2016,
assessed on 7 th September, 2016
 https://engineeringexcellence.files.wordpress.com/2011/10/screw-jack-design.pdf,
assessed on 7 th September, 2016
 http://blog.mechguru.com/machine-design/how-to-design-a-helical-compression-spring/
, assessed on 7th September, 2016
Models of various power transmission drives

1. Mr. M. S. Deshpande Lecturer. Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur
2. Dr. R. R. Choudhari HOD, Mechanical Engineering Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur
3 Er. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur
4 Shri. G. F. Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
9
COURSE CURRICULUM

COURSE TITLE : REFRIGARATION AND AIRCONDITIONING
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 03; TU: 00; PR: 02 (CLOCK HR)
TOTAL CREDITS : 04 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT=2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HR
PR. TEE : 02 HR (External)
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
With the increase in standard of living of people & society in general, the use of
refrigeration & air-conditioning systems has become very common. Hence the
mechanical technicians are required to know about the systems. The knowledge of
various refrigeration systems, their thermodynamic analysis & different types of
refrigerants is one of the basic requirements. It is also expected that they are conversant
with various refrigerating equipments & controls, basics of cryogenics and
psychrometry.
1. Analyze the performance of different refrigeration systems
2. Appraise of modern trends in the field of refrigeration and air conditioning.
3. Select the proper refrigeration and air Conditioning system.
4. Diagnose faults and suggest remedial measures in refrigeration an air conditioning
system.
5. Operate test rigs of air-conditioning unit.
6. Calculate COP of various refrigeration systems
1
ME408E Refrigeration and Airconditioning 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1. Basics Of 1. Define refrigeration, COP 1.1 Introduction:- Definition of 6
Refrigeration and Refrigeration effect refrigeration, Necessity of
2. Describe the concept of refrigeration, Concept of heat engine,
heat engine, heat pump and heat pump and refrigerator. Unit of
refrigerator refrigeration, C.O.P. and refrigerating
3. Draw PV and TS diagram effect.
of reverse Carnot cycle 1.2 Reversed Carnot Cycle and its
4. Describe the Bell Coleman representation on PV and TS diagram.
air refrigerator (numerical to find out COP)
1.3 Air Refrigeration Cycles
1.4 Bell Coleman air refrigerator, it’s
representation on PV and TS
2. 1. List the different 2.1 Vapour Compression Refrigeration 10
Refrigeration components of VCRC Cycle (V.C.R.C):
System And 2. State the effect of wet principle, components, Representation
Refrigerants compression, dry on P-H and T-S diagram, effects of
compression on COP. wet compression, dry compression,
3. Describe the effect of calculation of COP, Effect of
superheating, under superheating, under cooling, suction
cooling, suction pressure pressure and discharge pressure,
and discharge pressure on Actual V. C. R. system, (numerical to
performance of VCRC find out COP of VCRS), Introduction
4. Calculate the COP of to multistage V. C. R. Cycle, its
VCRS necessity, advantages
5. State the advantages of 2.2 Vapour Absorption Refrigeration
VCRC system :
6. Describe the working Principle, components and working of
principle of Vapour aqua- ammonia system (simple &
Absorption System practical) Li-Br Absorption System
7. State the desirable Electrolux Refrigeration System,
properties of Refrigerant Desirable properties of Refrigerant and
and absorbent used in absorbent used in Vapour Absorption
Vapour Absorption System System
8. State the desirable 2.3 Refrigerants :
properties of refrigerants Classification of refrigerants, Desirable
9. State how refrigerant is properties of refrigerants,
selected for specific Nomenclature of refrigerants, Selection
application of refrigerant for specific applications,
10. Describe the concept Concept of Green House Effect, Ozone
of Green House Effect, depletion, Global warming, Eco-
Ozone depletion, Global friendly refrigerants like , R-134a
warming alternate refrigerants etc, Retrofitting
for switchover from conventional
refrigerant to eco friendly
refrigerant(theoretical concept ,&
problems associated with retrofitting.)
3. Components 1. Describe the construction 3.1 Compressors - Classification, 10
Of Vapour and working of compressor, Construction and working of open
Compression condenser, expansion valve, type, hermetic, centrifugal, root
2
Refrigeration evaporators and chillers. blower, vane type, axial, screw

System. 2. State the different compressor and their applications.
components of hermitically 3.2 Condensers - Classification,
sealed compressor. description of air cooled and water
3. State the function of cooled condensers, comparison and
expansion devices applications. Evaporative condensers
4. Select different controller 3.3 Expansion devices - Types - Capillary
for particular VCRS tube, automatic expansion valve,
application. thermostatic expansion valve and their
5. Classify evaporator and applications
chiller. 3.4 Controls - High pressure & low
pressure cut-outs, high voltage & low
voltage control, thermostat & overload
protector, relay. Accumulator, strainer,
drier, oil separator, their functions &
locations
3.5 Evaporators and Chillers -
Classification of evaporators working
principle of Bare tube, Plate surface,
finned, shell and tube, flooded and dry
expansion evaporator, Capacity of
evaporator and their applications.
Classification of chillers, Construction
and working of dry expansion Chillers
and flooded chillers and their
applications.
4. 1 State the necessity of air 4.1 Definition and necessity of air 10
Psychrometry conditioner conditioning,
2 State Dalton’s law of 4.2 Properties of Air,
partial pressure 4.3 Dalton’s law of partial pressure,
3 Describe the different 4.4 Psychometric chart,
Psychometric processes and 4.5 Psychometric processes, Bypass
show it on Psychometric Factor, ADP, concept of SHF, RSHF,
chart Adiabatic mixing of Air streams,
4 Calculate SHF, RSHF, (numerical using Psychometric chart to
ERSHF, GSHF find out SHF, RSHF)
5 Describe the working of 4.6 Equipments used for Air- conditioning
equipments used for Air- like humidifier, dehumidifier, filter,
conditioning like heating and cooling coils,
humidifier, dehumidifier, 4.7 Factors affecting human comfort,
filter, heating and cooling Effective temp. and comfort chart
coils
6 Draw comfort chart
5. Air 1. Classify the A.C. systems 5.1 Classification of A.C. systems 6
Conditioning 2. Distinguish between 5.2 Industrial and commercial A.C.
System Industrial and commercial systems
A.C. systems 5.3 Summer, winter and year round A.C.
3. Select A.C. system for systems
particular working 5.4 Central and unitary A.C. systems
condition 5.5 Application of A.C. systems
4. State the application of
A.C. systems
3
6. Air 1. State the various duct 6.1 Duct systems -Closed perimeter 6
Distribution material and losses in ducts system, extended plenum system,
Systems 2. Describe the working of radial duct system, duct materials,
fans and blowers requirement of duct materials, losses in
3. State the types and ducts
properties of insulating 6.2 Fans and Blowers -Types, working of
materials. fans and blowers
4. How the insulation is 6.3 Air distribution outlets: - Supply
applied. outlets, return outlets, grills,
diffusers
6.4 Insulation - Purpose, properties of
insulating material, types of insulating
materials, methods of applying
insulation.
Total Hrs 64
Pract Specific Learning Outcomes Units Hrs.

icals (Psychomotor Domain)
1 Identify the components of water cooler test 2
rig.
2 Calculate the COP of water cooler test rig 2
3 Identify the components of ice plant test rig. 2
Refrigeration System And
4 Calculate the COP of ice plant test rig 2
Refrigerants
5 Identify the components of domestic 2
refrigerator.
6 Calculate the COP of domestic 2
refrigerator/VCRS.
7 Identify various controls like L.P./H.P. cut 2
outs, thermostat, overload protector, solenoid
valve used in RAC
8 Identify components of ‘hermetically sealed 2
compressor. Components Of Vapour
9 Prepare a report of Visit to cold storage Compression Refrigeration 6
industry/ central A.C. plant in view of System.
ducting system, insulation system and Air
distribution system (e.g. frozen food
industry/ice-cream industry/mushroom
plants/textile industries)..
10 Identify the components of A.C. test rig. 2
Air Conditioning System
11 Calculate the COP of A.C. test rig 2
12 Troubleshoot domestic refrigerator/ window 4
Air Distribution Systems
air- Conditioner
Skill Assessment 2
Total 32
4

No.
R U A
01 Basics of
04(00) 04(04) 00(00) 08(04)
Refrigeration
02 Refrigeration System
02(02) 10(00) 00(06) 12(08)
And Refrigerants
03 Components of
Vapour Compression 04(04) 08(00) 06(00) 18(04)
Refrigeration System.
04 Psychrometry 04(02) 04(08) 06(00) 14(10)
05 Air Conditioning
04(00) 04(00) 00(06) 08(06)
System
06 Air Distribution
00(04) 04(04) 06(00) 08(08)
Systems
Total 18(12) 34(16) 18 (12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2
01 5/7
2 R 2
02 1 U 4 5 R 4 4 R 4 4 U 4 3 R 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 3 U 4 3 U 4 6 R 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 6 U 4 5 U 4 4 U 4 1 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 2 U 6 6 A 6 2 A 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 3 A 6 5 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing diagrams of experiment set up, equipments, writing 10
procedure, etc.
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
_ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
1
2 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3
3 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3
4 _ 3 3 3 _ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _

Year Of publication
1. A Textbook of R. S. Khurmi, J.K. Gupta, S Chand 13: 978-81-219-
Refrigeration and Air & Co Ltd, 1 st Edition, 2006 2781-9
Conditioning 81-219-2781-1
2. Refrigeration and Air C. P. Arrora, Tata Mc-Graw Hill, 3 rd 10: 0071267565
Conditioning Edition, 2014 13:
9780071267564
3. Refrigeration and Air Manohar Prasad, New Age 13:
Conditioning Publications. 2nd Edition, 2011 9788122414295
4. Basic Refrigeration and P. N. Ananthanarayanan, Tata 10: 0-07-451515-2
Air Conditioning McGraw Hill, 1983 13: 978-0-07-
451515-0
7
 E-REFERENCES:
1) http://slideshare.in/wapakununkguy/refrigeration-andairconditioningnotes
2) http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse-content/IIT Kharagpur/Ref and Air
Cond/New_index1.html
3) http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2372/ Refrigeration-and-Air-Conditioning

1. Air conditioning trainer kit
2. Water cooler trainer kit
3. Ice plant trainer kit
4. Window Air conditioner
5. Split air conditioner
6. Domestic Refrigerator
7. Car air conditioning trainer kit

1. Prof. O. V. Sarode Lecture, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2 Prof. S. A. Dhankute Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Prof. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
4 Er. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur
5 Shri. G. F. Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : CNC MACHINES
PREREQUISITE : WS401E
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 02; TU: 00 ; PR: 02
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
This is Technology course which has relevance with the courses taught earlier
namely Manufacturing Processes and advanced manufacturing processes. After getting
conversant with the basic manufacturing processes and production processes, it is necessary
for a technician to know about the advancements in the area of manufacturing and
production processes. The subject will impart knowledge & skills necessary for working in
modern manufacturing environment.
This subject will help the student to get familiarized with working principles and
operations performed on CNC machining centers, generation of part program and study
tooling of CNC machine.
1. Select CNC machine for given type of work.
2. Apply G code and M code for specific machining process.
3. Select sequential tool list for given machining process.
4. Develop CNC program for sequence of operation.
5. Operate CNC machine for given job.
6. Measure dimensions of finished product for confirmation to drawing.
1
ME409E CNC Machines 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
1 Introduction to 1. Define NC, CNC, and 1.1 NC (Numeric control), CNC
06
CNC machines. DNC. (Computer numeric control),
2. Classify CNC DNC (Direct Numeric
Machines. control) definition.
3. Operate CNC control 1.2 Classification of CNC
panel. machines.
4. Describe principle axes 1.3 Difference between CNC and
of CNC Machine NC, relative advantages and
disadvantages.
1.4 CNC organization – CNC
machine body and control
panel, CNC machine tool
working principle.
1.5 Cartesian Co-ordinate system
and right hand rule for
identification of axes.
2 Construction and 1. Distinguish CNC 2.1 Construction and working of
04
working principle machine on the basis of CNC turning centre, VMC
of CNC machine. constructional features. and HMC
2. Differentiate CNC lathe, 2.2 Construction and working of
Vertical and Horizontal CNC turn mill centre
milling machine. 2.3 Construction and working of
3. List components of Multi- axis CNC machines
CNC machine
4. Describe features Multi-
axis CNC machine
3 Special features 1. Define various terms 3.1 Bed and machine frame
06
of CNC Machine related to construction construction.
components. of CNC. 3.2 Spindle constructional details
2. Describe construction 3.3 Constructional details and
and working of the working of ball screw and
different components, L.M. guide ways.
subassemblies, 3.4 Various Spindle drives used
assemblies and in CNC machines.
peripherals of CNC 3.5 Working of Machine control
machines. unit.
3. Describe working of 3.6 Types of lubrication systems
lubrication system used used for CNC machines.
in CNC Machines. 3.7 Working of hydraulic and
4. Draw circuit diagram of pneumatic systems used for
pneumatic and chuck, tool and pallet
Hydraulic system used changing in CNC machines.
in working of CNC
2
Machine.
5. Identify common faults
in CNC machines and
suggest remedies.
4 Manual Part 1. State different G and M 4.1 NC words, G codes
06
Programming for codes. (Preparatory function), M
CNC Lathe centre. 2. Describe function of codes (Miscellaneous
Codes used in manual functions)
part programming. 4.2 Programming format, word
3. Develop CNC part statement, block format.
programming according 4.3 Lathe co-ordinate system.
to the drawing of the Tool path co-ordinates.
component. Interpolation functions
4. Select and apply 4.3 Facing and turning program.
suitable lathe for 4.4 Tool nose radius
machining of compensation.
component. 4.5 Chamfer and taper programs.
4.6 List and Application of CNC
Lathe cycles
5 Manual Part 1. Define terms related to 5.1 Linear interpolation Program.
06
Programming for tool offset and cycles. 5.2 Circular interpolation
CNC VMC/HMC 2. Develop linear Program.
( Vertical/ interpolation program 5.3 Cutter radius compensation.
horizontal Milling for given drawing. 5.4 Tool offset.
Centre) 3. Develop circular 5.5 Introduction to Canned
interpolation program cycles.
for given drawing.
4. Select and apply
suitable canned cycle
for given job.
6 Tooling for 1. State types of CNC 6.1 Types of CNC Cutting tools
04
CNC machines. cutting tools for CNC 6.2 Types of index able inserts
and VMC/HMC. with its geometry
2. Describe construction 6.3 Construction of tool holding
and working of tool assembly
holding assembly. 6.4 Tool presetting procedure
3. Describe tool presetting 6.5 Working of Automatic Tool
procedure. Changing (ATC) device and
4. Describe working types of tool magazine
principle of Automatic 6.6 Safety Procedures, alarms,
tool changer. fool-proof procedures.
5. State safety precautions
while working on CNC
Machines.
Total Hrs.
32
3
Practical Specific Learning Outcomes Unit Hrs.

1 Prepare report on control systems employed Introduction to CNC
in the CNC machine centre observed during machines. 4
visit to industry.
2 Prepare report on constructional feature of
Construction and working
CNC machine centre observed during visit 4
principle of CNC machine.
to industry.
3 Prepare report on special features of CNC Special features of CNC
machine centre observed during visit to Machine components. 4
industry.
4 Prepare One job on CNC lathe having plain
Manual Part Programming
turning, taper turning, step turning,
for CNC Lathe centre. 8
threading, boring and grooving (Batch of 4-
5 students).
5 Prepare One job on CNC milling having Manual Part Programming
following operations – face milling, for CNC VMC/ HMC (
8
slotting, contour machining (Batch of 4-5 Vertical/ horizontal Milling
students) Centre)
6 Prepare report on selection of cutting tools
Tooling for CNC machines.
used for CNC lathe and milling during 4
practical no. 4 & 5.
Total Hrs. 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
1 Introduction to CNC 04(02) 08(04) 00(00) 12(06)
machines
2 Construction and working 04(00) 08(06) 00(00) 12(06)
principle of CNC
machine.
3 Special features of CNC 04(00) 08(04) 00(06) 12(10)
Machine components
4 CNC Lathe center manual 02(00) 04(04) 06(00) 12(06)
part programming
5 CNC Vertical Mill center 06(04) 00(02) 06(00) 12(06)
manual part programming
6 Tooling for CNC 04(04) 06(04) 00(00) 10(08)
machines
Total 24(10) 34(24) 12 (06) 70(40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
5 U 2
02 3 R 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 5 R 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 6 R 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 6 R 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 3 U 6 6 U 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Description of observed features of CNC Machine in the report. 10
2 Development of manual part program. 15
3 Execution of developed program on CNC machine 15
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3
2 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3
3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ 3
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3

Year Of publication
1. CNC Machines Adithan M., Pabla B. S., New Age 9780071623018
Publications.
2. CNC Machine Hand Alan Overby, Mc Grow Hill 9788122834262
Book
3. CAD/ CAM/ CAE Chougule N. K., Scitech Publication 9788183711753
Pvt Ltd
4. CNC Programming Made Binit Kumar Jha, Vikas Publication 9788125911807
Easy House Pvt. Ltd.
7
 E-REFERENCES:
th
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/37, assessed on 29 October, 2016
th
 http://www.egr.msu.edu/~pkwon/me478/operations.pdf, assessed on 29
October, 2016

 CNC Turning Machine Center.
 CNC Vertical/Horizontal Machine Center.

Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. D. C. Satdeve Workshop Supdt. Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur.
3. Mr. M. S. Deshpande Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
4. Er. A. M. Onkar Chief Executive Officer Onkar Furnitures, MIDC,
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
TOTAL CREDITS : 03 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Now a day a manual drafting is obsolete in industry. Computers being the
inevitable part in an engineer’s life due to its inbuilt characteristics which helps him to
do various task with acceleration. Using computers and Computer Aided Drafting
(CAD) software it is easy to create and modify a drawing which ultimately saves time.
It also may be useful to generate assembly and manufacturing drawings.
1. Create, save CAD drawing files and modify particular drawing
2. Use drafting set-up
3. Modify 2D and isometric drawing
4. Integrate layers and blocks in drawing
5. Develop customized drawing template
6. Print drawing.
1
ME410E Computer Aided Drafting 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1 1. Identify components of 1.1 Getting acquainted with CAD, 02
CAD Basics CAD screen. Starting CAD, CAD screen layout,
2. Describe the procedure to drawing area, menu and toolbars,
Create new drawing status bar
3. Describe toolbar and 1.2 Creating a new drawing, working
commands with toolbar and commands,
4. Describe the procedure to changing drawing limits, creating
Edit drawing rectangle etc. saving drawing for
first time
1.3 Opening and existing drawing file,
CAD Cartesian workspace,
working with drawing editor,
closing a drawing and exiting from
CAD
2 1. State drafting set-up 2.1 Drafting set-up: units, angle, area, 02
Drawing in 2. Describe the procedure to coordinate system, limits, grid,
Two Create 2D drawing with object snap, line type and line
Dimensions Draw commands weight
3. Identify and select draw 2.2 Draw commands: Drawing line,
commands for particular polyline, spline, rectangles,
drawing polygons creating construction
4. Describe the procedure to lines, creating rays
Use view options for 2.3 Drawing circles, arcs, ellipses,
drawing Donuts, placing points, changing
points style , text
2.4 Creating two dimensional
drawings using draw commands,
Viewing your drawing- zoom, pan,
window, aerial view, viewport,
undoing and redoing action, save
and exit
3 1. Modify the 2D drawing Modify commands: 02
Modifying with edit commands 3.1 Editing object, understanding
the Drawing 2. Identify and select object selection basic, erasing
proper edit command object, moving object, coping
for particular editing object, rotating object, scaling
3. Describe the procedure object, using change command
to Use edit commands 3.2 Copying and moving object using
4. Interpret draw and MIRROR command, ARRAY
modify commands command, Offsetting object,
5. Describe the procedure resizing command, extending
to Change properties of object, stretching object
drawing entities 3.3 Modify the created object using-
copy, mirror, hatch, divide,
explode, join, pedit, offset, array,
2
move, rotate, scale, stretch, trim,

chamfer etc. command
4 1. Identify dimensioning 4.1 Dimensioning/annotating your
Dimensionin techniques drawing-Working with annotation,
g, Layout and 2. Describe the procedure to adding text in drawing, modifying
Printing Use annotate menu for and formatting multiline text 03
dimensioning drawing 4.2 Hatching
3. Describe the procedure to 4.3 Adding dimensions- dimensioning
Create hatching concept, adding linear, radial,
4. Describe the procedure to angular dimensions, adding notes
Set up layout for printing to your dimensions
5. Describe the procedure to 4.4 Setting up layout- printing
Carry out printing of concept, creating view ports,
drawing setting up layouts, guideline for
layouts
4.5 Printing your drawing: Preparing
drawing for plotting or printing,
creating layout in paper space,
working with plot style, Plotting a
drawing- choosing a
plotter/printer, preview/creating
the plot
5 1. Create isometric 5.1 Isometric mode- grid, snap, 04
Isometric environment. standard/isometric
Drawing 2. Identify isometric setup 5.2 Isoplane-orientation of crosshairs,
3. Classify circle and isotop, isoright and isoleft
isocircle 5.3 Drawing isometric circles- set
4. Select proper plane for isoplane, use ellipse- isocircle
isometric drawing 5.4 Isometric text- oblique angle,
5. Describe the procedure to rotation angle, style, dynamic text
Draw isometric drawing 5.5 Creating isometric drawing
6 1. Describe the procedure to 6.1 Creating new drawing with 03
Drawing Create customized template
Organization template 6.2 Working in layers
and 2. Interpret components in 6.3 Getting information from your
information different layers. drawing- measuring objects,
3. Describe the procedure to working with properties
Collect information from 6.4 Inserting blocks- inserting blocks
drawing from tool pallets, inserting block
4. Describe the procedure to using insert, inserting block with
Insert proper block design center
5. Describe layers and
block
Total Hrs. 16
3

Practi - Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
cals
1 Identify and locate components of CAD classic screen CAD Basics 4
by creating new drawing.
2 Draw a line diagram using absolute coordinate
6
method. Use LIMITS, UNITS,LINE,ARC Commands Drawing in Two
3 Draw a line diagram using relative coordinate and Dimensions
6
relative polar coordinate method.
4 Draw a 2D figure using Draw and Modify commands.
Use LINE, CIRCLE, OFFSET, TRIM, FILLET 6
commands.
Drawing in Two
5 Draw a 2D figure using Draw and Modify commands.
Dimensions and
Use LINE, ARC, POLYGON, ELLIPSE, COPY, 6
Modifying the
MIRROR, TRIM, ROTATE, CHAMFER commands.
Drawing
6 Draw 2D drawing of mechanical component using
required commands. ( any one component like gear, 6
pulley, bearing etc. may be selected)
7 Dimension the object. Open the previously saved file Dimensioning,
8
and dimension the lines, arc, circle, polygon etc. Layout and
8 Plot the drawing from model space and print it. Printing 6
9 Draw isometric drawing of mechanical component.
Use LIMITS, UNITS, ZOOM, GRID, SNAP, LINE, Isometric
8
COPY, ISOPLANE, ELLIPSE, TRIM, ERASE, Drawing
PROPERTIES, SAVE Commands
10 Create the customized template, draw title block using Drawing
LAYER, RECTANGLE, EXPLODE, TEXT, AND Organization and 8
COPY Commands. information
Total Hrs. 64
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER : Nil

 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER : Nil
4

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Journal &
Writing Continuous 05 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Printouts
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

1 Using drafting set up /aids 10
2 Drawing diagrams of 2D or isometric given figure 20
3 Dimensioning figure 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Course
Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
2 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
Author, Publisher, Edition and Year ISBN
S.N. Title
Of publication Number
1. AutoCAD 2002 Bible Ellen Finkelstein, IDG Books India(P) 81-265-0233-9
Ltd., First Edition, 2001
2. AutoCAD 2016 and Donnie Gladfelter, John Wiley and 978-1-119-
AutoCAD LT 2016 Sons. Inc. Indiana, First Edition, 2016 05955-4
3. AUTOCAD IN 3D Frank J. Johnson, McGraw Hill Inc., 0-07-112653-8
New Delhi, First Edition,1992
4. Mastering AutoCAD 13 George Omura, BPB Publication, New 81-7029-785-0
Delhi, First Edition, 1997
5. Engineering Drawing N. D. Bhatt, Charotaar Publishing 978-93-80358-
House Pvt. Ltd., Anand, Gujrat, 51th 55-0
Edition,2012
6. A text book of P. J. Shah, S. Chand and Co.Ltd., New 81-219-2964-4
Engineering Drawing Delhi, First Edition,2008
7. Engineering Drawing Dhananjay A Jolhe, Tata McGraw-Hill 978-0-07-
with introduction to Co. Ltd.,New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2008 064837-1
AutoCAD
8. AutoCAD 2016 exercise Cheryl R. Shrock and Steve Heather, 978-0-8311-
workbook for windows Industrial Press Inc. South Norwalk, 3518-8
USA, First Edition, 2016
6
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://www.mycadsite.com/tutorials/level_3/isometric-drawing-in-autocad-3-2.htm
, assessed on 27th June, 2016
 http://www.cadlearning.com/courses/autocad-mechanical-training-tutorials/, assessed
on 27 th June, 2016
 http://www.staff.city.ac.uk/~ra600/ME1105/Tutorials/CAD-1/Tutorial%20CAD-1a.pdf,
assessed on 28 th June, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yruPUj_61bw, , assessed on 29th June, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Nv8skZZcUlw , assessed on 29th June, 2016
th
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Lz6piHlBn7g , assessed on 30 June, 2016

1. CPU with Intel ( R ) Core (TM) i3 processor or higher latest version
2. A color monitor with highest 32 bit/ 64 bit color display and with screen resolution
1024 by 768 pixels.
3. A scroll mouse.
4. Laser printer
5. Windows 7 operating system or latest operating system
6. Any one open source CAD software at AICTE website

1. Dr. R. R. Chaudhari Head of Department, Government Polytechnic,
Mechanical Engineering Nagpur
2. Shri. G. H. Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur
3. Dr. V. M. Athawale Head of Department, Government Polytechnic,
Mechanical Engineering Yawatmal
4. Mr. K. S. Thekedar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Bramhapuri
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : CAD/CAM
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 04 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1PR CREDIT = 2CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
CAD/CAM (Computer Aided Design / Computer Aided Manufacturing)
technology is moving in the direction of greater integration of design activities &
manufacturing activities. CAD is the use of computer system to assist in the creation
modification, analysis, or optimization of a design. CAD software is used to increase the
productivity of the designer, improve the quality of design, and improve communication
through documentation.CAM include the use of computer to plan manage & control the
operation in manufacturing plant through either direct or indirect computer interface with
plant production resources.
1. Use CAD/CAM hardware and software
2. Develop geometric modeling features
3. Construct geometric modeling : wireframe modeling, surface modeling, solid
modeling
4. Create assembly of components and generate exploded view
5. Print mechanical modeling and prepare orthographic and sectional views from solid
model
6. Execute CNC program.
1
ME411E CAD/CAM 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1 Fundamentals 1. Describe CAD/CAM 1.1 Roles of computers in industrial 03
of CAD/CAM 2. State product life cycle Manufacturing
3. Describe design process 1.2 What is CAD? What is CAM?
4. Describe the process to Create 1.3 Product life cycle
manufacturing data 1.4 The design process
5. Identify CAD/CAM hardware 1.5 Creating the manufacturing data
6. Select CAD/CAM software base
1.6 Applications of CAD/CAM
1.7 CAD/CAM hardware
1.8 CAD/CAM software
2 1. Describe the process to 2.1 Introduction, Requirement of 06
Basics of geometric modeling geometric modeling, geometric
Geometric 2. Apply geometric modeling models, 3D modeling workspace
Modeling features and navigation
3. Describe the process to use 2.2 Geometric construction methods:
editing features of geometric wireframe modeling, surface
modeling modeling, solid modeling,
4. Describe the process to use extrusion, sweeping, feature
plotting features modeling
2.3 Modeling facilities desired:
drafting features, modeling
features, editing features,
annotations, dimensioning and
hatching features
2.4 Plotting features
3 1. Describe the process to 3.1 Understanding/creating of Planes, 06
Solid create Plane axis, points axis, points.
Modeling - 2. Describe the process to 3.2 Creating Solid using Extrude,
Basic construct Solid using Revolve, Sweep,
Extrude, Revolve, Sweep 3.3 Modifying & Regenerating by Edit
3. Apply Round, chamfer, Rib Definition, Applying Round,
to solid chamfer, Rib,
4. Describe the process to carry 3.4 Creating & Working with datum
out solid modeling with Planes, Axis, curves,
datum Planes. datum Points, Auto round.
4 1. Describe the process to create 4.1 Creating Holes, Spring & Threads 06
Solid Modeling - solid model using Holes, using Helical sweep
Advance Spring & Threads 4.2 Swept blend, Helical sweep, Warp,
2. Describe the process to use Applying Draft
Swept blend, Helical sweep, 4.3 Copying features, Patterning
Warp & draft 4.4 Blending, View manager for Cross
3. Describe the process to create sections,
solid 4.5 customize screen, Environment
4. Describe the process to create
customize screen
5 1. Describe the process to draw 5.1 Calling components, Constraining
06
Assembly or call components for components
Modeling assembly 5.2 Working with Layers & Visibility,
2. Describe the process to Patterning,
2
ME411E CAD/CAM 2016
construct assembly with 5.3 Creating Assembly features

layers & pattern 5.4 View manager, Exploded Views
3. Apply Assembly features 5.5 Creating Assembly Models: Top-
4. Describe the process to create Down approach, Bottom-Up
assembly modeling approach
5. Generate exploded views 5.6 Create projection views –Front,
6. Generate orthographic views Top, side view and sectional views
1. Describe manufacturing and 6.1 Introduction to manufacturing and

6 automation 05
automation
Computer Aided 2. Describe 3D printing 6.2 Introduction to 3D printing
Manufacturing ( 3. List the types of 3D printing technology
CAM) 4. Select proper material for 3D 6.3 Types of 3D printing
printing 6.4 Material used for 3D printing
5. Generate G codes & execute 6.5 Generation of G codes of 3D
by using 3D printer drawing and its execution by using
3D printer
Total Hrs. 32

1 Draw 2 dimensional figure using Solid Fundamentals of
04
Modeling sketcher commands. CAD/CAM
2 Create 2D plan of any mechanical object and Basics of Geometric
06
convert it into 3 D modeling. Modeling
3 Create 3 D surface modeling and visualization Solid Modeling -
08
of any one components Basic
4 Create 3 D solid modeling of any one Solid Modeling -
10
components Advance
5 Create assembly of mechanical component by Assembly Modeling
Top-Down/ Bottom-Up approach ( Minimum 08
five parts)
6 Generate exploded view of an assembly Assembly Modeling 12
7 Prepare orthographic and sectional views from Assembly Modeling
08
solid model
8 Generate G codes program of 3D drawing and Computer Aided
execute by using 3D printer Manufacturing 08
( CAM)
Total Hrs. 64
3
ME411E CAD/CAM 2016

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Journal &
Printouts
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4
ME411E CAD/CAM 2016

1 Using drafting set up /aids 10
Creating any one geometric modeling (wireframe/ surface/solid modeling)
2 20
OR create assembly
3 Dimensioning 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
2 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 _ _ 3 _ _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 _ _ 3 _ _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3

Author, Publisher, Edition and Year
Of publication
1. CAD/CAM ( Computer Suresh Dalela & P.K.Jain, S. Chand & 81-219-1784-0
Aided Design/ Computer Company Ltd., New Delhi, First
Aided Manufacturing Edition, 2000
2. CAD/CAM ( Computer Mikell P. Groover & Emory W. 978-81-7758-416-5
Aided Design/ Computer Zimmers, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.
Aided Manufacturing Ltd., New Delhi, 05th Edition, 1997
3. CAD/CAM Concept Chennakesava R. Alavala, PHI Learning 978-81-203-3340-6
and Applications Pvt. Ltd, Delhi, Sixth Edition, 2015
4. CAD/CAM Principles P.N.Rao, Tata McGrawHill Education 978-0-07-068193-4
and Applications Pvt. Ltd.,New Delhi, Third Edition,
2010
5. CAD/CAM/CIM P. Radhakrishnan, S. Subramhanyam, 81-224-1248-3
V. Raju, New Age international
Publisher, New Delhi, Second Edition,
2000
6. Pro Engineer Wildfire Sham Tickoo, Dreamtech Press, New 978-81-7722-904-2
4 for Designers Delhi, 2010
5
ME411E CAD/CAM 2016
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/user/caddsoftsolutions , assessed on 29th June, 2016
 http://bobcad.com/training/lessons/, assessed on 29th June, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=83rhQ6oehIc , assessed on 30 th June, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xBE9eLQ5Cxc , assessed on 30th June, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hq47wq9qBbs , assessed on 30th June, 2016

1. CPU with Intel ( R ) Core (TM) i3 processor or higher latest version
2. A color monitor with highest 32 bit/ 64 bit color display and with screen resolution
1024 by 768 pixels.
3. A scroll mouse.
4. Laser printer
5. Windows7 operating system or higher version
6. Any one open source modeling software at AICTE website
7. CNC Trainer Machine

Mechanical Engineering Nagpur
Engineering Nagpur
3 Mr. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur
4. Dr. V. M. Athawale Head of Department, Government Polytechnic,
Mechanical Engineering Yawatmal
5. Mr. K. S. Thekedar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Bramhapuri
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
LEVEL NAME : PROFESSIONAL COURSE
COURSE TITLE : METROLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
The Diploma mechanical Engineer should have the knowledge of selection and
use of various measuring instruments as he often comes across measuring different
parameters of machined components and the appropriate fitment of interchangeable
components in the assemblies. The knowledge of the subject also forms the basis for the
design of mechanical measurement systems, design & drawing of mechanical
components.
1. Illustrate various linear and angular measuring instruments, standards of
measurements and system of limits, fits and gauges.
2. Analyze measurements of surface finish, dimensional and non dimensional
parameters and gear, screw thread parameters. Inspect components by using dial
indicator.
3. Apply various concepts of statistical quality control.
4. Measure different linear and angular dimensions by various instruments.
5. Plot various quality control charts and draw conclusion.
6. Adapt various precautions while taking measurements.
1
ME412E Metrology and Quality Control 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes (Cognitive Domain) Topics and subtopics Hrs.
NIL

1 Measure various dimensions & dimensional
parameters using instruments such as radius gauge,
pitch screw gauge, filler gauge, vernier caliper,
vernier height gauge, vernier depth gauge, dial type
vernier caliper, micrometer, inside micrometer.
Practical also includes following outcomes
(Cognitive Domain) - 06
 State Definition of Metrology,
 Describe Construction and working of various
types of linear measuring instrument.
2 Set the Adjustable snap gauge GO end and NOGO end
for a given dimensions using slip gauges.
(Cognitive Domain) -
 State Concept of limits fits and tolerances, 04
 Describe Hole and shaft basis system,
 State Taylors principle of gauge design,
 State classification of plug and ring gauges
 Describe Slip gauges and its accessories. Introduction
3 Inspect given components using Dial Test Indicator as
a mechanical comparator.
 State Definition of comparator,
 State Classification of comparators ,
 Describe Construction and working of dial
indicator as a comparator.
4 Check the given component using high pressure Dial
type pneumatic comparator.
 Describe Construction and working of 06
pneumatic compactors,
 Select different comparators for particular
applications.
 State advantages and disadvantages of
pneumatic comparator.
2
5 Find unknown angle of component using bevel

protractor and verify the same using sine bar/ sine
center and slip gauges.
 Concept of angular measurement, list of angular 06
measuring instrument,
 construction and working of bevel protracter,
 sine bar and sine centre.
6 Measure the angle of component with the Angle
Dekkor / Autocollimator using angle gauge.
 Construction and working of Angle Dekkor,
Autocollimator,
 Concept of angle gauges
 Calculate angle on a component.
7 Measure screw thread elements by using screw Angular
thread micrometer, screw pitch gauge and Verify Measurement
with the help of profile projector/tool maker’s
microscope.
 State terminology of screw thread,
 Describe construction and working of screw
pitch gauge,
 Describe construction and working of profile
projector and tool maker microscope.
8 Measure gear tooth elements by using gear tooth
vernier caliper and verify gear tooth profile using
profile projector.
Practical also includes following outcomes 06
 State terminology of gear,
 Describe construction and working of gear
tooth vernier caliper and profile projector
9 Measure surface roughness of turning, milling,
shaping, grinding and lapping surfaces using stylus
probe roughness measuring instrument. Thread and
Practical also includes following outcomes Gear
 Describe Primary and secondary texture, Metrology 04
 Define and interpret sampling length, lay,
direction of lay, sources of lay, CLA, Ra,
RMS, values as per IS3073-1967.
 Draw and interpret symbol for designating
surface finish on drawing.
10 Test lathe machine/drill machine for parallelism, Testing 04
squareness, trueness by Test Dial indicator.
3
Practical also includes following outcomes Techniques

 Define parallelism, straightness, squareness,
co-axiality, roundness, run out etc.,
 Describe Alignment testing of machine tools
like lathe and drilling machine.
11 Draw the frequency histogram, frequency polygon
for given samples. Take minimum 50 readings. And
find mean, mode, median.
Practical also includes following outcomes 06
 State Techniques for recording inspection data
like frequency histogram, frequency polygon
etc., Define SQC,
 Compute mean, median & mode for given
population data. Statistical
12 Draw and interpret X Bar and R Bar Chart by using 06
available inspection data. Quality
Practical also includes following outcomes Control (SQC)
 Define control charts,
 Classify control chart, X bar & R bar charts, P
bar and C charts,
 Compute control limits of various control
charts
 Interpret various control charts
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs. 64
4

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Journal &
Printouts
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

1 Skill of performing the practical 20
2 Knowledge of the topic 10
3 Care, Precautions and human error while handling instrument 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 _ 3 3 _
1
2 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 _ 3 3 _
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 1
3
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 _ 3 3 _
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
5
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 _
6
Year Of publication
1. Metrology and Quality R K Jain, Khanna Publication, Delhi 71-7409-024-X
Control
2. Engineering Metrology I. C. Gupta, Dhanpat Rai and Sons 798-81-89928-45-2
Publication.
 E-REFERENCES:
 www.a-zshiksha.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=148&t=61562, assessed on
17th September 2016.
 www.a-zshiksha.com/forum/viewtopic.php?f=148&t=61562, assessed on
18th September 2016.
 www1.gantep.edu.tr/~bozdana/ME472_5.pdf, assessed on 26th July
2016.
6

 Vernier Calliper, Vernier Height Gauge, Vernier Depth Gauge, Dial type vernier
caliper, Micrometer, Inside Micrometer, Tube micrometer, Radius gauge. Pitch screw
gauge, Feeler gauge.
 A set of adjustable snap gauges with Go and No Go End,A set of snip gauges, Dial
indicator with magnetic stand surface plate,
 High pressure dial type pneumatic comparator,
 Bevel protractor, sine bar ,sine centre.
 Angle Dekkor, Autocollimator and set of angle gauges.
 Screw thread micrometer, screw pitch gauge.
 Profile projector.
 Tool makers microscope
 Surface Roughness measuring instrument.

1. Mr. M. M. Dangre Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. M. S. Deshpande Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Mr. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : MECHANICAL MEASUREMENT
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PR. TEE EXAM : 02 HRs (External)
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
The art of measurement plays an important role in all branches of engineering.
With advances in technology, measurement techniques have also taken rapid strides,
with many types of instrumentation devices, innovations, refinements. The course aims
at making a Mechanical Engineering student familiar with the principles of
instrumentation, transducers & measurement of non electrical parameters like
temperature, pressure, flow rate, velocity, force & stress.
1. Select instrument for measurement of various measured.
2. Specify different instruments.
3. Draw various practical setups.
4. Operate various instruments.
5. Measure error in measurement.
6. Record the readings of various instruments.
1
ME413E Mechanical Measurement 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes (Cognitive Domain) Topics and subtopics Hrs.
NIL
Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Unit Hrs.

al’s
1. Identify various measuring instrument in laboratory & write Introduction
their technical specifications
 Select instrument to measure various measurands. 2
 Specify range, span, accuracy, threshold and resolution,
of various instruments.
2 Measure pressure and vacuum using Bourdon tube type Pressure
gauges. measurement
 Select bourdon tube type gauge to measure pressure and
vacuum
 Specify range, span of bourdon tube type gauges.
4
 Write units of pressure measurement.
 Draw constructional features of bourdon tube type
gauge.
 Measure pressure and vacuum using bourdon tube type
gauge.
3 Measure pressure using U tube manometer.
 Draw diagram of U tube manometer,
 Inclined manometer, U- tube differential manometer,
4
Inverted U- tube differential manometer.
 Compare U tube manometer and inclined manometer.
 Measure pressure using U tube manometer.
4 Measure temperature using Thermistor. Temperature
 Compare different temperature scales. Measurement
 Compare working principle of resistance temperature
4
detector and thermistor.
 Draw various shapes of thermistor.
 Measure temperature using thermistor.
5 Measure temperature using Thermocouple and optical
pyrometer.
 Compare contact and non contact type of indirect
temperature measurement.
 Draw basic thermocouple circuit working on Seebeck
4
effect.
 Draw constructional feature of optical pyrometer.
 Write Laws of thermocouple and their applications.
 Measure temperature using thermocouple and optical
pyrometer.
2
6 Measure flow rate using Rotameter Flow

 Compare various methods of flow measurement. Measurement
 Draw the diagram of practical set up to measure flow
using rotameter.
4
 Draw shapes of float used in rotameter.
 Write working principle of rotameter.
 Measure flow rate using roatameter and compare with
actual flow rate.
7 Measure flow rate using Venturimeter
 Compare flow rate measuring instruments working on
constant area variable head concept.
4
 Draw constructional features of Venturimeter.
 Write working principle of Venturimeter.
 Measure flow rate using Venturimeter.
8 Measure strain using strain gauge Strain
 Compare various types of Resistance strain gauges. measurement
 Draw Wheatstone bridge network to measure strain 4
using strain gauge and write working principle.
 Measure strain and plot a graph of Load Vs Strain.
9 Measure displacement using LVDT(Linear Variable Displacement
Differential Transformer) measurement
 Compare LVDT and RVDT(Rotary variable differential
transformer) working on mutual inductance concept.
 Draw circuit diagram of LVDT to measure linear
4
displacement.
 Measure actual linear displacement using micrometer
screw gauge and LVDT.
 Plot a graph (Displacement measured using micrometer
screw gauge Vs Displacement measured using LVDT)
10 Measure displacement using Inductive transducer
 Compare displacement measurement using concept of
mutual inductance and self inductance.
4
 Draw circuit diagram of Inductive Transducer to
measure displacement.
 Measure displacement using inductive transducer.
11 Measure Liquid level using Capacitive gauge Level
 Compare various methods to measure liquid level. Measurement
 Compare effect of change overlapping area, dielectric
constant between the plates of capacitor and the distance
between the plates of capacitor on capacitance.
4
 Draw practical set up to measure liquid level using
capacitive gauge.
 Measure liquid level using capacitive gauge and
compare it with actual level measurement using linear
scale
12 Measure Liquid level using float and shaft gauge
 Compare concept of direct & indirect liquid level
measurement
4
 Draw practical set up to measure liquid level using float
and shaft gauge.
 Measure Liquid level using float and shaft gauge
13 Measure speed using Stroboscope. Speed
4
 Compare different methods of speed measurement. Measurement
3
 Draw practical set up to measure speed using

stroboscope.
 Put a mark on rotating shaft.
 Adjust the flashing light frequency of stroboscope to
observe single mark on rotating shaft.
 Measure speed using stroboscope.
14 Measure force using Multi-lever platform scale Force
 Compare different methods of force measurement. Measurement
 Draw constructional features of Multi-lever platform 4
scale.
 Measure force by adjusting poise weight and pan weight.
15 Measure torque using strain gauge torsion meter. Torque
 Compare different methods of torque measurement. Measurement
4
 Draw practical set up of torque measurement using
 Measure torque using strain gauge torsion meter.
16 Measure shaft power using absorption dynamometer Power
 Compare Absorption, Transmission and Driving Measurement
 Dynamometers for shaft power measurement.
4
 Compare working principle of different types of
absorption dynamometer.
 Measure shaft power using eddy current dynamometer.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 64
4

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
Journal &
Printouts
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

1 Drawing figure of apparatus, selection of equipment’s. writing procedure 10
etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawing Graphs(if any 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(COs)
1 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
2 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 3 3 _
5 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _
6 _ 3 3 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 _

1. A Course In Mechanical A.K.Sawhney, P.Sawhney, 8177000233
Measurements And Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 12 th
Instrumentation Edition, 2001
2. Mechanical Measurement R.V. Jalgaonkar, Everest 10:8186314261
& Control. Publishing House, 18th Edition, 13: 978-8186314265
2010
3. Mechanical & Industrial R.K. Jain, Khanna 8174091912
Measurements.(Process Publications, 2011
Instrumentation and
Control)
Instrumentation Devices & C. Rangan, G Sarma, V.S.V. 10: 0074633503
Systems Mani , McGraw Hill Education; 13: 978-0074633502
2nd Edition, April 2001
5. Mechanical Measurements D.S.Kumar, Metropolitan 10: 8120004124
& Control. Publishing Pvt. Ltd. 4th Edition, 13: 978-8120004122
2006.
6
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://nptel.ac.in/reviewed_pdfs/112106138/lec1.pdf, assessed on 12 th September
2016
 http://www.slideshare.net/manishsharma225/lecture-no1-ppt, assessed on 12 th
September 2016
 https://drive.google.com/file/d/0BwYLk28fu-Hra28wUmd0VTJSUlU/view, assessed
on 12th September 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lc4dsNvm2Ks , assessed on 12th September 2016

1. LVDT Measurement Trainer (Sensor range +/- 10.0mm, Linearity 1%)
2. Thermister Trainer ( 100 degree centigrade, Temperature source –Water kettle,
Initial and Final Set – Through single turn Potentiometer)
3. Rota meter(Range 0-50 LPM)
4. Capacitance Level Trainer(Range 0-500 mm, Least count +/- 1mm,Medium –Water)
5. Thermocouple Iron – Constantan (00c to 482 0c), Limits of error ±2.2 °C.
6. Stroboscopic flash rate 100 to 15000 flashes per minute, Accuracy ± 0.05%.
7. Torsion meter (Range 10 Nm to 100 Nm), drive rotation speed 1 to 20r/min.
8. Eddy current Absorbing dynamometer, Max speed 6000 RPM, Peak absorbing
torque 1092 Nm at 1000 –1500 rpm.
9. Optical Pyrometer - Accuracy ± 0.5% of Reading, Temperature ranges 1420°F –
5800°F (770°C - 3200°C).

1. Dr. R. R. Chaudhari Head of Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. A. V. Abhyankar Lect Mech Engg Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL PROJECT
PREREQUISITE : 100 credits
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Industrial project course is the manifestation of technical knowledge acquired by the
student during their course of work. This course provides an opportunity to the students to
identify and solve real life problem of the industries /research organization / society.
Students also get opportunity to provide innovative, economic and technological viable
solution to the world of work.
1 Select possible project work through survey.
2 Develop method of commencement of project work
3 Analyze feasibility using analysis tools
4 Design and plan for fabrication and testing of project
5 Compose report of process and procedure of fabrication of project
6 Demonstrate and justify the outcome of project work
1
ME414E Industrial Project 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

al’s
1. Perform introductory Task
 Form project batch of four-five students
 Select project as per area of interest
 Select topic / industrial problem / work by
consulting the guide from following list
1. Innovation
2. Design & Fabrication
3. Improvement in Equipment
4. Maintenance
5. Repairs Introductory Task
6. Any recent topic related to mechanical and 10
engineering Literature Survey
Perform Literature Survey
 Refer various Periodicals, Journals, Books,
Internet literature related to project topic
 Note down findings
 Prepare database of collected literature on the
basis of title, area of work, methodology used,
type of work
 Analyze industrial need
 Prepare brief report
2 Plan project
 Prepare Synopsis in standard format which
includes following.
Title Page: Project Title, Purpose of submission,
Institute logo, Students Name, Guide Name,
Department and Institute Name
 Use Latex for preparing synopsis. Planning 10
 Submit the Synopsis to guide.
 Approve synopsis from guide
 Prepare action plan of project activities
 Submit the action plan to guide.
 Approve action plan from guide
3 Perform Project work
 Design a project Project Work 15
 Fabricate the same
4 Test Project work Testing 15
2
5 Prepare project report in standard format, which

includes following.
 Title Page which includes: Project Title, Purpose
of submission, Institute logo, Students Name,
Guide Name, Department and Institute Name
 Certificates: Student declaration, Certificate
from guide
 Acknowledgement
 Table of contents
 List of Tables
 List of Figures
 List of abbreviations and acronyms (if any) Project Writing 10
 Text
1. Introduction, objectives
2. Literature Survey
3. Methodology/Materials/Methods/Estimate.
4. Results
5. Summary/Conclusion.
6. References
Use Latex for preparing report.
Perform plagiarism check from free internet site.
 Submit report of plagiarism check to the guide
with project report
6 Present project work
 Prepare power point presentation of work done.
 Prepare yourself to handle examiner questions
Presentation 4
after presentation.
 Practice group presentation.
 Present before guide.
Total 64
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER : Not Applicable
 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER : Not Applicable
3

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Rubrics,
Skill Assessment
Assessment Continuous 40 -- Sheets & 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6

Project
work done
Students
CA
Writing Project
Continuous 10 -- 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Report
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE
End Exam End Of the Project

Students 100 40 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Report and
work done
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Selection of topic 10
2 Literature survey 10
3 Project planning and implementation 10
4 Work done, Feasibility of work, Results 50
5 Report writing 10
6 Presentation of work and viva voce 10
Total 100

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
(COs)
1 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _
2 _ 3 3 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 _
3 _ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3
4 _ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 3
6 _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 3 3 3

Year Of publication
1 Models & Methods for Graves, Samuel B., Ringuest, Jeffrey 978-1-4615-0280-
Project Selection L, International Series in Operations 7
Research & Management Science
Volume 58 2003
2 R and D Project Joseph P. Martino, 978-0471595373
Selection Wiley series in Engineering and
Technical Management
5
 E-REFERENCES: Nil
 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS/INSTRUMENTS WITH SPECIFICATION:

 As per requirement of project

Engineering Nagpur.
3. Dr. S. W. Rajurkar In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,
Development Cell Nagpur.
4. Mr. G. V. Gotmare In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,

Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/MT/PK/TX
COURSE CODE : SE401E
COURSE TITLE : SEMINAR
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:00; TU:00;PR: 02(CLOCK Hrs.)
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Seminar course is the manifestation of soft skills acquired by the student during their
course of work. This course provides an opportunity to develop and present their own
technical knowledge, communication skills, presentation skills, self- learning abilities,
creativity, and team working abilities. This course will also enable them to gain confidence to
face the world of work.
1 Select seminar topic
2 Carryout Literature survey
3 Prepare planning
4 Prepare seminar report
5 Prepare seminar presentation
6 Present interpersonal skills, presenting skills, soft skills and creativity.
1
SE401E Seminar 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

als
1. Perform introductory Task
 Select seminar topic individually as per area of interest
Topic Selection 2
 Select recent technical topic, not covered in curriculum, by
consulting the guide.
2 Perform Literature Survey
 Refer various Periodicals, Journals, Books, Internet
Literature
literature related to seminar topic 6
Survey
3 Plan Seminar
 Prepare outline of selected seminar topic in standard format
 Approve seminar topic from guide
Planning 2
 Prepare action plan of work
 Submit the action plan to guide.
 Approve action plan from guide
4 Prepare seminar report in standard format, which includes
following.
 Title Page which includes: Seminar Title, Purpose of
submission, Institute logo, Students Name, Guide Name,
 Certificates: Student declaration, Certificate from guide
 Acknowledgement
 Text
1. Introduction Report Writing 12
2. Literature Survey
3. Methodology/Materials/Methods
4. Results
6. References
 Submit report of plagiarism check to the guide with
seminar report
5 Prepare power point presentation
Prepare yourself to handle audience / examiner questions after
Preparation 08
presentation.
Practice presentation before group of students
6 Present before guide
Presentation 02
Present before assessment panel.
Total Hrs. 32
2
SE401E Seminar 2016
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER: Not Applicable

 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER: Not Applicable

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Rubrics,
Skill Assessment
Assessment Continuous 40 -- Sheets & 1,2,3,4,5,6

Seminar
Report
Students
CA
Report
Seminar
Writing Continuous 10 -- 1,2,3,4,5,6
Report
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics,
TEE
End Exam End Of the Seminar

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Report &
Presentation
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3
SE401E Seminar 2016

1 Selection of topic 05
2 Literature survey 05
3 Project planning and implementation, Work done, Feasibility of work 05
4 Report writing 05
5 Presentation Skills 25
6 Viva voce 05
Total 50

Outcomes
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(COs)
_ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _ _ _
1
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
2
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
3
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
4
_ 3 3 3 _ _ 3 3 3 3 _ _
5
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 3 _ _
6

Year Of publication
The Presentation Secrets of Carmine Gallo, McGraw-Hill 10: 0071636080
1. Steve Jobs: How to Be Insanely Education, 1 st Edition, October 13: 978-
Great in Front of Any Audience 2009 0071636087
Speaking Your Mind: Oral Rebecca Stott, Tory Young, 0582382432,
2. Presentation and Seminar Skills Cordelia Bryan, Longman, 2001 9780582382435
How to Design TED-Worthy Akash Karia, Create Space 10: 1507638124
Presentation Slides: Presentation Independent Publishing Platform, 13: 978-
3.
Design Principles from the Best 3rd Edition, February 2015 1507638125
TED Talks
Presenting with Credibility: Bruna Martinuzzi, Six Seconds 978-1-935667-
4. Practical Tools and Techniques Emotional Intelligence Press, 12-4
for Effective Presentations Kindle Edition, April 2012
4
SE401E Seminar 2016
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://www.prepareforsuccess.org.uk/skills_for_presenting_in_seminars.html , accessed on
5th November, 2016
 http://www.che.iitb.ac.in/faculty/jb/courses/seminar/tips.html , accessed on 5th November,
2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dEDcc0aCjaA , accessed on 5th November, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=V2q7Q2j7ESs , accessed on 5th November, 2016

1. DLP Projector, latest specification
2. Computer, latest specification

CURRICULUM:
Dr. S. W. Rajurkar In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,
1.
Mr. G. V. Gotmare In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,
2.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE CODE : ID401E
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
The aim of the polytechnic education is to create a pool of skill based manpower
to support shop floor and field operations as a middle level link between technicians and
engineers. Diploma pass out plays an important role in managing shop-floor operations
Therefore, it is necessary to the diploma pass out to get acquainted with the actual shop
floor operations in the industry. This course has been designed to give actual working
environment exposure to the diploma students.
1 Adhere industrial safety practices
2 Work in industrial working environment.
3 Carry out survey related to industrial processes.
4 Identify industrial problems for industrial Project Course
5 Prepare industrial training report based on work experience
6 Present report
1
ID401E Industrial Training 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

1. Adhere Industrial Safety Practices
 Talk to safety officer
Safety
 Record the safety practices to be followed in industry. 04
Practices
 Record Don’ts and Do’s.
 Follow all instructions.
2 Perform Industrial Process Survey
 Collect information regarding various processes carried
out in an industry by discussing the allotted
Survey 06
supervisor/officer
3 Work in industrial working environment
 Follow instructions of supervisor Working
18
 Observe industrial processes Experiences
 Record daily work done in diary
4 Identify industrial problems
 Discuss with the supervisor and workers
Problem
 Identify the problem in any of the industrial 04
Identification
process/system
 Record your findings
5 Prepare industrial training report in standard format, which
includes following.
 Title Page which includes: Title, Purpose of submission,
Institute logo, Students Name, Industry Name,
 Certificates: Student declaration, Certificate from industry
After Completion of Training
 Acknowledgement
 Text
1. Introduction to Industry
2. Safety Practices in Industry Report Writing
3. Industrial Process
4. Working Experience
5. Results
7. References
 Submit report of plagiarism check to the allotted teacher
with industrial training report
Presentation
Present before panel of teachers.
Total Hrs. 32
2
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER: Not Applicable

 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER: Not Applicable

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Rubrics,
Skill
Assessment
Assessment Continuous 40 -- 1,2,3,4,5,6
Sheets &
Report
Students
CA
Report
Writing Continuous 10 -- Report 1,2,3,4,5,6
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics,
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Students 50 20 Report & 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course
Presentation
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Selection of industry/ industry supervisor’s remark 05
2 Survey 05
3 Work done and Feasibility of work/ problem identified 15
4 Report writing 15
6 Viva voce 05
Total 50

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 2 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - 3 2 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - 3 - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -
5 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -
6 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Industrial Training and Lokesh Choudhary, Mittal 10: 8183242367
1.
Education Publications, 2007 13: 9788183242363
Training Practice Penny Hackett, McGraw-Hill 10: 0852929803
2.
Education, September 2003 13: 9780852929803
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://ihmshimla.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/05/Industrial-Training-
th
Rule-Book.pdf, assessed on 25 September, 2016
4

 DLP Projector, latest specification
 Computer, latest specification

CURRICULUM:
1.
2.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE CODE : ID402E
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL PRACTICES
TEACHING SCHEME : TH:00; TU:00;PR: 02(CLOCK Hrs.)
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
The aim of the polytechnic education is to create a pool of skill based manpower
to support Construction site and field operations as a middle level link between
technicians and engineers. Diploma pass out plays an important role in managing
Construction site operations Therefore, it is necessary to the diploma pass out to get
acquainted with the actual Construction site operations in the Construction industry. This
course has been designed as an optional course to industrial training to give actual
working environment exposure to the diploma students, through virtual industry in class
room.
1 Visit industries.
2 Get acquainted with industrial safety practices through videos and industrial experts.
3 Carry out survey related to industrial processes.
4 Explore industrial working environment through videos and industrial experts.
5 Identify industrial problems for industrial Project Course discussing with industrial
experts.
6 Prepare and present report based on virtual industrial exposure and industrial visit.
1
ID402E Industrial Practices 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

als
1. Visit any two industries related to program. Small scale, medium Industrial
18
scale, large scale and perform task given in following point 2 to 5. Visits
2 Get acquainted with industrial safety practices
 Observe Video and listen industrial experts
Safety
 Talk to industrial experts 02
Practices
 Record the safety practices to be followed in industry.
 Record Don’ts and Do’s.
3 Carryout survey related to industrial processes
 Observe Video and listen industrial experts
 Collect information by discussing with industrial experts Survey 02
4 Explore industrial working environment
 Observe Video and listen industrial experts Working
08
 Observe industrial processes Experiences
5 Identify industrial problems
 Discuss with industrial experts Problem
02
 Identify the problem in any the industrial process/system Identification
 Record your findings
6 Prepare and present report in standard format, which includes
following.
 Title Page which includes: Title, Purpose of submission,
Institute logo, Students Name, Industry Names, Department
and Institute Name
 Certificates: Student declaration
Home Assignment
 Acknowledgement
 Text
1. Introduction to Industry Report Writing
2. Safety Practices in Industry
3. Industrial Process
4. Results
6. References
 Submit report of plagiarism check to the allotted teacher with
industrial training report
Present before panel of teachers. Presentation
Total Hrs. 32
2
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER: NIL

 QUESTION PAPER PROFILE FOR THEORY PAPER:NIL

What Frequency
Two PT
-- -- -- --
Assessment)
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Rubrics,
Skill
Assessment
Assessment Continuous 40 -- 1,2,3,4,5,6
Sheets &
Report
Students
CA
Report
Writing Continuous 10 -- Report 1,2,3,4,5,6
TOTAL 50 20
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics,
TEE
End Exam End Of the

Students 50 20 Report & 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course
Presentation
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Selection of industry/ industry supervisor’s remark 05
2 Survey 05
3 Work done and Feasibility of work/ problem identified 15
4 Report writing 15
6 Viva voce 05
Total 50

Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 2 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - 3 2 2 2 - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - 3 - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -
5 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -
6 - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Industrial Training and Lokesh Choudhary, Mittal 10: 8183242367
1.
Education Publications, 2007 13: 9788183242363
Training Practice Penny Hackett, McGraw-Hill 10: 0852929803
2.
Education, September 2003 13: 9780852929803
4
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://ihmshimla.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/05/Industrial-Training-
th
Rule-Book.pdf, assessed on 25 September, 2016

 DLP Projector, latest specification
 Computer, latest specification

CURRICULUM:
1.
2.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
LEVEL NAME : ELECTIVE COURSE
COURSE TITLE : RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 HRs
PT. : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
The conventional energy resource is limited in nature and will be exhausted in
future. A day is not far off when major demand will be met by non-conventional energy
sources at less unit cost of production. World is emphasizing on the power generated by
non-conventional energy sources. It is expected that mechanical technicians will assist
in erecting, planning and commissioning these power plants. Therefore knowledge of
non-conventional energy sources is very essential.
1. Enumerate different forms of renewable energy.
2. Apply the principles of different renewable energy sources for energy generation
3. Select proper renewable energy sources for energy generation.
4. Install energy conversion system.
5. Measure energy input of different forms of energy.
6. Select proper energy conversion system based on input data.
1
ME501E Renewable Energy Sources 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Solar 1. State basic principle of 1.1 Basic principles of solar
12
Energy measurement of solar radiation measurement, solar
radiation. radiation data, estimation of
2. State methods of conversion of average solar radiation.
solar energy in to heat. 1.2 Solar energy collectors,
3. List components of photo principle of conversion of
voltaic street light system. solar radiation into heat, flat
4. Compare different types of plate collectors, concentrating
solar energy collector collectors, focusing type,
5. Describe the construction of comparison between flat plate
different solar energy and concentrating collector,
collectors basic principles & application
6. Justify, the selection different only.
1.3 Solar energy storage systems,
solar collectors for specific
thermal, electrical, chemical,
application
mechanical, electromagnetic
7. Justify, the selection PV
energy storage, solar pond and
panels
its applications.
1.4 Photo Voltaic-Phenomenon,
and power plant considerations
1.5 Applications of PV systems.
2. 1. Identify components of Janta 2.1 Basic principles of Biomass 10
Energy From bio gas plant. conversion, Photosynthesis,
Biomass 2. State relative advantages and biogas generation, factors
disadvantages of biogas plants affecting bio-generation of
Describe basic principle of gas.
Biomass conversion. 2.2 Classification of biogas plants,
3. Analyse the factors affecting advantages & disadvantages of
bio-generation of gas. floating dome and fixed dome
4. Describe the construction of type plant.
biogas plant 2.3 Types of biogas plants,
5. Analyse the factors affecting Constructional details of
the maintenance of biogas Gobar gas generator, Janta
plant. biogas plant, and community
6. Compare biogas with other biogas plants
gaseous fuel 2.4 Constituents of biogas,
7. Justify the selection of biogas properties, comparison of
as a fuel in rural area. biogas with other gaseous
fuels
3. Ocean 1. State types of ocean energy 3.1 Types of ocean energy 10
Energy technologies technologies
2. Describe types of OTEC power 3.2 Methods of ocean thermal
plants. methods electric conversion (OTEC)
3. Compare different types of power generation, open and
OTEC technologies closed cycle.
4. Describe operation of tidal 3.3 Principles of tidal power,
power plant. components of tidal power
5. Compare various types of tidal plant, operation, methods of
2
power plants utilization of total energy,

6. Justify the selection criteria of single basin tidal and double
tidal power plant. cycle system.
7. State different methods of 3.4 Ocean wave Energy methods,
ocean wave conversion Wave energy Conversion by
floats in to electric energy.
3.5 Prospects of ocean energy
power plants in INDIA
4. Wind 1. Define various terms related to 4.1 Wind Energy Basic, Power in 10
Energy wind power wind- power density, energy
2. State Betz’s Law content Annual mean wind
3. Describe various principle of speed and its potential value,
wind energy conversion. Betz’s Law, Principle of wind
4. State potential values of wind energy conversion- Drag and
speed for energy generation Lift principle
5. Classify wind energy 4.2 Wind Power Plant (WPP)- Site
conversion systems. selection criteria,
6. Describe the types of WPP. Classification of WPP, Wind
7. State advantages and Machines-Horizontal axis
disadvantages of wind energy machines, Vertical axis
conversion. machines Components of
8. Justify selection of WPP site. WPP, Necessity of speed
9. Justify the controls of WPP. control of wind turbine,
Methods of control of WPP-
Yaw control, pitch control
4.3 Prospects of wind power
plants in INDIA
5. Other 1. Define geothermal source, Geothermal energy 12
Forms of hydrothermal resource vapour 5.1 Nature of geothermal fields,
Energy. and liquid dominated system. geothermal sources,
2. Describe principle of hydrothermal resources,
operation of geothermal energy vapour and liquid dominated
conversion system. systems, binary cycle.
3. State necessity of hydrogen as 5.2 Geo-pressure resources, hot
a fuel dry rock, magma-resources,
4. Compare hydrogen with other 5.3 Prime movers for geothermal
fuel energy conversion.
5. Justify, the hydrogen as green Chemical Energy
fuel 5.4 Hydrogen energy-Merits of
6. Describe various methods of hydrogen over other fuels
hydrogen production Comparison of hydrogen
7. Describe construction and properties with Petrol
operation of H2- O2Fuel cell. Gasoline, Methane, Methanol
5.5 Different methods of hydrogen
production, Electrolysis of
water- Fundamentals of
Electrolysis, chemical
reaction, Electrolysis
Methods- Tank type
Electrolizer, Bipolar
electrolyzer Description,
advantages and limitations.
5.6 Hydrogen storage- Necessity
and methods, their description,
advantages and limitations.
3
5.7 Principle of operation of a H2-

O2 fuel cell, advantages and
disadvantages of fuel cells,
conversion efficiency,
applications of fuel cells.
6. Hydro 1. Draw layout of Hydroelectric 6.1 Classification of hydro power 10
energy. power plant. plants, based on head and
2. State function of components capacity
of Hydroelectric power plant. 6.2 Layout of Hydroe lectric
3. Justify the site selection of Power plant, and concept of
micro hydro power plant Micro Hydel Power plant. Its
4. Compare features of need. Hydroelectric potential
hydroelectric power plant with in India.
other. 6.3 Principle of working of
hydroelectric power plant., and
Its components.
6.4 Site selection for micro
hydroelectric power plant.
Selection criteria for hydraulic
turbine.
6.5 Comparison of operational and
maintenance cost of
hydroelectric power plant with
Thermal power plant
64

Domain)
1. Install solar water heater and write report. Solar Energy 2
2 Dismantle and assemble Janta bio gas plant model Energy From
and state precautions for use. OR Prepare a visit Biomass
2
report on biogas plant or Prepare a report on biogas
Plant by observing video CD.
3 Prepare report on different types of ocean energy Ocean Energy
2
based power plant in India.
4 Measure wind velocity and select suitable wind Wind Energy
2
mill.
5 Identify different components of wind Power Plants 2
6 Prepare a visit report on wind power plant or
Prepare a report on Wind Power Plant by observing 2
video CD.
7 Gather information about Micro Hydroelectric Hydro energy
2
power plants in India,
8 Prepare a visit report on Micro Hydro electric power
plants in India or Prepare a report on Micro Hydro 2
electric power plants by observing video CD.
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 32
4

No.
R U A
01 Solar Energy 02(02) 10(00) 00(06) 12(08)
02 Bio-mass Energy 02(04) 04(04) 06(00) 12(08)
03 Tidal Energy 06(00) 06(04) 00(06) 12(10)
04 Wind Energy 02(00) 06(04) 04(00) 12(04)
05 Other forms of Energy 08(00) 04(04) 00(00) 12(04)
06 Hydraulic Energy. 00(02) 00(04) 10(00) 10(06)
Total 20(08) 30(20) 20(12) 70(40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 3 R 2 4 R 2 3 U 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
6 R 2
02 1 U 4 2 U 4 3 R 4 2 R 4 2 U 4 3/5
03 3 U 4 6 A 4 4 A 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 5 R 4 5 R 4 5 U 4 5 U 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 1 U 6 2 A 6 1 A 6 2/3
06 4 U 6 6 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Procedure sequence, relevant information collection, measurement of wind 20
velocity
2 Record and Presentation 20
3 Summary of write-up 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _
2 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _
3 _ 3 _ _ 3 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _
4 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 2 _
5 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 2 _
6 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 2 _

Year Of publication
1. Non-conventional Energy G.D. Rai, Standard Publishers 8186308296
Distributors.
Sources
2. Power Plant Engineering Arora and Domkundwar. 0-07-084175-6
Dhanpat Rai & co.
3. Solar Energy S.P. Sukhatme, Tata McGraw-Hill 0074624539
Education, 1996.
4. Renewable Energy Sources D. P. Kothari, K. C. Singal, Rakesh 978-81-203-
and Emerging Ranjan, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2 nd 4470-9
Technologies Edition, 2015
5. Renewable Energy Chetan Singh Solanki, PHI 978-81-203-
Technologies- A Practical Learning Pvt. Ltd., First, 2008. 3434-2
guide for beginners
6. Solar Photovoltaic Chetan Singh Solanki, PHI 978-81-203-
Technology and System: A Learning Pvt. Ltd., 5th Edition, 4711-3
Manual for Technicians, 2016
Trainers and Engineers
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://www.hotwater.com/lit/im/solar/320009.pdf for solar water heater installation

 Solar Photovoltaic Training Kit prepared by IIT, Mumbai
 Mono-crystalline Solar PV module, 50Wp
 Poly- crystalline Solar PV module, 50Wp
 Wind Turbine 1 Kw with all accessories
 Wind turbine models
 Solar water heating system models
 Biogas Models
 Models of various power transmission drives

Engineering Nagpur.
2. Mr. M. S. Deshpade Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Mr. O. V. Sarode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
LEVEL NAME : ELECTIVES COURSES
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 05(1TH/TU CREDIT=1CLOCK HR,1PR CREDIT=2 CLOCK HR.)
TH.TEE : 03 Hrs
PR.TEE : 02 Hrs (External)
PT : 1 Hr
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified under Professional Electives. This course describes
the basic facts, concepts & principles of automation, which are commonly used in
industry.
Automation is need of industry which leads to fulfill the changing demand of
customer. Hence, this course will develop various ideas to develop automation system
and diagnose various real time problems in automation industry.
1. Identify potential areas for automation.
2. Identify various basic elements of automated system
3. Select suitable major control components required to automate a process or an activity
4. Diagnose the faults in automation
5. Identify suitable automation hardware for the given application.
6. Identify various automated processes, machines and equipment during industrial visit.
1
ME502E Industrial Automation 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1. 1. Define Automation 1.1 Basic Concept of Automation 12
Introduction 2. List the various types of  Need for Automation,
to automation  Types of Automated
Automation 3. State the basic elements of Manufacturing systems –
automated system. Fixed, Programmable,
4. Describe the use of Flexible Automation,
various safety monitoring  Advantages and Limitations
functions of Automation
5. State causes and remedies 1.2 Basic Elements of an Automated
of various faults in system
automated system  Power to accomplish the
Automated Process
 Program of Instructions
 Introduction to Control
systems
1.3 Advanced Automation Functions
 Safety Monitoring
 Maintenance and repair
diagnostics
 Error Detection and recovery
2. Control 1. List the various types of 2.1 Continuous control system – 12
Technologies control systems. regulatory control, feed forward
in 2. Select between time & control, adaptive control
Automation event driven control 2.2 Discrete Control system - event
system driven, time driven
3. Compare various computer 2.3 Forms of Computer process
process control system control – computer process
4 .Select control system for monitoring, direct digital control,
particular applications. supervisory control, distributed
control system
3 1. State role of various 3.1 Automated guided vehicle 12
Automation material handling systems systems
in material in automation  Types of vehicles and AGVs
handling 2. Describe the technology applications
system used in AGV.  Vehicle guidance technology
3. List the types of conveyors  Vehicle Management and
4. Select the material safety
handling system for 3.2 Monorails and other rail guided
particular automation vehicles
system 3.3 Conveyor system
 Types of conveyors
 Conveyor operations and
features
3.4 Cranes and hoist
2
4.Automatic 1. List the various 4.1 Overview of Automatic 10

data capture Automatic Identification Identification methods
methods  Bar Code Technology
2. State the concept of the  Linear bar codes(one
various Automatic dimensional)
Identification methods  Two-Dimensional bar codes
3. Select the data capture 4.2 Other Automatic data capture
system for particular technologies
application.  Magnetic strips
 Optical character recognition
5. Automated 1. State the various system 5.1 Fundamentals of automated 10
production configurations used in production lines
systems automated production lines  System configurations –
2. Describe the mechanism of in-line & rotary configurations
linear transfer and rotary  Work part Transfer
indexing Mechanisms- Linear transfer,
3. State the types of assembly Rotary indexing.
systems used in 5.2 Application of automated
automation production lines
4. List the applications of 5.3 Automated assembly systems
Automated production line  Type of assembly systems
& assembly system.  Applications
5. Select the type of assembly (no numerical)
system is required in
automobile industry.
6. 1.Define off-line and on-line 6.1 Introduction 08
Automation inspection  off-line and on-line inspection
in inspection 2. Differentiate between  Product inspection and
Product inspection and process monitoring
process monitoring  Distributed inspection and
3. Select the inspection final inspection
techniques for particular 6.2 Contact and noncontact
application. inspection techniques
4. State concept of to 6.3 Conventional measuring and
Coordinate Measuring gauging techniques
machine , Machine Vision 6.4 Introduction to Coordinate
Measuring machine , Machine
Vision
Total 64
3

Domain)
1 Diagnose the faults in any one automated Introduction to 6
system automation
2 Identify different control systems used in Control technologies 4
automated system. in automation
3 Prepare a visit report on function various Automation in 4
automated material handling equipments in material handling
industry system
4 Conduct case study on the data capturing Automatic data 4
technique and analyze the data. capture
5 Calculate the time required to manufacture a Automated 6
part / assemble a job in automation industry. production system
6 Measure various dimensions of given job using Automation in 6
CMM or any other automated gauging system inspection
Skill Assessment 2
Total 32
4

No.
R U A
Introduction to
01 04(02) 08(04) 00(00) 12(06)
automation
Control technologies
02 04(00) 04(06) 04(00) 12(06)
in automation
Automation in
03 material handling 00(00) 08(04) 04(06) 12(10)
system
Automatic data
04 02(00) 04(04) 06(00) 12(04)
capture
Automated production
05 00(02) 06(00) 06(04) 12(06)
system
Automation in
06 00(00) 06(04) 04(04) 10(08)
inspection
Total 10(04) 36(22) 24 (14) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
5 R 2
02 3 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 2 A 4 3 A 4 5 A 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 6 A 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 6 A 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 5 U 6 6 U 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing diagrams of machining set up, assembly line, equipments, 10
selection of equipment’s. writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
2 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _
5 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _
6 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _

Year Of publication
1. Automation, Production M.P. Groover, Pearson Education, 100132393212
Systems and Computer 3rd Edition, 2007
Integrated Manufacturing
2. Industrial Automation David W. Pessen, John Wiley and 9780471600718
Sons, edition 1989
3. Computer Based Industrial Krishna Kant, PHI Learning Pvt. 9788120339880
Control Ltd. 2nd Edition, 2010
4. Performance Modeling of Viswanandham N, PHI Learning 9788120308701
Automated Manufacturing Pvt. Ltd. International Edition. 2009
Systems
7
 E-REFERENCES:
1) http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063/pdf/L-01(SM)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf ,
assessed on 4th August, 2016
th
2) http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/108105063/ , assessed on 4 August, 2016

1. Automated guided vehicle – Automatic load transfer, wire guided/laser guide, load
capacity at least 5kg, height at least 2ft, speed at least 5mm/sec
2. Coordinate measurement machine- Measuring Volume at least 500mm x 400mm x
440mm, accuracy – 0.1 m, PC control, bechtop/portable, Probe/Sensors – Touch
type
3. Data capturing machine - bar code/optical character recognition
4. Model of Automated processing plant – bottling plant in Mechanical Engineering
Lab

CURRICULUM:
1. Prof. A. R. Sheikh Lecture, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2. Prof. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3. Prof. R. A. Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM

LEVEL NAME : ELECTIVE COURSES
COURSE TITLE : HEAT TRANSFER
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TEACHING SCHEME : TH: 04; TU: 00; PR: 02 (CLOCK HR)
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT=2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 HR
PR. TEE : 02 HR (External)
PT. EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified under Professional Electives. The basic principles of
heat transfer shall help students to solve problems related to heat transmission in the
process.
Heat transfer plays vital role in refrigeration, power plant engineering,
automobile engineering and process industries. They are considered as most common
elements that come across to mechanical engineers in different industries.
1. Apply convection and radiation phenomenon to different mechanical systems
that affects the environment
2. Solve conduction problems encountered in practical field.
3. Analyze the heat transfer rate through composite slab.
4. Determine thermal conductivity of various materials.
5. Compute the efficiency and effectiveness of fins.
6. Use various heat exchangers in industrial/domestic applications.
1
ME503E Heat Transfer 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
(Cognitive Domain)
1. Introduction 1. Define Heat transfer 1.1 Modes of Heat Transfer and its 8
to Heat transfer 2. State the principle of different effect on environment
modes of heat transfer. 1.2 Fourier’s law of Heat conduction
3. State various laws of Heat 1.3 Definition and Expression for
transfer thermal conductivity
4. Describe the concept of 1.4 Newton’s Law of cooling for
electrical analogy with heat convection
transfer 1.5 Stefan Boltzman’s law of Radiation
1.6 Electrical Analogy with Heat
Transfer
1.7 Concept of Thermal resistance
2. Steady State 1. Define thermal diffusivity 2.1 Three dimensional Fourier 12
conduction 2. Calculate the heat flow rate conduction equation in Cartesian
through slab, cylinder, and coordinate and Concept of thermal
sphere. diffusivity (no derivation)
3. State the equation for overall 2.2 Heat flow through single Slab
heat transfer coefficient for 2.3 Heat flow through Composite slab
slab (two layers)
4. Describe the concept of 2.4 Heat flow through hollow cylinders
unsteady state conduction. (single layer)
5. Differentiate between steady 2.5 Heat flow through Sphere (single
and unsteady state of heat layer)
conduction 2.6 Overall Heat Transfer coefficient
for slab (two layers) – definition,
equation
(numerical to calculate heat flow rate,
overall heat transfer coefficient and
temperatures on all above topics)
2.7 Concept and application of
unsteady state of heat conduction
3. 1. Define various terms related 3.1 Introduction – Definition, Need, 10
Heat transfer to fins Types of fins, applications
through Fins 2. State different types of fins.
3.2 Heat transfer through finite fin
3. State the application of fins
4. Determine the heat 3.3 Heat transfer through fin insulated
dissipation from various types at the tip
of fins. 3.4 Heat transfer through infinite long
5. Compute fin efficiency and fin
fin effectiveness 3.5 Efficiency and Effectiveness of fin
6. Interpret the meaning of term
used in various formulae of
fin.
4 1. Describe the principle of 4.1 Free (or Natural) convection 12
Convection Natural convection and force 4.1.1 Principle of Natural convection
2
convection and its applications

2. Define various non 4.1.2 Dimensionless numbers –
dimensional numbers Grashoff Number, Prandtl
3. State the various applications Number, Nusselt Number
of Natural convection and 4.1.3 Equations for free convection
force convection from flat plate (Numerical to
4. Determine the heat transfer calculate heat transfer coefficient
coefficient in Natural and heat flow rate by using given
convection and force equation)
convection 4.2 Forced convection
5. Compare Natural convection 4.2.1 Principle of Forced convection
and force convection and its application.
4.2.2 Dimensionless numbers –
Reynold Number, Prandtl Number,
Nusselt Number
4.2.3 Equations for force convection
from flat plate (Simple Numerical
by using given equation)
4.3 Combined free and forced
convection. – Principles of working
4.4 Comparison between Natural
convection and force convection
5. Radiation 1. Draw Electromagnetic 5.1 Thermal Radiation in 12
spectrum to indicate Thermal Electromagnetic spectrum,
Radiation 5.2 Radiation properties such as
2. Justify the relation between reflectivity, transmitivity and
reflectivity, transitivity and absorptivity,
absorptivity 5.3 Emissive properties – Emissive
3. State different radiation power, emissivity, monochromatic
properties emissive power, monochromatic
4. Describe the concept of black emissivity
body and grey body 5.4 Concept of Specular and diffuse
5. State the various laws of radiation
radiation 5.5 Concept of black and grey body
6. State the effect of radiation 5.6 Laws Radiation – Planks law,
shield on heat transfer. Kirchoffs law, Wein Displacement
7. Calculate the heat flow rate law, Stefan Boltzman law
between two surfaces. 5.7 Radiation from Real surfaces
5.8 Heat exchange by Radiation
between grey surfaces,
5.9 Radiation shields – effect on heat
transfer
(Numerical to calculate heat flow rate
between two surfaces )
3
6. Heat 1. List the various types of heat 6.1 Introduction – Definition, 12

Exchanger exchangers classification, application
2. Determine the LMTD and 6.2 Construction and working of
heat flow rate through various parallel flow, counter flow, shell
heat exchangers and tube type heat exchanger
3. State the functions of 6.3 Concept of Logarithmic Mean
condensers, radiators, cooling Temperature Difference (LMTD)
tower, solar appliances for parallel flow and counter flow.
4. Interpret the use of various (Numerical to calculate LMTD,
heat exchangers in industry or heat flow rate )
domestic appliances. 6.4 Effectiveness of heat exchanger
6.5 Condensers – types and its
functions
6.6 Radiators – types and its functions
6.7 Cooling Towers – types and its
functions
6.8 Domestic Appliances – working
principles and uses of Solar
Cooker, Solar water heater and
Solar drier.
Total Hrs. 64
Pract Specific Learning Outcomes Units Hrs

ical’s (Psychomotor Domain) .
1 Indentify the different apparatus used in various modes of heat 4
transfer. Introduction
2 Determine the thermal conductivity of a metal rod 2
3 Determine the thermal conductivity of insulating powder. Steady 2
4 Determine the thermal conductivity of composite walls. State 2
conduction
5 Determine the heat transfer coefficient, heat flow rate, fin 4
Heat
efficiency and effectiveness using Pin fin apparatus for free
transfer
convection
through
6 Determine the heat transfer coefficient, heat flow rate, fin 4
Fins and
efficiency and effectiveness using Pin fin apparatus for force
convection
convection
7 Determine the Stefan Boltzmann constant. Radiation 2
8 Determine the heat transfer rate of solar radiation apparatus. 2
9 Determine the LMTD and heat transfer of shell and tube heat 2
exchanger
Heat
10 Determine the LMTD and heat transfer of parallel flow heat 2
Exchan
exchanger
ger
11 Determine the LMTD and heat transfer of counter flow heat 2
exchanger
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
01 Introduction to Heat 04(02) 06(04) 00(00) 10(06)
transfer
02 Steady State 02(02) 04(00) 06(06) 12(08)
conduction
03 Heat transfer through 00(00) 08(00) 04(06) 12(06)
Fins
04 Convection 02(00) 04(08) 06(00) 12(08)
05 Radiation 02(04) 04(04) 06(00) 12(08)
06 Heat Exchanger 00(00) 08(00) 04(04) 12(04)
Total 10(08) 34(16) 26 (16) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 5 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
2 R 2
02 3 U 4 6 A 4 6 U 4 4 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 3 A 4 3 U 4 6 A 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 6 U 4 5 U 4 4 U 4 1 U 4 5 R 4 3/5
05 2 A 6 1 U 6 2 A 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing diagrams of experiment set up, equipments, writing 10
procedure, etc.
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 _ _
2 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _ _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _
5 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _
6 _ 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 2 3 3 _

Year Of publication
1. Heat and mass transfer S. P. Sukhatme, Melisende UK
9788173715440
Ltd, 4th edition, 2005
2. Heat and mass transfer Arora and Domkundwar,
Dhanpat Rai Pub. Pvt. Ltd., 2004 9788177000290
edition
3. Heat and mass transfer Prof. D.S. Kumar, S.K. Kataria
9789350142691
and Sons, 2013 edition
4. Heat and mass transfer Prof. R. K. Rajput., S Chand ,
9789385401930
2015 edition
 E-REFERENCES:
rd
1) nptel.ac.in/courses/112101097/, assessed on 23 August, 2016
2) https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qa-PQOjS3zA, assessed on 4th August, 2016
7

 Apparatus to determine thermal conductivity of metal rod, insulating powder and
composite wall
 Stefan Bolzmann apparatus
 Pin fin apparatus
 Solar flat plate collector
 Shell and tube type, parallel flow, counter flow heat exchanger
 LIST OF EXPERTS AND TEACHERS WHO CONTRIBUTED FOR THIS CURRICULUM:

1. Prof. O. V. Sarode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
2 Prof. S. A. Dhankute Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
3 Prof. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
Engineering Nagpur.
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM

COURSE TITLE : COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 05(1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 2 PR CREDIT=1 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : 03 Hrs.
PR. TEE : 02 Hrs. (External)
PT : 01 Hrs.
 RATIONALE:
This course is classified under Elective courses. Competition has an important
role to survive for manufacturing industries in global economic market. It is more
important capability of producing through diverse customer’s demand with very short
time to the market for manufacturing companies. Computer Integrated Manufacturing
(CIM) is the integration of the total manufacturing enterprise through the use of
integrated systems and data communications coupled with new managerial philosophies
that improve organization and personnel efficiency.
To satisfy industrial need, diploma engineer should be able to cope with
CAD/CAM & CIM. Detail knowledge of above mentioned aspects with deep insight to
the practical applications develop a professional confidence in them to become
successful engineers in manufacturing industries.
1. Interpret joints and configuration of Robot for particular applications.
2. Recognize various elements of CIM wheel.
3. Calculate system throughput for AS/RS system.
4. Apply OPITZ coding system for particular part.
5. Develop Flexible Manufacturing System for particular applications.
6. Prepare Industrial visit Report.
1
ME504E Computer Integrated Manufacturing 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
1. Introduction 1. Define CIM. 1.1 Definition of CIM
06
To CIM 2. Draw CIM wheel. 1.2 CIM Wheel
3. Describe evolution of CIM. 1.3 Concept of CIM
4. List benefits of CIM. 1.4 Evolution of CIM
1.5 Benefits of CIM (Tangible and
Intangible)
2. 1. Define Robot. 2.1 Definition of Robot, qualities of

Robot. 12
Robot 2. State qualities of Robot.
Technology 3. Identify type of Robot 2.2 Robot And Related Attributes
4. joints for specific Types of Joints, Common Robot
applications. Configurations. Polar coordinate,
5. Draw various robot Cylindrical coordinate, Jointed
Configurations. arm, Cartesian coordinate, SCARA
6. Compare Robot joint 2.3 Basic Robot motions, Six degrees
system. of freedom in robot motion,
Motion systems, Wrist
configuration, joint notation
7. Select robot control system, work volume.
system for particular 2.5 Robot Joint drive system:
applications. Electric, Hydraulic, Pneumatic.
8. State types of Grippers. 2.6 Robot control systems
9. List benefits of installation Limited sequence control,
of Robot. Playback with Point to Point
10. State social issues in Control, Playback with Continuous
installation of robot. Path control.
2.7 End Effectors, Types of Grippers,
Tools
2.8 Benefits of installing Industrial
robot, social issue.
3. 1. Describe Robot 3.1 Robot Applications: Material
12
Robot applications. handling, machine loading
Application 2. Define AGV. & unloading, processing operation
And Material 3. State types of AGV. & assembly application
Handling 4. Draw types of AGV 3.2 Automated guided vehicle:
5. Select vehicle guidance Definition, Types of vehicles,
technology for particular Vehicle guidance technology,
applications. Vehicle Management: traffic
6. Describe management of control and vehicle dispatching.
AGV. 3.3 Automated storage systems:
7. Calculate system through Automated storage/retrieval
put for AS/RS. Systems: types, applications.
Carousel storage systems
( Numerical analysis on system
throughput for AS/RS system
only.)
2
4. 1. Define Group 4.1 Group Technology:

12
Group Technology. Definition, Part families, Process
Technology And 2. Define part families. type layout and GT layout, Part
Computer Aided 3. Compare process type classification and coding, Coding
Process layout and GT layout. system structure, Opitz parts
Planning 4. Interpret the code for classification and coding system,
given part using OPITZ Grouping parts and machines by
system. Rank Order Clustering (
5. State applications of GT. Numerical on ROC). Applications
6. Group the machines in of GT.
machine cell using ROC 4.2 CAPP
7. Describe Retrieval type The planning function, Retrieval
CAPP. type
8. Describe Generative type computer aided process planning
CAPP. system, Generative type computer
9. Draw flow diagram for aided process planning system,
Retrieval type CAPP. Benefits of CAPP.
5. 1. Define FMS. 5.1 Definition of flexible
12
FMS 2. State flexibility tests for manufacturing system, Tests of
FMS. Flexibility, Types of FMS on the
3. Describe types of FMS. basis of number of machines, and
4. Describe FMS Flexibility.
components. 5.2 FMS Components
5.Draw the FMS system for Workstations: Load unload
particular type. stations, Machining stations, other
6.List applications of FMS. processing stations, assembly
7. List benefits of FMS. Material handling and storage
8. State planning issues of System: Functions, Equipments,
FMS. Layout configurations
9. State implementation issues Computer Control system:
of FMS. Various
11. Select type of FMS for functions of computer control
particular application. system
Human Resources.
5.3 Application and benefits of FMS,
FMS Planning and
Implementation
Issues .
6. 1. Define inspection 6.1 Introduction to inspection
technology 10
Computer Aided technology.
Inspection 2. Define CMM. 6.2 Coordinate Measuring machine:
3. Select proper type of Definition,
structure of CMM for CMM construction
particular application. i) Probe and its types
4. Describe the procedure to ii) Mechanical Structure and
measure dimensions and its types.
geometry of given part CMM applications and benefits.
using CMM. 6.3 Machine Vision:
5.Describe machine vision Definition, Operation of Machine
6. Describe laser system. Vision, Machine Vision
application
7. Identify the types of CMM
6.4 Other optical inspection method:
structure configuration
Laser Systems
Total Hrs. 64
3

1 Draw wheel CIM model which represent the Introduction To CIM
concept of CIM. 04
2 Identify type of joints, configuration, of given Robot Technology 06

model of Robot.
3 Calculate system throughput for AS/RS System. Robot Application 04
(solve one numerical) And Material
Handling
4 Interpret the code for the given part using Group Technology , 04
OPITZ system. Computer Aided
Process Planning
5 Measure dimensions and geometry of given part Computer Aided 06

using CMM machine. Inspection
6 Prepare Visit Report on industrial/institute visit to ALL units. 06
see the use of robots and its operations.
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs. 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
01 Introduction To CIM 04(00) 06(04) 00(00) 10(04)
00(00)
02 Robot Technology 04(04) 08(04) 12(08)
Robot Application
03 And Material 02(00) 06(04) 04(06) 12(10)
Handling
04 FMS 04(00) 02(00) 06(06) 12(06)
Computer Advance
05 00(04) 08(04) 04(00) 12(08)
Process Planning
Computer Aided
06 00(00) 08(04) 04(00) 12(04)
Inspection
Total 10(04) 34(20) 26(16) 70 (40)

option
3 R 2 4 R 2 4 R 2 4 U 2 6 U 2 1 U 2
01 5/7
1 U 2
02 1 R 4 2 U 4 5 U 4 1 U 4 2 A 4 3/5
03 2 A 4 2 A 4 5 U 4 3 U 4 5 U 4 3/5
04 3 A 4 5 A 4 6 A 4 5 R 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 1 U 6 3 U 6 3 A 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 6 U 6 4 A 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing diagrams of Robot joints, configurations, AS/RS system, CMM 10
machine, writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation, Result, Drawings (if any ) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ 3 2 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
2 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ 3 _ _ 3 3
3 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3
4 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 3 _ 2 3 3
5 _ 3 2 3 2 _ _ 3 _ 2 3 3
6 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 3 1 2 3 3

1. Industrial Robotics Technology Mikell P Groover, Mitchell 0-07-100442-4
,Programming and Weiss, Roger Nagel, Nicholas
Applications. Odrey, Mcgraw-Hill
International Edition, 1987
2. Principles Of Computer - Vajpayee S. Kant, PHI 10: 812031476X
Integrated Manufacturing Learning Pvt. Ltd., Edition
2005
3. CAD/CAM, Computer –Aided Mikell P Groover, Emory W 978-81-7758-416-5
Design and Manufacturing Zimmers, Jr. Prentice Hall
Publication, Edition 2009
4. Automation, Production Mikell P Groover, PHI learning 9780132393218
Systems, and Computer- private limited, Edition 2008
integrated Manufacturing
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101099/1, assessed on 29 th July, 2016
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101099/3 assessed on 29th July, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tiarT1YS-lM assessed on 3 rd October, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fmralr8DJFc assessed on 3rd October, 2016

 Charts for OPITZ parts classification and coding system.
 Co-ordinate measuring machine:- Measuring volume at least 500 mm x 400 mm x 440
mm, accuracy-0.1 µm, PC control, portable, Probe/Sensors- Touch type.
 F7000N Series Desktop Industrial Robot,
Worktable Load/Tool = 10 kg./5 kg.
Max. Speed X & Y /Z = 800/320(mm/axis)
Repeatability = +/- 0.02 mm/axis.

1. Prof. R A Gadekar Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
2. Prof. P. P. Patil Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
3. Prof. D. J. Ghode Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
4. Prof. G. H. Dahole Lecturer in Mechanical Govt. Polytechnic, Nagpur
Engineering
Nagpur
6. Prof.. G. F. Potbhare Principal NIT, Polytechnic, Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
LEVEL NAME : ELECTIVES COURSES
COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL FLUID POWER
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 05 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 2 PR CREDIT = 1CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE EXAM : 03 HRs
PR. TEE EXAM : 02 HRs (External)
PT. EXAM : 01HR
 RATIONALE:
Industrial Fluid Power deals with the power transmitting system,
employing pressurized oil or air to transmit energy from an energy generating source to
an energy use area. This is sub-categorized as oil hydraulics and pneumatics. The
concepts of hydraulics and pneumatics are important and indispensable tools being used
in the innovations, circuit design and improvement of engineering processes and
devices. Different types of power sources, valves and actuators are essential elements in
all the manufacturing industries, specially where automation and control is required.
This course is designed to develop underpinning knowledge of hydraulic and pneumatic
systems which are widely used for control and other purposes in Industry as machine
tools, material handling, etc
This course will give the students, the basic skills and knowledge of oil
hydraulics and pneumatics which will be directly needed in the industrial environment.
1. Identify various components of hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
2. Apply principle of various components used in hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
3. Interpret hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for various applications.
4. Construct hydraulic and pneumatic fluid based systems.
5. Develop hydraulic and pneumatic circuits for various applications.
6. Construct various hydraulic and pneumatic special purpose industrial circuits.
1
ME505E Industrial Fluid Power 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units
Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs.
(Cognitive Domain)
1. Basics of Oil 1. Draw general layout of 1.1General layout, Practical Applications,
08
Hydraulic hydraulic system Merits and limitations of oil hydraulic
Systems 2. Identify various systems
components in Structure of 1.2Pascal’s Law and Force Multiplication
oil hydraulic 1.3 Properties- Compressibility, Viscosity,
system/circuits Demulsiblity, Lubricity, Resistance to
3. State practical application Oxidation (aging), Air separating
of oil hydraulic system. ability, Fire Resistance and Flash point.
4. List Merits and limitations 1.4 Requirements of good hydraulic fluid.
of oil hydraulic systems. 1.5Hydraulic Pumps- Construction,
5. State Pascal’s Law and working principle, applications and
properties of fluid. symbols of gear pump, Gerotor pump,
6. Describe the construction Vane pump, screw pump, Piston Pump
and working principle of
various Pumps.
7. Distinguish between all
types of pumps.
2.Components 1. Identify hydraulic 2.1 Hydraulic control valves :-Necessity of
17
of oil components from fluid control system
Hydraulic symbols. 2.2 Hydraulic Valves:- Construction,
system 2. Memorise Fluid Power principle of working and symbols of
Symbols according to ISO Pressure control valves - pressure relief
1219-1976, (1991). valve - direct, pilot operated, pressure
3. Describe the construction reducing, pressure unloading, Sequence
and working principle of valves and counter balancing.
all types of valves. 2.3 Direction control valves - Poppet valve,
4. Distinguish between all spool valve, 2/2, 3/2, 4/2, 4/3, methods
types of Valves. of actuation. Types of different center
5. Describe Servo valves. positions. Check valves, pilot operated
6. Describe the construction check valves.
and working principle of 2.4Flow control valves - pressure
Actuators. compensated, non pressure
7. Select valves, actuators compensated flow control valve,
and accessories for the 2.5 Servo Valves: - Two-stage servo valve,
given application. Jet pipe servo valve, Flapper jet servo
8. List various materials for valve.
hydraulic pipes. 2.6Actuators:- Classification of actuators
9. Name different types of Construction, working principle and
pipe and tube fittings. symbols of Rotary Actuators –Limited
10. State function and causes Rotary: - Vane type and Dual piston
of failure of seal. type Limited rotary.
11. State function and 2.7 Hydraulic motors: - gear type, Vane
Location of Filter. type and Piston type Motor. Linear
12. Describe the construction Actuators - Cylinders - single acting,
and working of double acting, and their subtypes.
Accumulators and Different mounting methods.
pressure Intensifier. 2.8 Accessories- Construction, working
13. State need of principle and symbols of Pipes, Hoses,
Accumulators and Fittings, Oil filters, Seals and gaskets,
2
pressure Intensifier in 2.9 Accumulators and pressure Intensifier

hydraulic circuits. or Booster.
3.Oil Hydraulic 14. Describe construction of
3.1 Linear circuit 11
Circuits oil hydraulic circuits by
using various components 3.2 Re-generative circuit.
of hydraulic system. 3.3 Speed control; - Meter-in, Meter-out,
15. Choose Fluid Power Bleed-off Circuit.
Symbols to draw hydraulic 3.4 Sequence control circuits: - Travel
circuits. dependent and Pressure dependent.
16. Apply changes in 3.5 Synchronizing circuits: - Synchronizing
circuit with mechanical coupling,
hydraulic circuits.
Synchronizing with flowing valves.
17. Develop oil hydraulic
3.6 Hydraulic Motor Control circuits: -
circuit for different Speed control of a bi-directional
applications. motor, Free-running off and blocked
18. Describe working of off hydraulic motor circuits.
Speed control, sequence 3.7 Industrial hydraulic circuits:- Hydraulic
control, Synchronizing, circuits for Shaping machine, grinding
Hydraulic Motor Control machine and Milling machine
circuits.
19. Describe Industrial
hydraulic circuits.
4. Introduction 1. Identify various 4.1Applications of pneumatic systems
06
to Pneumatic components in simple General layout, merits and demerits of
Systems pneumatic circuits pneumatic systems, Comparison of
2. List the types of various Hydraulic and pneumatic, system.
components in simple 4.2Air compressors: - two stage
pneumatic circuits. reciprocating, Vane type rotary, Liquid
3. State practical application ring type and Screw type air
and Merits – demerits of compressor. 4.3Selection of air
pneumatic system. compressors for pneumatic circuits
4. Describe construction and
working of Air
compressor.
5. Classify air compressor.
5 Components 1. Identify hydraulic 5.1 Valves:-Construction, principle of
12
of Pneumatic components from working and symbols of -
Systems symbols.  Pressure regulating valves: - spool
2. Draw Fluid Power type and Seat type valve.
Symbols (pneumatic) as  Direction control valves:-2/2, 3/2,
per Is 7513- 1974 and 4/2, 5/2 and 5/3 direction control
ISO. valve.
3. State Pressure Regulating  Valve Actuation Mechanisms with
valve. symbol: - Mechanical actuation,
4. Describe construction and Electrical actuation, Pneumatic
working principles of actuation and Electro-pneumatic
different Valves and actuation.
actuators.  Impulse valve (5/2 pilot operated)
5. Identify actuation  Flow control valves: - Fixed and
mechanism in pneumatic variable type flow control valves,
circuits. Check valve (directly and pilot
6. Recommend Actuators for operated), Shuttle valve and Quick
particular application in exhaust valve.
pneumatic system.  Time delay valve.
7. State function of FRl, 5.2 Actuators - Construction, working and
3
dryers and mufflers in symbols of

pneumatic system.  Rotary Actuators - Pneumatic
8. Describe construction motors
and working of pipes,  Linear Actuators – Cylinders -
hoses and fittings. single acting, double acting.
5.3 Air preparation elements: - FRL unit,
Dryers and mufflers.
5.4Accessories- Construction, working and
symbols of Pipes, Hoses, fittings.
6. Pneumatic 1. Construct pneumatic 6.1Circuit for actuation of single and
10
Circuits circuits by using various double acting cylinder
pneumatic components. 6.2 Impulse operating circuits.
2. Choose pneumatic 6.3 Speed control circuit:-Speed control
symbols to draw circuits for double acting cylinder and
pneumatic circuits. bidirectional air motor
3. Describe working of 6.4 Sequencing circuits - Position based
Speed control, sequencing sequencing circuit.
and Time delay circuits. 6.5 Time delay circuit
Total Hrs. 64
Practi Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.

cal’s
1. Identify components of various types of oil hydraulic Basics of Oil 04
pump. Hydraulic Systems
2 Identify various types of valves in Oil Hydraulic Systems Components of oil 06
 Pressure control Valve Hydraulic system
 Flow control valve
 Direction control valve
3 Construct meter in and meter out circuit on hydraulic Oil Hydraulic 04
trainer. Circuits
4 Locate main components of pneumatic system. Introduction to 04
Pneumatic Systems
5 Interpret the given Pneumatic system. Components of 06
 FRL Pneumatic Systems
 Flow control valve
 Time delay valve
6 Construct pneumatic circuit to perform working of Pneumatic Circuits 06
following operation.
 Linear motion (single and double acting cylinder.)
 Control of speed of pneumatic motor.
 Sequence operation of liner actuators.
 Time delay operation.
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs 32
4

No. Marks
R U A
Basics of Oil
01 02(00) 06(04) 00(00) 08(04)
Hydraulic Systems
Components of
02 06(02) 08(04) 04(04) 18 (10)
Hydraulic system
Oil Hydraulic
03 00(02) 06(00) 06(04) 12(06)
Circuits
Introduction to
04 02(04) 04(00) 00(00) 06(04)
Pneumatic Systems
Components of
05 06(00) 08(06) 00(04) 14(10)
Pneumatic Systems
06 Pneumatic Circuits 02(00) 04(06) 06(00) 12(06)
Total 18(08) 36(20) 16 (12) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2 5 R 2 6 R 2 2 R 2
01 5/7
3 R 2
02 2 R 4 2 U 4 2 U 4 1 U 4 2 U 4 3/5
03 2 A 4 4 U 4 5 R 4 2 A 4 3 A 4 3/5
04 4 U 4 4 U 4 6 U 4 4 R 4 5 A 4 3/5
05 3 U 6 3 A 6 5 U 6 2/3
06 1 U 6 6 A 6 6 U 6 2/3
5

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
6

1 Drawing fig, Drawing circuit diagram, selection of equipment’s/ 15
apparatus/ trainer (hydraulic or pneumatic). writing procedure etc.
2 Performance 20
3 Viva voce 15
TOTAL 50

Outcomes
(COs) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - 3 - - - - - - - 3 3 -
2 - 3 - - - - - 3 - - 3 -
3 - 3 - - - - - 3 - 3 3 -
4 - 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 3 3 -
5 - 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 3 3 -
6 - 3 2 2 - - - 3 2 3 3 -

Year Of publication
1. Oil Hydraulic system- Majumdar S.R, Tata McGraw Hill 10: 0071406697
Principles and education Pvt. Lid, New Delhi, 13: 9780071406697
maintenance illustrated, reprint Edition, 2002.
2. Pneumatic System- Majumdar S.R, Tata McGraw Hill
10: 0-07-460231-4
Principles and education Pvt. Lid, New Delhi.23rd
13: 978-0-07-460231-7
Maintenance reprint edition , 2010
3. Treatise on Hydraulics and Sameer Vazir Shaikh, Iliyas Rasul -
Pneumatics Fluid Power. Khan, R. K. Publications,
4. Industrial hydraulics John J Pippenger, Tyler cregory 0070501408
Hicks, Gregg Division , Mc- Graw 9780070501409
Hill, 3rd Edition, 1979
5. Pneumatics and Andrew Parr, Butterworth – 0080080508405
Hydraulics Heinemann, 2nd Edition, reprint , 1999 97800808405
6 Hydraulic and Pneumatics Andrew Parr, Jaico publishing house,
1999.
7 Audel Pumps and Rex Miller, Mark Richard Miller, 13: 978-074571169
Hydraulics Harry L Steward , Audel, 6th Edition, 10: 0764571168
October, 2004.
8 Hydraulic and Pneumatic Andrew Parr, Butterworth Heinemann 13-978-7506-4419-9
A Technician’s and 3rd Edition, March, 2011. 10:-7506-4419-2
Engineer’s Guide
7
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105047/ , assessed on 04th October 2016
 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105046/, assessed on 04th October, 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8xd7cWvMrvEandindex=43andlist=PLbMVo
gVj5nJTKwm1WjlutrAEZrLE995Ja, assessed on 04th October 2016
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NUeR3nqK5tgandlist=PL6pT08wMYnwyZM
e4JKYaapxIoB7X7Xf , assessed on 04th October, 2016

1. Hydraulic Trainer
2. Pneumatic Trainer

1. Mr. P. P. Patil Lecturer, Department of Government Polytechnic,
Mechanical Engineering. Nagpur.
2. Mr. A. R. Sheikh. Lecturer , Department of Government Polytechnic,
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
8
COURSE CURRICULUM
COURSE CODE : ME 506E$
COURSE TITLE : MATERIAL HANDLING
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : 03 Hrs
PR. TEE : 02 Hrs (External)
PT : 01 Hr
 RATIONALE:
Material handling equipment is an integral part of modern industrial
enterprise. The flow of material in industry depends on a rational choice of the material
handling equipment, correct determination of its main parameters and efficient
operation. Carrying parts & products in a shop from one work station to another,
transferring them from shop to shop or taking care of stockpiling and reclaiming
operations, material handling equipment/systems enable the process to go on without
interruptions & at a predetermined pace.
1. Apply the knowledge of material handling and relevant concepts.
2. Identify types of loads, nature of movements, loading and unloading systems.
3. Select different types of conveying ,hoisting machinery and surface transport
equipment
4. Prepare maintenance schedule of material handling equipments.
5. Prepare a visit report of material handling plant of industry.
6. Select proper material handling system for specific application.
1
ME506E Material Handling 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Units
Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs.
(Cognitive Domain)
1 Introduction 1. Define material handling 1.1 Definition and scope of Material 10
to Material system. handling system
Handling 2 Classify different material 1.2 Main types of material handling
Systems handling equipments. equipments & their applications
3 Describe types of loads, 1.3 Types of load to be handled, concept of
nature of movements, unit load and bulk load
loading and unloading 1.4 Types/ nature of movements, loading &
systems. unloading systems.
4 State principles of material 1.5 Principles and objective of material
handling system. handling systems
5 Justify selection of different 1.6 Limitations of material handling
material handling systems. system
1.7 Concept of Robotic handling systems.
1. Describe various types of 2.1 Construction, working & maintenance
2 10
hoist. of different types of hoists such as lever
Hoisting 2 State types of cranes. operated hoist, portable hand chain
Machinery & 3 Identify various types of hoist, differential hoists, worm geared
equipments elevating equipments. and spur geared hoists, electric &
4 Practice maintenance pneumatic hoists, winch & tur for
measures for different types 2.2 Construction, working & maintenance
of hoists, cranes and of different types of cranes such as
elevating equipments. rotary cranes, trackless cranes, mobile
cranes, bridge cranes, cable cranes,
floating cranes & EOT
2.3Construction, working & maintenance
of elevating equipments such as forklift,
stackers, industrial lifts, freight
elevators, passenger lifts, and mast type
elevators, vertical skip hoist elevators.
1Describe traction & traction 3.1Construction, working & maintenance
3 12
less type of conveyors. of traction type conveyors such as belt
Conveying conveyors, chain conveyors, bucket
2 Compare traction & traction
Machinery elevators, escalators, and slate
less conveyors.
conveyors, roller conveyors
3 Practice different 3.2 Construction, working & maintenance
maintenance measures for of traction less type conveyors such as
traction & traction less gravity type conveyors, vibrating &
conveyors. oscillating conveyors, screw conveyors,
pneumatic & hydraulic conveyors
1. State various types of 4.1Construction, function, working of 10
4
trackless surface trackless equipment such as hand
Surface transportation equipment. operated trucks, powered trucks,
Transportation 2.Describe features of tractors, AGV- Automatic Guided
equipment Automatic Guided Vehicle vehicle, features, types and safety
3. Select different cross considerations, industrial Trailers
handling equipment. 4.2Construction, function, working of cross
handling equipment such aswinches,
reach truck, capstans, Turntables,
Transfer tables, monorail conveyors
2
5 1. State various flexible 12

5.1 Flexible hoisting appliances such as
hoisting appliances.
Components welded load chains, roller chains, hemp
2. Describe fastening methods
ropes, steel wire ropes, fastening
of material of wire & chains, eye bolts,
methods of wire & chains, eyebolts,
handling lifting tackles.
lifting tackles
systems 3 Define load handling
5.2 Load handling attachments-
attachments.
Various types of hooks-forged,
4 State various types of hooks
triangular eye hooks, appliances for
5 Describe grabbing
suspending hooks,
attachment for loose
b) Crane grab for unit & piece loads
materials.
c) Electric lifting magnet, vacuum lifter
6 Justify selection of different
d) Grabbing attachment for loose materials
crane attachments for
e) Crane attachment for handling
handling liquids/molten
liquids / molten metals
metal
6 1Describe factors affecting 6.1 Factors affecting choice of material
10
Selection of choice of material handling handling equipments
Material equipments. 6.2 Economics of material handling
Handling 2 Calculate different material system- material handling cost and
Equipment handling costs. economical aspects, safety cost and
consideration.
6.3 Benefits of good material handling
system.
Total Hrs
64

1 Operate the working model of any one type of Unit :2 6
hoist, crane and lifting device.
2 Use working model of any one type of traction less Unit:3 6
conveyor.
3 Follow the maintenance practices of different unit:2,3,4 6

material handling equipments.
4 Prepare preventive maintenance schedule of any Unit:2,3,4 6

one major material handling device using operation
manual or internet.
5 Prepare a visit report for coal handling plant of Unit:1,2,3,4 8
thermal power station or cement industry to,
1. Observe construction and working of various
types of material handling devices.
2. Observe various load handling attachments,
electric lifting magnets etc.
3. Follow the maintenance practices of different
material handling equipments.
Total 32
3

No. Marks
R U A
01 Introduction to Material
04(02) 08(04) 00(00) 12(06)
Handling Systems.
02 Hoisting Machinery and
04(00) 08(06) 00(00) 12(06)
Equipments.
03 Conveying Machinery. 04(00) 08(04) 00(06) 12(10)
04 Surface Transportation
02(00) 04(04) 06(00) 12(06)
Equipments.
05 Components of Material
06(04) 00(02) 06(00) 12(06)
Handling Systems.
06 Selection of Material
04(04) 06(04) 00(00) 10(08)
Handling Equipments.
Total 24(10) 34(24) 12 (06) 70 (40)

option
1 R 2 1 R 2 2 R 2 2 R 2 4 R 2 1 R 2
01 5/7
5 U 2
02 3 R 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 1 U 4 3 U 4 3/5
03 2 U 4 2 U 4 3 U 4 5 R 4 4 U 4 3/5
04 6 R 4 3 U 4 4 U 4 6 R 4 6 U 4 3/5
05 3 U 6 6 U 6 2 U 6 2/3
06 4 A 6 5 A 6 3 A 6 2/3
4

What Frequency
Two PT
Test
20 -- Answer 1, 2, 3
Assessment)
(Continuous

Sheets
Students
be computed)
CA
Assignment
Sheet
Examination)
(Term End
Theory
TEE
End Of the
Course
Sheets
Total 100 40
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
Rubrics &
TEE

Course Answer
Sheets
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
5

1 Technical knowledge and willingness to learn. 10
2 Skill. 20
3 Performance and attitude. 10
4 Viva voce. 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
2 _ 3 _ 3 _ _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
3 _ 3 _ _ 2 _ _ _ _ 3 3 _
4 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 2 3 3 2
5 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 2 3 3 2
6 _ 3 2 3 _ _ _ 2 2 3 3 2

Year Of publication
1. Plant layout and material R. B. Chaudhary and G. R. N. 81-7409-105-X
handling. Tagore, Khanna Publication, 2nd
Reprint 2013.
2. Material handling (principle Allegri T. H. CBS Publisher, 2nd 9788123908403
and practice) Edition, 2004
3. Plant layout and material Apple J.M, John Wiley 978-0471071716
handling. Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1978.
4. Plant Layout and Material S.C.Sharma, Khanna Publication 978-81-7409-319-6
handling. Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2013
6
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BaEHVpKc-1Q , assessed on 29th March, 2016

 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Material_handling, assessed on 29th March, 2016
 www.mhi.org/fundamentals/material-handling, assessed on 20th March, 2016
 www.newagepublishers.com/samplechapter/001455

 Working models of different types of hoist, cranes.
 Working models of different types of elevating equipments and conveyors.
 Working models of different types of track less equipment like trucks, tractors and
trailers.
 Different types of flexible hoisting appliances and load handling attachments.
 Working models of various power transmission drives

1. Mr. M. M.Dangre Lecturer in mechanical Government Polytechnic
Lecturer engg. Nagpur
2. Mr. A. V. Abhyankar Lecturer in mechanical engg. Government Polytechnic
Nagpur
Nagpur

Engineering
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/MT/PK/AE/TX/TR

COURSE CODE : FS501E
COURSE TITLE : FINISHING SCHOOL
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Polytechnic Diploma pass outs who are not readily employable in the desired target
jobs , need further grooming Diploma engineers are not fit for relevant jobs in related work
areas in corporate due to lack of required skills like communication, team work, arithmetic,
public speaking , attitude building, ethics , business etiquettes etc. This ‘disconnects’ between
the desired jobs and the qualifications obtained needs to be addressed by institutes. This
course helps in bridging the gap between Formal education and Industry requirements.
Industries and Institutes have a role to play.A pre-employment training programme in which
curriculum is developed for students to prepare them for requirements of industries.It aims to
provide soft skills to student to facilitate their employability and play a part in the supply side
issues (of talent) of the industry. Students then can adapt themselves to the industrial
scenario.
1 Perform SWOT analysis
2 Demonstrate soft skills.
3 Enhance employability skills.
4 Adapt ethics and values.
5 Practice interpersonal skills.
6 Refine communication skills.
1
FS501E Finishing School 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes(Cognitive .
Domain)
Nil
Practicals Specific Learning Outcomes Units Hrs.

1.  Identify Strengths and Weaknesses
A. Soft Skills
of Self
Understanding self &
 Observe Opportunities and Threats
others 4
in Self
a. SWOT Analysis
 Exhibit different interpersonal b. Interpersonal Skills
skills in given situations.
2  Practise face to face
communication in formal/informal
groups.
A. Soft Skills
 Observe Body Language of others
Communication Skills
and note the changes in different
a. Verbal & Non
persons.
Verbal Communication 8
 Construct and demonstrate short b. Body Language
public speech of five minutes on a
c. Sixth sense Intuition
topic of interest. d. Public Speaking
 Identify signs and signals as a
means of communication and list
them.
3 A. Soft Skills
 Identify factors in self esteem.
Self Confidence
 Produce a list of behavioural
a. Strength of Conviction
elements of concentration. 4
b. Power of
 Practise tongue twister to enhance Concentration
power of concentration. c. Self Esteem
4  Practise three different dress A. Soft Skills
combinations for professional Presenting Self
presentation. a. Fine Grooming
4
 Demonstrate three social manners b. Dress Sense
and etiquettes in a group task c. Manners &
Etiquettes
5  Set career goals for next five years A. Soft Skills
and list activities to achieve these Effective Self Management
goals. a. Goal Setting 6
 Prepare a chart of daily routine b. Time Management
activities with Important, Very c. Emotional Quotient
important, Urgent and Very urgent d. Motivating self and
2
classification. Others
 Identify assertive behavioural e. Positive Thinking &
aspects of persons in your Assertiveness
surrounding
 Identify factors/elements related to
emotional balance in given
situations.
6  Practise yoga /meditation. A. Soft Skills
 Prepare a habit plan and list steps Personality Development
for action plan. a. Physical & Mental Health
6
 Construct diet chart for self. b. Habit formation- Do’s &
Don’ts
c. Diet Pyramid
7  Exhibit attitude as response to B. Employability Skills
2
various situations (case studies). Attitudes
8  Demonstrate technical skills of B. Employability Skills
6
different subjects. Technical Skills
9  Observe the weakness domain of B. Employability Skills
4
the individuals in given situations. Adaptability
10  Compose creative essay.
B. Employability Skills
 Suggest creative solutions to 4
Creativity and Innovation
various given situations.
11  Exhibit team spirit and leadership B. Employability Skills
qualities while working in a team. Interpersonal Skills
4
a. Working in Team
b. Leadership
12  Practise Role play in group to B. Employability Skills
4
exhibit corporate culture. Corporate culture
13  Prepare Resume. B. Employability Skills
 Practise Group Discussions. Job Selection Process
 Demonstrate interview techniques a. Resume Writing 8
through mock interview. b. Group Discussions
c. Personal Interview
Total Hrs. 64

Not Applicable
Not Applicable
3

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Report writing 20
3 Viva voce 10
Total 50

Course Program Outcomes (Pos) PSOs
Outcomes
(Cos) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - 3 2 - - - 3 - 3 - -
2 - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 3 - -
3 - - - 2 3 - 3 3 3 3 - -
4 - - - - 3 2 3 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 - 3 2 3 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 - 3 2 - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
How to win friends and Dale Carnegie, Fingerprint Edition 10: 8175993480
1. Influence people 2016 13: 978-
8175993488
The SWOT Analysis Lawrence G. Fine, Createspace 10: 1449546757
2. Edition 2009 13: 978-
1449546755
Body Language Allan Pease, Manjul Publishing 10: 8183224105
3. House Pvt. Ltd., Edition 2014 13: 978-
8183224109
The Spark is Within Jagdish Bali, Authorspress, Edition 10: 9352072332
You 2016 13: 978-
4.
9352072330
How to Read a Person Rupa Publications India, Edition 10: 8129119188
5. Like a Book 2012 13: 978-
8129119186
5
Believe in Yourself Dr.Joseph Murphy, Manjul 10: 8183225098

6. Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 13: 978183225090
1 stEdition 2014
Think and Grow Rich Napoleon Hill, Jaico Publishing 10: 817992792X
7. House; First edition 2007 13: 9788179927922
Communication Skills Sanjay kumar, Oxford Edition 2011 10: 0198069324
8.
13: 9780198069324
The Power of your Sub Dr.Joseph Murphy, Amazing Reads 10: 8192910962
9. conscious Mind Edition 2015 13: 9788192910963
The Power of Positive Norman Vincent Peale, 10: 0091906385
10. Thinking 13: 9780091906382
The Ace of Soft Skills: Gopalaswamy Ramesh 10: 8131732851
Attitude, 13: 978-
11.
Communication and 8131732854
Etiquette for Success
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Soft_skills accessed on 20 th September,2016
 http://www.p21.org/about-us/p21-framework/262 accessed on 1st November 2016
 http://innovationexcellence.com/blog/2012/08/04/whats-the-difference-between-
creativity-and-innovation/ accessed on 10 th October 2016
 http://study.com/academy/lesson/self-understanding-and-self-concept.html accessed
on 20th October,2016
 http://www.skillsyouneed.com/ips/understanding-others.html accessed on 20th
October,2016
 http://articles.bplans.com/how-to-perform-swot-analysis/ accessed on 19th
September,2016
 http://www.skillsyouneed.com/ips/body-language.html accessed on 19th
September,2016
 https://www.mindtools.com/CommSkll/PublicSpeaking.htm accessed on 19th
September 2016
 https://www.mindtools.com/pages/article/newHTE_90.htm accessed on 20th October
2016
Nil
6

CURRICULUM:
Mr. D.S. Kulkarni HOD, Textile Manufacture Government Polytechnic,
1.
Nagpur.
Dr. SurendraGole Corporate HR Trainer, Nagpur Institute of
2.
Former Principal, Technology, Nagpur
Mr. Ashish Khole Divisional Manager TAL - Areospace Business
3. Unit – (Tata Group of
company) Nagpur
Dr. Rozina Rana Director ELAN Finishing School,
4. Priyadarshini Group of
Institutions
Mr. Sarang Sawangikar Asstt. Vice President(HR) Vidarbha Power Ltd.,
5.
Butibori
Ms. M.M.Machale Lecturer in English Government Polytechnic,
6.
Nagpur
Dr. S.W.Rajurkar In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,
7.
Mr. G.V.Gotmare In-Charge, Curriculum Government Polytechnic,
8.
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/ TX/MT/PK
COURSE CODE : FE501E
COURSE TITLE : BASIC BUILDING DRAWING
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 02 (1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1 PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR)
TH.TEE : NIL
PR.TEE : 02 HRs (Internal)
PT : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Various agencies involved in engineering works use drawings as effective medium of

communication. Engineering professionals of fields, other than civil engineering like
mechanical, electrical, chemical, polymer mining, metallurgy etc. are required to interpret the
space in the given building to assess whether their installations can be housed in the building or
to specify the space requirements of their machineries, assemblies and installations. Moreover as
an individual everyone of any profession wants to visualize his/her home before it is build,
therefore these professionals need to study basic of building drawings such as plan, elevation and
sections etc. This curriculum is designed to develop the basic skills of drawing building plan,
elevation and section.
1. Identify different types of lines and symbols used in working drawings.

2. Prepare line plans of buildings for different orientations and with different scales.
3. Prepare plan, elevation and section of an existing building by taking
measurements.
4. Develop working drawing duly considering rules, regulations and byelaws of
sanctioning authority.
5. Identify the units and their sizes required in a building for serving a given
purpose.
6. Interpret plan, elevation and section of building.
1
FE501E Basic Building Drawing 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
Practical Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
s
1 Draw different types of lines, common notations/symbols used Basics of
in civil engineering and also symbols used in their field to be Civil 10
shown in the plan (A1size sheet). Drawing
2 Prepare line plans of small residential building (1BHK) for
different plot orientation and with different scale on graph 10
paper (A1size).
Drawing line
3 Prepare line plans of Public building like (Primary school
building and Primary Health Centre) specifying names and
plans
10
sizes of different units. Prepare a separate report giving units,
their sizes and justification for sizes.
4 Prepare a Measured drawing of institutional workshop/any
Measured
small building. Show placement of machines/electrical fixtures 12
etc. drawing
5 Develop a working drawing of any one of the building drawn in
Practical no.2 considering rules, regulations and bye laws of 12
local /other sanctioning authority. working
6 Draw plan and sectional elevation of Bifurcated/ Dog legged drawing
06
staircase.
7 Interpret dimensions and sizes of various units in the given
building drawing.
Interpretation 04
Total 64
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Draw to the suitable scale a detailed plan of two room building. 20
2 Dimensioning 10
3 Neatness 10
4 Viva -Voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - - - - - 3 - 3 - -
2
- - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4
- - 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 - -
5
- - - - - - - 3 - 3 - -
6 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Building Drawing: With an M.G. Shah, C.M.Kale and V. Y.Patki 10:0074638769
Integrated Approach to Built Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing
1.
Environment Company Ltd. 4th edition, 2002
Building Planning and Dr.Kumara Swamy and A. 13:9789385039126

2. Drawing Kameshwara Rao , Charotar
Publications , 8th edition, 2015
Civil Engineering Drawing B.P.Verma, Khanna Publications, 13:9788174091688
3. and House planning 11th Edition,1986
Civil Engineering Drawing Gurucharan Singh, Standard 13:9788180140044
4.
Publications, 2009
Civil Engineering Drawing R. S. Malik,G.S. Meo, Computech 13:9788173180026
5. Publications ltd./ New Asian
Publications, 5th edition, 2015
4
 E-REFERENCES:
1. http://bie.telangana.gov.in/Pdf/civilenggdrawing.pdf., accessed on 3 rd September,
2016
2. http://www.iar.unicamp.br/lab/luz/ld/Arquitetural/livros/interior%20design%20stud
ent%20handbook.pdf, accessed on 3rd September, 2016.
3. https://law.resource.org/pub/in/bis/S03/is.962.1989.pdf accessed on 3 rd September,
2016
4. http://civilengineering-
notes.weebly.com/uploads/1/1/7/5/11750056/building_bye_laws.pdf accessed on 3 rd
September, 2016
5. http://civil.emu.edu.tr/courses/civl103/Tutorial%205.pdf accessed on 3rd September,
2016
Nil

CURRICULUM:
Mr. R. N.Giradkar Head of Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
1.
Deptt. Nagpur.
Dr. D. N. Kongre Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
2.
Nagpur.
Mr. S. R. Kukadapwar Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
3.
Nagpur.
Mr. M.K.Panchwate Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
4.
Nagpur.
Dr. S. J. Nikam Lecturer in Civil Engineering Government Polytechnic,
5
Nagpur.
6 Mr. M. R. Shelote Consultant Engineer M. R. Associates, Nagpur.
Ramdeobaba College of
7 Dr. R. N. Khapre Associate Professor Engineering and
Management, Nagpur
Assistant Secretary MSBTE, Regional Office,
8. Mr. A. J. Fulzele
(Technical) Nagpur.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/EE/EC/CM/IT/MT/PK/AE/TR/TX

LEVEL NAME : FREE ELECTIVES
COURSE TITLE : RAC MAINTENANCE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE :
The knowledge of repair and maintenance of domestic refrigerator and air conditioner
is helpful in daily life. One should acquire skills in carrying out basic repairs and
maintenance of refrigeration and air conditioning.
1. Identify various components of refrigeration and air conditioner.
2. Handle various tools
3. Test and find faults in refrigerator and air conditioner
4. Diagnosis fault of refrigerator and air conditioner.
5. Practice maintenance procedure
6. Practice safety procedure.
1
FE502E RAC Maintenance 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Topics Hrs.

al No.
1. Identify the components of domestic refrigerator and write 10
report.
Report includes- Introduction to
-Basic concept of refrigeration Refrigerator
-Vapor Compression Refrigeration system
-COP, Ton of refrigeration
2. Identify the hand tools required for maintenance of 04
domestic refrigerator. Use tools for various applications and
Hand Tools
write report.
-Specification of tools
3. Dismantle compressor, identify various components in
08
compressor and write report. Report includes –
-Hermitically sealed compressor
Compressor
- various components of compressor
4. Test Electric circuit and electrical controls used in 04
refrigerator and report writing. Electric circuit
Report writing includes –
of refrigerator
-Electric circuit diagram
-Various controls and its function
5. Identify various faults and write report
Fault finding and 08
Report includes –
-Various faults
maintenance of
- Remedies refrigerator
6. Run water cooler test rig and Write report.
04
Report writing includes-
-Working of water cooler
Water cooler
-various components of water cooler
7 Identify the components of air conditioning system and 08
write report.
Report includes- Air conditioning
-Basic concept of air conditioning system
-Various air conditioning systems like summer AC, winter
AC, comfort AC.
8 Identify of various faults and write report
08
Report includes – Fault finding of
-Various faults air conditioner
- Remedies
9 Test Electric circuit and electrical controls used in AC Electric circuit 04
and report writing. of air conditioner
2
Report writing includes –

-Electric circuit diagram
-Various controls and its function
10 Identify the components of car air conditioning system and 04
write report. Car Air
Report includes- Conditioning
-Basic concept of car air conditioning system
-function of various components of car AC
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs. 64

NIL
NIL
3

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Drawing of Sketch, selection of equipment’s, procedure etc. 20
2 Performance 10
3 10
Conclusion
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1
- - 3 - - - - 3 3 - - -
2
- - 3 3 - - - 3 - 3 - -
3
- - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4
- - 3 3 1 - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6
- - 3 3 1 - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Refrigeration and air S. Kumar, New Heights --
1.
conditioning servicing Publication New Delhi
Refrigeration and Air R.S. Khurmi, S.Chand and Co. 81-219-1687-9
2.
Conditioning
Refrigeration and Air 0-07-451515-2
3. C.P. Arrora, Tata Mc-Graw Hill,
Conditioning
Refrigeration and Air Manohar Prasad, New Age 13:
4.
Conditioning Publications. 9788122414295
Refrigeration and Air P.N. Ananthanarayanan; Tata 0074620088
5.
Conditioning McGraw Hill
5

1. Air conditioning trainer kit
2. Water cooler trainer kit
3. Ice plant trainer kit
4. Window Air conditioner
5. Split air conditioner
6. Domestic Refrigerator
7. Car air conditioning trainer kit

CURRICULUM:
Prof. O. V. Sarode Head, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
1
Engineering Nagpur
Dr. S. W. Rajurkar Lecturer, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
2
Engineering Nagpur.
Prof. D. J. Ghode Lecturer, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
3
Engineering Nagpur.
Prof. K. S. Thekedar Lecturer, Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
4
Engineering Nagpur.
5
Nagpur
6
7
Engineering
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/AE/PK/MT/EC/IT/CM /TX

COURSE TITLE : ELECTRICAL MAINTENANCE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 02(1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1PR CREDIT =2CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Electricity is a basic need of human beings. All are dealings with the different
electrical gadgets as well as electrical installations in day to day life. Therefore, the
knowledge of electrical maintenance is must for all the peoples. One should have ability
to acquire skills in carrying out repairs of electrical gadgets with accuracy and maintain
the electrical installations. This course imparts the practical skills of electrical
maintenance.
1. Use electrical maintenance tools and equipment’s.
2. Use fire-fighting equipment on different types of fires.
3. Test, Repair and maintain the domestic appliances.
4. Locate and repair the faults in electrical installation.
5. Identify the faults.
6. Follow safety precautions.
1
FE503E Electrical Maintenance 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

als
1. Identify electrical measuring instruments, sources,
ICDP/ICTP, switches, loads, wires and execute safety 4
precautions in laboratory. Electrical Safety
2 Use firefighting equipment on different fire.
4
3 Identify different electrical maintenance tools and
4
electrical accessories.
4 Test single phase and three phase supply using test Maintenance Tools
4
lamp and identify phase and neutral using test lamp.
5 Perform continuity, open circuit, short circuit and
4
earth fault test using series test board.
6 Test and find fault in an automatic/ semiautomatic/
4
steam electric iron/toaster/room heater/hot plate
Domestic Appliances
7 Test, find faults and repair ceiling fan. 4
8 Test, find faults and repair electric mixer. 4
9 Identify different wiring systems in the premises
4
& prepare list of accessories required for each.
10 Test & measure insulation resistance of Electrical 4
lab wiring installation by using megger.
11 Measure the earth resistance of earth electrode by 4
using earth tester.
12
Electrical Installation
Connect single phase and three phase energy meter 4
to load and note the reading.
13 Prepare a wiring of two lamp controlled by two one 6
way switch by using conduit wiring.
14 Fix ICDP/M CB/ DB/ELCB on wiring board & 4
connect it to supply.
15 Locate the fault in electrical installation 4
2
Skill Assessment
64
Total Hrs

Not Applicable
Not Applicable
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Drawing circuit diagram/selection of equipment’s/writing procedure etc. 10
2 Performance 20
3 Result 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3
2 - - - - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3
3 - - - - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 - - - - - -
3 3 3 3 3 3
5 - - - - - -
3 3 3 3 - 3
6 - - - - - - - -
3 3 3 3

Year Of publication
Electrical Design Estimating K.B. Raina and Dr. S.K. 10: 8122403638
1. and Costing Bhattacharya, New Age International 13: 978-
(P) Ltd. (2010) 8122403633
Study of Home Appliances K. B. Bhatiya, Khanna Publication 1234567146703
2.
2010 Edition.
Home Appliances Servicing E.P. Anderson, Audels 030114
3.
 E-REFERENCES:
 http://www.electricaltechnology.org/2015/09 assessed on 30 Jan 2016
 www.slideshare.net/bawaparam/made-by-param assessed on 30 Jan2016
4

1. Electrical Maintenance Tool Kit.
2. Megger 500V Hand driven
3. Earth tester 3 spike.

CURRICULUM:
1.
Nagpur.
K.M.Gaidhane I/C, Head of Electrical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
R.I.Kamble Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
S.P.Thote Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
4.
Engineering Nagpur.
Dr. R.S.Surjuse Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
5.
Engineering Nagpur.
G.V.Gotmare Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
6
Engineering Nagpur.
H,N.Kharkar Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
7
Engineering Nagpur.
N.H.Adkine Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
8
Engineering Nagpur.
A.P. Gandhi Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
9
Engineering Nagpur.
Bhashkar Bale Dy. Executive Engineer, MSTCL, Nagpur
10
R.Y.Ghormade Head of Electrical Dharampeth Polytechnic,
11
Engineering Nagpur
DR. S.S.Bharatkar Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
12
Engineering Amaravati.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/EE/ME/CM/IT/PK/AE/TX/TR

LEVEL NAME : PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE
COURSE TITLE : HOBBY ELECTRONICS
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PR. TEE EXAM : 02 HRs
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Some students may be interested in interdisciplinary approach therefore itis felt that
diploma holder those who have interest in ”Hobby Electronics Circuits” must have
minimum competency and knowledge of it, so later on some student may take up it as
business .Therefore this course has been kept as one of free elective interdisciplinary
course in the curriculum.
1 Identify different electronics components.
2 Handle electronics circuit development tools &test and measuring equipments.
3 Select the hobby electronics circuits as per requirements.
4 Test the electronics components and circuits.
5 Develop the simple electronics hobby project.
6 Present electronics project.
1
FE504E Hobby Electronics 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL

Pract Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Hrs.
icals
1 Identify and understand different electronics components. -like. 04
resistor, capacitor, inductor, diode, transistor, relay etc.
2 Observe and draw Symbols and unit of measurement for 04
electronics parameters like voltage, current, resistor, capacitor,
inductor etc.
3 Identify the applications of basic electronics test and measuring 08
equipments. Like multimeter LCR meter, Cathode Ray
Oscilloscope, Function generator etc.
3 Perform the basic handling skill of electronics circuit development 04
tools like soldering gun, de-soldering pump etc
4 Test different electronics components like resister, capacitor, 08
inducer, diode, relay etc.
5 Identify simple electronics Hobby circuits by referring journals, 04
websites, and hobby electronics manuals.
6 Arrange electronics component and PCB (general purpose) for 08
selected circuit and their testing.
7 Prepare component layout of selected electronics circuit. 04
8 Mount and solder electronics components on PCB (general purpose) 08
9 Perform Testing, fault finding, rectification of fault. of circuit.(Test 06
the circuit for performance and rectify the fault)
10 Perform the final testing of circuit & packaging. 04
Skill Assessment 02
Total Hrs 64

NIL
NIL
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

2 Performance–Demonstration of project work 25
5 Viva voce 25
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - - 3 - 3 - -
2 - - 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - -
3 - - - - 3 3 - 3 - -
4
- - 3 3 - - 3 - 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - 3 3 - 3 - -
6
- - 3 3 - - 3 1 - - -

Year Of publication
1. Electronic For You Journal --
Electronics Material And Dr. MadhuriA. Joshi, , Shroff 10: 8173669007
2. Components Publisher & Dist. Pvt. Ltd. 13:
3 rdEdition, 9788173669002
Data Books Of Electronic Business Promotion Bureau
3. --
Components &Devices
 E-REFERENCES:
 Websites www.electronicprojects.com , assessed on 4th May 2016
 Websites www.circuittoday.comassessed on 4th May 2016
 Websites www.electroschematics.comassessed on 4th May 2016
 Websites www.hobbyelectronics.inassessed on 4th May 2016
4

2. LCR-Q meter
3. Cathode Ray Oscilloscope
4. Soldering Gun.
5. De-soldering Pump.
6. Nose Plier

CURRICULUM:
S.S.Tadas HOD, Government Polytechnic,
1.
Electronics Telecomm. Engg. Nagpur.
A.A.Ali Lecturer (Selection Gr.) Government Polytechnic,
2.
Electronics Telecomm. Engg. Nagpur.
D.A.Brahmankar Lecturer (Selection Gr.) Government Polytechnic,
3.
Electronics Telecomm. Engg Nagpur.
U.M.Ramteke Lecturer (Selection Gr.) Government Polytechnic,
4.
Electronics Telecomm. Engg Nagpur.
5. Mr. Sandip V Darwhekar Director Beta Computronics Pvt Ltd ,
Nagpur
6. Mrs. Gazzala Ali Head Electronics Anjuman Polytechnic ,
Nagpur
7. Mr S M Kale Lecturer Electronics Government Polytechnic,
Gadchiroli.
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/IT/CM/AE/MT/TX

COURSE TITLE : BASIC PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Packaging is the need of every manufactured commodity. Safe delivery of product to
end user through package has got many expectations. Packaging has a various functions
and aspects. Packaging process starts as soon as finished product is ready. The package
with the product is subjected to various situational hazards. The success of packaging
largely depends on how these hazards have been considered and taken care of. This all
requires a panoramic or holistic view about the field of packaging.
The concept & technology of packaging has taken years together to develop to where
it is today, through evolution of technology, market and business. In spite of being a
value to the business and developing economy, packaging by virtue of consuming
resources, creating solid waste and pollution, is posing a grave threat to the environment.
After completing this course students will be able to -
1. Collect various primary and secondary packages.
2. Identify the packaging materials and appreciate their properties.
3. Identify product characteristics of a packaged product.
4. Estimate the hazards to the package along with its contents.
5. Record by testing/ measurement/ observation various parameters of a package.
6. Search web resources on environmental issues related with packaging.
1
FE505E Basic Packaging Technology 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :
Unit Number and Specific Learning Outcomes Topics and subtopics Hrs.
Name (Cognitive Domain)
Nil

Domain)
1. Introduction to Packaging.
 Form suitable number of groups of students.
 Collect 05 empty packages/ containers of different
products. (Primary & Secondary packages)
Introduction 02
Products may be assigned by the course teacher.
 Prepare a list of the packages and the products they
contained.
 Submit the list along with the collection.
2. Assort the collection of various packages by the class
into primary and secondary packaging.
 Classify the collected packages into Primary,
Secondary & Primary as well as Secondary
packaging.
 Classify the collected packages into Rigid, semi-
rigid and flexible packaging.
Packaging
 Note down the classification. 12
Materials
 Identify the material/ materials of the packages.
 Measure the physical parameters/ characteristics of
the packages/ packaging material such as
dimensions, weight, thickness, size, etc.
 Prepare a power point presentation on it.
 Attach the print out of above presentation in the
Journal.
3. Identify the product properties/ characteristics and
estimate packaging functions.
 Select appropriate number of products from the
collection.
 Identify various physical/ physiochemical properties
Product
of the products influencing its packaging. 10
Characteristics
 Predict the functions of the packaging material and
the package.
 Classify predicted functions into Technical/ Primary
and Commercial/ Secondary functions of packaging.
 Prepare a brief report on it and attach in the Journal.
4. Identify the fitness for use of the product contain by its
packaging.
2
 Collect at least one package each of – one

Perishable food and one Pharmaceutical Product. Packaging
 Examine the date of manufacture, expiry/best Communication 04
before.
 Note down above information and collect the
information on usage of unfit products.
5. Judge the hazards of handling, warehousing and
transportation.
 Observe the printed communication on the package
and find out the manufacturer and its geographical
location.
 Trace out the method of handling, warehousing and
transportation. 12
 Outline the distribution channel.
 Estimate the hazards to the products and packaging Packaging
due to of handling, warehousing and transportation. Hazards
 Interpret material handling instructions as printed
on the packaging.
 Write a report.
6. Carryout following tests on packaging materials and
dummy packages.
 Drop test. [IS : 7028 (Part 4) – 1987]
 Puncture resistance test. (T 803 om-88)
Package Testing 10
 Rolling test [IS : 7028 (Part 5) – 1987]
 Vibration test. IS : 7028 (Part 2) - 2002
 Box compression test. (T 804 om-89)
 Analyse the test results.
7. Conduct a Survey/ Case study on environmental
burdens caused by Packaging.
 Select a Packaging Industry.
 Visit to the industry or search information through
web resources.
 Gather information on different operations
Survey 12
performed by the industry.
 Study the impact of those operations on
environment.
 Appreciate 3-R concept (Reduce, Reuse and
Recycle)
 Prepare presentation.
Skill Assessment 02
Total 64
3

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Identification 10
2 Drawing / flowchart/schematics/symbols 10
3 Procedure/involvement/performance 10
4 Viva voce 20
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 2 - - 2 3 3 3 - -
6 - - - - 1 1 - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Fundamentals Of F.A. Paine, Newnes-Butterworth, 13:
1.
Packaging 1973 9780408001076
Packaging users Handbook F.A. Paine, Springer; 1991 13:
2.
9780751401516
The Packaging Media F.A. Paine, Blackie Academic & 13:
3.
Professional, 1977 9780216901919
Packaging In The edited by Geoffrey M. Levy 13:
4.
Environment 9780751400915
The Wiley Encyclopedia of Marilyn Bakker, John Wiley & 0471-80940-3
5.
Packaging Technology. Sons Inc. Canada
Fundamentals of Packaging S. Natrajan, M. Govindrajan, B. 978-81-203-
6. Technology Kumar, 2E, PHI LPL, Delhi, 2014 5054-0
5
 E-REFERENCES:
1. http://www.iip-in.com/site/default.aspx
2. https://books.google.co.in/books?isbn=0470541385
3. http://pkt.jinakarn.com/ept.pdf
4. http://www.boschpackaging.com/en/pa/homepage/homepage.html
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LbxXpP9ysjo

1. Bursting Strength tester
2. Box compression strength tester
3. Drop tester
4. Universal testing machine
5. Puncture testing machine
6. Edge compression tester

CURRICULUM:
I/C, Head of Packaging Government Polytechnic,
1. Prof. R.S.Raool
Technology Nagpur.
Lecturer in Packaging Government Polytechnic,
2. Prof. A.S.Bhagat
Technology Nagpur.
Lecturer in Packaging Government Polytechnic,
3. Prof. Imran K.Syed
Technology Nagpur.
4. Prof. A.P.Pardey Lecturer in Paper and pulp
Nagpur.
Academician, Dharmpeth Polytechnic
5. Prof. S.N.Madhugiri Ex Principal & Nagpur& Dept. Packaging
Retired Head of Technology G.P.Nagpur
Consultant &
6. Prof. P.P Sargaonkar Retired Lecturer in
Nagpur.
Packaging Technology
BTE Repetitive &
7. Prof. M.S.Deshpande Lecturer in Mechanical
Bramhapuri.
Engineering
Industry Expert, Palekar Food Products,
8. Shri. Suresh Thakur
Managing Director, MIDC, Amravati.
______________________ ______________________
6
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/IT/AE/PK/TX

COURSE TITLE : INDUSTRIAL METALLURGICAL PRACTICES
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : NIL
 RATIONALE:
A technician comes across the various problems in metallurgical industries. Also,
at the work place, it is always necessary, to tackle the problem so that the sound
metallurgical product can obtained by application of suitable metallurgical engineering
techniques. Hence, the basic knowledge of various industrial metallurgical practices is
necessary for a technician. This course helps to impart the basic knowledge to technician
for increasing the productivity and a sound metallurgical product.
1. Draw sketches of different tools/machines in metallurgical shops/labs
2. Use of tools and machinery in different metallurgical labs/shops.
3. Operate different equipments/machineries used in basic Metallurgical labs/shops
4. Perform inspection and testing of metallurgical products.
6. Choose proper tool for different metallurgical processes.
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
NIL
1
FE506E Industrial Metallurgical Practices 2016

Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain)
als
Units Hrs.
equipments used in pattern making and mouldings shops and
02
draw the sketches and write specifications, details, applications Pattern
of above tools. making and
2. Prepare sand mould by using any one pattern (mould to be Moulding
prepared by group of 2 to 4 students depending on volume of 08
work)
equipments used in casting shop and draw the sketches and write 02
specifications, details, applications of above tools.
Casting
4. Prepare one casting related to mould prepared. (any one type of
casting to be prepared by group of 2 to 4 students depending on 08
volume of work)
equipments used in metal working operations (rolling, wire
02
drawing, etc) and draw the sketches and write specifications, Metal working
details, applications of above tools.
6. Perform practical related to any one metal working operations 08
equipments used in heat treatment Shop and draw the sketches 2
and write specifications, details, applications of above tools. Heat treatment
8 Prepare sample for Performing heat treatment operation and
8
conduct any one heat treatment to steel/cast iron sample
9 Observe the demonstration of hand tools and equipments used in
testing and inspection lab and draw the sketches and write 2
Testing and
specifications, details, and applications of above tools.
inspection
10 Carry out various necessary testing and write the test report for
8
any one metallurgical product.
11 Observe the demonstration of hand tools, machine Tools and
equipments used in metallographic lab and draw the sketches and 2
write specifications, details, applications of above tools.
Metallography
12. Prepare one sample for metallographic examination and examine
the sample under metallurgical microscope and draw the 8
structure.
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 64

Nil
Nil
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Drawing diagram/ selection of equipment’s/ writing procedure etc. 10
2 Performance 20
3 Calculation/Result/ Drawing Graphs(if any) 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - 3 - - - 3 - 3 - -
2 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
1. Principles of metal castings Dr. P.C. Mukharjee 81-20300716-X
2. Foundry Engineering Shrinivasan 81-7409-026-6
Introduction to Physical Sidney H. Avner 0-07-085018-6

3. Metallurgy McGraw-Hill international edition,
2 nd edition
4. Testing of materials by Prof. A.V.K. Suryanarayana. 81-20300716-X
The Testing & Inspection H. E. Davis, G. E. Troxell, 81-7409-026-6

5
of Engineering materials, McGraw Hill
Mechanical Metallurgy George Dieter, McGraw Hill, 0-07-084453-4
6
Heat treatment Principles T.V. Rajan , C.P. Sharma, Prentice 81-20300716-X

7
and techniques Hall of India Pvt. ltd, 12th edition
4
 E-REFERENCES:
http://books.google.co.oin/books/isbn=9380026757 , assessed on
17thMarch 2016
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=101M1kaZIFg , assessed on 27thApril 2016
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1HuxDVpy_iv , assessed on 27thApril 2016

1. Patterns
2. Foundry tools
3. Welding Transformer (Oil Cooled) Three Phase
4. Pit type furnace
5. Mould boxes
6. Crucibles
7. Muffle furnace
8. Mould shaking machine
9. Draw bench
10. Rolling mill
11. Grinder
12. Polishing machine
13. Hardness tester
14. Microscopes
15. NDT equipments

CURRICULUM:
K.L.Meshram Head of the Dept Government Polytechnic,
1. Department of metallurgical Nagpur.
Engineering
Ms. V.C. Humney Lecturer in Metallurgical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
S.M.Waikar Lecturer Metallurgical Government Polytechnic,
3 Nagpur
Engineering
Y.Y. Mahajan Assist. Professor , VNIT Nagpur
4. Metallurgy & Material
Science
5
S.B.Varadpande Managing director Orange city alloys Pvt. Ltd
Nagpur
Y. K. Gaiky Lecturer Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
6 Sakoli
Engineering
______________________ _________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/AE/MT/PK/TX

COURSE TITLE : COMPUTER NETWORK
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 02(TH/TU CREDIT = 00 CLOCK HR., 1PR CREDIT = 2 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
The world in the information era has become network centric. A Computer networks has been
growing with rapid technological progress. Computer communication through networking
becomes essential part of our life. We can manage many application like Air Line Reservation,
Railway Reservation, E-banking, E-Governance, On-Line shopping, E-learning etc. by clicking
mouse button from our own place. Because of this, world become the global village. By
considering importance of networking towards all aspects of our life, we here introduce basic
concept of networks, network classification, network topologies, network devices, Transmission
media, Network reference models, concept of TCP/IP.
1. Identify network and network topologies.
2. Connect and handle different networking devices.
3. Identify network architecture and physical media used to connect computers in
network.
4. Identify E-Commerce and E-Governance website on the internet.
5. Use and share Network Recourses.
6. Use various Internet and Intranet Applications
1
FE507E Computer Network 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY: NIL

(Cognitive Domain)
NIL

Pract Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain) Units Hrs.
icals
1. Identify different types of network. 2
2. Identify different network topologies. 2
1.Introduction
3. Connect and identify different Transmission Media. 4
to Computer
4. Connect and identify different network controlling devices like 4
network and
hub, switches etc. topologies
5. Connect computers in star topology by using wired media and 4
with any network device (eg. Hub)
6. Install and configure LAN card. 4
2.Local Area
7. Prepare a Straight Cable and Network Cross over Cable and 4
Network
test by Line Tester.
8. Share different devices like printer, scanner etc. over LAN 2
network.
9. Share a printer on a network & print a document on it from a 2
different computer on a network 3.Applications
10. Share files and directories from one computer to other & Uses of 2
computer on the network. Computer
11. Install Win Messenger on LAN network. network 2
12. Create ID on Win messenger. 2
13. Communicate through Win Messenger over LAN network. 4
14. Connect through WAN network 4

15. Create Email-ID on any WAN software like Gmail, Rediff, 4
4.Wide Area
Yahoo etc. Network
16. Communicate through any WAN software. 4
17. Search information on the internet. 2
18. Identify different E-commerce website on the internet like 2
amazon.com, ebay.com etc. 5.Concepts of
19. Connect through any E-commerce website on the internet and E-Commerce 2
learn the procedure to buy books.
20. Identify different E-Governance website on the internet like 2
6. Introduction
irctc.co.in etc.
to E-
21. Connect through E-governance railway website on the internet 2
Governance
and learn the procedure for online railway reservation.
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 64
 SPECIFICATION TABLE FOR THEORY PAPER:NIL

2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Selection, writing steps, installation etc. 10
2 Connection and configuration. 10

3 Performance 20
5 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 - - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Computer Networks Andrew S Tannenbaum, Tata 9780132126953
1.
McGraw-Hill Edition, 2012
Fundamentals of computer E Balaguruswamy, Tata McGraw- 9780070141605
2. Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., 2009
Computer Basics Micheal Miller,Tata McGraw-Hill 0789734206

3. Edition, 2012
Complete Reference Craig Zacker, Tata McGraw-Hill 0132126958

4.
Networking Edition
4
 E-REFERENCES:
http://www.pcworld.com/article/116583/article.html , assessed on 20th April 2016
http://www.computerstepbystep.com/computer-maintanence.html , assessed on 20th
April2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a0rEXzyX0-8, assessed on 20th April2016
 LIST OF MAJOR COMPONENTS/DEVICES WITH THEIR SPECIFICATION.

1. Operating System(Windows 98/2000/XP/7/8/8.1/10)
2. CPU Intel core i3/i5/i7
3. Hub(4 port USB hub, TB-226)
4. Switches
5. Connectors(RJ45/BNC/AUI/FIBER)
6. Printers(INK JET/LASER)
7. Scanner(FLAT BED)
8. Crimps, Strips and cut tools(HT-200R, HT-2008R)

CURRICULUM:
1
Engineering Nagpur.
2
Technology Nagpur.
Ms. Shifa S. Sayyed Lecturer in Information Government Polytechnic,
3.
Technology Nagpur.
Mrs. V A Raje System Analyst( Lecturer in Government Polytechnic,
4.
Computer Engineering) Nagpur.
Ms. Gayatri B. Chavan Lecturer in Computer Government Polytechnic,
5.
Engineering Nagpur.
Shri. Atul Upadhay COE Vista computers, Ramnagar,
6.
Nagpur
Shri N. V Chaudhri Asst. Professor (CSE) DBACEO ,Wanadongri,
7.
Nagpur
Shri Manoj Jethawa HOD, Computer Science Shri DattaMeghe Polytechnic,
8.
Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA INCE/ME/EE/EC/PK /TR/AE/TX/MT

COURSE TITLE : PC ARCHITECTURE AND MAINTENANCE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TOTAL CREDITS : 02(1 TH/TU CREDIT = 1 CLOCK HR., 1PR CREDIT = 02 CLOCK HR.)
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
As computers are heavily used for most of the activities like office automation, database
management etc, the repair and maintenance of computer and its peripheral devices is becoming
an essential part of the information technology. This course will enable the student to assemble
different types of computer system and maintenance of different supporting equipments like
printer, scanner, etc.
After completing this course students will be able to –
1. Assemble and de-assemble computer system.
2. Perform different setting on various types of printers.
3. Install various types of software’s.
4. Install operating system and device drivers in system.
5. Handle computer system hardware.
6. Maintain peripheral devices.
1
FE508E PC Architecture And Maintenance 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY:

(Cognitive Domain)
NIL

1. Identify all the peripheral devices. 1. Pc Motherboard And 2
Its Components
2. Identify all components mounted on motherboard. 2
3. Perform Basic Input/output System (BIOS) setting and 4
configuration setup using Complementary Metal Oxide
Semiconductor (CMOS).
4. Install CDROM drive to system. 2. Storage Devices And 2
Interfacing
5. Copy data on CD, DVD 2
6. Install different types of cards such as Video Graphics 3.Display Devices And 2
Array (VGA) or Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA) Interfacing
display ,sound card ,LAN card, multimedia cards etc.
10. Perform different printer settings on different types of 4
4. Input And Output
printers. Write down the function of each switch.
Devices
11. Format, partition and install a Hard Disk Drive (HDD). 4
12. Identify components of Hard Disk Drive (HDD) as a 2
storage device.
13. Connect scanner, scan documents and pictures on the 4
scanner available in your lab. Sample printout be
attached
14. Install Internal and External Modem 4
16. Per form Internet installation. 2
17. Connect Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) and 4
5. Power Supplies
identify different parts of SMPS.
18. Connect Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) and write 2
down function of it.
19. Connect speakers and microphones to system. 2
20. Assemble, de-assemble computer system. 4
6.Troubleshooting And
21. Identify installed computer peripherals and test their 4
Tools
working using diagnostic software
22. Find faults related to Monitor, CPU, Hard disk, Printer 4
and other peripherals.
23. Form a pico based net using Bluetooth devices and 4
transfer data.
24. Create bootable CD and Install an operating system 2
4
Skill Assessment
64
Total hours

2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Writing steps, selection, procedure 10
2 Performance 20
3 knowledge/block diagram/connection 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
th
Upgrading and repairs PCS Pearson, Scott Mueller, 20 13: 9780789747103
1.
Edition,2012
Troubleshooting Your PC Mr. David Stone &Alfred Poor, 13: 9780735614901
2.
Prentice Hall India, 2000
A+ Complete David Groth, BPB Publication,2006 13:9780782128024
3.
Computer Installation and Balasubramaniam, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Servicing Education Pvt. Ltd, Reprint, 2011 13:9781259082467
4
 E-REFERENCES:
http://www.pcworld.com/article/116583/article.html , assessed on 26th April 2016
http://www.computerstepbystep.com/computer-maintanence.html , assessed on 26th April
2016
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=a0rEXzyX0-8, assessed on 26th April 2016

1. Operating System(Windows 98/2000/XP/7/8/8.1/10)
2. CPU Intel core i3/i5/i7
3. Fiber optics cable(LSFH Polymer)
4. Unshielded Twisted pairs cable(CAT 1 to CAT5)
5. Connectors(RJ45/BNC/AUI/FIBER)
6. Printers(INK JET/LASER)
7. Scanner(FLAT BED)
8. Crimps, Strips and cut tools(HT-200R, HT-2008R)

CURRICULUM:
1
Technology Nagpur.
2
Engineering Nagpur.
Ms.I.G.Lokhande Lecturer in Information Government Polytechnic,
1.
Technology Nagpur.
Mrs.V.A.Raje Lecturer in Computer Engg. Government Polytechnic,
2.
Nagpur.
Mrs.D.P.Chanmanwar Lecturer in Information Government Polytechnic,
3.
Technology Nagpur.
Shri. Atulupadhay COE Vista computers, Ramnagar,
4.
Nagpur
Shri N. V Chaudhri Asst. Professor (CSE) DBACEO ,Wanadongri,
5.
Nagpur
Shri Manoj Jethawa HOD, Computer Science Shri Datta Meghe
6
Polytechnic, Nagpur
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/AE/PK/MT/EC/IT/CM /TR

LEVEL NAME : FREE ELECTIVE COURSES
COURSE TITLE : FABRIC SELECTION AND CARE
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE EXAM : NIL
PT. EXAM : 01 HR
 RATIONALE:
Clothes are as important as food and shelter. You use them for covering, protecting and even
decorating yourself. You must be having different types of clothes for different occasions like
your casual attire, office wear, party dresses, and your night suit and so on. In this course
technology and science behind selection of right fabric and its care is illustrated.
1. Judge the fibres by means of a physical test.
2. Select the yarn and fabric.
3. Illustrate and draw care labels in Textiles.
4. Identify the different methods for different stain removal from textiles.
5. Perform stain removal on fabric.
6. Suggest precaution for storage of textiles.
1
FE509E Fabric Selection and Care 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

Domain)
NIL

Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Domain)
Units Hrs.
als
1. Prepare textile fibre classification chart. 4
Fibre
2. Detect the fibre type by means of physical test. 6
3. Select the different types of yarn and fabric 4
4. Prepare chart of classification of yarn with their end uses. Yarn
6
5. Identify different fabric formation methods. 4
6. Draw the plain and twill weaves on graph paper. Fabric
6
7. Judge quality of textiles based on fibre, yarn and weave. 4
Selection of
8. Prepare a chart of removal of different types of stain in a Textiles
fabric and 6
9. Perform stain removal on a given fabric. 4
Care of
10. Draw care label symbols with instructions for fabrics. Textiles 6
11. Collect 10 garment samples and note the care labels
instructions 4
Maintenance
12. Prepare the list of precautions necessary for storage of of textiles
6
textiles.
Skill Assessment 4
Total Hrs. 64

Nil
Nil
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3
 SCHEME OF JOB EVALUATION:
1 Chart preparation 10
2 Analysis of fabric samples 20
3 Draw symbols/diagrams / sketches 10
4 Viva voce 10
Total 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - 3 3 1 - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
Textile Fabrics;: Their George Henry Johnson : Harper & B000863N32
1 Selection And Care From Brothers (1927)
The Standpoint Of Use,
Wear, And Launder ability,
Textiles Sara J. Kadolph, Pearson Prentice 0131187694,
2 Hall, 2007 9780131187696
3 Fabric Care Noemia, D Souza : New Age 978-81-224-
international,1998 1143-0
4 Fundamentals of Textile Sushila Dantyagi : Orient Longman 8125010270
and their care private limited, 2006
4
 E-REFERENCES:
1. http://www.textileassociationindia.org/ assessed on 20/9/2016

2. http://www.fiber2fashion.org/
3. http://www.nift.ac.in/
4. www.itamma.org/
5. http://www.fabriclink.com/ assessed on 20/9/2016
6. http://download.nos.org/srsec321newE/321-E-Lesson-22.pdf assessed on
20/9/2016
7. http://download.nos.org/srsec321newE/321-E-Lesson-26.pdf assessed on
20/9/2016

CURRICULUM:
Mr. D. S. Kulkarni Head of Textile Government Polytechnic,
1.
Department Nagpur.
Dr. S. B. Muttagi Lecturer in Textile Government Polytechnic,
2.
Technology Nagpur.
Mr. S. G. Gaikwad Lecturer in Textile Government Polytechnic,
3.
Technology Nagpur
Dr. C. P. Kapse Lecturer in Textile Government Polytechnic,
4.
Technology Nagpur.
Mrs. L. S. Chakraborty Lecturer in Textile Government Polytechnic,
5.
Technology Nagpur.
Prof. G.S. Kakad Head of Textile JDIT, Yavatmal
6.
Department
Mr. R.N.Yadav President RSR Mohota Spinning and
7.
Weaving Mill
______________________ ______________________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/EE/EC/CM/TX/MT/PK/IT/TR
COURSE TITLE : TWO AND FOUR WHEELER TECHNOLOGY
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Today majority of people using a vehicle and it becomes a common need of daily life.
Therefore, it is felt that one must have knowledge about the various systems and their
functional importance and working in the context of automobile and its maintenance. The
course aims to impart basic skills and understanding of two and four -wheeler systems basic
components their working principle and basic maintenance procedure. Hence, this course has
been offered for student of various diploma programme as one of the Allied Courses as
“Credit Non-Exam Course”
• Identify various systems of two wheeler.
• Identify various systems of four wheeler.
• Use different tools required for preliminary maintenance of vehicle.
• Practice to drive two and four wheeler vehicle or simulator.
• Practice various technique and procedure for finding general fault and repair
them
• Prepare a report on Motor Vehicle Rules, Road Signals safety and precautions
etc.
 COURSE DETAILS:
 A. THEORY :
Units Specific Learning Outcomes (Cognitive Topics and subtopics Hrs.

Domain)
NIL
1
FE510E Two and Four Wheeler Technology 2016
 B. PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ASSIGNMENTS:

1 Identify the various systems of two wheeler and write 04
report.
Report includes-
-Classification of two wheeler
-Block diagram of various system of two wheeler
-function of various systems.
2 Identify the various systems of four wheeler and write Introduction 06
report. to
Report includes- Automobile
-Classification of four wheeler
-Block diagram of various system of four wheeler
-function of various systems.
3 Use off hand tools and special tools required for 06
maintenance of two and four wheeler vehicle.
4 Prepare a report on Motor Vehicle act and traffic signs. 10

Reports includes-
-Various motor act.
Motor
-Driving license requirement.
Vehicle Act
-Traffic signs.
-Insurance of vehicle.
5 Practice four wheeler driving training on simulator. 20
6 Identify below mention faults in two wheeler and repair 08
them.
1) Starting Problem.
2) Mileage Problem.
3) Pick-up Problem.
4) Abnormal sound from Engine and Transmission Fault
System. finding and
maintenance
7 Identify below mention faults in Four wheeler and repair of 08
them. Automobile
5) Starting Problem.
6) Mileage Problem.
7) Pick-up Problem.
8) Abnormal sound from Engine and Transmission
System.
Skill Assessment 02
Total hours 64
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Drawing of Sketch, selection of equipment’s, procedure etc. 20
2 Performance 10
3 Conclusion 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
2 - - - - - - - 3 3 3 - -
3 - - - 3 3 - - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 3 3 - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - - - 3 3 3 3 3 3 - -
1-Slight (Low) 2-Moderate ( Medium) 3 –Substantial (High)

Year Of publication
Automobile Engineering Dr. Kripal Singh, Standard 97881801419669

1. Vol.I Publishers Distributors, 13th
Edition, 2013
Automotive Mechanics S. Srinivisan,Tata McGraw – 9780070494916
2 HILL, 2nd Edition, 2003
Basic Automobile Nakra CP , DhanpatRai Publishing 9788187433224

3.
Engineering Company (P) Limited,2009
Automotive Mechanics S. Srinivisan,Tata McGraw – Hill, 9780070494916
4.
2 nd Edition, 2003
The Motor vehicle Act Goverment Publication, 1989. Government
5
Publication
4
 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS/INSTRUMENTS

 Air compressor-1 HP 3 phase, Max Pressure: 4, 95 kg/cm², 70 ltr.
 Engine Crane –Hydraulic,2 ton Capacity.
 Bottle/Floor/Scissor Jacks- 3 ton Capacity.
 Two Post Lift- Capacity 3.5 Ton, Max Lifting ht - 1830 mm, Min Lowering
height - 110 mm, Post height - 3700 mm Lifting time - 55 Secs, Width between
posts : 2800 mm, with 1 HP / 2 HP power pack 1 or 3 phase
 Air hydraulic press - Capacity:30 Ton. Air pressure: 100-140PSI. 2 Press plates
included (designs may vary) Air inlet fitting: 1/4" NPT
 Socket/ Impact wrenches-¼”, 3/8”, ½” and 3/4"
 Torque wrenches- 3/8”, ½”and 3 NM, Ratcheting type/Click-type.
 Driving simulator.
 Road signs.
 Vehicle with two paddle control.

CURRICULUM:

Dr.K.S.Dixit I/C, Head of Automobile Government Polytechnic,
1.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. S.D.Thakre Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. R.B.Tirpude Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. Syed J.M. Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
4.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. V.S.Kumbhar Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
5.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. A.R.Yadgire Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
6
Engineering Nagpur.
______________________ _______________
5
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/AE/PK/MT/EC/IT/CM /TX

LEVEL NAME : FREE ELECTIVES
COURSE TITLE : ENERGY CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Energy conservation is a scientific and basic tool to make balance in different forms
of energies. This course imparts the awareness, knowledge and practical skills/ techniques of
energy conservation in various sectors. After completion of this course diploma engineering
students must use various techniques and methods of energy conservation. Also they should
able to perform energy audit and its implementation.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
1. Determine losses in Mechanical System
2. Use different methods of energy conservation
3. Collect information related to star rating equipment
4. Use energy conservation equipment for energy audit
5. Design efficient illumination scheme foe energy conservation
6. Prepare energy audit report.
 COURSE DETAILS:
THEORY:

Outcomes (Cognitive
Domain)
Nil
1
FE511E Energy Conservation and Management 2016
A. LIST OF PRACTICALS/LABORATORY EXPERIENCES/ASSIGNMENTS:
Practic Specific Learning Outcomes (Psychomotor Units Hrs

als Domain) .
1. Use different dynamometers and tachometer for 4
measurement of power of rotating shaft.
2 Use RDT PT100 thermal sensor and its module for 2
Mechanical
measurement of temperature at different stages in IC
Measurement
engine.
3 Use anemometer and measure quantity of air supplied 2
to IC Engine.
4 Determine Volumetric and overall efficiency of two 4
stage reciprocating compressor by conducting trial on
test rig.
Mechanical
5 Determine overall efficiency of centrifugal pump and 4
Performance
plot operating characteristics by using centrifugal test
Measurement
rig.
6 Calculate coefficient of performance by conducting 4
trial on vapour compression refrigeration test rig.
7 Collect performance information of 5 stars and 2 stars, 2
same brand split AC and compare the results in terms
of energy consumption.
8 Calculate electric bill for electric water heating system. 2
Compare it with cost of solar water heating system
and calculate payback period of solar water heating
system. Basic of Energy
9 Connect voltmeter, ammeter and wattmeter in electric Conservation 2
circuit to measure voltage, current and power required
for energy audit.
10 Determine losses of single phase Transformer at No 2
load, Half load and Full load by conducting load test.
11 Use power guard meter for measurement of different 2
electrical quantities
12 Calculate payback period of energy efficient motor. 4
Compare losses of energy efficient motor with similar
capacity conventional motor.
13 Calculate energy saving by using energy efficient 4
equipments like automatic Star – Delta starter for three
phase induction motor
14 Calculate energy saving in lighting system by 4
Energy
retrofitting tube lights with LED lamps. Also calculate
Conservation
payback period.
Methods
15 Measure illumination level of different places with the 4
help of Digital Lux Meter
16 Design illumination Scheme for any one of the 4
following by using energy efficient luminaries;
a) Flat b) Bungalow c) Independent House
17 Mini project Prepare Energy audit report of any 4
institute/Industry/Hospital/Residence/small workshop.
2
18 Prepare report on visit to cogeneration system. 4

19 Prepare detail report and give presentation in the class 4
on any one of the following topics ,
i) Energy conservation and Environmental
issues
ii) Market survey on energy efficient
luminaries
iii) Market survey on energy efficient motors
and transformers.
iv) Energy tariff system in India
v) Energy conservation equipments
vi) Energy Management
vii) Energy Audit
viii) Energy conservation act 2003
Skill Assessment 2
Total Hrs 64
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
3

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
4

1 Drawing circuit diagram, selection of equipments, writing procedure etc. 10
2 Performance 20
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1
- - 3 - 3 3 - 3 - 3 - -
2 - - 3 - 3 3 - 3 - 3 - -
3 - - - - - 3 - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 2 3 - - 3 3 3 - -
5
- - 3 - - - - 3 - 3 - -
6 - - 3 - 3 3 - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
D.Srilatha S.Sivnagraju
Generation and Utilization 8131798771,
1. M.Balasubbareddy Pearson , New
of Electrical Energy 9788131798775
Delhi
2. India – The Energy Sector P.H. Hederson,University Press,
Energy management
3. W.CTurner, Wiley Press 10: 142008870X
Handbook
Efficient Use and B.G. Desai, J.S.Rana, A.V.
4. management of electricity Dinesh, R. Paraman, Devki
in industry. Energy Consultancy PVT Ltd
Renewable Energy Chetan Singh Solanki, Prentice-
978-81-203-3434-
5. Technologies- A Practical Hall of India PVT. Ltd., First,
2
guide for beginners 2008.
Chetan Singh Solanki,
Renewable Energy Technologies- -978-81-203-
6 Prentice-Hall of India
A Practical guide for beginners 3434-2-
PVT. Ltd., First, 2008.
5
D.S.Chauhan, S.K.Srivastava,
Non-Conventional Energy 13:978-81-224-
7 New Age International (P) Ltd.
Resources 1768-5
Publishers, Second 2011.
Renewable Energy
0074600230,
8 Sources & Conversion N.K. Bansal, Kleemann, Meliss
9780074600238.
Technology
Kamlesh Roy, Laxmi
9 Illuminating Engineering 9789380386553
Publication, 2006
 E-REFERENCES:
1.www.bee.india.nic.in , accessed on 11th November, 2016
2.www.mnes.nic.in , accessed on 11th November, 2016
3.www.energy managertraining.com , accessed on 11th November, 2016
4.www.greenbusiness.com , accessed on 11th November, 2016
5.www.worldenergy .com , accessed on 11th November, 2016
6.www.mahaurja.com , accessed on 11th November, 2016

1. Lux meter
7. PV Solar panel
8. Energy efficient motors
9. Energy efficient transformer
10. Energy efficient luminaries
11. Energy efficient Equipments /Devices
12. Power Guard Meter (For measurement of V, I, W, VA, PF, KWh)

CURRICULUM:
1.
Nagpur.
Mr. O. V. Sarode I/C, Head of Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur
Mrs. K.M.Gaidhane I/C, Head of Electrical Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. A.R. Shaikh Lecturer in Mechanical Government Polytechnic,
4.
Engineering Nagpur.
6
Mrs.S.P.Thote Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,

4.
Engineering Nagpur.
Dr. R.S.Surjuse Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
5.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr.G.V.Gotmare Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
6
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr.N.H.Adkine Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
7
Engineering Nagpur.
Bhashkar Bale Dy. Executive Engineer, MSTCL, Nagpur
8
R.Y.Ghormade Head of Electrical Dharampeth Polytechnic,
9
Engineering Nagpur
DR. S.S.Bharatkar Lecturer in Electrical Government Polytechnic,
10
Engineering Amaravati.
______________________ ______________________
7
COURSE CURRICULUM
PROGRAMME : DIPLOMA IN CE/ME/AE/PK/MT/EC/IT/CM /TX/TR

COURSE TITLE : LEARNING ABILITY DEVELOPMENT
PREREQUISITE : NIL
TH. TEE : NIL
PT. : NIL
 RATIONALE:
Learning ability of an engineer or professional is essential through the level at which
he/she has developed and persuades his/her hobby. It enhances the creativity. Hobby is
integral and important part of human personality. Hobby is best for recreation which rejuvenates
a person. To obtain maximum benefits from hobby the overall understanding and competency in
performance is utmost important.
1. Develop learning ability through hobby.
2. Appreciate importance of hobby in developing learning ability.
3. Choose related equipments, consumables and gears.
4. Maintain related equipments.
5. Carry out setting of equipment.
6. Exhibit learning through performance.
1
FE512E Learning Ability Development 2016
 COURSE DETAILS:
A. THEORY :

(Cognitive Domain)
Nil

als
1. Present following: Learning ability development
Introduction 4
through hobby.
2 Collect information about present scenario of Awareness
Development 4
related field – Experts in India, Experts in your city
3 Demonstrate different related equipments. 4
Demonstration
4 Demonstrate Performance. 4
5 Practice setting up related instruments 4
6 Practice performance –level I 20
7 Practice performance –level II Practice 16
8 Practice tuning and preliminary maintenance of
4
related instruments.
4
Skill Assessment
64
Total Hrs

Not Applicable
Not Applicable
2

What Frequency
Two PT
(Continuous
Students
be computed)
CA
Examination)
(Term End
TEE
End Of the
Course
Total -- -- -- --
Skill Rubrics &


Sheets
Students
CA
Journal
TOTAL 25 10
Examination)
(Term End
TEE

Students 50 20 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
Course Printouts
After First
Indirect Assessment
Student Feedback on
course
Test
Students 1, 2, 3, 4,5,6
End Of The
Course
3

1 Practical on setting up / tuning related instruments 10
2 Performance –level I 20
3 Performance –level II 10
4 Viva voce 10
TOTAL 50

Outcomes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2
1 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
3 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 - -
4 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 - -
5 - - 3 3 - 3 - 3 3 3 - -
6 - - 3 3 - - - 3 3 3 - -

Year Of publication
NIL
 E-REFERENCES:
 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hobby
 www.justdial.com/Nagpur/Hobby
 nagpur.quikr.com
 As per requirement of related field.
4

CURRICULUM:
1.
Nagpur.
Dr. K.S.Dixit Head of Automobile Government Polytechnic,
2.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. S.A.Telang Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
3.
Engineering Nagpur.
Mr. R.B.Tirpude Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,
4. Engineering Nagpur
Mr. J.M.Syed Lecturer in Automobile Government Polytechnic,

5. Engineering Nagpur
______________________ ______________________

Me 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Me 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Me 2016 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OUTCOME BASED CURRICULUM 2016

Program: Diploma in Mechanical

Curriculum Development Cell,

Government Polytechnic, Nagpur

Dr. S.W. Rajurkar

Faculties and Experts (Mentioned in individual curriculum)

Advisory Board (AB),

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS),

Board of Studies (BOS),

Government Polytechnic, Nagpur

Governing Board (GB),

Government Polytechnic, Nagpur

OUTCOME BASED CURRICULUM-2016

The Program Structure and Curriculum Contents for Diploma in

(Mr. O.V.Sarode) (Dr. S.W.Rajurkar)

S.N. Name of Members Designation Organization

7 Shri. Shashikant Choudhary Member M.D. India, Global Logic; Nagpur.

15 Dr. U. Ramesh Member Director, AICTE-Western Regional

S.N. Name of Members Designation Organization

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Mechanical Engineering

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Packaging Technology

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Textile Manufacture

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Electronics & Telecommunication

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Mrs. U. M. Ramteke Member (Institute) Lecturer, ETX,

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Program wise Board of Studies (PBOS) - Information Technology

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Advisory Board (AB) - English

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Advisory Board (AB) - Physics

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Member Designation Organization

Sr. Name of Faculty Designation

List of contributors for the curriculum is mentioned in individual curriculum.

@ 2017, Government Polytechnic, Nagpur

LIST OF FIGURES .......................................................................................................XX

LIST OF TABLES ....................................................................................................... XXI

CHAPTER 1 GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC, NAGPUR AN INTRODUCTION

1.1 History ....................................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Autonomy .................................................................................................................. 1

1.3 Awards ...................................................................................................................... 2

1.4 Geographical Location of Nagpur City ..................................................................... 2

1.5 Government Polytechnic, Nagpur Campus ............................................................... 3

CHAPTER 2 POLYTECHNIC EDUCATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5

2.1 Higher Education System in India ............................................................................ 5

2.1.1 Department of Higher Education, MHRD ...................................................... 7

2.1.2 All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) ...................................... 7

2.1.3 National Board of Accreditation (NBA) ......................................................... 7

2.1.4 Higher and Technical Education, Government of Maharashtra ...................... 8

2.1.5 Directorate of Technical Education (DTE), Government of Maharashtra ...... 8